Home

WebFOCUS Summary of New Features 5.2 - ikax.net

Contents

1. 7 26 Creating Synonyms 7 26 Accessing Files on z OS and OS 390 7 27 External Sort 7 28 Hiper Memory 7 28 Accessing z OS and OS 390 Applications From the WebFOCUS Reporting Server Console 7 29 Accessing z OS and OS 390 VSAM Files Using XMI Server 7 29 Security Types 7 31 Contents xvi Information Builders Server Accounting Using SMF Records 7 31 Workload Manager Enclave Integration
2. 8 26 Writing a Java Class 8 27 Java Class Communications 8 27 Compiling and Running a Java Program 8 27 DATASET Attribute for a Segment in a Master File 8 28 DATASET Behavior in FOCUS Data Sources 8 29 COBOL FD Translator Enhancements 8 32 Database Selection From the Console 8 33 Field Identification as Read Only 8 34 LIBPATH Display for DBMS 8 35 Long Qual
3. 1 162 Functions Summary 1 165 2 Developer Studio Enhancements 2 1 New Architecture 2 2 Managed Reporting Developer for Windows 2 3 Enhanced Explorer 2 4 Project Wizard 2 4 Redesigned Deploy Wizard 2 5 Dimensions Tool 2 6 Synonym Enhancements
4. 6 30 Architecture 6 31 Locating the Name of a Resource File 6 32 Interpreting the Resource File 6 33 Editing the htm File 6 33 7 WebFOCUS Reporting Server Enhancements 7 1 Installing WebFOCUS Reporting Server Remotely 7 2 Controlling WebFOCUS Reporting Server Remotely 7 2 Agent Services 7 2 Blocking New Connections on a Running Server 7 4 Enhanced Connection Management
5. 3 4 Security 3 4 Servlet Exit 3 5 Integrating Managed Reporting Security With Basic Web Server Authentication 3 5 LDAP Authentication 3 6 Updated Presentation 3 6 Reporting Object Component Validation 3 7 New Create Synonym Behavior 3 7 Multiple Servers and Application Path 3 7 Custom Reports in Managed Reporting
6. 2 7 Date Format and Time Display Options 2 8 Comma Suppression Display Option 2 9 Percent Edit Display Option 2 10 Report Viewing in a Browser 2 10 PS Format in Compound Reports 2 11 Excel Enhancements 2 11 Comma delimited and Tab delimited Output Formats 2 12 Configuration for ANSI Windows Format 2 13 Creating and Styling Reports With the Report Painter 2 14 Summary of Report
7. 8 17 Suppressing Zero Values and Missing Data 8 18 Support for User Defined Attributes 8 18 Data Adapter for Informix 8 19 Data Adapter for J D Edwards 8 19 Data Adapter for Millennium 8 19 Data Adapter for MUMPS 8 19 Data Adapter for PeopleSoft 8 20 Data Adapter for Progress 8 20 Data Adapter for SAP BW
8. 7 4 Specifying the Location of User Profiles 7 4 Configuring National Language Support 7 5 Step 1 Determine Which Code Page You Need 7 6 Step 2 Configure the WebFOCUS Reporting Server for NLS 7 9 Step 3 Configure the WebFOCUS Client for NLS 7 12 Configuring the Server and Client for Baltic Code Pages 7 15 Specifying the Number of Lines in the EDAPRINT Log 7 16 Automatic Self Recovery 7 17 Tree View for Procedures 7 17 Text Console Enhancements
9. 5 3 Security Configurations 5 3 ReportCaster Authentication Exit 5 4 ReportCaster User Credentials 5 4 Configuring Access to the User Interfaces 5 4 Development and Administration Interface 5 5 ReportCaster Server Configuration Tool 5 5 Creating and Managing ReportCaster User IDs 5 5 Distribution Enhancements 5 6 Distributing a Task
10. 2 56 Displaying an FML Hierarchy With the Financial Report Painter 2 56 Consolidating Data in a Hierarchy in Developer Studio 2 62 Formatting Enhancements 2 64 SET Parameters 2 69 Functions for Displaying Fields 2 70 3 Managed Reporting Enhancements 3 1 User Administrator 3 2 Developer User Type 3 2 Managed Reporting Developer for Windows 3 3 Change Management
11. 11 8 Candidates for Column Index Report 11 9 A New Feature Roadmap for WebFOCUS Version 5 Release 2 3 A 1 WebFOCUS Reporting Language Enhancements A 2 Developer Studio Enhancements A 3 Managed Reporting and Dashboard Enhancements A 4 Ad Hoc Reporting Enhancements A 5 Report Caster Enhancements A 5 WebFOCUS Client Enhancements A 6 WebFOCUS Reporting Server Enhancements A 7 Data Adapter Enhancements
12. 9 10 Importing a Form Into a Procedure 9 12 Dynamically Managing the Display of Controls 9 13 Preselecting List Items by Value 9 13 New Sample Launch Page 9 14 Multiple Level Tracing With Statement Trace 9 15 Application Level Tracing With TYPE ON EDAPRINT 9 16 Retrieving WebFOCUS CGI Parameters 9 16 Importing and Binding Variables From a WebFOCUS Report 9 17 Changing WebFOCUS Settings From a Procedure 9 20 Issuing SQL Commands in a Procedure
13. 1 129 Selecting a Language for Excel Requests 1 137 Setting the Default Column Width for Excel 1 138 Stacking Columns With Multiple FOLD LINEs 1 138 Specifying Multiple Drill Down Links 1 140 Navigating Reports From a Table of Contents 1 141 Grouping Sort Fields for Display 1 147 Producing Row Totals for ACROSS Field Values 1 149 Output Formats for Application Processing 1 151 COM Format 1 152 COMT Format
14. 7 32 Support for Additional Operating Systems and Releases 7 32 Support for Large Files on HP and Solaris 7 32 Displaying Listener Statistics in the WebFOCUS Reporting Server Console 7 33 MQ XML Listener 7 33 SOAP XML Listener 7 33 8 Data Adapter Enhancements 8 1 Data Adapter for Adabas 8 2 Setting Connection Attributes 8 2 Adabas Transparent Superdescriptors 8 4 Adabas Hyper and Phonetic Descriptors
15. 1 153 TAB Format 1 153 TABT Format 1 154 Adjusting Field Displays 1 154 Reducing Multiple Spaces in a Field to a Single Space 1 155 Removing a Character From a Field 1 156 Removing Leading or Trailing Occurrences of a Pattern 1 158 Contents WebFOCUS Summary of New Features xi PostScript Type 1 Fonts for PS and PDF Reports 1 160 How Type 1 Fonts Are Used 1 160 Controlling the Paper Source for a PS Printer 1 161 SET Parameter Summary
16. 4 6 HTML Report Assistant 4 8 Report Presentation 4 9 Creating New Columns 4 10 Selecting Records for a Report 4 11 Designing Joins 4 15 End User Drill Down Capability 4 16 Performing OLAP Operations Directly From the Report 4 16 HTML Graph Assistant 4 17 Addition of Several Templates to the Styles Tab 4 18 Updated Styles Tab to Include Graph Types and Graph Sty
17. 1 106 Converting Case for File Names and Directories 1 107 Adding Borders for Emphasis 1 107 Aligning Decimals in a Multi Line Heading 1 111 Using Fields to Define Formats 1 116 Punctuating Numbers 1 118 Displaying a Leading Zero in Decimal Numbers 1 119 Selecting a Currency Symbol for Display 1 121 Displaying a Minus Sign After Negative Data 1 124 Displaying Compound Reports in PS Format 1 125 Excel Integration Enhancements
18. 8 5 Adabas ORDER Fields in the Indexed Field List 8 6 Adabas Internal Sequence Numbers ISN and Global Format Buffer IDs GFBID 8 6 Switching Access Mode Using NOPACCESS 8 8 Data Adapter for Allbase on HP UX 8 9 Data Adapter for Micro Focus C ISAM 8 9 Data Adapter for DBFILE 8 10 DBFILE Metadata 8 10 Data Adapter for DB2 8 10 Declaring DB2 CAF Connection Attributes From the WebFOCUS Reporting Server Console 8 11 DB2 FETCH FIRST n R
19. 9 2 Support for Standard WebFOCUS CGI Aliases 9 3 Access to the Installation Verification Program 9 3 Performance Enhancements 9 4 Deploying Only Changed Files With Smart Deploy 9 4 Running Components From the Developer Launch Console 9 6 Editing Master Files as Text 9 8 Customizing Parsing Activity 9 8 Searching for Text in a Project 9 9 Creating Applications With Update Assist 9 10 Applying a Cascading Style Sheet to a Form
20. 9 30 Examining RDBMS Return Codes in a Procedure 9 32 WebFOCUS Maintain Functions 9 33 CHAR2INT 9 33 INT2CHAR 9 34 NLSCHR 9 34 GetAppCGIValue 9 35 Enhanced Screening Options 9 35 CONTAINS and OMITS 9 35 NOT_IN
21. 6 1 Introducing the WebFOCUS Client Console 6 2 Accessing the WebFOCUS Client Console 6 2 Configuring WebFOCUS Reporting Server Settings 6 4 Adding or Changing Server Settings 6 4 Configuring Deferred Server Mappings 6 7 Configuring Special Services 6 9 Configuring WebFOCUS Client Settings 6 10 Configuring WebFOCUS Startup Parameters 6 10 Changing WebFOCUS Client Settings 6 15 Redirection Settings
22. 9 43 WebFOCUS Connector for Excel 9 44 Contents WebFOCUS Summary of New Features xix 10 ETL Manager Enhancements 10 1 Request Generation 10 2 Request Categories and Application Directories 10 2 Request Logs 10 3 Request and Log Management From the WebFOCUS Reporting Server Console 10 4 Request Scheduling 10 5 Bulk Loading 10 7 Flat File Targets
23. 7 17 Communicating With a FOCUS Database Server 7 18 Windows Authentication Methods 7 21 Assigning Administrative Privileges 7 22 Protecting the WebFOCUS Reporting Server Console 7 23 Windows Trusted Client 7 23 HTTP Basic Authentication 7 24 SSL TLS Support 7 24 Lawson Security Adapter 7 25 C2 Security Support 7 25 Data Adapter Support
24. 1 2 Calculating Trends and Predicting Values With FORECAST 1 3 FORECAST Processing 1 4 Using a Simple Moving Average 1 6 Using Single Exponential Smoothing 1 9 Using Double Exponential Smoothing 1 12 Using Triple Exponential Smoothing 1 13 Using a Linear Regression Equation 1 16 Calculating Trends and Predicting Values Using REGRESS 1 18 Calculating Cumulative Normal Distribution 1 21 Grouping Numeric Data Into Tiles 1 25 Grouping Sort Field Va
25. 1 98 Increased Number of Display Fields 1 98 Increased Number of Columns Generated by ACROSS 1 98 Increased Numbers of Headings and Footings 1 98 Increased Space for Column Titles 1 98 Prompting for Variables in CGI Servlet 1 99 Including Script Files in Reports 1 104 Specifying Holidays 1 104 Establishing a Non Standard Alias 1 105 Compiling Expressions Containing DEFINEs 1 105 Exiting on Error
26. 1 73 Consolidating Data in an FML Hierarchy 1 78 Indenting Row Titles in an FML Hierarchy 1 85 Returning FOR Field Values in a Computed Column 1 87 Formatting an FML Report 1 89 Contents x Information Builders Graph Enhancements 1 93 Saving a Graph as a GIF File 1 93 Altering X and Y Axis Values Using Linear Regression 1 97 New Graph Type Options 1 97 Sending Graph Output Directly to a Printer 1 97 Expanded Limits
27. 1 50 Using AnV Fields With Functions 1 52 LENV Returning the Length of an Alphanumeric Field 1 53 LOCASV Creating a Variable Length Lowercase String 1 54 POSITV Finding the Beginning of a Variable Length Substring 1 56 SUBSTV Extracting a Variable Length Substring 1 59 TRIMV Removing Characters From a String 1 61 UPCASV Creating a Variable Length Uppercase String 1 63 Validating Function Arguments 1 66 Financial Reporting Language Enhancements 1 70 Defining an FML Hierarchy 1 71 Displaying a Dynamic FML Hierarchy
28. 1996 CA West Coffee 117539 1 484 873 00 1453548 Food 116389 1 443 083 00 1414902 Gifts 74948 947 783 00 946382 MIN West 74948 947 783 00 946382 AVE CA 74948 1 291 913 00 946382 IL Midwest Coffee 52348 683 559 00 628333 Food 55867 729 658 00 705915 Gifts 38405 481 515 00 487090 MIN Midwest 38405 481 515 00 487090 AVE IL 38405 631 577 33 487090 CNT UNITS 1996 6 961 745 17 487090 1997 CA West Coffee 118044 1 453 023 00 1507092 Food 106322 1 325 430 00 1302582 Gifts 77328 988 080 00 961841 MIN West 77328 988 080 00 961841 AVE CA 77328 1 255 511 00 961841 IL Midwest Coffee 57233 715 220 00 737931 Food 59293 754 132 00 737912 Gifts 37918 473 792 00 484611 MIN Midwest 37918 473 792 00 484611 AVE IL 37918 647 714 67 484611 CNT UNITS 1997 6 951 612 83 484611 TOTAL 12 956 679 00 484611 WebFOCUS Reporting Language Enhancements WebFOCUS Summary of New Features 1 43 Handling Missing Data in HOLD Files Three SET parameters have been added to improve the handling of missing data in HOLD files HNODATA controls how missing data characters are propagated to a HOLD file HOLDMISS distinguishes between missing data and blank strings or zero values in a HOLD file NULL enables you to create a variable length comma or tab delimited HOLD file that differentiates between a missing value and a blank string or zero value Controlling Missing Values Propagated to a HOLD
29. 8 21 Contents WebFOCUS Summary of New Features xvii Data Adapter for SAP R 3 8 21 Security Support for the SAP R 3 Native Interface 8 22 BAPI Support in the SAP R 3 Interface 8 22 Join Support in the SAP R 3 Interface 8 23 Aggregation Support in the SAP R 3 Interface 8 23 IDoc Listener 8 23 Data Adapter for Siebel 8 24 Data Adapter for UniVerse on HP UX 8 24 Data Adapter for VSAM 8 25 Java Applications Adapter
30. 3 14 Saving Most Recently Used Reports 3 15 Creating a My Favorite Reports List 3 15 Creating Custom Toolbars 3 15 Stand Alone Domain Role Trees 3 17 Optionally Displaying Frame Separators 3 18 Hiding the Display of Content Blocks 3 18 Default Public User 3 18 Domain Searches 3 18 User Options Settings 3 19 Custom Reports
31. A 7 WebFOCUS Maintain Enhancements A 8 Contents xx Information Builders WebFOCUS Summary of New Features 1 1 CHAPTER 1 1 WebFOCUS Reporting Language Enhancements This chapter describes all of the features of the WebFOCUS Reporting language in Version 5 Release 2 and has been updated to reflect Version 5 Release 2 3 Topics that contain Version 5 Release 2 3 features are marked with asterisks Topics Creating Reports Calculating Trends and Predicting Values Calculating Cumulative Normal Distribution Grouping Numeric Data Into Tiles Grouping Sort Field Values in Ranges Indicating Total Number of Pages Manipulating Summary Values Handling Missing Data in HOLD Files Using Variable Length Character Expressions Validating Function Arguments Financial Reporting Language Enhancements Graph Enhancements Expanded Limits Prompting for Variables in CGI Servlet Including Script Files in Reports Specifying Holidays Establishing a Non Standard Alias Compiling Expressions Containing DEFINEs Exiting on Error Converting Case for File Names and Directories Styling and Displaying Reports Adding Borders for Emphasis Aligning Decimals in a Multi Line Heading Using Fields to Define Formats Punctuating Numbers Displaying a Leading Zero
32. 2 50 Tree Navigation Enhancements 2 51 Enhanced Date Field Validation 2 51 Validation of User Supplied Data in Update Assist Applications 2 51 Choosing a Color Scheme for an Update Assist Application 2 52 Customizing Update Assist Designs 2 52 Calendar Control for Date Formatted Fields in Update Assist 2 53 Right Click Menu Options on Trees 2 53 Sorting Tables 2 54 Financial Report Painter Enhancements 2 54 Reporting Dynamically From a Hierarchy 2 55 Indenting Row Titles
33. 5 6 Distribution Enhancements When Creating a Schedule 5 7 Scheduling Wizard and HTML User Interface 5 8 Distribution Enhancements When Using the Scheduling Wizard 5 8 Report Library 5 9 ReportCaster Console 5 10 Log Enhancements 5 10 Configuring ReportCaster for NLS 5 11 ReportCaster API 5 17 Two Way Email API 5 18 6 WebFOCUS Client Enhancements
34. 2 43 Displaying Radio Buttons and Check Box Lists in Multiple Columns 2 44 Specifying Different Names for Dynamic Parameter Values 2 46 Hiding Borders Around Frames 2 47 Applying Parameter Values to External Reports 2 47 Source File Management 2 48 Contents xii Information Builders Update Assist 2 49 Dynamic List Generation 2 49 Results Page 2 50 Enhanced DBA Prompting 2 50 Enhanced Data Retrieval Error Messages
35. 3 8 Execution of a Custom Report Using INCLUDE 3 11 Deferred Receipt 3 12 Migration Utility 3 12 Repository Extract Utility 3 12 Creating Multiple Content Pages 3 13 Creating a Group View 3 13 Unique Customizations for Public Views 3 14 Contents WebFOCUS Summary of New Features xiii Removing the Banner 3 14 Customizing Content Block Layouts
36. 10 7 Migrating ETL Requests 10 7 General Workbench Enhancements 10 14 SQL Answer Set Object 10 15 Source Object 10 15 Target Object 10 16 Validating Records 10 16 Load Options 10 17 Transport Simplification 10 19 Nesting Dependent Requests
37. Mean is the point at the center of the curve Standard deviation describes the spread of the curve It is the distance from the mean to the point of inflection the point where the curve changes direction WebFOCUS Reporting Language Enhancements WebFOCUS Summary of New Features 1 23 Syntax How to Calculate Cumulative Standard Normal Distribution NORMSDST value D8 where value Is a normalized value D8 Is the required format for the result The value returned by the function is double precision You can assign it to a field with any valid numeric format Syntax How to Calculate Inverse Cumulative Standard Normal Distribution NORMSINV value D8 where value Is a number between 0 and 1 which represents the percentile in a standard normal distribution D8 Is the required format for the result The value returned by the function is double precision You can assign it to a field with any valid numeric format Calculating Cumulative Normal Distribution 1 24 Information Builders Example Using the NORMSDST and NORMSINV Functions The NORMSDST function finds the percentile for the Z field The NORMSINV function then returns this percentile to a normalized value DEFINE FILE GGPRODS CONVERT SIZE FIELD TO DOUBLE PRECISION X D12 5 SIZE END TABLE FILE GGPRODS SUM X NOPRINT CNT X NOPRINT CALCULATE MEAN AND STANDARD DEVIATION COMPUTE NUM D12 5 CNT X NOPRINT COMPUTE M
38. Signifies that any user ID is valid An asterisk is the default value dev1 dev2 Are the user IDs that can issue application commands For more information about application commands see the Developing Reporting Applications manual This setting controls certain Developer Studio features such as the ability to use the Deploy Wizard If you change this setting from an to a list of developer user IDs then these features are available only to the specified developer user IDs Developers can set these WebFOCUS Client credentials under the WebFOCUS Environments properties in Developer Studio You can set a default value during the Developer Studio installation If set during the Developer Studio installation this user ID must be a user ID that can connect to a WebFOCUS Reporting Server This setting replaces the app_admin setting in ibidir wfs Authentication for a developer is applied in the same manner as for an administrator for more information see the ADMINISTRATORS setting Setting Usage Notes WebFOCUS Client Enhancements WebFOCUS Summary of New Features 6 13 ADMINISTRATORS admin1 admin2 admin1 admin2 Are the user IDs that can issue configuration commands and application commands For more information about valid application commands see the Developing Reporting Applications manual admin is the default value If IBIWFC_Authentication is set to EDA and an EDANODE has n
39. Distribute a report that is created using the HTMLFORM command For more information about how to accomplish this see Using HTMLFORM in the Tips and Techniques for Coding a ReportCaster Report appendix in the ReportCaster Development and Administration manual Specify additional WebFOCUS output formats ALPHA GIF XML TABT COMMA EXL97 and EXL2K FORMULA For detailed information about these formats see the ReportCaster Formats appendix in the ReportCaster Development and Administration manual Scheduling Wizard and HTML User Interface 5 8 Information Builders Scheduling Wizard and HTML User Interface In Release 5 2 3 Managed Reporting Analytical Users can create a schedule for Standard Reports or their own My Reports using the ReportCaster Scheduling Wizard The ReportCaster Scheduling Wizard may be accessed from both the Business Intelligence Dashboard and Managed Reporting Domains environments Once you have created the schedule you can access the ReportCaster HTML User Interface to edit the properties of the schedule delete the schedule or run a log report to obtain information about the schedule Additionally you can purge log records to conserve space in the log file These redesigned interfaces which use DHTML technology replace the ReportCaster Java applet user interface Distribution Enhancements When Using the Scheduling Wizard When creating a schedule using the Scheduling Wizard you can Select
40. 9 35 EQ_MASK and NE_MASK 9 35 File Designations for Procedures 9 36 Testing Procedures With Run Procedure 9 37 Syntax Parsing in Scripts 9 37 Specifying Additional Search Paths 9 38 Support for Data Source Access Passwords 9 39 Coding Auto Increment Columns 9 40 Concurrent FOCUS Data Source Access 9 42 Variable Varchar Data Type Support 9 43 Additional Microsoft Access Support
41. 10 19 E mail Request Notification 10 19 Optimized Load 10 21 11 Resource Analyzer and Resource Governor Enhancements 11 1 Configuring Internal Tables From the WebFOCUS Reporting Server Console 11 2 Granting Access to Resource Analyzer Resource Governor Data Sources 11 3 Running the Resource Governor Configuration Verification Program CVP 11 4 Accessing Resource Analyzer and Resource Governor Reports From the WebFOCUS Reporting Server Console 11 6 Increased Support for Long Procedure Names 11 6 Resource Analyzer Reports 11 7 Long running Requests Report 11 7 Large Volume Request Reports
42. From the Explorer a developer can track the code for a project for example the procedures in a project through an audit trail of changes This feature is available from the Projects on localhost area in Developer Studio and is not applicable to files in the WebFOCUS Environments area Procedures and guidelines for source file management are fully documented in Managing a Project With Source Control in the Creating a Reporting Application chapter in the Developing Reporting Applications manual Developer Studio Enhancements WebFOCUS Summary of New Features 2 49 Update Assist The new Update Assist tool enables you to create fully functional applications by answering a few simple questions The applications use Maintain and can perform a combination of add update delete and search functions The Update Assist tool is ideal for generating rapid prototypes for any Maintain based application The tool uses standard templates Applications generated with Update Assist can also be used as quick file browsers and can generate single screen updates that seamlessly work with WebFOCUS report drill downs Update Assist generated application screens can be easily inserted into WebFOCUS reports and layouts The Update Assist tool is fully documented in the Creating an Update Application With Update Assist chapter in the Developing Reporting Applications manual Dynamic List Generation Update Assist provides you with the ability to gen
43. Support for Allbase native data types Data Adapter for Micro Focus C ISAM The Micro Focus C ISAM data source is supported on the RS 6000 platform The Data Adapter for Micro Focus C ISAM supports read access to Micro Focus C ISAM data structures and the CREATE SYNONYM command for the generation of Master Files The Data Adapter for Micro Focus C ISAM provides the following enhanced capabilities Create Synonym using COBOL Copy Book SQL translation Support for all Micro Focus C ISAM compression types Data Adapter for DBFILE 8 10 Information Builders Data Adapter for DBFILE The Data Adapter for DBFILE SUFFIX DBFILE is used for physical logical and multi format logical file support using the OS 400 OPNQRYF tool These types of files are generally created through application languages such as RPG and Cobol While considered legacy languages they are very actively used today DBFILE Metadata The Data Adapter for DBFILE has been enhanced to include adapter configuration and metadata creation from the WebFOCUS Reporting Server Console You can also create metadata synonyms manually using the syntax CREATE SYNONYM abc FOR library file DBMS DBFILE END While physical and logical files can also be accessed through the Data Adapter for DB2 performance tests show significant advantages in the range of 300 file size of 25021171 bytes 130 fields 37513 records when the Data Adapter for DBFILE i
44. END WebFOCUS Maintain Enhancements WebFOCUS Summary of New Features 9 35 GetAppCGIValue The IWC GetAppCGIValue function imports the value of a WebFOCUS CGI parameter into a Maintain variable IWC GetAppCGIValue retrieves the parameter value from the CGI the HTTP request header For syntax and an example see Retrieving WebFOCUS CGI Parameters on page 9 16 Enhanced Screening Options The screening options for the WHERE clause in the NEXT command have been enhanced Screening options with NEXT are fully documented in Using Selection Logic to Retrieve Rows in the Command Reference chapter in the Maintain Language Reference manual CONTAINS and OMITS You can use CONTAINS and OMITS with a variable such as a calculated field in a NEXT command against a data source Example Using CONTAINS With a Calculated Field Compute namepart a0 searchname For All Next Employee into Stk Where Empname CONTAINS namepart NOT_IN The NOT_IN logical operator selects values that are not in a supplied list Example Selecting Countries Not in a Supplied List For All Next Country into Stk Where Country NOT_IN ENGLAND FRANCE EQ_MASK and NE_MASK The EQ_MASK and NE_MASK logical operators compare a data source field to a calculated field that uses as a wild card character Example Comparing a Data Source Field to a Calculated Field Compute afld a8 LAND For All Next Country into Stk Where Country EQ_MASK afld
45. Financial Modeling Language FML 1 70 hierarchies 1 70 1 73 reports 1 89 2 64 Financial Report Painter 2 54 to 2 55 multiple rows 2 69 financial reports 2 55 charts of accounts 1 76 formatting 1 89 to 1 90 2 64 hierarchies 2 55 to 2 56 multiple rows 2 69 FML Financial Modeling Language 1 70 hierarchies 1 70 1 73 reports 1 89 2 64 FML Financial Modeling Language reports formatting 1 89 2 64 FML hierarchies 1 70 1 73 1 76 2 55 assigning captions 1 72 consolidating data 1 78 to 1 79 1 81 displaying 1 74 indenting captions 1 86 indenting row titles 1 85 2 56 indenting text or numbers 1 91 FMLINFO function 1 87 to 1 88 FOCERROR 9 32 FOCHTMLURL parameter 1 105 FOCSBS 7 18 FOCUS data source access in Maintain 9 42 FOCUS Database Server 7 19 FOCUS Database Server FDS 7 18 FOLD LINE clauses 1 138 fonts 1 115 measuring 1 115 footing limitations 1 98 FOR statement 1 85 2 69 repeated values 1 85 2 69 FORECAST 1 2 exponential moving average 1 3 to 1 4 1 9 2 26 to 2 27 2 29 2 31 to 2 32 2 34 linear regression analysis 1 3 to 1 4 2 26 to 2 27 2 29 2 31 to 2 32 2 34 linear regression equation 1 16 to 1 17 simple moving average 1 3 to 1 4 1 6 to 1 7 2 26 to 2 27 2 29 2 31 to 2 32 2 34 Forecast dialog box 2 27 to 2 34 forecasting 1 2 1 18 2 26 FORMAT EXL97 command 1 135 formatted dates 1 131 Excel 2000 and 1 131 formatting cells 1 89 to 1 90 2 64 2 68 formatt
46. In this report the data source names are hyperlinks that allow you to drill down to a report that shows usage for the columns for the specified data source including whether they were used with functions relations selects sorts groups or never used From this report you can drill down further to see more information about when the columns were used Resource Analyzer Reports 11 10 Information Builders WebFOCUS Summary of New Features A 1 APPENDIX A A New Feature Roadmap for WebFOCUS Version 5 Release 2 3 The Roadmap appendix is intended as a chapter by chapter reference for users who wish to quickly locate information about features introduced in Release 5 2 3 Topics WebFOCUS Reporting Language Enhancements Developer Studio Enhancements Managed Reporting and Dashboard Enhancements Ad Hoc Reporting Enhancements Report Caster Enhancements WebFOCUS Client Enhancements WebFOCUS Reporting Server Enhancements Data Adapter Enhancements WebFOCUS Maintain Enhancements WebFOCUS Reporting Language Enhancements A 2 Information Builders WebFOCUS Reporting Language Enhancements Enhancement See Multivariate regression Calculating Trends and Predicting Values on page 1 2 IN RANGES OF Grouping Sort Field Values in Ranges on page 1 27 TABLASTPAGE variable Indicating Total Number of Pages on page 1 29 Summarizing alphanumerics Manipulating Summar
47. In this section CONTAINS and OMITS NOT_IN EQ_MASK and NE_MASK File Designations for Procedures 9 36 Information Builders File Designations for Procedures Maintain procedures have a new file designation On portable platforms such as Windows and UNIX the new extension is mnt On OS 390 and z OS the ddname is MAINTAIN On portable platforms front end tools generate the extension mnt for the procedure On OS 390 or z OS you must allocate the ddname MAINTAIN Syntax How to Work With Maintain File Designations To work with Maintain procedures from a WebFOCUS command line you must issue the MNTCON command To execute a Maintain procedure MNTCON EX maintproc To compile a Maintain procedure MNTCON COMPILE maintproc The preceding command creates a compiled procedure with the extension fcm on Windows and UNIX or ddname FOCCOMP on OS 390 or z OS allocate ddname FOCCOMP To run a compiled Maintain procedure MNTCON RUN maintproc where maintproc Is a compiled Maintain procedure fcm or FOCCOMP Reference Maintain Search Order Maintain first searches for a procedure with the extension mnt or ddname MAINTAIN If it does not find the procedure with extension mnt on Windows or UNIX or with ddname MAINTAIN on OS 390 or z OS it searches for extension fex on Windows and UNIX or ddname FOCEXEC on OS 390 or z OS How to Work With Maintain File Designations Example Specifying File Des
48. This is useful when you want to temporarily remove a content block from a Dashboard view Procedure How to Temporarily Remove a Content Block 1 From the Content window select the content page where the content block is located 2 Click the check box next to the block you wish to edit 3 Click Edit Block The Edit Block window opens 4 Select the Check to Inactivate Block box 5 Click Save Default Public User The public user is automatically created in Managed Reporting so you do not need to create one for new installations of the Dashboard Prior to Release 5 2 you were required to create a public user in Managed Reporting before customizing your Dashboard view Domain Searches When performing a domain search in the Dashboard you can search across domains based on modification dates for a file For example you can search for documents that were modified between certain dates or since a specified date The format of the date and time shown in the Domain Search Results window and the Modified Since panel are based on your system setting Managed Reporting Enhancements WebFOCUS Summary of New Features 3 19 User Options Settings There is a link in the Dashboard banner called Options that allows you to set certain user options Some of these include Selecting the tool type HTML or Java applet for Report Assistant and Graph Assistant Controlling report execution windows Selecting
49. You can edit requests to add functionality or to address problems Saving and opening requests is much faster Resource Analyzer can monitor requests by name A FOCUS data source is no longer required for storing requests which simplifies configuration The log and statistics tables still use a FOCUS data source Request names can be up to 32 characters allowing for more descriptive names A user ID can be up to 32 characters increased from eight characters Request Categories and Application Directories Previous releases of ETL Manager allow for the categorizing of requests at the time the request is saved In this release server application namespaces replace the categories This affects Directories where ETL requests are stored Synonyms available to the ETL Manager user By default ETL requests and synonyms are stored in the BASEAPP directory To save requests in another directory the directory must be Created or mapped under APPROOT Added to the application path in the server or user profile Application names are limited to 18 characters must be alphanumeric or underscore and must be lowercase only Requests migrated from Version 4 3 6 and Version 5 1 will have their categories converted to applications How to Create a New Application Directory Set the Server Application Path ETL Manager Enhancements WebFOCUS Summary of New Features 10 3 Proce
50. scatter graph 1 97 scheduling ETL requests 10 5 Scheduler tool 10 5 to 10 6 scheduling wizard 5 8 screening options for NEXT command 9 35 search order in Maintain 9 36 search paths in Maintain 9 38 searching a project in Maintain 9 9 searching for text in Maintain 9 9 Secure Socket Layer SSL 7 24 security 7 21 administration levels 7 22 administrator privileges 7 22 methods 7 21 on Windows NT 2000 7 21 passwords 7 23 specifying Windows NT 2000 clients 7 23 SSL Secure Socket Layer 7 24 TLS Transport Layer Security 7 24 user privileges 7 22 user rights 7 21 WCPROTECT mode 7 23 security settings 7 31 INTERNAL type 7 31 MVS type 7 31 SelectedItems property for Maintain controls 9 13 selecting code pages 7 6 selecting databases from Web Console 8 33 selecting OLAP tools 4 5 selecting records 4 11 selecting records in VSAM data sources 8 25 selecting report fields 4 10 Selection Criteria tab 4 11 server activity file 7 16 server configuration file 7 23 server control 7 2 Server for OS 390 and z OS 7 26 accessing synonyms from 7 26 CREATE SYNONYM command 7 26 DYNAM command 7 27 MVS external sort 7 28 security settings 7 31 supported data adapters 7 26 server installation 7 2 server level profiles 7 4 server nodes 6 8 alternate 6 8 server search behavior 3 7 servers 7 2 7 4 configuring 7 4 Enable control 7 4 managing connections to 7 4 parameters for 7 2 Quiesce contr
51. NEW YORK 1017 2 1 NEW YORK 1017 0 1 DAMAGED 0 NEW YORK 1017 6 DAMAGED is missing NEW YORK 1017 4 RETURNS is missing NEW YORK 1017 0 0 DAMAGED 0 RETURNS 0 NEW YORK 1017 3 2 Using Variable Length Character Expressions 1 50 Information Builders Using Variable Length Character Expressions In Release 5 2 3 you can use an AnV field of alphanumeric type in arithmetic and logical expressions in the same way you would use an An type field An expression that contains AnV type fields can be of either the AnV or An type The type that results from the expression depends on the specific type of operation You can use the following with AnV fields Concatenation EDIT function CONTAINS and OMITS operator LIKE operator EQ NE LT GT LE and GE operators DECODE function Assignment operation which assigns one value to equal another NEW YORK 1017 4 7 NEW YORK 1017 DAMAGED is missing RETURNS is missing NEW YORK 1017 4 2 NEWARK 1018 1 1 NEWARK 1019 1 0 RETURNS 0 In this section Using AnV Fields With Functions LENV Returning the Length of an Alphanumeric Field LOCASV Creating a Variable Length Lowercase String POSITV Finding the Beginning of a Variable Length Substring SUBSTV Extracting a Variable Length Substring TRIMV Removing Characters From a String UPCASV Creating a Variable Length Uppercase Str
52. Syntax How to Apply a Cascading Style Sheet to a Form Include the following command in the procedure WINFORM SET form CSSname TO stylesheet where form Is the name of the form to which you are applying the CSS stylesheet Is the name of the CSS It can be the name of a CSS file in the application path a relative addressed file name path path file or an HTTP qualified file name The form and all the controls on the form with properties set to Default use the settings from the CSS Syntax How to Apply a Class to a Control on a Form Assuming you have applied a CSS to a form you can apply a class to any control on the form using the following command WINFORM SET form control CSSClass TO classname where form Is the name of the form to which you applied the CSS control Optionally is the name of a control on the form classname Is the name of the class If the class name is set to a value other than a blank WebFOCUS Maintain explicitly sets the name to the supplied value If the class name is set to blank the WebFOCUS Server does not write a class name to the control s attributes which means the control is formatted using the most specific default selector for the control type or form for example BODY INPUT TEXTAREA and so on If you do not set the class name in this manner Maintain uses the legacy class name for the control IWCcontrolname Formatting for the control inher
53. The CALLJAVA interface defines two methods execute and fetch Execute method Receives three parameters user ID password ID and the String array of parameters Any one of those parameters can be a null object reference Null reference for the parameters array represents invocation with no parameters The server invokes the Java class in the password pass through mode The execute method performs the request and returns the instantiated IBI Answer Set object populated with the answer set description The fetch method populates this object with data Fetch method Invoked by the server to receive one row of the answer set at a time IBI_EOD is returned when answer is finished IBI_DATA is returned to indicate more data is coming You can use ibtrace println to trace execution of the program and ibtrace printException to output all information about a caught interruption The output of ibtrace class method calls is forwarded into the standard server trace file Java Class Communications When executing a Java class either with the CALLJAVA or EX command the server and the program communicate using an IBI answer set object This object has to be instantiated and populated with the answer set description on an execute method call The method is called by the server only once The server calls a fetch method repeatedly until it receives an IBI_EOD indicator The server expects to receive the answer set row by row in the same in
54. 6 18 Customizing WebFOCUS Client Settings 6 20 NLS Settings 6 20 WebFOCUS Client Tracing 6 22 Quick Links 6 22 National Language Support for International Computing 6 23 Contents WebFOCUS Summary of New Features xv Using the Dynamic Language Switch 6 24 Dynamic Language Switch Feature 6 25 Directory Structures 6 28 Editing Language Values 6 29 Customizing the User Interface
55. 8 23 Join Support in the SAP R 3 Interface The Native Interface supports all from SAP to SAP joins However for performance reasons it is not recommended to join to SAP from a non SAP data source It is more efficient to hold the keys in a sequential file and then use the following code TABLE FILE SAP PRINT FIELDS IF KEYS IS HOLD END Aggregation Support in the SAP R 3 Interface In Release 5 2 3 the Native Interface for SAP R 3 has been enhanced to pass aggregation to Open SQL for Transparent Tables To activate this functionality use the following SET command SQL SQLSAP SET OPTIMIZATION SQL IDoc Listener Intermediate Documents IDocs and the IDoc Listener provide a means to perform Electronic Data Interchange EDI with SAP EDI enabled applications in SAP are capable of generating IDoc data from an SAP document IDocs can be sent either in batch or real time and are perfect for online data warehousing The purpose of the IDoc Listener is to generate a Relational Data Base Management System RDBMS environment that replicates the source SAP RDBMS tables from which the IDoc originates Those tables are then updated automatically as new IDocs are received For more information on configuration and operations see the IDoc Listener documentation To access this document open your WebFOCUS Reporting Server Console follow the Summary of New Features link on the main page then follow the link provided To access this do
56. AnV fields 1 52 and functions 1 52 1 54 1 56 1 59 1 61 1 63 application directories 10 2 creating 10 3 name spaces 10 2 Application Path 3 7 application level tracing in Maintain 9 16 applications 2 49 accessing concurrently in Maintain 9 42 tracing in Maintain 9 16 updating with Update Assist tool 2 49 applications and projects 9 2 Index I 2 Information Builders applying Cascading Style Sheets to forms 9 11 applying classes to controls 9 11 applying time formats 2 9 architecture of Developer Studio 2 2 authentication 7 21 auto increment columns in Maintain 9 40 automatic drill down 4 5 B Baltic language support 7 7 7 12 to 7 13 configuring 7 15 banners 3 14 BAPIs Business Application Programming Inter faces 8 22 binding variables in Maintain 9 17 BLANKINDENT SET parameter 1 85 2 69 BORDER attribute 1 107 to 1 108 1 110 borders 1 107 1 110 2 47 2 65 2 67 to 2 68 around headings and footings 1 108 colors 1 108 hiding 2 47 styles 1 108 width of 1 108 bulk load capacity 10 7 Business Application Programming Interfaces BAPIs 8 22 BW Reporting 8 21 C C2 server security 7 25 CA certificates 7 24 caching parameters 2 42 calculated values 1 38 and prefix operators 1 38 calculating trends 1 2 and multivariate regression 1 18 with FORECAST 1 3 calculating trends with FORECAST 2 26 calendar in Update Assist 2 53 CALL statements in Maintain 9 38 CA
57. Customizing the User Interface 6 42 Information Builders WebFOCUS Summary of New Features 7 1 CHAPTER 7 7 WebFOCUS Reporting Server Enhancements This chapter describes all of the features for the WebFOCUS Reporting Server in Version 5 Release 2 Topics that contain Version 5 Release 2 3 features are marked with asterisks For complete documentation about server configuration and administration see the iWay Server Administration for UNIX Windows OpenVMS OS 400 OS 390 and z OS manual Topics Remote Installation and Control Installing WebFOCUS Reporting Server Remotely Controlling WebFOCUS Reporting Server Remotely Server Administration Agent Services Blocking New Connections on a Running Server Enhanced Connection Management Specifying the Location of User Profiles Configuring National Language Support Specifying the Number of Lines in the EDAPRINT Log Automatic Self Recovery Tree View for Procedures Text Console Enhancements Communicating With a FOCUS Database Server Server Security Windows Authentication Methods Assigning Administrative Privileges Protecting the WebFOCUS Reporting Server Console Windows Trusted Client HTTP Basic Authentication SSL TLS Support Lawson Security Adapter C2 Security Support OS 390 and z OS Server Data Adapter Support Creating Synonyms Accessing Files on z OS and OS 390 External Sort Hiper Memory Acce
58. Finds the normalized value that forms the upper boundary of a percentile in a standard normal distribution curve Calculate Inverse Cumulative Standard Normal Distribution on page 1 23 Function Description For details see FMLINFO Returns the FOR value associated with each row in an FML report Can be used to change negative signs to positive as required by accounting data Retain FOR Field Values for Consolidated Report Rows on page 1 87 WebFOCUS Summary of New Features 2 1 CHAPTER 2 2 Developer Studio Enhancements This chapter describes all of the features for Developer Studio in Version 5 Release 2 and has been updated to reflect Version 5 Release 2 3 Topics that contain Version 5 Release 2 3 features are marked with asterisks Topics New Architecture Managed Reporting Developer for Windows Enhanced Explorer Project Wizard Redesigned Deploy Wizard Dimensions Tool Synonym Enhancements Date Format and Time Display Options Comma Suppression Display Option Percent Edit Display Option Report Viewing in a Browser PS Format in Compound Reports Excel Enhancements Comma delimited and Tab delimited Output Formats Configuration for ANSI Windows Format Creating and Styling Reports With the Report Painter Calculating Trends and Predicting Values in Developer Studio Designing a User Interface With the Resource Layout Painter Source File Management Update Assis
59. IF screening test 8 25 Image Properties window 2 43 images 2 43 adding to HTML pages 2 43 Image Properties window 2 43 importing and binding variables in Maintain 9 18 importing forms in Maintain 9 12 importing variables in Maintain 9 17 importing WebFOCUS parameters in Maintain 9 19 indenting hierarchy levels 2 56 Informix Data Adapter 8 19 IN GROUPS OF phrase 1 27 IN RANGES OF phrase 1 27 to 1 28 inserting 1 29 page numbers 1 29 INT2CHAR Maintain function 9 33 integration of Maintain and Developer Studio 9 2 Intermediate Documents IDocs 8 23 Internal Sequence Number ISN 8 6 8 8 internal tables 11 2 INTERNAL type security settings 7 31 inverted lists for Adabas 8 5 ISN Internal Sequence Number 8 6 8 8 issuing SQL commands in Maintain 9 30 iWay Web Console 10 4 configuring ETL Manager 10 4 IWC GetAppCGIValue function 9 16 Index I 12 Information Builders J J D Edwards Data Adapter 8 19 Java Applications Adapter 8 26 Java classes 8 26 to 8 27 CALLJAVA command 8 26 communication 8 27 EX command 8 26 writing 8 27 Java programs 8 27 JavaScript 4 2 JavaScript in Maintain 9 13 9 37 job ID 10 4 join structures 4 15 joins 8 38 between data sources 8 38 between DBMSs 8 38 JSURLS parameter 1 104 JUSTIFY attribute 1 115 K keywords 7 2 L LABEL attribute 1 89 to 1 90 2 64 labels 1 89 formatting cells and 1 90 formatting rows and 1 89 2 64
60. REPORT GRID OFF TYPE SUBHEAD ITEM 1 WIDTH 1 5 TYPE SUBHEAD ITEM 2 WIDTH 2 JUSTIFY DECIMAL 1 ENDSTYLE END In order for the second item to align the first item must have a WIDTH specification so that it will take up a set amount of space The rightmost character of the region name aligns over the digit to the left of the decimal point in the numeric values Aligning Decimals in a Multi Line Heading 1 114 Information Builders The output is SALES FOR Midwest Units 905 045 Dollar Sales 11 400 665 00 Budgeted Sales 11 194 373 00000 SALES FOR Northeast Units 916 675 Dollar Sales 11 392 310 00 Budgeted Sales 11 576 932 00000 SALES FOR Southeast Units 935 232 Dollar Sales 11 710 379 00 Budgeted Sales 11 807 981 00000 SALES FOR West Units 932 039 Dollar Sales 11 652 957 00 Budgeted Sales 11 641 513 00000 WebFOCUS Reporting Language Enhancements WebFOCUS Summary of New Features 1 115 Procedure How to Measure for Column Width and Decimal Alignment Measuring Width Determining the width of a heading or footing item is a three step process 1 Identify the maximum number of characters in a text string or field 2 For a text string count the characters For a field refer to the format specification in the Master File or in a command such as a DEFINE 3 Measure the physical space in units for example inches that is required to display the number of characters identif
61. Searching for Text in a Project In Release 5 2 3 the search project feature in WebFOCUS Maintain uses the CGI or ISAPI to find requested instances of text in a project It returns a list of matching text sourced as XML showing the component name in which the text occurs and the text Procedure How to Search for Text in a Project 1 In the Edit menu click Search project or Click the Search project button on the General toolbar 2 In the Search project dialog box enter the text to search for in the Find what field or use the text from a previous search by selecting it from the drop down list Select the file type from the In file types drop down list or select to search all file types 3 Check the options to apply to the search Match case Match whole word only Look in subfolders or Search all application paths 4 Click Find Now 5 If the Output window is not open open it by clicking Output window in the View menu 6 WebFOCUS Maintain displays a list of the project components that contain the text in the Find tab of the Output Window To open a component at an instance of the text double click its line in the Find tab Creating Applications With Update Assist 9 10 Information Builders Creating Applications With Update Assist Update Assist allows you to create fully functional update applications by answering a few simple questions It is ideal for generating prototypes of WebFOCUS Maintain base
62. The Fields list will be in tree format If filters exist they will be listed prior to the tree listing of the file HTML Report Assistant 4 12 Information Builders 2 Click lt Select expression gt in the right frame to display a list of operators in the left frame 3 Click the expression of your choice Ad Hoc Reporting Enhancements WebFOCUS Summary of New Features 4 13 4 Click lt Select values gt to complete the expression 5 Compare type options will appear in the left frame Enter or Retrieve Value Select to generate a list of values for the field and display an edit box to type in the value Note When entering a value that contains a literal enclose the value in single quotation marks When entering multiple values they must be delimited with or HTML Report Assistant 4 14 Information Builders Parameter Select to display an Edit box to enter the name of the amp variable Click Add to complete the expression Field Select to regenerate the fields list Ad Hoc Reporting Enhancements WebFOCUS Summary of New Features 4 15 You can activate or delete expressions by switching between the green check and the red X that appear next to each expression You can also use parentheses and group expressions together to optimize the WHERE statement Click the grayed out parentheses to activate both Filters are listed above the file in the fields frame of the Selection Criteria tab You
63. WebFOCUS Reporting Language Enhancements WebFOCUS Summary of New Features 1 163 FORMULTIPLE Allows you to include the same FOR field value in multiple rows of an FML matrix Display the Same Record in Multiple FOR Rows on page 1 85 GRAPHSERVURL Creates a GIF file of the graph by sending an HTTP request to a servlet Save a Graph as a GIF File on page 1 94 GTREND Specifies the use of basic linear regression to alter the X and Y axis values in a SCATTER graph Alter X and Y Axis Values Using Linear Regression on page 1 97 HDAY Specifies the holiday file from which to retrieve dates that are considered holidays Specify Holidays on page 1 104 HNODATA Controls missing values propagated to a HOLD file Control Missing Values Propagated to a HOLD File on page 1 44 HOLDMISS Distinguishes between missing data and default data in a HOLD file Store Missing Data in HOLD Files on page 1 47 JSURL Includes JavaScript or VBScript files in an HTML report Include a JavaScript or VB Script File in an HTML Report on page 1 104 NULL Enables creation of a variable length comma or tab delimited HOLD file that differentiates between a missing value and a blank string or zero value Propagate Missing Values to a Delimited HOLD File on page 1 49 SET Parameter Description For details see SET Parameter Summary 1 164 Information Builders PCOMMA Enables the reading of PC type comma
64. after the installation is complete you can use the iWay Client Web Console to remotely control and access the server In addition you can use this Console as a single point of control for an entire network of servers To install additional servers you can expand the Add folder on the Remote Servers page choose how to connect to the server and define a node for the server Agent Services You can divide agents into different groups called services Each agent runs for a specific service Each service can have different values for some of the configuration parameters Services are configured in the server configuration file edaserve cfg At least two services must be configured in edaserve cfg DEFAULT WC_DEFAULT This service is used only for administrative requests from the WebFOCUS Reporting Server Console More services can be configured as required WebFOCUS Reporting Server Enhancements WebFOCUS Summary of New Features 7 3 To manually define a service in edaserve cfg use the following format SERVICE lt service_name gt BEGIN deployment lt private pooled gt eda_user_fixed lt yes no gt pooled_user lt pooled_user_id gt pooled_password lt pooled_user_password gt maximum lt number gt number_ready lt number gt maximum_q lt number gt queue_limit lt number gt idle_session_limit lt number gt idle_agent_limit lt number gt cpu_limit lt number gt memory_limit lt
65. can choose the database to work with directly from the WebFOCUS Reporting Server Console using the Select Database option Order Fields Enter Yes to generate Order fields in a Master File Enter No to generate a Master File without Order fields No is the default value Level 88 as Enter Comment to include COBOL Level 88 fields as comments in the Master Files Enter Skip to exclude level 88 fields Skip is the default value Zoned Numeric Fields Choose Packed to describe zoned numeric fields as packed numeric Choose Alpha to describe zoned numeric fields as alphanumeric Alpha is the default value Numeric Field Edit Options Zeros Enter Suppress to suppress printing of the digit zero for a field whose value is zero Enter Display to display leading zeros for example 00124 Enter None for no formatting None is the default value Negative value Enter Bracket to bracket negative values for example 1234 Enter Credit to credit negative values for example 1234 CR Enter None for no formatting None is the default value Dollar Sign Enter Floating to display a floating dollar sign and commas for example 1 234 Enter Fixed to display a fixed dollar sign and commas for example 1 234 Enter None for no formatting None is the default value Separate Thousands Enter Comma to include commas where appropriate Enter None for no formatting None is the default value Option Description Field Identification as Read Onl
66. previous average is also used as the new data point the predicted values are always equal to the last trend value For example the previous average for period 13 is 706 741 6 and this is also used as the next data point Therefore the average is calculated as follows 706741 6 0 5 706741 6 0 5 706741 6 EXPAVE EXPAVE 1 k new DOLLARS k 706741 6 0 5 706741 6 0 50 353370 8 353370 8 706741 6 Calculating Trends and Predicting Values 1 12 Information Builders Using Double Exponential Smoothing Double exponential smoothing produces an exponential moving average that takes into account the tendency of data to either increase or decrease over time without repeating This is accomplished by using two equations with two constants The first equation accounts for the current time period and is a weighted average of the current data value and the prior average with an added component b that represents the trend for the previous period The weight constant is k DOUBLEXP t k datavalue t 1 k DOUBLEXP t 1 b t 1 The second equation is the calculated trend value and is a weighted average of the difference between the current and previous average and the trend for the previous time period b t represents the average trend The weight constant is g b t g DOUBLEXP t DOUBLEXP t 1 1 g b t 1 These two equations are solved to derive the smoothed average The fir
67. sections and group the data based on a lower level sort field Navigating Reports From a Table of Contents 1 148 Information Builders Example Customizing Sections of the Report With a Page Break TABLE FILE SHORT PRINT PROJECTED_RETURN BY CONTINENT BY REGION BY COUNTRY BY HOLDER BY TYPE ON HOLDER PAGE BREAK ON TABLE SET PAGE NUM OFF ON TABLE PCHOLD FORMAT HTML ON TABLE SET COMPOUND BYTOC 5 ON TABLE SET HTMLCSS ON ON TABLE SET STYLE TYPE REPORT GRID OFF FONT ARIAL SIZE 9 COLOR BLACK BACKCOLOR NONE STYLE NORMAL ENDSTYLE END One section of the report is displayed at a time The report is broken into sections based on the values for HOLDER You will see the detail for each value of HOLDER in a single section WebFOCUS Reporting Language Enhancements WebFOCUS Summary of New Features 1 149 Producing Row Totals for ACROSS Field Values You can produce row totals for horizontal ACROSS sort field values Row totals for horizontal sort fields are different from standard row totals in that only the horizontal sort field values are included in the total Syntax How to Produce Row Totals for Horizontal ACROSS Sort Field Values ACROSS sortfield ACROSS TOTAL AS name COLUMNS col1 AND col2 where sortfield Is the name of the field being sorted across name Is the new name for the ACROSS TOTAL column title col1 col2 Are the titles of the ACROSS columns you want to
68. 0 ON DEALER_COST RECAP FORMPG FORECAST MPG 1000 3 REGRESS END The output is Note Three predicted values of FORMPG are calculated For values outside the range of the data new DEALER_COST values are generated by adding the interval value 1 000 to the prior DEALER_COST value There are no MPG values for the generated DEALER_COST values Each FORMPG value is computed using a regression line calculated using all of the actual data values for MPG DEALER_COST is the independent variable x and MPG is the dependent variable y The equation is used to calculate FORMPG trend and predicted values DEALER_COST MPG FORMPG 2 886 27 25 51 4 292 25 23 65 4 631 21 23 20 4 915 21 22 82 5 063 23 22 63 5 660 21 21 83 21 21 83 5 800 24 21 65 6 000 24 21 38 7 427 16 19 49 8 300 18 18 33 8 400 18 18 20 10 000 18 16 08 11 000 18 14 75 11 194 9 14 50 14 940 11 9 53 15 940 0 8 21 16 940 0 6 88 17 940 0 5 55 Calculating Trends and Predicting Values 1 18 Information Builders In this case the equation is approximately as follows FORMPG 0 001323 DEALER_COST 29 32 The predicted values are the values are not exactly as calculated by FORECAST because of rounding but they show the calculation process Calculating Trends and Predicting Values Using REGRESS In Release 5 2 3 you can calculate trends and predict values with multivariate regression This
69. 1 From the View Builder click Toolbox The Toolbox window opens 2 In the Select Toolbox field click Add 3 Enter a name for the toolbox in the Explorer User Prompt dialog box and click OK 4 In the Link Caption text box enter the name for the link This is the text that will display in the toolbar 5 In the Link URL text box enter the URL for the link in the format http websitename For example http www informationbuilders com 6 Click Insert The link is added to the Available Links box 7 Repeat steps 4 6 to add additional items to the toolbox The number of items you can put in a toolbox is unlimited 8 Click Submit Procedure How to Copy a Toolbox 1 From the View Builder click Toolbox The Toolbox window opens 2 Highlight a toolbox from the Select Toolbox list and click Save As 3 Enter a name for the new toolbox 4 Click OK Managed Reporting Enhancements WebFOCUS Summary of New Features 3 17 Procedure How to Create a Toolbar 1 From the View Builder click Toolbar The Toolbar window opens 2 Select the Toolbar 1 or Toolbar 2 radio button 3 Highlight a toolbox in the Select Toolbox list 4 From the Available Links list highlight a link and click Add 5 Repeat steps 3 and 4 until your toolbar is complete 6 Use the up and down arrows to position the order of the selected links 7 Select the toolbar position top bottom left or right by clic
70. 13 53 28 Pid 00001528 MntType hello send to edaprint Retrieving WebFOCUS CGI Parameters The WebFOCUS Maintain language allows a Maintain procedure to access WebFOCUS CGI parameters from HTTP request headers or user defined parameters as issued on typical Web URLs For example you can retrieve any parameter passed from a WebFOCUS drill down report to Maintain The IWC GetAppCGIValue function imports the value of a WebFOCUS CGI parameter into a Maintain variable If the passed CGI parameter name is not found the function returns a null value Tip Unlike Maintain variables CGI parameters are case sensitive Available WebFOCUS Maintain functions are fully documented in the WebFOCUS Using Functions manual How to Retrieve a WebFOCUS CGI Parameter Example Retrieving a WebFOCUS CGI Parameter WebFOCUS Maintain Enhancements WebFOCUS Summary of New Features 9 17 Syntax How to Retrieve a WebFOCUS CGI Parameter Declare mnt_var type_length IWC GetAppCGIValue cgi_parm where mnt_var Is the Maintain variable that receives the ASCII value of the CGI parameter The value is unescaped before it is passed to the variable type_length Is the type and length of the Maintain variable cgi_parm Is the CGI parameter which can be a variable or a literal value enclosed in double quotation marks The value of cgi_parm is case sensitive Example Retrieving a WebFOCUS CGI Parameter IWC getAppCGIValue retri
71. 2 20 Information Builders Navigation of sort groups from a table of contents You can add multiple BY fields to an HTML Table of Contents TOC In the previous release you could only sort on the highest level BY field in a single request With the implementation of this multi level feature the TOC option is available when you right click any BY field in your report For this feature to be useful the report must contain at least one vertical sort BY field If you include more than one sort field in a report the hierarchy is determined by the order in which the fields are specified in the request The TOC displays as hyperlinks all values of the first highest level vertical sort field as well as the values of any lower level BY fields that you designate for inclusion Unless otherwise specified in the request a new page begins when the highest level sort field changes The TOC itself is an object that appears as an icon in the upper left corner of the report or as one or more drop down lists in a heading or footing For examples and additional information on the multi level HTML Table of Contents TOC feature see Navigating Sort Groups From a Table of Contents in the Creating Reports With the Report Painter chapter in the Creating Reports With Graphical Tools manual For language implementation of this feature see Navigating Reports From a Table of Contents in Chapter 1 WebFOCUS Reporting Language Enhancements Check
72. 432 5 5 53289 660740 676 086 3 6 58742 734705 705 395 6 7 60127 760586 732 990 8 8 55622 695235 714 112 9 9 55787 683140 698 626 5 10 57340 713768 706 197 2 11 57459 710138 708 167 6 12 57290 705315 706 741 3 13 0 0 706 028 3 14 0 0 705 671 6 15 0 0 705 493 3 WebFOCUS Reporting Language Enhancements WebFOCUS Summary of New Features 1 11 Each average EXPAVE value is computed using DOLLARS values where they exist The calculation of the moving average begins in the following way The first EXPAVE value 801 123 0 is the same as the first DOLLARS value The second EXPAVE value 741 731 5 is calculated as follows n 3 number used to calculate weights k 2 1 n 2 4 0 5 Note that because of rounding and the number of decimal places used the value derived in this sample calculation varies slightly from the one displayed in the report output EXPAVE EXPAVE 1 k new DOLLARS k 801123 0 5 682340 0 50 400561 5 341170 741731 5 The third EXPAVE value 753 404 8 is calculated as follows EXPAVE EXPAVE 1 k new DOLLARS k 741731 5 0 5 765078 0 50 370865 75 382539 753404 75 For predicted values beyond those supplied the last EXPAVE value is used as the new data point in the exponential smoothing calculation The predicted EXPAVE values starting with 706 741 6 are calculated using the previous average and the new data point Because the
73. 6 107 890 6 107 890 2400 CHANGED Cost Of Goods Sold 36 723 267 36 723 267 2500 UNCHANGED Variable Material Costs 27 438 625 27 438 625 2600 UNCHANGED Direct Labor 6 176 900 6 176 900 2700 UNCHANGED Fixed Costs 3 107 742 3 107 742 2800 UNCHANGED WebFOCUS Reporting Language Enhancements WebFOCUS Summary of New Features 1 89 Formatting an FML Report You can format a row or cell as well as a column in an FML report In Release 5 2 3 you can indent TAG rows RECAP rows or all rows in a dynamically generated hierarchy Syntax How to Format a Row Column or Cell in an FML Report TYPE type COLUMN column LABEL Rn label format_def where type Identifies the component you wish to format Possible values are REPORT denotes a row with the specified label DATA denotes a row with the specified label which contains user supplied data values FREETEXT denotes a free text or blank row with the specified label UNDERLINE denotes underlines generated by BAR Formatting of an underline is supported for PDF and PS but not for HTML reports column Identifies a specific column You can identify the column by its name or its position in a row LABEL Is the controlling factor in identifying and formatting an FML row Note that the label is used to identify a row for calculation or formatting The label for a TAG or DATA row will never appear in the report output it is used only to identify
74. 9 30 SQL EDA commands in Maintain 9 30 SQL SELECT statements 10 15 SQL Answer set object 10 15 SQUEEZ function 1 155 to 1 156 2 70 SSL Secure Socket Layer 7 24 stacking columns 1 138 in EXL2K format 1 138 standard normal deviation 1 22 Standard Reports 3 11 3 20 statement trace in Maintain 9 15 Statistics tables 10 4 STRIP function 1 156 to 1 157 2 70 style sheets 1 145 WebFOCUS StyleSheets 1 145 Styles tab 4 18 STYLESHEET parameter 1 145 TOC 1 145 SUBSTRING function 8 42 SUBSTV function 1 59 SUB TOTAL 1 40 using multiple commands 1 40 SUB TOTAL command 1 31 prefix operators and 1 32 to 1 33 SUBTOTAL command 1 31 prefix operators and 1 32 to 1 33 SUFFIX values 1 151 2 12 SUMMARIZE 1 40 using multiple commands 1 40 SUMMARIZE command 1 31 prefix operators and 1 32 to 1 33 summary line processing 1 37 summary values 1 31 prefix operators and 1 32 to 1 33 SUPEMPTY setting for Essbase 8 18 superdescriptors for Adabas 8 4 SUPMISSING setting for Essbase 8 17 supported code pages 7 7 supported languages 6 28 suppressing missing data in Essbase 8 17 suppressing zero values in Essbase 8 17 SUPSHARE setting for Essbase 8 17 Index WebFOCUS Summary of New Features I 21 SUPZERO setting for Essbase 8 17 switching access modes 8 8 to 8 9 switching between languages 6 24 Synonym Wizard 2 7 recreating synonyms 2 7 synonyms 2 7 3 7 7 26 accessing from OS 390
75. Administration Interface which is a full client application that uses Java Web Start technology replaces the Java applet user interface From this redesigned interface which requires JRE 1 4 0_02 supplied with the installation CD on the user s desktop you can Access the ReportCaster Server Configuration tool Create users and groups to provide ReportCaster capabilities for non Managed Reporting users Create and maintain a schedule Access the Library Access List and Library Management interfaces of the optional Report Library product View a log report and maintain the log file Create and maintain a Distribution List ReportCaster Server Configuration Tool ReportCaster provides a GUI configuration tool for ease of configuration of ReportCaster Using the ReportCaster Server Configuration tool administrators can navigate through and change the various configuration parameter settings For example ReportCaster enables administrators to change the polling interval for the ReportCaster Distribution Server define access to multiple WebFOCUS Reporting Servers and configure the ReportCaster Distribution Server for National Language Support NLS For more information about how to access and use the ReportCaster Server Configuration tool see the ReportCaster Server Configuration chapter in the ReportCaster Development and Administration manual Creating and Managing ReportCaster User IDs When
76. Builders Syntax How to Indent Row Titles in an FML Hierarchy SET BLANKINDENT ON OFF n ON TABLE SET BLANKINDENT ON OFF n where ON Indents FML hierarchy captions 0 125 units for each space that would normally appear before the caption For child levels in an FML hierarchy it indents 0 125 units for each space that would normally display between this line and the line above it OFF Turns off indentations for FML hierarchy captions in an HTML report For other formats uses the default indentation of two spaces OFF is the default value n Is an explicit measurement in the unit of measurement defined by the UNITS parameter This measurement is multiplied by the number of spaces that would normally appear before the caption For child levels in an FML hierarchy n units are indented for each space that would normally appear between this line and the line above it 2 is the default value Zero 0 produces the same report output as OFF Negative values for n are not supported They generate the following message and the request processes as if BLANKINDENT OFF VALID VALUES ARE OFF ON OR A POSITIVE NUMBER IN CURRENT UNITS You can change the number of blank spaces before the parent line of a hierarchy or before any FML tag or RECAP line in an FML request For an illustration of the default indent see Displaying an FML Hierarchy With Captions on page 1 77 WebFOCUS Reporting Language Enhancements WebFOCUS Summary
77. Builders Two Way Email API The following additional features concern Two Way Email API authentication and customization as well as accessing and editing sample Two Way Email API JavaServer Pages JSP Authentication The Two Way Email API authenticates users the same way as the ReportCaster Bean API For more information see the ReportCaster and Two Way Email API for Self Service Applications manual Customization You can customize the content of the Two Way Email API Event Log by editing the Event Log setting in the ReportCaster Distribution Server configuration file This setting controls what Two Way Email inbox events should be logged Possible values are ON displays all events ERROR displays only errors OFF turns off the Event Log Nothing displays You may edit the ReportCaster Distribution Server configuration file using the ReportCaster Server Configuration tool For detailed information about this configuration tool see the ReportCaster Server Configuration chapter in the ReportCaster Development and Administration manual Two Way Email API JavaServer Pages To access the sample Two Way Email API JavaServer Pages enter the following URL http hostname rcaster samples twindex htm where hostname Is the name of the ReportCaster Distribution Server To edit the sample Two Way Email API JavaServer Pages go to the directory where the Web application is deployed or refe
78. Click the Report Options icon on the toolbar and select the Output tab Under Display Options select HTML and verify that On is selected from the Cascading Style Sheets drop down menu b For fonts click the Select Fonts button The Fonts dialog box opens Select font name font style font size and color Click OK c For background color select the Single Color radio button under Background Coloring and choose a color from the palette Click OK 3 Click OK to return to the Design matrix where many styling changes are reflected 4 Click the Run icon on the toolbar to see the row formatting options applied to the report output Financial Report Painter Enhancements 2 68 Information Builders Procedure How to Format a Cell in the Design Matrix 1 Right click a cell and choose Options from the shortcut menu The Field Properties dialog box opens at the Style tab with Cell identified as the active object 2 Under Graphical select the font characteristics border characteristics and or background colors that you wish to apply to the cell a For borders click the Select Borders button The Borders dialog box opens Select width style and or color options from the drop down menus Click OK You can apply the same specifications to all border lines or vary specifications for top bottom right and or left borders Note To set borders in an HTML report you must turn Cascading Style Sheets On Click the Report Op
79. Data Sources The DATASET attribute can be used on the file or segment level of a FOCUS Master File If a USE command or explicit allocation is issued for the file a warning is issued that the DATASET attribute will be ignored The segment with the DATASET attribute must be either a LOCATION segment or a cross referenced segment For cross referenced segments If field declarations are specified for the cross referenced fields the DATASET attribute is the only method for specifying a physical file because FOCUS does not read the cross referenced Master File and therefore does not pick up its DATASET attribute if one is specified If field declarations are not specified for the cross referenced fields it is better to place the DATASET attribute at the file level in the cross referenced Master File as FOCUS reads and parses the cross referenced Master File In this case specifying different DATASET values at the segment level in the host Master File and the file level of the cross referenced Master File causes a conflict resulting in a FOC1998 message If DATASET is used in a Master File whose data source is managed by the FOCUS Database Server the DATASET attribute is ignored on the server side because the FOCUS Database Server does not read Master Files for servicing table requests The DATASET attribute in the Master File has the lowest priority A user s explicit allocation overrides DATASET attributes The USE
80. Developers and Administrators are configured to access the ReportCaster Development and Administration Interface Managed Reporting Analytical users can only access the ReportCaster Scheduling Wizard and HTML User Interface In Release 5 2 3 the Managed Reporting Applet Environment can be configured so that Managed Reporting Developers and Administrators access the ReportCaster Scheduling Wizard and HTML User Interface rather than the ReportCaster Development and Administration Interface You can change the interface by editing the following files located in ibi_html workbnch mrdetectx htm controls the Managed Reporting Developer user type mrAdminFlags js controls the Managed Reporting Administrator user type To configure the Developer or Administrator user type to access the ReportCaster Scheduling Wizard and HTML User Interface set the following flag var WFInstallOption_ReportBrokerHTMLFlag true To configure the Developer or Administrator user type to access the ReportCaster Development and Administration Interface set the flag back to the default setting var WFInstallOption_ReportBrokerHTMLFlag false If you are using the WebFOCUS Servlet you must reload the WebFOCUS Web application in order for your changes to take effect In addition users must log out and log back in ReportCaster Enhancements WebFOCUS Summary of New Features 5 5 Development and Administration Interface The ReportCaster Development and
81. ETL Request chapter in the iWay ETL Manager User s Guide Procedure How to Schedule an ETL Request to Run at Multi Day Intervals 1 In the Scheduler window select Multi Days in the Schedule Type section 2 Select the days of the week or month on which you want your job run from the Days of the Week or Days of the Month section If you want your job to run at the end of the month select Last Day of Month 3 Select a start time in the Start Time section by entering the time in the fields or using the arrow buttons 4 Select a start date in the Start Time section by entering the date or by clicking the calendar icon and choosing a date from the Calendar window that opens 5 Optionally select an end time in the End Time section by entering the time in the fields or using the arrow buttons 6 Optionally select an end date in the End Time section by entering the date or by clicking the calendar icon and choosing a date from the Calendar window that opens Note You do not need to change the schedule to stop a query from executing regularly Instead set the status of the request to Inactive in the ETL request main window For details on setting the status of an ETL request see Specifying ETL Request Properties in the Working With an ETL Request chapter in the iWay ETL Manager User s Guide ETL Manager Enhancements WebFOCUS Summary of New Features 10 7 Bulk Loading Bulk loading is supported for Sybase Adaptive
82. Features 3 15 Saving Most Recently Used Reports Dashboard automatically creates a list of the last ten reports you have viewed You can access the list from the Recent link in the banner The Recent link is included for all authenticated users You can clear your list of recently used reports with the Remove All button Creating a My Favorite Reports List There is an Add to Favorites option on the pop up menu that opens when a user clicks a report in a Domain Tree Role Tree list block or folder block You can also add reports to the My Favorites list when you are performing a domain search Creating Custom Toolbars Dashboard Administrators can insert a custom toolbar in the Dashboard that contains any type of link that the Internet or intranet supports such as Web sites applications documents and other tools When a user clicks one of the links a new browser window opens and displays the contents Toolbars can be placed in various positions on the Dashboard and you can select different colors for the toolbars so they conform with your Dashboard view Because toolbars are created from items in your toolbox es you must create a toolbox before you create a toolbar You can create as many toolboxes as you require and each can contain an unlimited number of items How to Create a Toolbox Copy a Toolbox Create a Toolbar Creating Custom Toolbars 3 16 Information Builders Procedure How to Create a Toolbox
83. File In Release 5 2 3 the SET HNODATA command controls the missing data characters that are propagated to fields with the MISSING ON attribute in HOLD FORMAT ALPHA files Missing values in fields that do not have the MISSING ON attribute are propagated to a HOLD file as blank for alphanumeric fields or zero for numeric fields In this section Controlling Missing Values Propagated to a HOLD File Holding Missing Values Propagating Missing Values to a Variable Length Delimited HOLD File How to Control Missing Values Propagated to a HOLD File Example Controlling Missing Data Values in an Alphanumeric HOLD File Propagating Numeric Values for Missing Data to a HOLD File Handling Missing Data in HOLD Files 1 44 Information Builders Syntax How to Control Missing Values Propagated to a HOLD File SET HNODATA charstring ON TABLE SET HNODATA charstring where charstring Is a string of up to 12 characters that will be propagated to a HOLD FORMAT ALPHA file for missing values in a field with the MISSING ON attribute A period is the default value If the string is longer than the length of the field the value stored in An alphanumeric field will be the leftmost characters of the string A numeric field will be a blank string When an alphanumeric string other than the default value the period is used to populate a missing numeric field a blank will be inserted in the held field to pre
84. Footings In Release 5 2 3 the following guidelines apply to report headings and footings page headings and footings and sort headings and footings In a single report there can be a maximum of 32K characters for all types of heading and footing text The maximum number of sort headings plus sort footings in one request is 64 The maximum number of nested headings is 64 Increased Space for Column Titles In Release 5 2 3 you can enter column title text of unlimited length In this section Increased Number of Display Fields Increased Number of Columns Generated by ACROSS Increased Numbers of Headings and Footings Increased Space for Column Titles WebFOCUS Reporting Language Enhancements WebFOCUS Summary of New Features 1 99 Prompting for Variables in CGI Servlet The amper auto prompting feature enables you to prompt users for the variables necessary to execute a procedure With this feature you can also design the form that will prompt for the amper variables You can add the following with auto prompting Description of the procedure For details see Add a Description of the Procedure on page 1 100 Heading for the form For details see Add a Heading to the Form on page 1 100 Description of a variable For details see Add a Variable Description to the Form on page 1 100 Default variable values For details see Set a Default Variable Value on page 1 100 S
85. Format on page 2 13 Apportioning numeric data in ranges Summary of Report Painter New Features on page 2 14 Multiple drill down links Creating Multiple Drill Downs With the Report Painter on page 2 21 Chaining parameters for record selections Filtering Dynamic Parameter Values on page 2 40 Image hyperlinks in Resource Layout Painter RLP Adding an Image With a Hyperlink to the Layout on page 2 43 Multi column display of radio buttons and check boxes in RLP Displaying Radio Buttons and Check Box Lists in Multiple Columns on page 2 44 Dynamic display of names in RLP Specifying Different Names for Dynamic Parameter Values on page 2 46 Hiding borders around frames in RLP Hiding Borders Around Frames on page 2 47 Using parameter values with external reports in RLP Applying Parameter Values to External Reports on page 2 47 Update Assist enhancements Validation of User Supplied Data in Update Assist Applications on page 2 51 Choosing a Color Scheme for an Update Assist Application on page 2 52 Customizing Update Assist Designs on page 2 52 Calendar Control for Date Formatted Fields in Update Assist on page 2 53 Right Click Menu Options on Trees on page 2 53 Sorting Tables on page 2 54 Increased number of columns generated by Across Summary of Report Painter New Features on page 2 14 Managed Reporting and Dashboard Enhancements A 4 Information Builders Managed Reporting and Dashboard Enhan
86. GRAPHSERVURL http localhost ibi_apps IBIGraphServlet GRAPH FILE CENTORD SUM LINEPRICE ACROSS PLANTLNG AS Plant ON GRAPH HOLD AS PLANT FORMAT GIF END TABLE FILE CENTORD SUM LINEPRICE BY PLANTLNG AS Plant ON TABLE SET STYLE TYPE REPORT IMAGE plant gif POSITION 4 0 SIZE 5 3 ENDSTYLE ON TABLE PCHOLD FORMAT PDF END 2 Save the procedure as HOLDGIF 3 Create the following HTML file which calls the HOLDGIF WebFOCUS procedure from a hyperlink lt HTML gt lt HEAD gt lt TITLE gt Inserting a GIF Image in a PDF Report lt TITLE gt lt HEAD gt lt BODY gt lt H4 ALIGN CENTER gt Report on Line Price by Plant lt H4 gt lt HR gt lt P gt lt FONT SIZE 2 gt lt FONT gt lt P gt lt UL TYPE SQUARE lt LI gt lt A HREF http localhost ibi_apps WFServlet IBIF_ex holdgif gt lt H4 ALIGN CENTER gt Click Here to Launch a PDF Report with an Embedded GIF Image lt H4 gt lt A gt lt UL gt lt BODY gt lt HTML gt Graph Enhancements 1 96 Information Builders The resulting launch page looks like this 4 Click the link on the launch page to run the report The output looks like this You can run the report from a browser or from Developer Studio To distribute the report using ReportCaster you would schedule the actual procedure in this example HOLDGIF WebFOCUS Reporting Language Enhancements WebFOCUS Summary of New Features 1 97 Altering X and Y Axis Values Using Linear
87. Governor Usage Monitor data sources REQUESTS COMPLETED FOR TEST COLLECTION DATA This is a cancellation message that Resource Governor generates to indicate that a SELECT statement was issued and canceled based on rules built by the CVP and used for governing GKE36048 RESOURCE GOVERNOR CANCELED THIS REQUEST Governing Mode GOVERN KBName IVP RuleNum 3 Threshold Type ROWS Thresh Exceeded 10 Accessing Resource Analyzer and Resource Governor Reports From the WebFOCUS Reporting Server Console 11 6 Information Builders If the Resource Governor installation and configuration is unsuccessful messages preceded by the keyword ERROR appear along with the output These messages are specific to the type of error encountered For example The following message results from the incorrect execution of the gkecol procedure ERROR SETTING COLLECTION ON The following message results from the incorrect execution of the GKETABLE procedure ERROR CREATING GKETABLE Tip If the success messages are not found in the TS3OUT listing or if error messages are found turn on tracing and examine the messages in the trace for any problems in the setup Accessing Resource Analyzer and Resource Governor Reports From the WebFOCUS Reporting Server Console Resource Analyzer and Resource Governor reports are accessible from the W
88. INCLUDE in the Using Java Applet Managed Reporting chapter in the WebFOCUS Managed Reporting End User s Manual Deferred Receipt 3 12 Information Builders Deferred Receipt You can connect from a single WebFOCUS Client installation to multiple WebFOCUS Reporting Servers This means that it is possible for a single user to have deferred tickets for output residing on multiple servers These servers can be on different platforms and may require different user IDs Users have access to all their deferred output regardless of its location and are automatically prompted for credentials as needed There are administrator settings for managing deferred workload There can be up to one alternate deferred server per immediate server to separate interactive and deferred processing You can limit the number of server agents allocated to handling deferred requests and also the number of deferred requests a given user can process at one time these features are not available on OS 390 On OS 390 a global keyword UNIQUE restricts simultaneous server connections to one per logon ID which can be used to manage both deferred and interactive workload when server authentication is used Deferred Receipt is fully documented in the Using the Deferred Report Status Interface chapter in the WebFOCUS Managed Reporting End User s Manual Migration Utility The command line migration utility has been enhanced to support multiple Managed Reporting repo
89. Information Builders Formatting Enhancements You can apply a wide range of formatting options to individual columns rows and cells in a financial report using options on the Field Properties Style tab You can further refine formatting For columns by identifying the column title and column data as separate objects for styling For rows by identifying the row and title as separate objects for styling If you style a row and then a cell within that row the cell styling takes precedence for the cell If you style a column and then a cell with that column the cell styling takes precedence for the cell If you style a cell then style a row or column that the cell is in the cell style remains the same Row and cell styling options are specific to financial reports created in the Financial Report Painter Column styling options are identical whether applied from the Financial Report Painter or the Report Painter For language implementation of this feature see Formatting an FML Report in Chapter 1 WebFOCUS Reporting Language Enhancements Developer Studio Enhancements WebFOCUS Summary of New Features 2 65 Procedure How to Format a Column in the Design Matrix 1 Right click a column and choose Options from the shortcut menu The Field Properties dialog box opens at the Style tab 2 Select Column Title and Data as the active object or select Column Data or Column Title to style them separately If you
90. MNTCON STARTSERVER Variable Varchar Data Type Support WebFOCUS Maintain supports the variable varchar data type Variables are fully documented in Using Variables in Procedures in the Developing Procedures chapter in the Developing WebFOCUS Maintain Applications manual Additional Microsoft Access Support In Release 5 2 3 WebFOCUS Maintain supports read write access to Microsoft Access databases date time fields and long text fields WebFOCUS Connector for Excel 9 44 Information Builders WebFOCUS Connector for Excel In Release 5 2 3 the WebFOCUS Connector for Excel enables you to use Excel to interact with WebFOCUS Maintain and WebFOCUS Reporting This product offering lets you load data to Excel using WebFOCUS work with the data in Excel and update the data centrally without having to leave Excel Use this product offering to develop and deploy Excel based solutions that allow Excel users to share data in a common central database accessible to the enterprise It is ideal for accounting inventory management and performance applications in fact any application for which Excel is a primary tool The major benefits include It allows Excel users to work in a familiar environment with no special training required It eliminates manual cutting copying pasting and rekeying of data It simplifies automatic information reconciliation It enables you to convert all current Excel based solutions
91. Multiple FOR Rows on page 1 85 Example Displaying One Summary Row for an FML Hierarchy The CENTSYSF data source contains detail level financial data To use the account hierarchy in the CENTGL data source with this financial data the two data sources are joined First the lines of the hierarchy starting with account 3100 Selling Expenses are displayed by the WITH CHILDREN command Note that only accounts with no children are populated in this detail level data source The ADD command then creates one line that is the sum of account 3100 and all of its children SET BLANKINDENT ON SET FORMULTIPLE ON JOIN SYS_ACCOUNT IN CENTGL TO ALL SYS_ACCOUNT IN CENTSYSF TABLE FILE CENTGL SUM NAT_AMOUNT D10 0 NAT_YTDAMT D10 0 FOR GL_ACCOUNT 3100 WITH CHILDREN ALL AS CAPTION OVER BAR OVER 3100 ADD AS CAPTION IF PERIOD EQ 2002 03 END WebFOCUS Reporting Language Enhancements WebFOCUS Summary of New Features 1 81 The output is Syntax How to Consolidate FML Hierarchy Data to Any Level and Depth TABLE FILE filename SUM FOR hierarchyfield parentvalue GET WITH CHILD REN n ALL ADD m ALL AS CAPTION text LABEL label END where filename Is the name of the file to be used in the FML request If the hierarchy for this request cannot be loaded automatically you must have previously issued the LOAD CHART command to load the hierarchy hierarchyfield Is the hierarchy field name If the request refer
92. OS 390 ISPF Command Shell session option 6 from ISPF menu enter the following command to copy the CMSCHED Master Files and Access Files To copy the Master File oput qualif copymgr master data cmsched ibi apps baseapp cmsched mas To copy the Access File oput qualif copymgr access data cmsched ibi apps baseapp cmsched acx 4 Prepare the ETL internal database for migration To do this configure the Data Adapter for DB2 for the internal tables 5 In the Web Console navigation pane click ETL The ETL Configuration page opens 6 In the ETL Configuration page s navigation pane click the ETL Procedures folder A context menu opens 7 Click Migrate 4 x Procedures The Migrate page opens ETL Manager Enhancements WebFOCUS Summary of New Features 10 11 8 If you copied the Master Files and Access Files for the CMSCHED tables in Step 3 then enter the path to the directory where these files reside The default location is ibi apps baseapp If you did not copy the files in Step 3 and if the PDS was allocated in the start up JCL under MASTER and ACCESS ddnames the default location is mas dd master acx dd access 9 Click Submit The message Migrate procedure submitted appears 10 When the migration procedure finishes review the log created to ensure that all ETL Requests migrated successfully The following message should appear for each ETL Request ICM18164 Request NAME
93. PeopleSoft 7 5 and earlier as well as the newer PeopleSoft Pure Internet Architecture The adapter must be configured on the server used for PeopleSoft reporting prior to creating any connections to PeopleSoft data sources The adapter provides the following three classes of services Authentication services PeopleSoft data source connection management services Metadata administration and data access security services Native data source SQL scripts are provided to prepare the following PeopleSoft data constructs for simplified reporting Effective dated records PeopleSoft trees Data Adapter for Progress The Data Adapter for Progress has been enhanced to use an ODBC connection to the database ODBC provides full support for ANSI SQL 92 specifications which supports Binary Large Objects BLOBs The Data Adapter for Progress 9 1d is supported on the following platforms Windows NT and Windows 2000 IBM AIX Sun Solaris HP UX Linux The adapter is available on Compaq tru64 platforms only as an embedded SQL 89 interface Data Adapter Enhancements WebFOCUS Summary of New Features 8 21 Data Adapter for SAP BW The Data Adapter for SAP BW is a data adapter from SAP with consolidated information from SAP R 3 and external sources BW is pre configured for but not limited to SAP R 3 data and is based on the same business objects and metadata as R 3 BW reporti
94. Reporting Enhancements This chapter describes all of the features for Managed Reporting in Version 5 Release 2 and has been updated to reflect Version 5 Release 2 3 Topics that contain Version 5 Release 2 3 features are marked with asterisks Topics User Administrator Developer User Type Managed Reporting Developer for Windows Change Management Security Updated Presentation Reporting Object Component Validation New Create Synonym Behavior Multiple Servers and Application Path Custom Reports in Managed Reporting Execution of a Custom Report Using INCLUDE Deferred Receipt Migration Utility Repository Extract Utility Dashboard Features Creating Multiple Content Pages Creating a Group View Unique Customizations for Public Views Removing the Banner Customizing Content Block Layouts Saving Most Recently Used Reports Creating a My Favorite Reports List Creating Custom Toolbars Stand Alone Domain Role Trees Optionally Displaying Frame Separators Hiding the Display of Content Blocks Default Public User Domain Searches User Options Settings Custom Reports in Dashboard Filters For Standard Reports in Dashboard Content Pages ReportCaster and Report Library Dynamic Tracing User Administrator 3 2 Information Builders User Administrator You can create a new user and assign the user s properties and password all in one step The User Administrati
95. SET ERROROUT command you can control how a server responds to error conditions encountered in a procedure Syntax How to Control Error Processing Enter the following in a profile or procedure SET ERROROUT ON OFF where ON Terminates the procedure and returns a message to the client in the event of an error on the server OFF Continues processing when an error is encountered OFF is the default value WebFOCUS Reporting Language Enhancements WebFOCUS Summary of New Features 1 107 Converting Case for File Names and Directories Both UNIX and WebFOCUS support uppercase lowercase and mixed case file names and directories Since lowercase is the default in UNIX environments WebFOCUS offers a way to automatically convert file names and directories to lowercase Syntax How to Convert File Names to Lowercase SET FILECASE ACTUAL LOWER where ACTUAL Retains file names in uppercase lowercase or mixed case exactly as they are entered When this setting is used WebFOCUS looks for file names exactly as they are entered uppercase lowercase or mixed case LOWER Converts uppercase or mixed case names to lowercase When this setting is used WebFOCUS looks for file names in lowercase LOWER is the default value Adding Borders for Emphasis You can add a border around an entire HTML PDF or PS report or just add a border around headings footings and columns to emphasize them Using the BORDER att
96. Server IQ Bulk loading is fully documented in Using Bulk Loading in the Building an ETL Request chapter in the iWay ETL Manager User s Guide Flat File Targets There is improved support for transformations to flat file targets You can apply transformations in a single pass of the source data Mapping to a predefined flat file target structure can be used Migrating ETL Requests Enhancements have been made to the ETL migration features in the following areas Workbench As with previous releases you can migrate requests from the ETL workbench You can use copy and paste or drag and drop to migrate requests from one server to another Server A server procedure initiated from the WebFOCUS Reporting Server Console is provided to migrate requests from a Version 4 3 or Version 5 1 server to the new format in order to facilitate migration of a large number of requests You can migrate ETL Requests from version 4 x and 5 1 x when you upgrade ETL Manager to a newer version The migration process includes the following tasks 1 Migrate Master Files and Access Files 2 Prepare the ETL internal database for migration 3 Migrate the ETL Requests 4 Test the migrated requests Although procedures vary slightly by operating system each variation includes these tasks For details see Migrate ETL Requests on UNIX and Windows on page 10 8 Migrate ETL Requests on OS 390 on page 10 10 Migrate ETL Requests on OS 400 o
97. String on page 1 61 The LENV function returns the actual length of each instance of TITLEV to the ALEN field TABLE FILE MOVIES PRINT COMPUTE TITLEV A39V TRIMV T TITLE 39 1 TITLEV COMPUTE ALEN I2 LENV TITLEV ALEN BY CATEGORY NOPRINT WHERE CATEGORY EQ CHILDREN END The output is LOCASV Creating a Variable Length Lowercase String The LOCASV function converts alphabetic characters to lowercase and is similar to LOCASE However LOCASV can return AnV output whose actual length is the lesser of the actual length of the AnV input field and an input parameter that specifies the length limit How to Create a Variable Length Lowercase String Example Creating a Variable Length Lowercase String WebFOCUS Reporting Language Enhancements WebFOCUS Summary of New Features 1 55 Syntax How to Create a Variable Length Lowercase String LOCASV length_limit string outfield where length_limit Numeric Is a positive constant or a field whose integer portion represents the size and therefore the upper limit for the length of the input string string Alphanumeric Is the field or alphanumeric constant enclosed in single quotation marks that is to be converted to lowercase If it is a field it can have An or AnV format If it is a field of type AnV its length is taken from the length bytes stored in the field If length_limit is smaller than the actual length the source string is truncated to this
98. The TOC collapses to its icon when you click Table of Contents but you can continue to scroll back expand the TOC and make additional selections WebFOCUS Reporting Language Enhancements WebFOCUS Summary of New Features 1 145 Syntax How to Add TOCs to a Heading Include the following attribute in your StyleSheet declaration TYPE heading subtype TOC sort_column where heading Is the type of heading or footing that contains the TOC Possible values are TABHEADING specifies the report heading TABFOOTING specifies the report footing HEADING specifies the page heading FOOTING specifies the page footing subtype Are attributes that identify the location in the heading or footing where each requested drop down list will be displayed These options can be used separately or in combination depending upon the degree of specificity required to identify a component Possible values are LINE_ identifies a line by its position in a heading or footing If a heading or footing has multiple lines and you apply a StyleSheet declaration that does not specify LINE_ the declaration is applied to all lines Blank lines are counted when interpreting the value of LINE LINE n is required if a heading or footing has multiple lines otherwise you can omit it OBJECT identifies the TOC object in a heading or footing as a text string or field value Possible values are TEXT or FIELD You can use a
99. With the Report Painter chapter in the Creating Reports With Graphical Tools manual Launch procedure components from the Prefix tab in the Object Inspector The Prefix tab lists the components that precede the report component Click the component to access the appropriate tool Define Join or Dimension See Opening Report Components Object Inspector in the Report Painter Basics chapter in the Creating Reports With Graphical Tools manual View the Master File structure segments or fields from the Fields tab in the Object Inspector You can drag fields from this tab to the Report Painter window If you drag a segment all the fields in the selected segment are added to the report See Viewing Master File Segments Object Inspector in the Report Painter Basics chapter in the Creating Reports With Graphical Tools manual View all the parts of the expression as you build it With the new Expression Builder drag and drop the field in the expression and select the logical relation and comparison type from drop down lists For procedures see Creating a List of Acceptable Values in the Creating Reports With the Report Painter chapter in the Creating Reports With Graphical Tools manual References dialog boxes and other procedures are fully documented in Using the Expression Builder in the Writing Expressions chapter in the Creating Reports With Graphical Tools manual Improved handling of images The Report Painter
100. Yen it is formatted with the decimal at the end and no zeros By aligning the decimal points in a vertical stack you can more easily read and compare these numbers as illustrated in the following output This technique uses a width specification for the item that contains decimals combined with a variation on standard left right center justification to achieve the proper decimal alignment Decimal alignment is supported for styled reports in the following formats HTML requires Cascading Style Sheets SET HTMLCSS ON PDF and PostScript For the graphical implementation of this feature see Adding a Page Heading or Footing in the Creating Reports With Report Painter chapter in the Creating Reports With Graphical Tools manual For related information about aligning text and data in headings and footings see Aligning Content in a Multi Line Heading or Footing in the Using Heading Footing Titles and Labels chapter in the Creating Reports With WebFOCUS Language manual How to Specify Decimal Alignment of a Heading or Footing Measure for Column Width and Decimal Alignment Example Aligning Data and Text in a Multi Line Heading or Footing Floating decimal points Aligned decimal points Bond Face Value Bond Face Value Galosh Ltd 22375 5784596 Galosh Ltd 22375 5784596 Mukluk Inc 1212345 457 Mukluk Inc 1212345 457 Overshoe Inc 232 45484 Overshoe Inc 232 45484 Aligning Decimals in a Multi Line Headin
101. a Variable Length Substring The following request extracts a trailing definite or indefinite article from a movie title such as THE in SMURFS THE First it trims the trailing blanks so that the article is the trailing pattern Next it finds the starting position and length of the pattern Then SUBSTV extracts the pattern and TRIMV trims the pattern from the title See POSITV Finding the Beginning of a Variable Length Substring on page 1 56 and TRIMV Removing Characters From a String on page 1 61 DEFINE FILE MOVIES TITLEV A39V TRIMV T TITLE 39 1 TITLEV PSTART I4 POSITV TITLEV LENV TITLEV I4 1 I4 PLEN I4 IF PSTART NE 0 THEN LENV TITLEV I4 PSTART 1 ELSE 0 PATTERN A20V SUBSTV 39 TITLEV PSTART PLEN PATTERN NEWTIT A39V TRIMV T TITLEV 39 PATTERN LENV PATTERN I4 NEWTIT END TABLE FILE MOVIES PRINT TITLE PSTART AS Pattern Start IN 25 PLEN AS Pattern Length NEWTIT AS Trimmed Title IN 55 BY CATEGORY NOPRINT WHERE PLEN NE 0 END WebFOCUS Reporting Language Enhancements WebFOCUS Summary of New Features 1 61 The output is TRIMV Removing Characters From a String The TRIMV function removes a pattern from a string and is similar to TRIM However both the input string and the pattern of characters to remove can have AnV format Note The TRIMV function is useful for converting an An field to an AnV field with the length bytes containing the actual length of the dat
102. a default century globally or on a field level for an application that does not contain an explicit century DEFCENT is used in conjunction with YRTHRESH to interpret the current century according to the given values When assigned globally the time span created by these parameters applies to every 2 digit year used by the application unless you specify file level or field level values You can achieve the same result by including the FDEFCENT and FYRTHRESH attributes in a Master File SYS_MGR FOCSET DEFCENT cc 19 where cc Is the default century If you do not supply a value cc defaults to 19 for the twentieth century DEFCENT is fully documented in Working With Cross Century Dates in the Unique FOCUS Topics category in Supplementary Documentation on the documentation CD Changing WebFOCUS Settings From a Procedure 9 24 Information Builders Example Setting DEFCENT From a Procedure The following code MAINTAIN COMPUTE MYDATE YYMD SYS_MGR FOCSET DEFCENT 21 COMPUTE DATE1 YMD 90 01 01 COMPUTE MYDATE DATE1 TYPE After setting DEFCENT 21 MYDATE lt lt MYDATE END produces this output After setting DEFCENT 21 MYDATE 2190 01 01 Syntax How to Set EMGSRV From a Procedure EMGSRV controls the return of all messages from the WebFOCUS Server SYS_MGR FOCSET EMGSRV ON OFF where ON Returns messages from the WebFOCUS Server ON is the default value OFF Suppres
103. also cancel the connection from this panel Specifying the Location of User Profiles You can specify the location of user profiles A user profiles directory is created during installation and pointed to by a new keyword edaprfu in the server configuration file edaserve cfg This user profiles directory is located by default under the ibi directory for example in a Windows environment c ibi profiles Overwrite the default location of the user profiles directory by setting an environment variable EDAPRFU or by assigning the location to the edaprfu keyword in edaserve cfg When a user connects to the server the location pointed to by the environment variable EDAPRFU is searched If this variable is not set or the user profile is not found in the specified directories then the location pointed to by the edaprfu keyword in edaserve cfg is searched WebFOCUS Reporting Server Enhancements WebFOCUS Summary of New Features 7 5 Configuring National Language Support You can use the NLS National Language Support Configuration Wizard to select the code page for the data sources your server will access Access the NLS Configuration Wizard through the WeFOCUS Reporting Server Console A code page is the computer representation of a character set Each written symbol in a language is assigned a unique number usually expressed in hexadecimal notation A code page has a unique identification number to distinguish the operating system and
104. an asterisk the server messages and console are displayed in English 5 Click Configure and Restart A message indicates that the server is restarting At this point the server is creating the necessary transcoding sorting and monocasing tables for the selected code page Procedure How to Manually Specify the Language and Code Page Values 1 From the NLS Configuration Wizard click Advanced NLS Configuration The advanced NLS Configuration window opens showing the current values for the language LANG and code page CODE_PAGE 2 In the LANG field enter either the language name or language abbreviation See Language and Default Code Pages for Windows and UNIX on page 7 12 or Language and Default Code Pages for OS 400 on page 7 13 for values To specify the language of server error messages enter one of the following AMENGLISH DUTCH FRENCH GERMAN JAPANESE or SPANISH 3 In the CODE_PAGE field enter a code page based on the data sources that the server will access You may enter a code page that is different from the default associated with a language WebFOCUS Reporting Server Enhancements WebFOCUS Summary of New Features 7 11 4 Click Save and Restart A message indicates that the server is restarting At this point the server is creating the necessary transcoding sorting and monocasing tables for the code page selected You can configure the server for other features by editing the NLS configuration fil
105. and seasonality Triple exponential smoothing takes both the trend and seasonality into account by using three equations with three constants Note For triple exponential smoothing you must know the number of data points in each time period designated as L in the following equations To account for the seasonality a seasonal index is calculated The data is divided by the prior season s index and then used in calculating the smoothed average The first equation accounts for the current time period and is a weighted average of the current data value divided by the seasonal factor and the prior average adjusted for the trend for the previous period The weight constant is k SEASONAL t k datavalue t I t L 1 k SEASONAL t 1 b t 1 PERIOD YTD Actual EXP DOUBLEXP 2002 01 12 957 681 12 957 681 0 12 957 681 0 2002 02 25 441 971 19 199 826 0 22 439 246 3 2002 03 39 164 321 29 182 073 5 34 791 885 1 2002 04 52 733 326 40 957 699 8 48 845 816 0 2002 05 66 765 920 53 861 809 9 63 860 955 9 2002 06 80 952 492 67 407 150 9 79 188 052 9 Example Calculating a Triple Exponential Smoothing Column Calculating Trends and Predicting Values 1 14 Information Builders The second equation is the calculated trend value and is a weighted average of the difference between the current and previous average and the trend for the previous time period b t represents the average trend The weight
106. are fully documented in the WebFOCUS Using Functions manual For a graphical implementation of these display types see Functions for Displaying Fields in Chapter 2 Developer Studio Enhancements In this section Reducing Multiple Spaces in a Field to a Single Space Removing a Character From a Field Removing Leading or Trailing Occurrences of a Pattern WebFOCUS Reporting Language Enhancements WebFOCUS Summary of New Features 1 155 Reducing Multiple Spaces in a Field to a Single Space The SQUEEZ function reduces multiple contiguous blank spaces within a character string to a single space The resulting character string has the same length as the original string but is padded on the right with spaces This is useful for displaying a field that contains extra spaces such as a virtual field that combines two fields Syntax How to Reduce Multiple Spaces to a Single Space SQUEEZ length string outfield where length Integer Is the length in characters of string and outfield or a field that contains the length string Alphanumeric Is the field that contains the character string or the character string enclosed in single quotation marks outfield Alphanumeric Is the field that contains the result or the format of the output value enclosed in single quotation marks In Dialogue Manager you must specify the format In Maintain you must specify the name of the field How to Reduce Multiple Spaces to
107. available in Release 5 2 Information about all WebFOCUS Client settings that may be modified using the WebFOCUS Client Console is documented in the WebFOCUS Administration Using the WebFOCUS Client Console chapter in the WebFOCUS Security and Administration manual Accessing the WebFOCUS Client Console You can access the WebFOCUS Client Console by entering the following URL http hostname ibi_html wfconsole htm where hostname Is the host name of the machine on which the WebFOCUS Client is installed The WebFOCUS Client Console logon window appears WebFOCUS Client Enhancements WebFOCUS Summary of New Features 6 3 Specify a valid user ID and password If you are logging on to the WebFOCUS Client Console for the first time specify the admin user ID Once you have successfully logged on you can change the type of authentication and IDs to use for all subsequent logons by specifying values in the IBIWFC_Authentication ADMINISTRATORS and DEVELOPERS settings in the ibiweb cfg file Developers may only access the tracing and Quick Links options in the WebFOCUS Client Console To view the WebFOCUS Client Console using a different language click Select Language to display the available languages specified during the WebFOCUS installation If only one language was selected during the installation the Select Language option does not display After a successful logon the welcome window appears Configuring WebFOCUS Reporting S
108. by the RDBMS and improving performance The IF or WHERE test to be optimized must be a CONTAINS or OMITS test against a field described with USAGE TX and ACTUAL TX in the Master File The RDBMS column must be a character variable length data type CONTAINS translates to LIKE in the generated SQL and OMITS translates to NOT LIKE The generated SQL places wildcard characters around the literal string specified in the CONTAINS or OMITS test Example Optimizing a Selection Test Against a Variable Length Character Column Reference Usage Notes for Optimization of Selection Criteria Using Variable Length Data Types Data Adapter Enhancements WebFOCUS Summary of New Features 8 41 Example Optimizing a Selection Test Against a Variable Length Character Column Consider the following variation of the DB2 Master File named EMPINFO A CLOB column that contains a job description has been added FILENAME EMPINFO SUFFIX SQLDS SEGNAME EMPINFO SEGTYPE S0 FIELD EMP_ID ALIAS EID USAGE A9 ACTUAL A9 FIELD LAST_NAME ALIAS LN USAGE A15 ACTUAL A15 FIELD FIRST_NAME ALIAS FN USAGE A10 ACTUAL A10 FIELD HIRE_DATE ALIAS HDT USAGE YMD ACTUAL DATE FIELD DEPARTMENT ALIAS DPT USAGE A10 ACTUAL A10 MISSING ON FIELD CURRENT_SALARY ALIAS CSAL USAGE P9 2 ACTUAL P4 FIELD CURR_JOBCODE ALIAS CJC USAGE A3 ACTUAL A3 FIELD JOBDESC ALIAS JDSC USA
109. class that is to be used by all requests associated with a service add the following keyword to the service block in the server configuration file edaserve cfg wlm_enclave_trname WLM_service_class up to 8 alphanumeric characters Support for Additional Operating Systems and Releases Version 5 Release 2 adds support for the following operating systems and releases OS 400 OS 400 V05R01 in addition to V04R04 and V04R05 Until fully certified Release 5 2 should be considered candidate for release when used on OS 400 V05R02 IBM s latest OS level offering UNIX Compaq ALPHA Tru64 V5 1 SUN Solaris 8 Linux 7 2 on Intel and OS 390 platforms OpenVMS Compaq ALPHA OpenVMS V7 3 1 Support for Large Files on HP and Solaris On Solaris Version 5 6 2 or higher and HP Version 10 20 or higher you can create and read non FOCUS files with a size greater than two gigabytes but less than 128 gigabytes in either 32 or 64 bit mode WebFOCUS Reporting Server Enhancements WebFOCUS Summary of New Features 7 33 Displaying Listener Statistics in the WebFOCUS Reporting Server Console You can display listener statistics in the WebFOCUS Reporting Server Console To do so in the list of listeners select the listener s Process ID MQ XML Listener The MQ XML Listener listens on MQ for XML documents conforming to the iWay XML Document Specification You can control the incoming XML from the listener for th
110. command for FOCUS data sources overrides DATASET attributes and explicit allocations Note If a DATASET allocation is in effect a CHECK FILE command must be issued in order to override it by an explicit allocation command The CHECK FILE command deallocates the allocation created by DATASET DATASET Attribute for a Segment in a Master File 8 30 Information Builders Syntax How to Use the DATASET Attribute For a LOCATION segment SEGNAME segname SEGTYPE segtype PARENT parent LOCATION filename DATASET physical_filename ON sinkname For a cross referenced segment SEGNAME segname SEGTYPE segtype PARENT parent CRSEGNAME crsegname CRKEY crkey CRFILE crfile DATASET filename1 ON sinkname FIELD where filename Is the logical name of the LOCATION file physical_filename Is the platform dependent physical name of the data source sinkname Indicates that the data source is located on the FOCUS Database Server This attribute is valid for FOCUS data sources On z OS and OS 390 the syntax is DATASET DATA qualifier qualifier or DATASET DATA ddname ON sinkname On CMS the syntax is DATASET DATA filename filetype filemode ON sinkname On UNIX the syntax is DATASET DATA path filename On Windows the syntax is DATASET DATA path filename Data Adapter Enhancements WebFOCUS Summary of New Features 8 31 Examp
111. consolidated line will sum all children If m is 2 direct children and grandchildren will be consolidated for each line on the report output ADD 99 aggregates children to 99 levels ALL is a synonym for 99 CAPTION Indicates that the caption of the parent value will appear for the total row Note The AS CAPTION phrase is supported for tagged rows including those that do not use the GET WITH CHILDREN or ADD syntax However the hierarchy must be defined by specifying the PARENT_OF attribute in order to load and display the caption values If the hierarchy is not defined the AS CAPTION phrase is ignored text Is a text string to use as the row title for the aggregate row The CAPTION field defined in the Master File will not be used as the caption on the report output label Is an explicit row label Each generated row is labeled with the specified label text WebFOCUS Reporting Language Enhancements WebFOCUS Summary of New Features 1 83 Example Displaying Consolidated Data For Multiple Hierarchy Levels In the following request the first WITH CHILD command displays the detail data for the hierarchy starting with account 3100 The next WITH CHILD command creates a consolidated line for the parent account 3100 and each direct child SET BLANKINDENT ON SET FORMULTIPLE ON JOIN SYS_ACCOUNT IN CENTGL TO ALL SYS_ACCOUNT IN CENTSYSF TABLE FILE CENTGL SUM NAT_AMOUNT D10 0 NAT_YTDAMT D10 0 FOR GL_ACCOUNT 3100 WITH CHILDR
112. describes the fields used to format the trace information For examples of trace output generated by statement trace and additional instructions on the use of this feature including tracing scenarios see Maintain Statement Trace in the Debugging WebFOCUS Maintain Applications chapter in the Developing WebFOCUS Maintain Applications manual Syntax How to Set Statement Trace You must first enable tracing on the server SET TRACEON MNTSTMT produces basic WebFOCUS Maintain trace information such as file name case name line number and milliseconds SET TRACEON MNTPERF used in addition to SET TRACEON MNTSTMT generates tracing that includes memory and CPU performance statistics How to Set Statement Trace Application Level Tracing With TYPE ON EDAPRINT 9 16 Information Builders Application Level Tracing With TYPE ON EDAPRINT Issuing a TYPE ON EDAPRINT directs tracing output to the edaprint log file which is viewable from the WebFOCUS Reporting Server Console or SDSF display on OS 390 Use this feature in production applications for communicating tracing information to the application administrator Example Issuing TYPE ON EDAPRINT The following code MAINTAIN type on edaprint first to edaprint type hello world from user1 type on edaprint hello send to edaprint END generates this output in the edaprint log file 11 20 2002 13 53 28 Pid 00001528 MntType first to edaprint 11 20 2002
113. designs 2 52 Index WebFOCUS Summary of New Features I 5 D Dashboard 3 13 Add to Favorites option 3 15 banners 3 19 domain search in 3 18 Domain Role Tree 3 17 to 3 18 group views 3 13 public views 3 14 removing banners 3 14 toolbars 3 15 Data Adapter for Adabas 8 2 Data Adapter for Allbase 8 9 Data Adapter for DB2 8 10 connection attributes 8 11 FETCH FIRST n ROWS clause 8 12 Data Adapter for DBFILE 8 10 Data Adapter for Enterprise Java Beans 8 13 Data Adapter for Essbase 8 14 Data Adapter for Informix 8 19 Data Adapter for J D Edwards 8 19 Data Adapter for Micro Focus C ISAM 8 9 Data Adapter for Millennium 8 19 Data Adapter for MUMPS 8 19 Data Adapter for PeopleSoft 8 20 Data Adapter for Progress 8 20 Data Adapter for SAP BW 8 21 Data Adapter for SAP R 3 8 21 Data Adapter for Siebel 8 24 Data Adapter for UniVerse 8 24 data consolidation 2 63 data sources 1 80 CENTGL 1 80 CENTSYSF 1 80 data target options 10 18 target setup options 10 18 10 22 Target Setup tab 10 18 10 22 data types in Maintain 9 43 Database Management Systems DBMSs 8 1 database selection 8 33 DATASET attribute 8 28 to 8 29 8 31 DATASET syntax for FOCUS data sources 8 30 Date and Time dialog box 4 20 date fields 2 53 date format display 2 8 date formats 2 8 changing 2 8 display options 2 8 Date Formats dialog box 2 9 date time fields 2 51 date time information in Maintain 9 4
114. displays the parent and then the children In either case you can show all children for the specified parent or children to a specified level in the hierarchy up to 99 levels deep The default hierarchy depth is one level To highlight these relationships visually successive levels of the hierarchy field are indented two spaces from the previous level The hierarchy is displayed sorted by the parent field and within the parent sorted by the hierarchy field When displaying a hierarchy you can show either detail or summary data for fields other than the For field in the request You can also replace the For field value with a descriptive caption For language implementation of this feature see Displaying a Dynamic FML Hierarchy in Chapter 1 WebFOCUS Reporting Language Enhancements Developer Studio Enhancements WebFOCUS Summary of New Features 2 57 Example Displaying an FML Hierarchy With Captions The following example displays two levels of a charts of accounts hierarchy and shows descriptive captions defined in the Master File instead of the account numbers in the report 1 Create a report procedure in Developer Studio and name the file fmlhiercaps 2 When prompted choose Report Painter as your reporting tool it is the default and choose CENTGL as your data source The Report Painter opens with CENTGL fields listed in the Object Inspector panel 3 Drag the field GL_ACCOUNT_PARENT into the Report Painter wi
115. distribute the report with ReportCaster which displays the compound PDF report in Adobe Acrobat Reader or sends the compound PS report directly to a printer See the ReportCaster documentation for details about this product For language implementation of this feature see Displaying Compound Reports in PS Format in Chapter 1 WebFOCUS Reporting Language Enhancements Excel Enhancements The Excel 2000 format EXL2K has been enhanced to Display Formatted Dates and Numeric Values in Excel 2000 Excel 2000 spreadsheets generated by WebFOCUS contain the same numeric formatting as specified in the data source s Master File or as specified in a temporary field WebFOCUS numeric values and date formats such as currency and Smart Dates are translated to supported Excel formats and are displayed properly in Excel 2000 Generate Native Excel Formulas in Excel 2000 When you display or save a report request using EXL2K FORMULA the resulting spreadsheet contains an Excel formula that computes and displays the results of any type of summed information such as column totals row totals subtotals and calculated values rather than static numbers Spreadsheets saved using the EXL2K FORMULA format are interactive allowing for what if scenarios that immediately reflect any additions or modifications made to the data Customize Worksheet Tabs By default when you choose EXL2K as your display format the report opens in an Exce
116. exits and to turn off the prompting of variables in Managed Reporting When you select a Position check box it places a Y in that position in MR_PGM_FLAGS Positions 1 4 and 6 are reserved for internal use You can select multiple Position check boxes Examples To use the MRCEXT4 exit and turn off variable prompting select Position 7 and Position 9 The following appears in ibiweb cfg MR_PGM_FLAGS Y Y To use the MRCXT3 exit along with the MRCEXT4 exit select Position 5 and Position 7 The following appears in ibiweb cfg MR_PGM_FLAGS Y Y Setting Usage Notes WebFOCUS Client Enhancements WebFOCUS Summary of New Features 6 15 Example Configuring IBIWEB CFG The following example depicts configuration settings that may appear in ibiweb cfg Changing WebFOCUS Client Settings All default global settings generated by installing WebFOCUS are located in ibi client52 wfc etc cgivars wfs To change the default global settings in the cgivars wfs file click Configuration and then Client Settings The settings in the cgivars wfs file appear Make the necessary changes to the file and then click Save The following settings in cgivars wfs may be changed Those marked with an asterisk were added in Release 5 2 3 Settings Description APPROOT Location of the Application Namespace root directory on the Web server where WebFOCUS is installed The default directory is installationdrive ibi apps
117. field and or text as a placeholder for a TOC drop down list however using a field is preferred If the TOC feature is not in effect the field name is displayed in the report TEXT may represent free text or a Dialogue Manager amper amp variable It is not necessary to specify OBJECT TEXT unless you are styling both text strings and embedded fields in the same heading or footing For related information see ITEM_ Navigating Reports From a Table of Contents 1 146 Information Builders ITEM_ identifies an item by its position in a line To determine an ITEM_ for an OBJECT follow these guidelines When used with OBJECT TEXT count only the text strings from left to right When used with OBJECT FIELD count only the fields from left to right If you apply a StyleSheet declaration that specifies ITEM_ the number is counted from the beginning of each line in the heading or footing not just from the beginning of the first line sort_column Identifies the vertical sort columns BY fields to include as TOCs You can identify a column using the following notations Nn Pn Bn or fieldname For details about column notation in a StyleSheet see How to Identify an Entire Column in the Identifying a Report Component in WebFOCUS chapter in the Creating Reports With WebFOCUS Language manual Note You must maintain the hierarchy of BY fields because the TOC objects in headings the drop down lists are interdepe
118. files AFM and PFB or PFA to a location that is accessible by the WebFOCUS Reporting Server The location that contains the default fonts shipped with WebFOCUS is a good choice drive srv52 home etc Next update the font map files PDF FMP and or PSCRIPT FMP These configuration files already exist in the correct location with specifications for the fonts that are distributed with Adobe Acrobat Reader The FMP files map the name of a font to its actual font file information You will add the new font definitions to these files Once this step is completed you can begin using the new font in your StyleSheet declarations For detailed procedures and sample map files see Adding PostScript Type 1 Fonts for PS and PDF Reports in the Choosing a Display Format chapter in the Creating Reports With WebFOCUS Language manual Controlling the Paper Source for a PS Printer The SET PSPAGESETUP command instructs a PostScript printer to use the paper source that matches the value specified for the PAGESIZE parameter Syntax How to Control the Paper Source for a PS Printer SET PSPAGESETUP ON OFF where ON Includes PostScript code that automatically tells a PostScript printer how to set its paper source OFF Does not include PostScript code for the selection of a PostScript printer paper source OFF is the default value SET Parameter Summary 1 162 Information Builders SET Parameter Summary You can customize your
119. formatting options applied in the report output Tip If you wish to affect other column features click the Drill Down tab to drill down to another procedure a URL or another supported option General tab to change the column title or field format to make the column visible or invisible in the output or to activate other features For details about defining conditional report styles and other column formatting features see the Styling Reports With the Report Painter chapter in the Creating Reports With Graphical Tools manual Developer Studio Enhancements WebFOCUS Summary of New Features 2 67 Procedure How to Format a Row in the Design Grid 1 Right click a row label either a default label like R1 or an explicit row label that you have assigned and select Options from the shortcut menu The Field Properties dialog box opens at the Style tab with Row identified as the active object 2 Under Graphical at the right of the Style tab select the font characteristics border characteristics and or background colors that you wish to apply to the row a For borders click the Select Borders button The Borders dialog box opens Select width style and or color options from the drop down menus You can apply the same specifications to all border lines or vary specifications for top bottom right and or left borders Click OK Note To set borders in an HTML report you must turn Cascading Style Sheets On
120. from a list of Execution IDs you have previously used for the selected server This new feature is available when scheduling jobs in Release 5 2 3 Distribute reports to the Report Library see Report Library on page 5 9 Run a schedule once and delete it if it is not scheduled to run again Specify additional WebFOCUS output formats ALPHA GIF XML TABT COMMA EXL97 and EXL2K FORMULA Specify a maximum of 256 characters of text within the body of an e mail message For detailed information about how to access and use the Scheduling Wizard and ReportCaster HTML User Interface see the ReportCaster End User s Manual ReportCaster Enhancements WebFOCUS Summary of New Features 5 9 Report Library When you create a schedule you can specify to distribute schedule output to the Report Library an optional storage and retrieval facility The schedule output must be stored in an SQL repository for example SQL Server Oracle or DB2 The Report Library can contain any information that is distributed by ReportCaster WF Server Procedures Standard Reports My Reports URLs and Files When distributing to the Report Library you can send an e mail informing users of its availability and the link to the content in the library The Report Library includes secure access to library content the ability to save multiple versions of the same output and the ability to set an expiration date or keep a specified number o
121. has been enhanced To configure National Language Support NLS settings for the WebFOCUS Client 1 Click Configuration and then NLS Settings 2 Select the operating system on which the WebFOCUS Client is running The available code pages for the selected operating system are displayed in the scroll down list WebFOCUS Client Enhancements WebFOCUS Summary of New Features 6 21 3 From the list select a code page that configures the client for the correct display of report output in the browser Tip The language selected for the client usually corresponds to the language selected for the server from the WebFOCUS Reporting Server Console If the language chosen from the WebFOCUS Reporting Server Console does not appear in the drop down list on the WebFOCUS Client Console select User Defined and manually enter the code page as prompted You would do this for example if the server adds support for a new code page that is not yet reflected in the client software In the following sample configuration window the administrator entered code page 921 Baltic Multilanguage 4 Click Save to store your NLS settings The console will generate and update the client configuration file nlscfg err with the CODE_PAGE setting Note that if you click NLS Settings again the new setting is highlighted as the active code page WebFOCUS Client Tracing 6 22 Information Builders WebFOCUS Client Tracing The Diagnostics option in
122. in Dashboard 3 19 Filters For Standard Reports in Dashboard 3 20 Content Pages ReportCaster and Report Library 3 20 Dynamic Tracing 3 20 4 Ad Hoc Reporting Enhancements 4 1 OLAP 4 2 Drag and Drop Dimensions and Measures 4 2 Right Click in a Report 4 3 Hidden Reports 4 5 Tiles
123. in Decimal Numbers Selecting a Currency Symbol for Display Displaying a Minus Sign After Negative Data Displaying Compound Reports in PS Format Excel Integration Enhancements Selecting a Language for Excel Requests Stacking Columns With Multiple FOLD LINEs Specifying Multiple Drill Down Links Navigating Reports From a Table of Contents Producing Row Totals for ACROSS Field Values Output Formats for Application Processing Adjusting Field Displays PostScript Type 1 Fonts for PS and PDF Reports Controlling the Paper Source for a PS Printer SET Parameter Summary Functions Summary Calculating Trends and Predicting Values 1 2 Information Builders Calculating Trends and Predicting Values You can calculate trends in data and predict values beyond the range of those stored in the data source with the FORECAST and REGRESS commands FORECAST uses either averages or a linear regression line to distinguish trends in data using a single independent variable to derive the dependent variable FORECAST can be used in a report or graph request REGRESS uses up to three independent variables to derive a linear equation that best fits a set of numeric data points This Release 5 2 3 feature is useful when the dependent variable can be approximated by a linear combination of multiple independent variables The FORECAST and REGRESS commands cannot be used in the same request In this section Cal
124. incorrect values Therefore if the member has the AGGREGATE NO attribute in the Access File a SUM action in the request against the member results in the following message FOC43241 Aggregation is requested for non aggregatable member s The server allows SUM to be used on non aggregated fields in the Access File Data Adapter for Essbase 8 16 Information Builders Syntax How to Turn Aggregation ON OFF For Non Aggregated Fields SQL ESSBASE SET RESTRICTSUM ON OFF FOR synonym where ON Does not allow the use of SUM on non aggregated fields ON is the default value OFF Allows the use of SUM on non aggregated fields synonym Is an alias for the data source and is a maximum of 64 characters Preventing Aggregation of Non Consolidating Members In Release 5 2 3 member consolidation properties determine how children roll up into the parents in the Essbase outline The members with the as a consolidation property in the Essbase outline are not rolled up in the database The SET AGGREGATE NOOP No Operation setting only affects those Essbase members in the Accounts dimension with the consolidation property If the AGGREGATE NOOP setting is OFF SUM is not permitted on Essbase members with the consolidation property and those members appear in the Access File as MEMBER ADDITIONS AGGREGATE NO Syntax How to Prevent Aggregation of Non Consolidating Members You must set AGGREGATE NOOP to OFF
125. into separate items You can then individually position and style these items See Styling or Positioning an Individual Item in a Text String in the Styling Reports With the Report Painter chapter in the Creating Reports With Graphical Tools manual In this section Summary of Report Painter New Features Creating Multiple Drill Downs With the Report Painter How to Create a Multiple Drill Down Procedure Developer Studio Enhancements WebFOCUS Summary of New Features 2 15 Apply an external Cascading Style Sheet CSS to an HTML report The Style tab features a Style File Selection button that enables you to apply an external Cascading Style Sheet to an HTML report You can also assign a Cascading Style Sheet class to a report object in the StyleSheet See Applying an External Style Sheet in the Styling Reports With the Report Painter chapter in the Creating Reports With Graphical Tools manual Use new shading patterns and scaling options to improve data visualization Data visualization is supported for PDF and PS formats Although the color option on the Data Visualization dialog box is the default for HTML PDF and PS formats you can select different shading patterns for PDF and PS formats The shading patterns make graphs in black and white reports more readable There are two options for specifying relative bar graph scaling for multiple report columns under a common Across sort field to which data visualization is ap
126. is created under APPROOT and the following message appears New Created APP directories newapp 11 In the ETL Configuration page s navigation pane click Refresh Page then check to see that the application directories and requests are listed Operating System and ETL Release Default Location UNIX Release 4 3 home ibi srv43 cpm copymgr UNIX Release 5 1 home ibi srv51 etl etlmgr Windows Release 4 3 c ibi srv43 cpm copymgr Windows Release 5 1 c ibi srv51 etl etlmgr Migrating ETL Requests 10 10 Information Builders Procedure How to Migrate ETL Requests on OS 390 1 Locate the Master Files and Access files used by your ETL Requests These comprise all the data sets concatenated under the ddnames MASTER and ACCESS 2 Allocate Master and Access PDSes using startup JCL at qualif SRV52 ETL DATA EDASTART For example MASTER DD DISP SHR DSN qualif MASTER DATA ACCESS DD DISP SHR DSN qualif ACCESS DATA All the files from the concatenated datasets under ddnames MASTER and ACCESS will appear in the mapped application directory MVSAPP 3 If the Master and Access files for the CMSCHED tables are in a PDS allocated in step 2 this step can be skipped Optionally copy the Master Files and Access Files for the CMSCHED tables from the PDS for example qualif COPYMGR MASTER DATA to an HFS directory for example ibi apps baseapp In an
127. marks that contains the substring whose position you want to find If it is a field it can have An or AnV format If it is a field of type AnV its length is taken from the length bytes stored in the field If in_limit is smaller than the actual length the source string is truncated to this upper limit in_limit Numeric Is a positive constant or a field whose integer portion represents the size and therefore the upper limit for the length of the input string substring Alphanumeric Is a field name or an alphanumeric constant enclosed in single quotation marks that contains the substring whose position you want to locate If it is a field it can have An or AnV format If it is a field of type AnV its length is taken from the length bytes stored in the field If sub_limit is smaller than the actual length the source string is truncated to this upper limit sub_limit Numeric Is a positive constant of a field whose integer portion represents the size and therefore the upper limit for the length of the substring outfield Integer Is the name of the field to which the position is returned or the format of the output value enclosed in single quotation marks Using Variable Length Character Expressions 1 58 Information Builders Example Finding the Starting Position of a Variable Length Pattern The POSITV function finds the starting position of a trailing definite or indefinite article in a movie title such as TH
128. may not be in effect If the Truncate command fails the result is as if you had chosen to delete the records For complete details on the options in the Target Setup tab see Specifying Target Setup Options in the Building an ETL Request chapter in the iWay ETL Manager User s Guide Procedure How to Load Options for a FOCUS or Fusion File 1 Add a Load component to the workspace and connect it to the Target component 2 Double click the Load component to open it The Load window opens with the Target Setup tab open 3 In the Prior to Load section select whether to remove data prior to loading the data target The options are Leave Table does not delete the records already in a data target Drop Table drops and recreates the data target This option is available only for FOCUS and Fusion data targets For complete details on the options in the Target Setup tab see Specifying Target Setup Options in the Building an ETL Request chapter in the iWay ETL Manager User s Guide ETL Manager Enhancements WebFOCUS Summary of New Features 10 19 Transport Simplification An optional transport object simplifies specification of FTP parameters Procedure How to Set Transfer Details for FTP 1 Add a Transport component to the workspace 2 Connect the Transport component to the Column component or to the Sort component if you are using one 3 Double click the Transport component to open it The Tran
129. must be a positive whole number The weight k is calculated by the following formula k 2 1 npoint1 npoint2 For DOUBLEXP and SEASONAL this positive whole number is used to calculate the weights for each term in the trend The weight g is calculated by the following formula g 2 1 npoint2 npoint3 For SEASONAL this positive whole number is used to calculate the weights for each term in the seasonal adjustment The weight p is calculated by the following formula p 2 1 npoint3 Calculating Trends and Predicting Values 1 6 Information Builders Using a Simple Moving Average A simple moving average is a series of arithmetic means calculated with a specified number of values from a field Each new mean in the series is calculated by dropping the first value used in the prior calculation and adding the next data value to the calculation Simple moving averages are sometimes used to analyze trends in stock prices over time In this scenario the average is calculated using a specified number of periods of stock prices A disadvantage to this indicator is that because it drops the oldest values from the calculation as it moves on it loses its memory over time Also mean values are distorted by extreme highs and lows since this method gives equal weight to each point Predicted values beyond the range of the data values are calculated using a moving average that treats the calculated trend values as new data points The
130. nlscfg err file Configuring WebFOCUS Startup Parameters The initial configuration file loaded by the WebFOCUS Client is ibiweb cfg The WebFOCUS installation program only inserts edaconf ADMINISTRATORS IBIWFC_Authentication and DEVELOPERS into ibiweb cfg All additional settings must be added using the WebFOCUS Client Console To add and change settings in the ibiweb cfg file click Configuration and then Startup Parameters WebFOCUS Client Enhancements WebFOCUS Summary of New Features 6 11 The following settings may be added modified or deleted in the ibiweb cfg file Setting Usage Notes IBIWFC_Authentication NONE EDA EDA EDANODE WEB NONE EDA EDA EDANODE WEB Optionally specifies the authentication method used to verify the administrator or developer user IDs NONE is the default value which means that no authentication is desired To indicate authentication against a particular EDANODE set the parameter value as EDA EDANODE Only one EDANODE may be listed The WEB setting indicates Web server authentication If using the WFServlet J2EE role based security is required for the WEB setting Note In Release 5 2 1 5 2 2 if you change this value you must also change the value for the WFInstallOption_Authentication setting in ibi WebFOCUS52 ibi_html java assist cgipath js Configuring WebFOCUS Client Settings 6 12 Information Builders DEVELOPERS dev1 dev2 dev1 dev2 where
131. previously calculated value of the average and the next data point There are three methods for using an exponential moving average Single exponential smoothing calculates an average that enables you to choose weights to apply to newer and older values Double exponential smoothing accounts for the tendency of data to either increase or decrease over time without repeating Triple exponential smoothing accounts for the tendency of data to repeat itself in intervals over time Linear regression analysis derives the coefficients of a straight line that best fits the data points and uses this linear equation to estimate values When predicting values in addition to calculating trends the Forecast command continues the same calculations beyond the data points by using the generated trend values as new data points For the linear regression technique the calculated regression equation is used to derive trend and predicted values Forecast performs the calculations based on the data provided but decisions about their use and reliability are the user s responsibility Therefore Forecast predictions are not always reliable and many factors determine how accurate a prediction will be Procedure How to Calculate a Simple Moving Average Column 1 With the By or Across field you want to use for your calculations click Forecast The Forecast dialog box opens 2 If you want to change the name of the output field fro
132. rcaster context path used in URLs for accessing ReportCaster For example instead of the default URL http webserver rcaster console RCHConsole jsp you can use http webserver contextpath console RCHConsole jsp Information on this customization is included throughout the WebFOCUS and ReportCaster Installation and Configuration manual for your platform For WebFOCUS and ReportCaster files you can either specify this setting during the WebFOCUS and ReportCaster installation or you can manually change it afterwards For the Web and Application servers you must specify your custom context path instead of rcaster when deploying the rcaster52 war file Changing the rcaster context path is not certified on OS 390 and z OS and is not supported with Two Way Email ReportCaster Enhancements WebFOCUS Summary of New Features 5 3 Configuration Tools In Release 5 2 3 using configuration options available on Windows from the ReportCaster52 Configuration menu you can Enable and disable tracing outside of the ReportCaster Server Configuration tool From the Programs menu select ReportCaster52 Configuration and then Traces On to display the possible tracing options For detailed information about the ReportCaster tracing options see the ReportCaster Tracing chapter in the ReportCaster Development and Administration manual This option is also available on UNIX and z OS using a shell script Edit the ReportCaster Server Con
133. relational tables and OLAP enabled Master Files This tool is accessed through the Dimension component but it does not show the graphical representation of a Master File Instead it lists the fields The process of creating a hierarchy is the same drag and drop fields from the left pane to the right pane Procedure How to Launch the Dimensions Tool From the Procedure Window 1 Click and hold a component connector yellow diamond and select Dimensions 2 In the Open dialog box select a Master File for which you want to create dimensions and click Open The Dimensions Tool opens with the Master File you selected 3 Create hierarchies the same way you do with the Dimension Builder by dragging and dropping a selected field to the appropriate level in the right pane of the Dimensions Tool window How to Launch the Dimensions Tool From the Procedure Window Launch the Dimensions Tool From the Report Painter Developer Studio Enhancements WebFOCUS Summary of New Features 2 7 Procedure How to Launch the Dimensions Tool From the Report Painter 1 From the Report Painter s Report menu select OLAP Dimensions The Dimensions Tool opens with the Master File you selected when you launched the Report Painter 2 Create hierarchies the same way you do with the Dimension Builder by dragging and dropping a selected field to the appropriate level in the right pane of the Dimensions Tool window Synonym Enhancements Using t
134. report 11 7 long procedure names 11 6 Long running Requests report 11 7 Resource Analyzer reports 11 9 Large Volume Request reports 11 8 Long running Requests report 11 7 resource files 6 30 interpreting 6 33 locating names in 6 32 Resource Governor 11 1 accessing through Web console 11 6 configuring internal tables 11 2 long procedure names 11 6 Resource Layout Painter 2 35 2 43 adding frames 2 47 adding images 2 43 RESTRICTSUM command 8 14 retaining SUBSTRING behavior 8 42 retrieving CGI parameters from Maintain procedures 9 16 retrieving records 8 25 return codes in Maintain 9 32 reusing form templates in Maintain 9 12 reversing the order of parameters 2 41 right click menu options in Update applications 2 53 right click options 4 3 row totals 1 149 rows 1 89 formatting 1 89 2 64 2 67 identifying 1 89 2 64 2 67 identifying in WebFOCUS StyleSheets 1 89 2 64 RPCs Remote Procedure Calls 7 28 Run Now option 5 10 Run Procedure in Maintain 9 37 S SAP BW Data Adapter 8 21 SAP processing 8 23 SAP R 3 Data Adapter 8 21 SAP R 3 Interface 8 22 Native Interface enhancement 8 22 SAP R 3 Native Interface 8 21 to 8 23 BAPI support for 8 22 SAS Shared Application Server in Maintain 9 42 SAVE formats 1 152 COM 1 152 COMT 1 153 TAB 1 153 TABT 1 153 Index I 18 Information Builders saving graphs as GIF files 1 95 using SET GRAPHSERVURL 1 93 saving report output 1 130
135. the Change Management chapters in the WebFOCUS Managed Reporting Administrator s Manual and the WebFOCUS Managed Reporting Developer s Manual Security Managed Reporting security features include Managed Reporting Servlet Exit Integrating Managed Reporting Security With Basic Web Server Authentication LDAP Authentication Managed Reporting Enhancements WebFOCUS Summary of New Features 3 5 Servlet Exit The Managed Reporting Servlet Exit may be used for Authentication Authenticate Managed Reporting credentials outside of Managed Reporting Dashboard User IDs and privileges are still managed using the Managed Reporting User Administration tool This is often referred to as the MRCEXT4 exit or Authentication and Authorization Authenticate Managed Reporting credentials outside of Managed Reporting Dashboard Assign the following authorization User type for example Managed Reporting Administrator or Developer Privileges for example Shared and Schedule Domains specify the domains to which the user has access This is often referred to as the MRCEXT5 exit In Release 5 2 3 the Managed Reporting Servlet Exit may be used with ReportCaster It uses a trusted connection between Managed Reporting and ReportCaster For detailed information about how to use the Managed Reporting Servlet Exit see Managed Reporting Servlet Exit in the WebFOCUS Custom Security Exits cha
136. the FML syntax CHILD1 OVER CHILD2 OVER WITH CHILDREN Displays the hierarchy starting from the specified parentvalue Includes the parent in the display This corresponds to the FML syntax parentvalue OVER CHILD1 OVER CHILD2 OVER n ALL Is a positive integer from 1 to 99 specifying the number of levels of the hierarchy to display If a number greater than 99 is specified a warning message is displayed and n is set to 99 1 is the default value Therefore if n is omitted direct children are displayed GET or WITH CHILDREN 2 displays direct children and grandchildren GET or WITH CHILDREN 99 displays children to 99 levels ALL is a synonym for 99 Each child instance is printed over the next child instance Successive levels of the hierarchy field are indented two spaces from the previous level WebFOCUS Reporting Language Enhancements WebFOCUS Summary of New Features 1 75 CAPTION Indicates that caption values should be taken from the field defined as the CAPTION in the Master File Note The AS CAPTION phrase is supported for tagged rows including those that do not use the GET WITH CHILDREN or ADD syntax However the hierarchy must be defined by specifying the PARENT_OF attribute in order to load and display the caption values If the hierarchy is not defined the AS CAPTION phrase is ignored text Is a text string to use as the row title for the hierarchy field values The CAPTION field defined in the Master F
137. the WebFOCUS Client Console enables you to view and delete WebFOCUS Client trace files Trace files enable you to track requests processed by the WebFOCUS Client CGI ISAPI or Servlet In order to view WebFOCUS Client trace files you must set the trace parameter ON in the ibiweb cfg file You must also specify the location where you want the trace files to be sent using the trace_location parameter in ibiweb cfg To view WebFOCUS Client trace files click Diagnostics and then Client Traces The current WebFOCUS Client trace files appear The Trace File column lists the WebFOCUS generated number identifying each trace A WebFOCUS Servlet trace file is denoted by srvnnnn trc while a WebFOCUS CGI or ISAPI trace file is denoted by cg0000nnnn trc The Size column lists the size in bytes of each trace file and the Query String column lists the actual request that was sent to the WebFOCUS Client You can view or delete a trace file by selecting the file and then clicking the appropriate action button View Delete or Delete All When you click View the trace file appears in a separate browser window increasing your search speed without interrupting the console session Quick Links The following Quick Links are available in the WebFOCUS Client Console Information Builders Provides a link to Information Builders home page WebFOCUS Provides a link to the WebFOCUS home page which includes utilities to run a procedure or ad h
138. the information in this configuration block The FOCUS Database Server startup JCL must allocate the same data set to ddname FOCSU This is the SU name that must be specified in the USE command needed to access a data source on the FOCUS Database Server Note During installation of the Server for OS 390 and z OS the odin cfg file is created with two blocks named FOCSU and FOCSU01 These blocks provide access to the FOCUS Database Server running under the Server for OS 390 and z OS You cannot use either of these two names for this new block qualif focsu data Is the fully qualified name of the z OS and OS 390 FOCUS Database Server communication data set 2 For each FOCUS data source to be accessed on the FOCUS Database Server issue a USE command in any supported profile or in a procedure on the Server for OS 390 and z OS USE focusdb1 ON sbsname USE focusdb2 ON sbsname Communicating With a FOCUS Database Server 7 20 Information Builders Example Retrieving Data From a FOCUS Database Server on z OS and OS 390 The odin cfg file on the Server for OS 390 and z OS contains the following blocks The first two are created automatically The third block has been added for communicating to a FOCUS Database Server on z OS and OS 390 FOCUS Database Server NODE FOCSU BEGIN PROTOCOL TCP CLASS SUSERVER SERVICE 3562 END FOCUS Database Client NODE FOCSU01 BEGIN PROTOCOL TCP CLASS SUCLIENT HOST localhost SERVI
139. the maximum number of recently used reports Selecting how menus are displayed Selecting how folders in a domain are displayed User options are fully documented in Setting User Options in the Using Dashboard chapter in the WebFOCUS Managed Reporting End User s Manual Custom Reports in Dashboard In Release 5 2 3 custom reports enable you to create your own reports using the Report Assistant Graph Assistant or text editor Depending on which tool you use to create your report you can edit your report using the same tool You can change the name of your custom report from the Properties window Procedure How to Create a Custom Report in Dashboard 1 In the Domain Tree expand the My Reports folder 2 Click the Custom Reports folder and select one of the following Report Assistant to create a report using the Report Assistant Graph Assistant to create a graph using the Graph Assistant Editor to create a report or graph using the text editor New Folder to create a new folder under Custom Reports If you have selected the Report Assistant or Graph Assistant you will be prompted to select a data source from which you want to report Click OK to continue The appropriate tool opens 3 Design and then save your Custom Report Filters For Standard Reports in Dashboard 3 20 Information Builders Filters For Standard Reports in Dashboard In Release 5 2 3 users can select pred
140. the screen The SET CONNECTION_ATTRIBUTES command is inserted into the edasprof prf file For example ENGINE ADBSINX SET CONNECTION_ATTRIBUTES 1 ADAEMPL 11 Example Configuring the Data Adapter From the WebFOCUS Reporting Server Console Using OS 390 and z OS Parameters The following Adabas parameters are applicable to OS 390 and z OS platforms only and must be entered into the input fields of the Add Adapter screen 1 Specify the Adabas router SVC number For example 240 2 Specify the type of the device on which the Adabas Associator is located For example 3390 3 Specify the name of the Adabas source library that contains member ADALNK For example ADABAS V713 SRCE 4 Specify the name of the Adabas Associator Data Set For example ADABAS V713 EXAMPLE DB001 ASSOR1 5 Click Configure after the parameters are entered Configuration results appears on the screen The SET CONNECTION_ATTRIBUTES command is inserted into the edasprof prf file For example ENGINE ADBSINX SET CONNECTION_ATTRIBUTES 3 ADAEMPL 1 ADASVC 240 ADADEVICE 3390 ADAASSO ADABAS V713 EXAMPLE DB001 ASSOR1 Data Adapter for Adabas 8 4 Information Builders Adabas Transparent Superdescriptors A superdescriptor is a key value associated with all or part of two to twenty Adabas fields The Data Adapter for Adabas has been enhanced to transparently use the most efficient superdescriptor available based on the nature of the request The SET S
141. there are multiple FOR rows present in an FML request for the same record and FORMULTIPLE is OFF the record will only be included in one of the FOR rows OFF is the default value With FORMULTIPLE set to OFF multiple tags referenced in any of these ways OR TO are evaluated first for an exact reference or for the end points of a range next for a mask and finally within a range For example if a value is specified as an exact reference and then as part of a range the exact reference is displayed Note that the result will be unpredictable if a value fits into more than one row whose tags have the same priority for example an exact reference and the end point of a range Indenting Row Titles in an FML Hierarchy To clarify relationships within an FML hierarchy the captions titles of values are indented at each level You can use the SET BLANKINDENT command in an HTML PDF or PostScript report to specify the indentation between each level in the hierarchy You can use the default indentation for each hierarchy level or choose your own indentation value To print indented captions in an HTML report you must set the BLANKINDENT parameter to ON or to a number In Release 5 2 3 you can also change the number of blank spaces before the parent line of a hierarchy or before any FML tag or RECAP row For more information see Indent an FML Label Tag or Caption on page 1 91 Financial Reporting Language Enhancements 1 86 Information
142. to estimate values Note This calculation is different from multivariate regression which is described in Calculating Trends and Predicting Values Using REGRESS on page 1 18 When predicting values in addition to calculating trends the FORECAST command continues the same calculations beyond the data points by using the generated trend values as new data points For the linear regression technique the calculated regression equation is used to derive trend and predicted values FORECAST performs the calculations based on the data provided but the user must make decisions about their use and reliability Therefore FORECAST predictions are not always reliable and many factors determine how accurate a prediction will be You can conditionally format forecasted values For the graphical implementation of these features see Calculating Trends and Predicting Values With FORECAST in Developer Studio in Chapter 2 Developer Studio Enhancements Calculating Trends and Predicting Values 1 4 Information Builders FORECAST Processing You invoke FORECAST processing by including FORECAST in a RECAP command In this command you specify the parameters needed for generating estimated values including the field to use in the calculations the type of calculation to use and the number of predictions to generate The RECAP field that contains the result of FORECAST can be a new field non recursive or the same field used in the FORECAST calculatio
143. token may produce inconsistent results for a DEFINE or COMPUTE command Syntax How to Remove Leading and Trailing Occurrences TRIM trim_where string string_length pattern pattern_length outfield where trim_where Alphanumeric Is one of the following which indicates where to remove the pattern L removes leading occurrences T removes trailing occurrences B removes both leading and trailing occurrences string Alphanumeric Is the field containing the string or the source character string enclosed in single quotation marks string_length Integer Is the length of the string in characters pattern Alphanumeric Is the pattern to remove enclosed in single quotation marks pattern_length Integer Is the number of characters in the pattern How to Remove Leading and Trailing Occurrences Example Removing Leading Occurrences WebFOCUS Reporting Language Enhancements WebFOCUS Summary of New Features 1 159 outfield Alphanumeric Is the field to which the result is returned or the format of the output value enclosed in single quotation marks In Dialogue Manager the format must be specified Example Removing Leading Occurrences The TRIM function removes leading occurrences of the characters BR from the DIRECTOR field and stores the result in a field with the format A17 TABLE FILE MOVIES PRINT DIRECTOR AND COMPUTE TRIMDIR A17 TRIM L DIRECTOR 17 BR 2 A17 WHER
144. type is Execute Procedure the Procedure Name drop down list appears select the name of the detail procedure 9 Click Add if you need to pass a parameter from the main report The Drill Down Parameter dialog box opens For this sample procedure click Cancel to return to the Properties dialog box 10 After creating the first drill down definition click New on the Properties dialog box When you click New the default name for the next drill down DrillDown2 appears in the Current Drill Down input box then DrillDown3 and so on If you change the default name of the first drill down definition DrillDown 1 that value appears again when you create the second drill down definition Creating and Styling Reports With the Report Painter 2 24 Information Builders 11 Type an additional drill down name in the Current Drill Down input box When you create multiple drill down items the Multiple Drill Downs check box is automatically checked and disabled to avoid the inadvertent loss of drill down items you previously created If you delete drill down items until one remains the Multiple Drill Downs check box is enabled again 12 Select a drill down type from the Drill Down Type drop down list 13 Enter any values or parameters required by the selected drill down type 14 To continue adding drill down items click New and repeat steps 6 9 15 When you are finished click OK to return to the Report Painter window 16 Save
145. 00 7 13 code page values for UNIX 7 12 code page values for Windows 7 12 code pages 7 5 to 7 6 selecting 7 6 specifying manually 7 10 supported 7 7 color schemes for Update Assist applications 2 52 column titles 1 98 column totals 1 149 to 1 150 EXL2K format 1 133 columns 1 89 formatting 1 89 1 138 2 64 to 2 65 2 67 identifying 1 89 2 64 to 2 65 COM data source 1 151 2 12 COM format 1 152 combining mixed format reports 1 125 to 1 126 combining multiple reports 1 125 2 11 combining PDF reports 1 125 combining report formats 1 126 Comma Suppress Edit Format Option 2 9 comma delimited data sources 2 12 commands 4 10 COMPUTE 4 10 DEFINE 4 10 COMMIT parameter in Maintain procedure 9 20 compiling a Java program 8 27 compiling expressions 1 105 compound reports 1 125 2 11 combining report formats 1 126 displaying 1 125 PDF 1 125 COMPOUND SET parameter 1 125 compressed Millennium VSAM files 8 19 COMPUTE command 4 10 Index I 4 Information Builders COMT data source 1 151 2 12 COMT format 1 153 concurrent data source access in Maintain 9 42 configuring deferred server mappings 6 7 configuring internal tables 11 2 configuring NLS National Language Support 7 5 configuring special services 6 9 configuring the ReportCaster Distribution Server for NLS 5 11 configuring WebFOCUS Client for NLS 6 20 configuring WebFOCUS client settings 6 10 configuring WebFOCUS Repo
146. 202 0 9 57829 730317 711 155 3 10 57012 724412 703 541 7 11 51110 620264 691 664 3 12 58981 762328 702 334 7 13 0 0 694 975 6 14 0 0 719 879 4 15 0 0 705 729 9 Food 1 54394 672727 672 727 0 2 54894 699073 685 900 0 3 52713 642802 671 534 0 4 58026 718514 686 796 3 5 53289 660740 674 018 7 6 58742 734705 704 653 0 7 60127 760586 718 677 0 8 55622 695235 730 175 3 9 55787 683140 712 987 0 10 57340 713768 697 381 0 11 57459 710138 702 348 7 12 57290 705315 709 740 3 13 0 0 708 397 8 14 0 0 707 817 7 15 0 0 708 651 9 Calculating Trends and Predicting Values 1 8 Information Builders In the report the number of values to use in the average is 3 and there are no UNITS or DOLLARS values for the generated PERIOD values Each average MOVAVE value is computed using DOLLARS values where they exist The calculation of the moving average begins in the following way The first MOVAVE value 801 123 0 is equal to the first DOLLARS value The second MOVAVE value 741 731 5 is the mean of DOLLARS values one and two 801 123 682 340 2 The third MOVAVE value 749 513 7 is the mean of DOLLARS values one through three 801 123 682 340 765 078 3 The fourth MOVAVE value 712 897 3 is the mean of DOLLARS values two through four 682 340 765 078 691 274 3 For predicted values beyond the supplied values the calculated MOVAVE values a
147. 4785 Espresso 68127 Latte 222866 Southeast Capuccino 73264 Espresso 68030 Latte 209654 West Capuccino 71168 Espresso 71675 Latte 213920 Page 2 of 3 Category Region Product Unit Sales Food Midwest Biscotti 86105 Croissant 139182 Scone 116127 Northeast Biscotti 145242 Croissant 137394 Scone 70732 Southeast Biscotti 119594 Croissant 156456 Scone 73779 West Biscotti 70436 Croissant 197022 Scone 72776 WebFOCUS Reporting Language Enhancements WebFOCUS Summary of New Features 1 31 Manipulating Summary Values You can use the SUBTOTAL SUB TOTAL RECOMPUTE and SUMMARIZE commands at the ON TABLE level to specify the type of summary operation to use to produce the grand total line on the report Prefix operations on summary lines are performed on the retrieved selected and summed values that will become the detail lines in the report They are not performed on each incoming record as field based prefix operations are Each type of summary has its own purpose and handles the prefix operators appropriately for the type of summary information to be displayed For example using AVE at a sort field break produces the average within the sort group Page 3 of 3 Category Region Product Unit Sales Gifts Midwest Coffee Grinder 50393 Coffee Pot 47156 Mug 86718 Thermos 46587 Northeast Coffee Grinder 40977 Coffee Pot 46185 Mug 91497 Thermos 48870 Southeast Coffee Grinder 47083 Coff
148. 5 7 Distribution Enhancements When Creating a Schedule When creating a schedule from the ReportCaster Development and Administration Interface you can Select from a list of Execution IDs you have previously used for the selected server This new feature is available when scheduling jobs in Release 5 2 3 Schedule jobs to run within 1 to 59 minute intervals The minute interval is useful when scheduling an alert Support multiple WebFOCUS Reporting Servers to create and run schedules Distribute output to the Report Library see Report Library on page 5 9 Create distribution information dynamically when a scheduled job runs This is accomplished by running a WebFOCUS procedure Run a schedule once and delete it if it is not scheduled to run again Send a single e mail including multiple burst sections as attachments Zip scheduled output e mail only Specify a maximum of 256 characters of text within the body of an e mail message For detailed information about the above enhancements see the Creating and Maintaining a Schedule chapter in the ReportCaster Development and Administration manual Distribute a report that is created using the WebFOCUS GRAPH FILE command For more information about how to accomplish this see Using the GRAPH FILE Command in the Tips and Techniques for Coding a ReportCaster Report appendix in the ReportCaster Development and Administration manual
149. AGE from Maintain procedure 9 25 setting NODATA from Maintain procedure 9 26 setting PASS from Maintain procedure 9 26 setting statement trace in Maintain 9 15 setting TRACEOFF from Maintain procedure 9 27 setting TRACEON from Maintain procedure 9 27 setting TRACEUSER from Maintain procedure 9 28 setting up Shared Application Server in Maintain 9 43 setting USER from Maintain procedure 9 26 9 28 setting WARNING from Maintain procedure 9 28 setting YRTHRESH from Maintain procedure 9 29 Shared Application Server SAS in Maintain 9 42 shared Custom Reports 3 11 Shared Library Path 8 35 shared members for Essbase 8 17 Siebel Data Adapter 8 24 simple moving average 1 3 to 1 4 1 6 to 1 7 2 26 to 2 27 2 29 2 31 to 2 32 2 34 simultaneous use in Maintain 9 42 Smart Deploy in Maintain 9 4 SMF records 7 31 SOAP XML listener 7 33 Index I 20 Information Builders sort fields 1 142 defining ranges 1 27 grouping 1 147 sort footings 1 98 limitations 1 98 sort headings 1 98 limitations 1 98 sort order 1 27 grouping numeric data 4 7 in numeric data 1 27 sort values 1 27 sorting tables 2 54 source control 2 48 source file management 2 48 Source object 10 15 specifying code pages manually 7 10 specifying holidays 1 104 specifying indentation between levels 1 85 2 56 specifying language values manually 7 10 specifying search paths in Maintain 9 38 SQL commands in Maintain
150. ARS D10 2 BUDDOLLARS BY YEAR BY ST BY REGION BY CATEGORY WHERE REGION EQ West OR Midwest WHERE ST EQ CA OR IL WHERE YEAR EQ 1996 OR 1997 ON YEAR SUB TOTAL CNT UNITS AS CNT UNITS ON ST SUB TOTAL AVE DOLLARS AS AVE ON REGION SUB TOTAL MIN AS MIN END In the following report output some of the values have been manually italicized or bolded for clarity The lines preceded by asterisks and the very last grand total line are generated by the SUB TOTAL commands Subtotal values in the normal typeface are the count of unit sales generated by the command ON YEAR SUB TOTAL CNT UNITS This command is the topmost summary command and therefore does not propagate to any other summary lines Subtotal values in bold italic are average dollar sales generated by the command ON ST SUB TOTAL AVE DOLLARS This command is the second summary command and therefore propagates to the DOLLARS column of summary lines for the YEAR sort field Manipulating Summary Values 1 42 Information Builders Subtotal values in bold are minimums within their sort groups generated by the command ON REGION SUB TOTAL MIN This command is the last summary command and therefore propagates to all other summary lines but only calculates minimum values for those columns not already populated with a count or an average YEAR State Region Category Unit Sales Dollar Sales Budget Dollars
151. AS INVENTORY LABEL INV OVER RECAP CURASST I5C CA AR INV ON TABLE SET STYLE TYPE REPORT GRID OFF TYPE REPORT COLUMN N2 LABEL CA STYLE BOLD ENDSTYLE END The output is For additional examples of row and cell based formatting see Formatting an FML Report in the Creating Financial Reports chapter in the Creating Reports With WebFOCUS Language manual WebFOCUS Reporting Language Enhancements WebFOCUS Summary of New Features 1 91 Syntax How to Indent an FML Label Tag or Caption FOR forfield IN k tag GET CHILDREN WITH CHILDREN n INDENT m AS text CAPTION OVER or RECAP fieldname format expression INDENT m AS text where forfield Is a field in the data source whose values will be included in the report k Is the starting column for the FOR value in an FML report tag Is a value of forfield to be displayed on a row of the FML report n Is the number of levels of an FML hierarchy to display on the FML report m Is a positive integer zero is not supported specifying the number of spaces to indent the tag value label or caption of an FML row or hierarchy The indentation starts from column one if there is no IN phrase specified in the FOR command If there is an IN phrase on the FOR command indentation starts from the column specified in the IN phrase The maximum indentation is the same as the maximum length of an AS name If you indent an FML hierar
152. ATA From a Procedure NODATA determines the character string that indicates missing data on a report SYS_MGR FOCSET NODATA string where string Is the character string that indicates missing data A period is the default value Syntax How to Set PASS From a Procedure PASS establishes a user s identity for WebFOCUS DBA A user must enter the password before accessing any data source that has WebFOCUS DBA security applied to it When setting a password for DBA access keep in mind that the last value set from the application is in effect for all transactions for that end user s session SYS_MGR FOCSET PASS USER name where name Is the user s name or password The use of this parameter with encryption and decryption is fully documented in ENCRYPT DECRYPT in the Command Reference chapter in the Maintain Language Reference manual Implementing password security is fully documented in Implementing Data Source Security in the Providing Data Source Security DBA chapter in the WebFOCUS Security and Administration manual Example Setting PASS From a Procedure The following code sets the password to DBAUSER2 SYS_MGR FOCSET PASS DBAUSER2 WebFOCUS Maintain Enhancements WebFOCUS Summary of New Features 9 27 Syntax How to Set TRACEOFF From a Procedure TRACEOFF enables you to turn off all or specific trace options Values are available to suppress different kinds of
153. Builders Configuring Internal Tables From the WebFOCUS Reporting Server Console Server administrators can configure the Resource Analyzer and Resource Governor internal tables from the WebFOCUS Reporting Server Console The configuration process prompts you for the information required to create these tables You can turn Global Request Monitoring and Global Stored Procedure FOCEXEC monitoring on or off when the internal tables are created Procedure How to Create Resource Analyzer Resource Governor Internal Tables 1 Do one of the following From the WebFOCUS Reporting Server Console select Workspace followed by Resource Analyzer Governor or Go to the Resource Analyzer Resource Governor Administrator and connect to the appropriate server 2 Enter the information that is required to create the Resource Analyzer and Resource Governor internal tables in the available fields The internal tables are created based on your entries For more information on any of these fields click the icon A message appears when this process is complete Next Steps If you are storing your internal tables in a relational database management system go to Granting Access to Resource Analyzer Resource Governor Data Sources on page 11 3 If you selected Resource Governor during installation go to Running the Resource Governor Configuration Verification Program CVP on page 11 4 before you use the Resource Governor Adminis
154. CE 3562 END FOCUS Database Client against z OS and OS 390 Sink Machine NODE FOCSBS BEGIN PROTOCOL SBS CLASS SUCLIENT SERVICE USER1 FOCSU DATA END WebFOCUS Reporting Server Enhancements WebFOCUS Summary of New Features 7 21 The following REQUEST has a USE command that directs retrieval to the FOCUS Database Server on z OS and OS 390 USE GGSALES ON FOCSBS END SET PAGE NOPAGE TABLE FILE GGSALES SUM UNITS DOLLARS BY REGION BY CATEGORY END The output is Region Category Unit Sales Dollar Sales Midwest Coffee 332777 4178513 Food 341414 4338271 Gifts 230854 2883881 Northeast Coffee 335778 4164017 Food 353368 4380004 Gifts 227529 2848289 Southeast Coffee 350948 4415408 Food 349829 4308731 Gifts 234455 2986240 West Coffee 356763 4473527 Food 340234 4202338 Gifts 235042 2977092 Windows Authentication Methods Security on Windows NT 2000 has been enhanced to support different Microsoft authentication methods This is done with a keyword in the server configuration file edaserve cfg These methods correspond to a user s privileges within Microsoft security A method indicates the mode used to authenticate and impersonate the client at the operating system level Windows allows access only for users that have the corresponding user right logon_method interactive batch network interactive Corresponds to the user privilege log on locally interactive is the def
155. Click the tool with which you want to create the report The Master File dialog box appears If you choose New Folder you can specify a subfolder name and then create your Custom Report using Report Assistant Graph Assistant or the Editor Note Custom Reports can only be created and edited with the HTML version of Report or Graph Assistant even if you have set the flag for the Java Report or Graph Assistant Note The list of Master Files is determined by the Default Reporting Server s profile settings or if set by the Server and Application Path settings on the Domain You do not have the ability to set a Server and or Application Path at the Custom Report level at this time 3 Select your Master File and click OK to open the tool of your choice Note You can scroll through the Master File list quickly by typing the first letter of a data source For example if you type C the list will advance to the CAR data source 4 Design your Custom Report 5 Click Save As to open the Save My Reports window Custom Reports in Managed Reporting 3 10 Information Builders 6 Enter a name for your report and select the options of your choice For example check the Share Report check box to share your report with another user 7 Click OK to save your report as a Custom Report 8 You can access your Custom Report under the Custom Reports folder in the My Reports tab Managed Reporting Enhancements WebFOCUS Summary of
156. D F and P How to Display an Extended Currency Symbol Example Displaying Extended Currency Symbols Selecting a Currency Symbol for Display 1 122 Information Builders Syntax How to Display an Extended Currency Symbol numeric_format option where numeric_format Is a valid numeric format data types I D F or P Is required option Determines the currency symbol that is displayed and whether the symbol is floating or non floating Possible values are d displays a non floating dollar sign D displays a floating dollar sign e displays a non floating euro symbol E displays a floating euro symbol l displays a non floating British pound symbol L displays a floating British pound symbol y displays a non floating Japanese yen symbol Y displays a floating Japanese yen symbol WebFOCUS Reporting Language Enhancements WebFOCUS Summary of New Features 1 123 Example Displaying Extended Currency Symbols The following request displays the British pound on the row that represents England the euro on the row that represents Italy and the Japanese yen on the row that represents Japan DEFINE FILE CAR CFORMAT A8 DECODE COUNTRY ENGLAND F12 1C L JAPAN D12 Y ELSE D12 2 E END TABLE FILE CAR PRINT SALES CFORMAT DEALER_COST CFORMAT BY COUNTRY WHERE COUNTRY EQ ENGLAND OR JAPAN OR ITALY WHERE SALES GT 0 END The output is Displaying a Minus Sign After Negati
157. DATEDISPLAY parameter in Maintain procedure 9 20 DB2 CLOB columns 8 39 adding 8 41 describing 8 39 DB2 Data Adapter 8 10 8 13 table types on OS 400 8 13 DBA files 4 19 DBA in Maintain 9 26 9 39 DBA prompting in Maintain 2 50 DBAPASS in Maintain 9 39 DBFILE Data Adapter 8 10 Index I 6 Information Builders COBOL and 8 10 RPG and 8 10 DBMS_ERRORCODE property 9 30 9 32 DBMSs Database Management Systems 8 1 ddname FOCCOMP in Maintain 9 36 ddname MAINTAIN 9 36 ddnames in Maintain 9 36 decimal points 1 111 default data 1 47 DEFCENT parameter in Maintain procedure 9 20 deferred receipts 3 12 DEFINE command 1 106 4 10 compiling 1 106 DEFINE compiler 1 105 DEFINES parameter 2 69 defining equal ranges 1 27 Deploy Wizard 2 5 deploying a project 2 5 9 2 9 4 deploying changed files in Maintain 9 4 descriptors 8 5 designing user interfaces 2 35 Desktop Viewer 2 10 Developer Launch Console 9 6 Developer Studio 2 1 to 2 2 architecture 2 2 Deploy Wizard 2 5 Dimensions Tool 2 6 Explorer 2 4 Managed Reporting for Windows 2 3 3 3 Project Wizard 2 4 Developer user type 3 2 DEVELOPERS setting 6 12 Dimension Builder 2 6 launching 2 6 to 2 7 Dimensions Tool 2 6 to 2 7 Direct SQL Passthru 8 38 directory structures 6 31 for NLS 6 28 directory tree structure 7 17 display fields 1 98 display formats for reports 1 126 compound reports 1 126 EXL2K 1 133 displa
158. DDTYPE gt jpg image jpeg binary no no lt ADDTYPE gt bmp image x MS bmp binary no no lt ADDTYPE gt text text plain ascii no no lt ADDTYPE gt tmp text plain binary no no lt ADDTYPE gt mas text plain ascii no no lt ADDTYPE gt xml text xml ascii no no lt ADDTYPE gt xls application vnd ms excel binary yes no lt ADDTYPE gt ps application postscript ascii no amp astran lt ADDTYPE gt prn application x prn ascii no amp astran lt ADDTYPE gt pdf application pdf ascii yes amp astran lt ADDTYPE gt dif application x dif ascii yes amp astran lt ADDTYPE gt gfa application gfa binary no no lt ADDTYPE gt doc application msword ascii yes amp astran lt IF gt IBIMR_returntype contains sync lt ADDTYPE gt doc text plain ascii no no lt ENDIF gt WebFOCUS Client Enhancements WebFOCUS Summary of New Features 6 19 Setting the redirect column to yes enables redirection which allows you to save the report output in a temporary directory Then an http call is made from the browser to retrieve the temporary stored output for display in the browser If redirection is turned off the report output displays in the browser immediately after the request is executed To access the redirect setting using the WebFOCUS Client Console click Configuration and then Redirection Settings Change the Redirect settings where applicable and then click Save to save your changes Note If you select the ENCRYPT check box the mime wf
159. DF report defines the format for the concatenated report enabling you to intersperse intermediate reports of other formats HTML PDF PS EXL2K into one encompassing report You can then run or distribute the report with ReportCaster which displays the compound PDF report in Adobe Acrobat Reader or sends the compound PS report directly to a printer For a graphical implementation of this feature see Combining Multiple Reports Into a Single PDF or PS Report in the Saving and Reusing Report Output chapter in the Creating Reports With Graphical Tools manual Syntax How to Display Compound Reports For a compound report that may contain different report types use the syntax SET COMPOUND OPEN CLOSE NOBREAK or ON TABLE SET COMPOUND OPEN CLOSE NOBREAK Note that when you are using this syntax you must also include the following code to identify the display format of each of the reports to be concatenated ON TABLE PCHOLD FORMAT formatname If all of the reports in the compound set are of the same type either PDF or PS you can use the following more compact syntax ON TABLE PCHOLD FORMAT PDF PS OPEN CLOSE NOBREAK where OPEN Is specified with the first report and begins the concatenation process A report that contains the OPEN attribute must be in PDF or PS format CLOSE Is specified with the last report and ends the concatenation process How to Display Compound Reports Example Combinin
160. E HEADING SIZE 14 STYLE BOLD TYPE REPORT IMAGE SLSGRPH1 gif POSITION 4 5 0 5 SIZE 3 5 2 5 ENDSTYLE ON TABLE PCHOLD FORMAT PS END WebFOCUS Reporting Language Enhancements WebFOCUS Summary of New Features 1 127 Report 2 GRAPH FILE TRADES SUM AMOUNT BY CONTINENT ON GRAPH SET LOOKGRAPH PIE ON GRAPH SET GRAPHEDIT SERVER ON GRAPH HOLD AS TRDSGR1 FORMAT GIF END SET COMPOUND NOBREAK TABLE FILE TRADES SUM AMOUNT AS Amount BY CONTINENT AS Continent BY REGION AS Region HEADING Trades Report ON TABLE SET HTMLCSS ON ON TABLE SET STYLE TYPE DATA BACKCOLOR BY B2 SILVER WHITE TYPE HEADING SIZE 14 STYLE BOLD TYPE REPORT IMAGE TRDSGR1 gif POSITION 4 3 SIZE 4 2 5 ENDSTYLE ON TABLE PCHOLD FORMAT HTML END Report 3 GRAPH FILE SHORT SUM BALANCE BY CONTINENT ON GRAPH SET LOOKGRAPH 3D_BAR ON GRAPH SET GRAPHEDIT SERVER ON GRAPH SET STYLE TYPE DATA COLOR RED ENDSTYLE ON GRAPH HOLD AS BALGR1 FORMAT GIF END SET COMPOUND CLOSE TABLE FILE SHORT SUM BALANCE AS Balance BY CONTINENT AS Continent BY REGION AS Region HEADING Balance by Region ON TABLE SET STYLE TYPE DATA BACKCOLOR BY B2 SILVER WHITE TYPE HEADING SIZE 14 STYLE BOLD TYPE REPORT IMAGE BALGR1 gif POSITION 4 6 SIZE 4 2 5 ENDSTYLE ON TABLE PCHOLD FORMAT EXL2K END Displaying Compound Reports in PS Format 1 128 Information Bu
161. E in SMURFS THE First TRIMV removes the trailing blanks from the title so that the article will be the trailing pattern see TRIMV Removing Characters From a String on page 1 61 DEFINE FILE MOVIES TITLEV A39V TRIMV T TITLE 39 1 TITLEV PSTART I4 POSITV TITLEV LENV TITLEV I4 1 I4 PLEN I4 IF PSTART NE 0 THEN LENV TITLEV I4 PSTART 1 ELSE 0 END TABLE FILE MOVIES PRINT TITLE PSTART AS Pattern Start IN 25 PLEN AS Pattern Length BY CATEGORY NOPRINT WHERE PLEN NE 0 END The output is WebFOCUS Reporting Language Enhancements WebFOCUS Summary of New Features 1 59 SUBSTV Extracting a Variable Length Substring The SUBSTV function extracts a substring from a string and is similar to SUBSTR However the end position for the string is calculated from the starting position and the substring length Therefore it has fewer parameters than SUBSTR Also the actual length of the output field if it is an AnV field is determined based on the substring length Syntax How to Extract a Variable Length Substring SUBSTV in_limit parent start sublength outfield where in_limit Numeric Is a positive constant or a field whose integer portion represents the size and therefore the upper limit for the length of the input string parent Alphanumeric Is the field or alphanumeric constant enclosed in single quotation marks that contains the substring you want to extract If it is a fi
162. E DIRECTOR CONTAINS BR END The output is DIRECTOR TRIMDIR ABRAHAMS J ABRAHAMS J BROOKS R OOKS R BROOKS J L OOKS J L PostScript Type 1 Fonts for PS and PDF Reports 1 160 Information Builders PostScript Type 1 Fonts for PS and PDF Reports You can add and configure PostScript Type 1 fonts to significantly expand your options for displaying and printing PS and PDF reports beyond those provided by the basic set of fonts distributed with Adobe Acrobat Reader Courier Helvetica and Times Thousands of PostScript fonts are available to make your reports more stylish and useful including some that support symbols and bar codes How Type 1 Fonts Are Used WebFOCUS generates a PSD or PS document from scratch physically embedding all the objects it displays or prints including images and fonts in the document itself When you execute a report and specify PDF or PS as your display format the WebFOCUS Reporting Server retrieves the data and begins to format the report Fonts and images specified in the StyleSheet must be available to the server to create the output file It reads the font information from the font files and embeds that information into the document The font itself is stored on the server To ensure that the server can locate the required information you must define and map it in the following files Font file usually a Printer Font Binary PFB file This file contains the information about
163. EAN D12 5 AVE X NOPRINT COMPUTE VARIANCE D12 5 NUM ASQ X X X NUM NUM 1 NOPRINT COMPUTE STDEV D12 5 SQRT VARIANCE NOPRINT PRINT SIZE X NOPRINT COMPUTE NORMALIZED VALUES AND USE AS INPUT TO NORMSDST FUNCTION THEN USE RETURNED VALUES AS INPUT TO NORMSINV FUNCTION AND CONVERT BACK TO DATA VALUES COMPUTE Z D12 5 X MEAN STDEV COMPUTE NORMSD D12 5 NORMSDST Z D8 COMPUTE NORMSI D12 5 NORMSINV NORMSD D8 COMPUTE DSIZE D12 NORMSI STDEV MEAN BY PRODUCT_ID NOPRINT END The output is Size Z NORMSD NORMSI DSIZE 16 07298 47091 07298 16 12 80273 21106 80273 12 12 80273 21106 80273 12 20 65678 74434 65678 20 24 1 38654 91721 1 38654 24 20 65678 74434 65678 20 24 1 38654 91721 1 38654 24 16 07298 47091 07298 16 12 80273 21106 80273 12 8 1 53249 06270 1 53249 8 WebFOCUS Reporting Language Enhancements WebFOCUS Summary of New Features 1 25 Grouping Numeric Data Into Tiles You can group numeric data into any number of tiles percentiles quartiles deciles and so on in tabular reports For example you can group student test scores into deciles to determine which students are in the top ten percent of the class Grouping is based on the values in the selected vertical BY sort field and is apportioned as equally as possible into the number of tile groups you specify Syntax How to Group Nu
164. EAR Y SDATE END TABLE FILE GGSALES PRINT BUDUNITS UNITS BUDDOLLARS DOLLARS ON TABLE RECAP ESTDOLLARS F8 REGRESS 3 BUDUNITS UNITS BUDDOLLARS DOLLARS WHERE SYEAR EQ 97 WHERE CATEGORY EQ Coffee WHERE REGION EQ West WHERE UNITS GT 1600 AND UNITS LT 1700 END The output is Budget Units Unit Sales Budget Dollars Dollar Sales ESTDOLLARS 1796 1696 17960 25440 23381 1463 1663 21945 19966 18919 1759 1615 17590 17765 20850 1403 1601 21045 17611 16530 1825 1695 23725 25425 24316 1613 1685 22582 18535 21365 1568 1682 23520 25230 20841 1733 1647 17330 24705 21313 1870 1620 24310 24300 23033 1665 1678 21645 23492 21722 1725 1669 22425 21697 22307 1457 1671 21855 20052 19038 1662 1674 24930 18414 21931 1556 1643 18672 18073 19201 1653 1694 21489 16940 21963 1473 1616 14730 16160 17095 WebFOCUS Reporting Language Enhancements WebFOCUS Summary of New Features 1 21 Calculating Cumulative Normal Distribution You can perform calculations on a standard normal distribution curve with the NORMSDST and NORMSINV functions The NORMSDST function calculates the percentage of data values that are less than or equal to a normalized value A normalized value is a point on the X axis of a standard normal distribution curve This is useful for determining percentiles in normally distributed data The NORMSINV function finds the normalized value that forms the upper b
165. EN ALL AS CAPTION OVER OVER BAR AS OVER OVER 3100 WITH CHILDREN ADD AS CAPTION IF PERIOD EQ 2002 03 END In the following output the top portion shows the detail level data The bottom portion shows the consolidated data In the consolidated portion of the report There is one line for the parent that is the sum of itself plus all of its children to all levels There is one line for each direct child of account 3100 Selling Expenses Advertising Promotional Expenses Joint Marketing and Bonuses Commissions Financial Reporting Language Enhancements 1 84 Information Builders The line for Advertising is the sum of itself plus all of its children If it had multiple levels of children they would all have been added into the sum The other direct children of 3100 did not themselves have children so the sum on each of those lines consists of only the parent value WebFOCUS Reporting Language Enhancements WebFOCUS Summary of New Features 1 85 Syntax How to Display the Same Record in Multiple FOR Rows SET FORMULTIPLE ON OFF ON TABLE SET FORMULTIPLE ON OFF where ON Enables you to reference the same value of a FOR field in more than one row in an FML request With FORMULTIPLE set to ON a value retrieved from the data source is included on every row in the report output for which it matches the tag references OFF Does not allow you to include the same value in multiple rows If
166. ES LISTPR WHOLESALEPR TITLE A23 BY RATING BY CATEGORY WHERE CATEGORY EQ CHILDREN OR CLASSIC WHERE RATING EQ G OR NR ON RATING SUBTOTAL AVE LISTPR AS Ave ON CATEGORY SUBTOTAL SUM COPIES AS Sum END WebFOCUS Reporting Language Enhancements WebFOCUS Summary of New Features 1 35 The output is Manipulating Summary Values 1 36 Information Builders Example Displaying an Alphanumeric Field on a Summary Line The following request displays the sum of the list price field and the minimum value of the director field by rating TABLE FILE MOVIES PRINT COPIES LISTPR WHOLESALEPR DIRECTOR BY RATING BY CATEGORY WHERE CATEGORY EQ CHILDREN OR CLASSIC WHERE RATING EQ G OR NR WHERE DIRECTOR NE ON RATING SUBTOTAL SUM LISTPR MIN DIRECTOR AS A N END The output is WebFOCUS Reporting Language Enhancements WebFOCUS Summary of New Features 1 37 Controlling Summary Line Processing Reports that use prefix operators on summary lines are processed differently than those without prefix operators In some cases a different style of report output results from each type of request If a summary command specifies one field name and another summary command specifies a second field name In a report without summary prefix operators both columns are populated on both summary lines In a report with summary prefix operators only the specified column is populated on each summary line If a p
167. FOCHTMLURL Alias used to locate WebFOCUS resources on the Web server DISPLAY Points to where the X Windows server is located This displays Server Side Graphics on UNIX Configuring WebFOCUS Client Settings 6 16 Information Builders IBIJAVACMD Points to where the Java Virtual Machine JVM is located in order to execute Java language based programs such as Server Side Graphics WF_SIGNON_MESSAGE Points to the HTML page that appears after a successful signon occurs lang This setting is applicable only when using the WebFOCUS CGI on UNIX In order to display NLS characters on a report with Server Side Graphics you must set this parameter to the appropriate UNIX locale encoding for example en_us IBIF_external_xsl Holds the URL to the XSL document used to transform the XML document produced by IBIF_internal_xsl into the desired final document HTML form If the variable is blank then the resulting document from the internal transformation is sent to the client IBIF_webapp The alias of the WebFOCUS Web application IBIF_wfdescribe Variable for amper auto prompting Possible values are XMLRUN An XML document is created describing the amper variables in the procedure and the procedure is executed XML An XML document is created describing the amper variables OFF Turns auto prompting off OFF is the default value This variable is always turned OFF for Managed Reporting requests IBIF
168. FOCUS or FUSION data source you can specify the disposition of the target structure For a relational table the options are Leave Delete and Truncate For a FOCUS or FUSION data source the options have been renamed to clarify their functions They are Leave and Drop Access these options from the Target Setup tab in the Load component How to Specify Load Options for a Relational Data Source Load Options for a FOCUS or Fusion File Load Options 10 18 Information Builders Procedure How to Specify Load Options for a Relational Data Source 1 Add a Load component to the workspace and connect it to the Target component 2 Double click the Load component to open it The Load window opens with the Target Setup tab open 3 If you want to activate Key Matching logic select Preprocessing The Key Matching Logic section appears 4 In the Prior to Load section select whether to remove data prior to loading the data target The options are Leave Table does not delete the records already in a data target Delete rows from table deletes all rows prior to loading data A DELETE FROM TABLE command is issued against the target and a log of the deleted records is created so that a Rollback command can later be issued to recover them Truncate logically empties the table A log is not created so this is often faster than selecting Delete rows from table However it requires privileges that
169. Features 7 7 Reference Supported Code Page File Windows UNIX OS 400 The following is the supported code page file cpxcptbl nls for Windows UNIX and OS 400 In Release 5 2 3 WebFOCUS added support for the three Baltic code pages at the end of the file For instructions on configuring the server and client for these code pages see Configuring the Server and Client for Baltic Code Pages on page 7 15 The active Code Page information is represented by lines whose first 2 columns are CP Valid DBCSID SOSI SJIS EUC KPC KKS TPC TBIG5 SOSIF SOSIH C Character type E EBCDIC A ASCII DBCS DBCS ID SBCS Single Byte Character Set SOSI IBM MF SJIS EUC SOSIF SOSIH Japanese KPC KKS Korean TPC TBIG5 TNS TTEL Taiwanese note NRC Set National Replacement Character Set MF Mainframe Codepage C DBCS Description CP00037 E SBCS US IBM MF EBCDIC code CP00437 A SBCS US PC ASCII code CP00137 A SBCS ANSI character set for MS Windows CP00500 E SBCS IBM MF International European CP00273 E SBCS IBM MF Germany F R Austria CP00277 E SBCS IBM MF Denmark Norway CP00278 E SBCS IBM MF Finland Sweden CP00280 E SBCS IBM MF Italy CP00281 E SBCS IBM MF Japanese English CP00284 E SBCS IBM MF Spain Latin America CP00285 E SBCS IBM MF United Kingdom CP00297 E SBCS IBM MF France CP00420 E SBCS IBM MF Arabic Bilingual CP00424 E EBCH IBM MF Isra
170. File no errors are reported for those functions until the DEFINE field is used in a subsequent request If a problem occurs the following message is generated FOC003 THE FIELDNAME IS NOT RECOGNIZED OFF does not verify parameters except in the following cases If a parameter that is too long would overwrite the memory area in which the computational code is stored the size is automatically reduced without a message being issued If an alphanumeric parameter is too short it is padded with blanks to the correct length Validating Function Arguments 1 68 Information Builders FULL is the same as ON but also verifies parameters for functions used in Master File DEFINEs ALERT verifies parameters in a request without halting execution when a problem is detected It does not verify parameters for functions used in Master File DEFINEs If a parameter has an incorrect length and an attempt is made to fix the problem behind the scenes the problem is corrected with no message If such a problem cannot be fixed a warning message is generated Execution then continues as though the setting were OFF Note For the ON FULL and ALERT settings if an argument provided is the incorrect type verification fails and processing terminates Example Verifying Arguments With Correctable Errors The following request uses the SUBSTR function to extract the substring that starts in position 6 and ends in position 14 of the TITLE fiel
171. GE TX50 ACTUAL TX FIELD ED_HRS ALIAS OJT USAGE F6 2 ACTUAL F4 MISSING ON FIELD BONUS_PLAN ALIAS BONUS_PLAN USAGE I4 ACTUAL I4 The following request specifies a CONTAINS test against the JOBDESC field SET TRACEUSER ON SET TRACEOFF ALL SET TRACEON STMTRACE CLIENT TABLE FILE EMPINFO PRINT EMP_ID LAST_NAME FIRST_NAME DEPARTMENT CURR_JOBCODE JOBDESC WHERE JOBDESC CONTAINS PR END The CONTAINS operator is translated to a LIKE operator in the generated SQL SELECT T1 EID T1 LN T1 FN T1 DPT T1 CJC T1 JDSC FROM USER1 EMPINFO T1 WHERE T1 JDSC LIKE PR FOR FETCH ONLY Reference Usage Notes for Optimization of Selection Criteria Using Variable Length Data Types The following options are not yet supported with text fields CRTFORM TYPE FSCAN MODIFY HOLD DEFINE COMPUTE SUBSTRING Function Behavior 8 42 Information Builders SUBSTRING Function Behavior In Release 5 2 3 you can choose to retain the SUBSTRING function behavior from previous releases Syntax How to Specify SUBSTRING Function Behavior SQL SET SUBSTRING ANSI OLD where ANSI Returns the SUBSTRING in ANSI VARCHAR format ANSI is the default value OLD Returns the SUBSTRING in CHAR format VARCHAR Support The TX and CLOB fields are merged to simplify the task of selecting the format A CHAR fixed length of n lt 32k This format supports ful
172. HAR 1 50 varchar data type 9 43 VARCHAR support 8 42 variable varchar 9 43 variable length expressions 1 50 variables binding in Maintain 9 17 variables importing in Maintain 9 17 VBScript in Maintain 9 13 9 37 viewing reports 2 10 virtual directories in Maintain 9 3 visible property for Maintain controls 9 13 VSAM data sources 8 25 selecting records and 8 25 Index WebFOCUS Summary of New Features I 23 W WARNING parameter in Maintain procedure 9 20 WCPROTECT mode 7 23 Web aliases in Maintain 9 3 WebFOCUS Browser Version 4 5 OLAP and 4 5 WebFOCUS Client configuring for NLS 6 20 WebFOCUS Client Console 6 2 WebFOCUS Client settings 6 15 customizing 6 20 WebFOCUS Client tracing 6 22 WebFOCUS Connector for Excel 9 44 WebFOCUS Developer Studio 4 5 OLAP and 4 5 WebFOCUS Reporting Server Console 7 5 Maintain procedures 9 2 Maintain trace output 9 15 WebFOCUS StyleSheets 1 145 wfmpriv1 htm launch page 9 14 wfmstart html launch page 9 14 WHERE clause 8 39 to 8 40 WHERE clause in NEXT commands 9 35 WHERE statements 4 11 WHERE TOTAL statements 4 11 WIDTH attribute measuring 1 115 Windows language and code page values 7 12 WITH CHILDREN command 1 73 1 78 WITH STATISTICS option 8 38 WLM Workload Manager 7 32 workflow tool 10 19 Transport component 10 19 Workload Manager WLM 7 32 worksheet customization 1 129 2 11 worksheet names 1 134 X X axis
173. ISO 8859 4 Baltic Multilanguage CP01257 Windows Baltic Latin 7 2 Use the advanced NLS configuration option to manually enter the LANG and CODE_PAGE values from the WebFOCUS Reporting Server Console as described in How to Manually Specify the Language and Code Page Values on page 7 10 On the NLS Configuration window specify LANG BALTIC CODE_PAGE CP0nnnn where nnnn Is the Baltic code page for the data sources 3 Generate the transcoding tables by clicking Save and Restart 4 To configure the WebFOCUS Client use the User Defined option to manually enter the code page as described in Configuring WebFOCUS Client Settings in Chapter 6 WebFOCUS Client Enhancements Specifying the Number of Lines in the EDAPRINT Log 7 16 Information Builders Specifying the Number of Lines in the EDAPRINT Log In Release 5 2 3 the configuration parameter edaprint_max_lines specifies the maximum number of lines that the server writes to a single server activity log edaprint file When the specified number is reached the current log file is archived and a new log file is created Note The lines generated by the server start process are not included in the count As a result the first log file in the session contains more lines than the specified maximum It is larger by the number of lines in the startup information Syntax How to Specify the Maximum Number of Lines in a Server Activity Log edaprint_max_lines 0 max
174. Is the parent field in the hierarchy Note The parent and child fields in the hierarchy must share data values The formats of the parent and child fields must both be numeric or both alphanumeric PROPERTY PARENT_OF Identifies this field as the parent of the referenced field in a hierarchy These attributes can be specified on every field Therefore multiple hierarchies can be defined in one Master File However an individual field can have only one parent If multiple fields have PARENT_OF attributes for the same hierarchy field the first parent found by traversing the structure in top down left to right order is used as the parent seg Is the segment location of the hierarchy field Required if more than one segment has a field named hierarchyfield hierarchyfield Is the child field in the hierarchy PARENT_OF is also allowed on a virtual field in the Master File DEFINE name fmt expression PROPERTY PARENT_OF REFERENCE hierarchyfield How to Define a Hierarchy Between Fields in a Master File Assign Descriptive Captions for Hierarchy Field Values in the Master File Financial Reporting Language Enhancements 1 72 Information Builders Syntax How to Assign Descriptive Captions for Hierarchy Field Values in the Master File To make reports generated from this data more meaningful you can specify a caption for a hierarchy field in a Master File FIELD captionfield PROPERTY CAPTION REFERENCE seg hierarch
175. L TCP CLASS SUCLIENT HOST lt Name of Host gt SERVICE lt of Communication port gt END Example Using the XMI Listener and XMI Client to Access Data on z OS and OS 390 After the XMI Listener is running the client can perform the following request USE DBVSAM02 on XMISU01 TABLE FILE DBVSAM02 PRINT END WebFOCUS Reporting Server Enhancements WebFOCUS Summary of New Features 7 31 Security Types The Server for OS 390 and z OS uses RACF TOP SECRET and ACF2 security packages When configuring the server in secured mode you can choose from two security settings z OS and OS 390 and INTERNAL The z OS and OS 390 setting prohibits the server from calling unauthorized external interfaces while the INTERNAL setting allows calls to non APF authorized interfaces Syntax How to Specify a Security Type To specify the security type include the following setting in the Server JCL under the EDAENV DDNAME or in the profile on OS 390 and z OS SECURITY_TYPE INTERNAL MVS where INTERNAL Allows the server to call non APF authorized external interfaces for IDMS INTERNAL is the default value MVS Prohibits the server from calling unauthorized external interfaces Server Accounting Using SMF Records The Server for OS 390 and z OS can write SMF accounting records that contain information on each connect and disconnect You can view the accounting reports through the WebFOCUS Reporting Server Console Y
176. LA where PCHOLD Displays the output in an Excel 2000 spreadsheet HOLD Saves the output for reuse in an Excel 2000 spreadsheet WebFOCUS Reporting Language Enhancements WebFOCUS Summary of New Features 1 131 Example Displaying Formatted Dates in Excel 2000 The following request illustrates how customized dates appear in a spreadsheet when you use the EXL2K format The format for Month Hired is defined in the request as MtYY the month is represented as a 3 character abbreviation with an initial capital letter followed by a four digit year The format for Years of Service is defined as I4C a four digit integer with a comma if required Both formats are properly displayed as defined in the spreadsheet SET PAGE NUM OFF DEFINE FILE EMPLOYEE YRHIRED YY HIRE_DATE MHIRED MtYY HIRE_DATE TOTSVC I4C 2002 YRHIRED END TABLE FILE EMPLOYEE Employee Service Report for 2002 Excel 2000 Spreadsheet PRINT FIRST_NAME AS First Name MHIRED AS Month Hired TOTSVC AS Years of Service BY LAST_NAME AS Last Name ON TABLE SET BYDISPLAY ON ON TABLE PCHOLD FORMAT EXL2K ON TABLE SET STYLE TYPE REPORT GRID OFF FONT TAHOMA TYPE HEADING SIZE 14 COLOR NAVY TYPE HEADING LINE 2 SIZE 12 COLOR RED TYPE TITLE JUSTIFY CENTER STYLE BOLD TYPE DATA JUSTIFY CENTER TYPE DATA COLUMN TOTSVC COLOR BLUE WHEN TOTSVC GT 20 ENDSTYLE END Excel Integr
177. LANG parameter 1 161 LANGUAGE parameter in Maintain procedure 9 20 language subdirectories 6 31 language values 7 10 language values for OS 400 7 13 language values for UNIX 7 12 language values for Windows 7 12 Large Volume Requests report 11 7 to 11 8 LAST function 10 15 launch pages in Maintain 9 14 launching Dimension Builder 2 6 to 2 7 leading zero 1 119 displaying 1 119 LENV function 1 53 limitations for headings and footings 1 98 linear regression 1 97 linear regression analysis 1 3 to 1 4 2 26 to 2 27 2 29 2 31 to 2 32 2 34 linear regression equation 1 16 to 1 17 List mode 4 10 listener statistics 7 33 load options 10 17 LOCASV function 1 53 to 1 54 log continuation files 7 16 log file ETL 10 3 Log File option 5 10 Log tables 10 4 Logoff option 5 10 long procedure names 11 6 Long running Requests report 11 7 LOOKGRAPH command 1 97 LOOKGRAPH parameter 1 97 Index WebFOCUS Summary of New Features I 13 M Maintain and Developer Studio integration 9 2 Maintain and reporting integration 9 3 Managed Reporting 3 6 Change Management 3 4 creating synonyms 3 7 Developer for Windows 3 3 migrating 3 12 multiple servers 3 7 Managed Reporting Developer for Windows 2 3 managing the visible property in Maintain 9 13 Master Files 1 124 1 152 editing in Maintain 9 8 for CSV format 1 152 for Essbase 8 15 Minus Edit format option 1 124 max_connections_per_
178. LLJAVA command 8 26 execute method 8 27 fetch method 8 27 Candidates for Column Index report 11 7 11 9 CAPTION parameter 2 56 captions 2 57 indenting 2 56 captions in a hierarchy 2 56 to 2 57 Cascading Style Sheets CSS in Maintain 9 10 CDN Continental Decimal Notation 1 118 to 1 119 punctuating large numbers 1 118 CDN parameter 2 69 CDN parameter in Maintain procedure 9 20 cells 1 89 adding borders 2 68 formatting 1 89 to 1 90 2 64 2 67 to 2 68 identifying 1 89 2 64 CENT ZERO parameter 1 119 2 69 CGI aliases in Maintain 9 3 Index WebFOCUS Summary of New Features I 3 CGI parameters in Maintain 9 16 CGI scripting in Maintain 9 3 CGI Servlet 1 99 prompting for variables 1 99 chain feature 2 40 to 2 42 caching parameters 2 42 removing parameters from a chain 2 41 reversing the order of parameters 2 41 Change Management 3 4 changing date formats 2 8 changing settings from Maintain procedure 9 21 changing time display 2 9 CHAR2INT Maintain function 9 33 character expressions 1 50 variable length 1 50 character functions 1 155 SQUEEZ 1 155 to 1 156 STRIP 1 157 TRIM 1 158 to 1 159 character strings 1 155 reducing spaces 1 155 Check Box Properties window 2 44 check boxes 2 44 Check Box Properties window 2 44 CLOB fields 8 42 COBOL Copy Book 8 32 COBOL FD Translator 8 32 code page generation files 7 5 to 7 6 code page values 7 5 to 7 6 code page values for OS 4
179. ML page more easily and precisely For procedures on customizing Web objects see Customizing the Layout in the Designing a User Interface for a Web Application With the Resource Layout Painter chapter in the Developing Reporting Applications manual In this section Form Controls With User supplied Values Enhanced Customization of Web Objects Setting Static Parameter Values Updating Parameters in the Resource Layout Painter With Report Painter Changes Automatically Deleting a Form Control Associated With a Parameter Filtering Dynamic Parameter Values Adding an Image With a Hyperlink to the Layout Displaying Radio Buttons and Check Box Lists in Multiple Columns Specifying Different Names for Dynamic Parameter Values Hiding Borders Around Frames Applying Parameter Values to External Reports Designing a User Interface With the Resource Layout Painter 2 36 Information Builders Setting Static Parameter Values When you specify a list of static values for a parameter you can select the value to pass to the parameter the text that will represent that value in the form and the default value to be selected Procedure How to Specify Static Parameter Values In the Parameters window 1 In the Control Values section select Static 2 Click the New icon and enter the parameter value information in the Static values section a In the Value column enter the value to be passed to the selected parameter b I
180. MSINV 1 23 to 1 24 O ODBC connection 8 20 OLAP 4 2 drag and drop dimensions in 4 2 grouping data with tiles 4 6 hidden reports in 4 5 right click options 4 3 tile fields 4 6 OLAP options 4 16 OLAP tools 4 5 selecting 4 5 OLAP enabling reports 4 5 OMITS operator in Maintain 9 35 OMITS test 8 40 Index WebFOCUS Summary of New Features I 15 OpenVMS Operating System 7 32 optimized loading in ETL 10 21 options settings 3 19 ORDER field for Adabas 8 6 Ordinary Least Squares 1 18 2 26 OS 400 language and code page values 7 13 OS 400 Operating System 7 32 output file formats 1 152 COM 1 152 COMT 1 153 TAB 1 153 TABT 1 154 output formats 1 151 2 12 P parameter values 2 36 2 38 to 2 40 dynamic list 2 46 filtering with the chain feature 2 40 static list 2 36 parameters 2 40 Parameters window 2 38 to 2 40 2 46 properties 2 38 to 2 40 Parameters window 2 38 to 2 40 2 46 parentheses 4 11 grouping expressions together 4 11 grouping WHERE Statements together 4 11 parsing in Maintain 9 8 9 37 PASS parameter in Maintain procedure 9 20 passing language parameters to a URL 6 27 passwords in Maintain 9 39 PATH keyword in Maintain 9 38 PCHOLD command 1 142 Excel formats and 1 135 PCOMMA parameter 2 69 PDF reports 1 160 adding PostScript fonts 1 160 PeopleSoft Data Adapter 8 20 Percent Edit Format Option 1 124 2 10 percentiles 4 6 to 4 7 performance enhancements in M
181. Maintain applications using FOCUS data sources Syntax How to Issue an SQL Command in a Procedure SYS_MGR ENGINE engine command where engine Is the name of the RDBMS to which you are passing the command command Is any valid SQL command including CREATE INSERT and DROP How to Issue an SQL Command in a Procedure Example Inserting a Row Into a Table MS SQL Dropping the Table NYACCTS MS SQL Setting Connection Attributes for an MS SQL Server Passing Credentials to a Remote Server WebFOCUS Maintain Enhancements WebFOCUS Summary of New Features 9 31 Example Inserting a Row Into a Table MS SQL Compute rc i8 Type Inserting row into table MNTBTAB2 rc sys_mgr engine SQLMSS insert into mntbtab2 values X2 XDAT2222 Type ReturnCode lt lt rc DBMS Err lt lt SYS_MGR DBMS_ERRORCODE The return code is saved in a variable named rc Test it to determine whether the record was inserted successfully rc 0 With MS SQL if the inserted row is a duplicate you receive the following return codes Return Code 1 DBMS Err 2627 Example Dropping the Table NYACCTS MS SQL Compute rc i8 rc sys_mgr engine SQLMSS DROP TABLE NYACCTS Type Return Code lt lt rc DBMS Err lt lt SYS_MGR DBMS_ERRORCODE Example Setting Connection Attributes for an MS SQL Server Compute rc i8 rc sys_mgr engine SQLMSS set connection_attributes mssxyz ibiusr1 mkt Type RC fro
182. Managed Reporting is configured with ReportCaster you must use the Managed Reporting User Administrator tool to create and manage users and groups Managed Reporting calls ReportCaster and synchronizes user information in the ReportCaster Repository When ReportCaster is not configured with Managed Reporting you must use the User Administrator tool in the ReportCaster Development and Administration Interface to create and manage users and groups The user ID created with the Managed Reporting or ReportCaster User Administrator tool is the user ID that owns objects schedules Distribution Lists log reports Library Access Lists and Library Content Note that you can now assign ReportCaster Administrator privileges to multiple ReportCaster user IDs For detailed information about creating and managing ReportCaster user IDs see the Accessing ReportCaster and Enabling User Capabilities chapter in the ReportCaster Development and Administration manual Distribution Enhancements 5 6 Information Builders Distribution Enhancements Using the ReportCaster Development and Administration Interface you can create and distribute multiple jobs Tasks within a single schedule that uses the e mail or printer distribution methods You can distribute one Task per schedule as an inline e mail message Additional Tasks are sent as e mail attachments Distributing a Task When creating a schedule from the ReportCaster Development and Administration Inter
183. New Features 3 11 9 If you share your custom reports they will be available to other users using the Shared Reports tab as shown below For information about running a Custom Report see How to Run a My Report or Custom Report in the Using Java Applet Managed Reporting chapter in the Managed Reporting End User s Manual In Release 5 2 3 Custom Reports are available in Dashboard See Custom Reports in Dashboard on page 3 19 Execution of a Custom Report Using INCLUDE In Release 5 2 3 you can insert one procedure within another using the INCLUDE command When you name a report Managed Reporting creates the actual file name in the format of username userfolder fexname which tells Managed Reporting where to find the file The file name is displayed in the Properties dialog box and is the value to specify when referencing the report with INCLUDE within Custom Reports Note that only Analytical Users who have been granted the Advanced capability or Administrators and Developers who have the Advanced capability by default can create Custom Reports The actual file name for Shared Custom Reports is in the format of shared user s name shared user s folder shared procedure name also designated on a Shared Custom Reports Properties dialog box Standard Reports include the procedure name also designated on a Standard Report s Properties dialog box The INCLUDE command is fully documented in Execution of a Custom Report Using
184. OCUS COMMAND WHERE BYPASSING TO END OF COMMAND When the request is executed with the USERFCHK OFF setting no verification is done and no message is produced The request runs and produces incorrect results In some environments this type of error may cause abnormal termination of the application Financial Reporting Language Enhancements 1 70 Information Builders Financial Reporting Language Enhancements You can define hierarchical relationships between fields in a Master File and automatically display the hierarchy using the Financial Modeling Language FML For example suppose that An employee data source contains both the employee s ID and the ID of the employee s manager or A general ledger data source contains both an account number field and an account parent field By examining these fields it is possible to construct the entire organization chart or chart of accounts Once you have defined the hierarchy it is loaded into memory An FML request can then dynamically construct the rows that represent the hierarchical relationship and display them in the report starting at any point in the hierarchy For details about the process through which you define and use the FML hierarchy see Defining an FML Hierarchy on page 1 71 Displaying a Dynamic FML Hierarchy on page 1 73 Consolidating Data in an FML Hierarchy on page 1 78 Returning FOR Field Values in a Computed C
185. ORE500_TOTALSALES AVANT_GARDE_CLOTHING_DATASOURCE FRANCE PROVINCE_NICE_STORE501_TOTALSALES END RUN The output is PAGE 1 PROVINCE_NICE_STORE500_TOTALSALES PROVINCE_NICE_STORE501_TOTALSALES 12235 5470 9827 7675 7635 9327 10325 7543 Size Restrictions for Generated Alpha Fields 8 38 Information Builders Size Restrictions for Generated Alpha Fields To restrict the size of alpha fields created by the CREATE SYNONYM command for long character fields use the following SET command ENGINE engine SET CONVERSION LONGCHAR number where engine Is a valid adapter tag suffix number Is any number from 1 to 32767 This restricts the size of An and AnV fields created by the CREATE SYNONYM command 32767 is the default value For a Full Function Server application the recommended values are up to 4096 The setting also controls the size of answer set columns created by Direct SQL Passthru SQL Join Optimization The heterogeneous joins between two DBMSs or between the data sources on two sub servers is enhanced in the following manner Predicate of EQ and LIKE is cloned from one table to another in the join Equi joins order of retrieval is now based on the size cardinality of the table Smaller tables are read first The cardinality may be obtained by using a new option of the CREATE SYNONYM command WITH STATISTICS Data Adapter Enhanc
186. OS 390 using the XMI Server This functionality consists of two parts Multi user XMI Listener running under server control The client running as an agent on any platform How to Configure the XMI Listener and the XMI Client Example Using the XMI Listener and XMI Client to Access Data on z OS and OS 390 Accessing z OS and OS 390 VSAM Files Using XMI Server 7 30 Information Builders Procedure How to Configure the XMI Listener and the XMI Client To configure the XMI Listener and XMI Client to access data on z OS and OS 390 complete the following steps 1 For the XMI Listener add the following node description in the communication configuration file odin cfg XMI Database Listener NODE XMISU BEGIN PROTOCOL TCP CLASS SUBSERVER SERVICE lt of Communication port gt END 2 For the XMI Listener create the file xmisprof prf to describe all VSAM files that clients are going to access The description contains DYNAM statements where DDNAMEs are used by clients for access For example DYNAM ALLOC DDNAME DBVSAM01 DSN DSNVSAM1 SHR REU DYNAM ALLOC DDNAME DBVSAM02 DSN DSNVSAM2 SHR REU DYNAM ALLOC DDNAME DBVSAM0N DSN DSNVSAMN SHR REU 3 For the XMI Client add the following node description in the communication configuration file odin cfg The number of the communication port for the client and the XMI Listener must be the same XMI Database Client NODE XMISU01 BEGIN PROTOCO
187. OWS 8 12 DB2 Table Types on OS 400 8 13 Support for DB2 8 1 8 13 Data Adapter for Enterprise Java Beans 8 13 Data Adapter for Essbase 8 14 Describing the Measures Dimension in the Master File 8 15 Summing on Non Aggregated Fields 8 15 Preventing Aggregation of Non Consolidating Members 8 16 Suppressing Shared Members 8 17 Suppressing Zero Values 8 17 Suppressing Missing Data
188. Only those records that you request are retrieved from the file The alternative method of retrieval the sequential read forces the data adapter to retrieve all the records into storage Selection criteria that are based on the entire primary key or on a subset of the primary key cause direct reads using the index A partial key is any contiguous part of the primary key beginning with the first byte The EQ and IS relations realize the greatest performance improvement over sequential reads When testing on a partial key equality logic is used to retrieve only the first segment instance of the screening value To retrieve subsequent instances NEXT logic is used Screening relations GE FROM FROM TO GT EXCEEDS IS MORE THAN and NOT FROM TO all obtain some benefit from direct reads The following example uses the index to find the record containing primary key value 66 IF keyfield GE 66 It then continues to retrieve records by sequential processing because VSAM stores records in ascending key sequence The direct read is not attempted when the IF screening conditions NE IS NOT CONTAINS OMITS LT IS LESS THAN LE and NOT FROM are used in the report request Similar performance improvement is available for ESDS and KSDS files that use alternate indexes An alternate index provides access to records in a key sequenced data set based on a key other than the primary one All benefits and limitations inherent with screening on the prima
189. PCHOLD FORMAT EXL2K ON TABLE SET STYLE TYPE REPORT TITLETEXT 1999 Sales Report ENDSTYLE END The output is WebFOCUS Reporting Language Enhancements WebFOCUS Summary of New Features 1 135 Example Viewing a Report in EXL97 Format The following request illustrates how a report appears when you use the PCHOLD FORMAT EXL97 command The request includes drill downs to another procedure and formatting options including conditional styling TABLE FILE CENTORD HEADING Order Revenue Styled Report in Excel 97 SUM ORDER_DATE LINEPRICE AS Order Total BY HIGHEST 10 ORDER_NUM ON TABLE SET PAGE NUM OFF ON TABLE SET ACCESSIBLE 508 ON TABLE PCHOLD FORMAT EXL97 ON TABLE SET STYLE TYPE HEADING COLOR NAVY SIZE 14 TYPE HEADING LINE 2 COLOR RED TYPE DATA BACKCOLOR AQUA STYLE BOLD WHEN LINEPRICE GT 200000 TYPE TITLE STYLE BOLD TYPE DATA COLUMN ORDER_NUM FOCEXEC DETAILS ENDSTYLE END Excel Integration Enhancements 1 136 Information Builders The output is Note Although format EXL97 is available there are some limitations when compared to the Excel 2000 EXL2K formats Future enhancements in the area of Excel integration will primarily be made to the EXL2K formats We recommend upgrading to Excel 2000 or higher so you can take full advantage of our Excel integration as well as all future enhancements WebFOCUS Reporting Language Enhancements WebFOCUS Summar
190. Painter New Features 2 14 Creating Multiple Drill Downs With the Report Painter 2 21 Calculating Trends and Predicting Values in Developer Studio 2 26 Calculating Trends and Predicting Values With FORECAST in Developer Studio 2 26 Designing a User Interface With the Resource Layout Painter 2 35 Form Controls With User supplied Values 2 35 Enhanced Customization of Web Objects 2 35 Setting Static Parameter Values 2 36 Updating Parameters in the Resource Layout Painter With Report Painter Changes 2 36 Automatically Deleting a Form Control Associated With a Parameter 2 39 Filtering Dynamic Parameter Values 2 40 Adding an Image With a Hyperlink to the Layout
191. Properties Window The Frame Properties Window contains the Frameborder option Frameborder Determines whether or not a border appears around the frame when the request is executed Yes is the default value To hide borders around a frame choose no from the drop down list All options are fully documented in Frame Properties Window in the Designing a User Interface for a Web Application With the Resource Layout Painter chapter in the Developing Reporting Applications manual Applying Parameter Values to External Reports In Release 5 2 3 you can apply parameters to external reports in a report layout the same way that you can apply them to reports you create with the Report Painter You can also update and target parameters for an external report to a frame or window directly within your report layout See your Information Builders representative for details Source File Management 2 48 Information Builders Source File Management Developer Studio supports third party source file management products such as Microsoft Visual SourceSafe PVCS Version Manager from MERANT and others that use an industry standard API Source file management provides version control for individual projects and team projects enabling multiple users of Developer Studio to work on the same files without overwriting each other s modifications A source file management product typically controls access to source code and documents all code changes
192. Regression You can use basic linear regression to alter the X and Y axis values in a SCATTER graph with the SET GTREND command Basic linear regression involves the average of the summation of X and Y axis values to determine a linear equation that expresses the trend of the scatter diagram Syntax How to Alter X and Y Axis Values Using Linear Regression To alter the X and Y axis values in a SCATTER graph the syntax is SET GTREND ON OFF where ON Uses basic linear regression to alter the X and Y axis values OFF Does not alter the X and Y axis values OFF is the default value New Graph Type Options The following graph styles are supported when using the SET LOOKGRAPH command in a GRAPH request GANTT Provides a visual representation of project oriented time critical events Gantt charts require six display fields and one sort field in that order Conditional styling and drill down are not supported for GANTT charts POSITION Product position charts provide a visual representation of market share and growth versus revenue and measurement past present future Product position charts require a set of three display fields A sort field is not required VWATERFL There are no field column limitations for vertical waterfall charts HWATERFL There are no field column limitations for horizontal waterfall charts PARETO Displays data following Pareto s 80 20 rule Pareto charts re
193. SQL request contains the FETCH FIRST 2 ROWS clause SET TRACEUSER ON SET TRACEOFF ALL SET TRACEON STMTRACE CLIENT TABLE FILE EMPINFO PRINT LAST_NAME FIRST_NAME CURRENT_SALARY BY EMP_ID IF READLIMIT EQ 2 END The generated SQL request contains the FETCH FIRST 2 ROWS clause SELECT T1 EID T1 LN T1 FN T1 CSAL FROM USER1 EMPINFO T1 ORDER BY T1 EID FETCH FIRST 2 ROWS ONLY If the test specifies READLIMIT EQ 1 the SQL request contains the clause FETCH FIRST 1 ROW ONLY SELECT T1 EID T1 LN T1 FN T1 CSAL FROM USER1INFO T1 ORDER BY T1 EID FETCH FIRST 2 ROW ONLY DB2 Table Types on OS 400 The WebFOCUS Reporting Server Console CREATE SYNONYM facility for DB2 on OS 400 has been extended beyond tables and views to include types for physical and logical files which can also be accessed by DB2 Support for DB2 8 1 Release 5 2 3 supports the DB2 Version 8 1 database on UNIX and NT Data Adapter for Enterprise Java Beans The Data Adapter for Enterprise Java Beans supports Create Synonym and Access Beans CREATE SYNONYM uses the Interrogate Method to retrieve bean property method or event information If the bean returns data the Master File contains a field description A table request uses the Invoke Method to access the bean The value of the bean Primary Key is specified in a WHERE clause Only one active Primary Key is allowed in the request The URL of the server where the bean is located is stored in th
194. SS SEGNAME MNTAUTO SEGTYPE S0 FIELD CONTROL CONTROL I11 I4 MISSING OFF FIELDTYPE R FIELD LASTNAME LASTNAME A12 A12 MISSING OFF FIELD FIRSTNAME FIRSTNAME A12 A12 MISSING OFF FIELD ITEM ITEM A20 A20 MISSING OFF FIELD AMOUNT AMOUNT P19 P10 MISSING OFF The generated Access File is SEGNAME MNTAUTO TABLENAME AUTOINC1 CONNECTION MSSXYZ KEYS 1 Concurrent FOCUS Data Source Access 9 42 Information Builders Example Coding an Auto Increment Column The following Maintain procedure which adds new data does not assign a value to the auto increment column called Control or reference it in the INCLUDE command If a record is successfully included the RDBMS automatically generates a new value for Control for that record MAINTAIN FILE MNTAUTO INFER CONTROL LASTNAME FIRSTNAME ITEM AMOUNT INTO INSTK PERFORM UPDAT1 CASE UPDAT1 COMPUTE INSTK 1 LASTNAME PIG COMPUTE INSTK 1 FIRSTNAME PORKY COMPUTE INSTK 1 ITEM PORKBELLIES COMPUTE INSTK 1 AMOUNT 2000 00 FOR 1 INCLUDE LASTNAME FIRSTNAME ITEM AMOUNT FROM INSTK ENDCASE END If the Maintain code were to provide a value for Control in the following commands the updated value for that field would be ignored COMPUTE INSTK 1 CONTROL 1234 FOR 1 INCLUDE CONTROL LASTNAME FIRSTNAME ITEM AMOUNT FROM INSTK Make sure to query the data source to find out which value was generated by the RDBMS for the
195. Single Exponential Smoothing Column The following request defines an integer value named PERIOD to use as the independent variable for the moving average It predicts three periods of values beyond the range of retrieved data DEFINE FILE GGSALES SDATE YYM DATE SYEAR Y SDATE SMONTH M SDATE PERIOD I2 SMONTH END TABLE FILE GGSALES SUM UNITS DOLLARS BY CATEGORY BY PERIOD WHERE SYEAR EQ 97 AND CATEGORY NE Gifts ON PERIOD RECAP EXPAVE D10 1 FORECAST DOLLARS 1 3 EXPAVE 3 END Example Calculating a Single Exponential Smoothing Column Calculating Trends and Predicting Values 1 10 Information Builders The output is In the report three predicted values of EXPAVE are calculated within each value of CATEGORY For values outside the range of the data new PERIOD values are generated by adding the interval value 1 to the prior PERIOD value Category PERIOD Unit Sales Dollar Sales EXPAVE Coffee 1 61666 801123 801 123 0 2 54870 682340 741 731 5 3 61608 765078 753 404 8 4 57050 691274 722 339 4 5 59229 720444 721 391 7 6 58466 742457 731 924 3 7 60771 747253 739 588 7 8 54633 655896 697 742 3 9 57829 730317 714 029 7 10 57012 724412 719 220 8 11 51110 620264 669 742 4 12 58981 762328 716 035 2 13 0 0 716 035 2 14 0 0 716 035 2 15 0 0 716 035 2 Food 1 54394 672727 672 727 0 2 54894 699073 685 900 0 3 52713 642802 664 351 0 4 58026 718514 691
196. Summary of New Features Version 5 Release 2 DN4500463 0304 EDA EDA SQL FIDEL FOCCALC FOCUS FOCUS Fusion FOCUS Vision Hospital Trac Information Builders the Information Builders logo Parlay PC FOCUS SmartMart SmartMode SNAPpack TableTalk WALDO Web390 WebFOCUS and WorldMART are registered trademarks and iWay and iWay Software are trademarks of Information Builders Inc Due to the nature of this material this document refers to numerous hardware and software products by their trademarks In most if not all cases these designations are claimed as trademarks or registered trademarks by their respective companies It is not this publisher s intent to use any of these names generically The reader is therefore cautioned to investigate all claimed trademark rights before using any of these names other than to refer to the product described Copyright 2004 by Information Builders Inc and iWay Software All rights reserved Patent Pending This manual or parts thereof may not be reproduced in any form without the written permission of Information Builders Inc WebFOCUS Summary of New Features iii Preface This manual describes the new features available in WebFOCUS Version 5 Release 2 It is intended for all levels of users including application developers administrators and end users How This Manual Is Organized This manual includes the following chapters Chapter Appendix Contents 1 WebFOCUS Reporting L
197. Supports layering for the display of images with other report components Tiles a background image instead of enlarging the image to fit the background Developer Studio Enhancements WebFOCUS Summary of New Features 2 19 General functionality improvements The Report Painter Enables you to save a report from the Save button on the General toolbar The Save button saves all the components in the procedure not just the report component Enables a developer to assign a variable as the display format This feature enables a user to select the report s output format See Choosing an Output Format in the Creating Reports With the Report Painter chapter in the Creating Reports With Graphical Tools manual Calculated trends and predicted values You can calculate trends in data and predict values beyond the range of values stored in the data source with the Forecast feature The Forecast feature uses averages or a linear regression line to distinguish trends and predict values This is useful for predicting values that may occur beyond the current data set See Calculating Trends and Predicting Values With FORECAST in Developer Studio on page 2 26 For language implementation of this feature see Calculating Trends and Predicting Values With FORECAST in Chapter 1 WebFOCUS Reporting Language Enhancements Apportioned numeric data in tiles You can group numeric data into any number of tiles percentiles quart
198. The State NY is supplied by default Product name is supplied by the user lt heading gt Please specify a state storename and product name lt heading gt DEFAULT amp STATE NY TABLE FILE CENTORD SUM QTY_IN_STOCK BY STATE BY PRODNAME BY SNAME ON TABLE SUBHEAD Inventory Report WHERE STATE EQ amp STATE 2 3 letters for US State WHERE SNAME EQ amp SNAME eMart TV City Web Sales Store Name WHERE PRODNAME EQ amp PRODNAME Product Name END The HTML form generated by this code is For examples of a description of a procedure static and dynamic multi select lists and range of values see Amper Auto Prompting in CGI Servlet in the Coding a User Interface chapter in the Developing Reporting Applications manual Including Script Files in Reports 1 104 Information Builders Including Script Files in Reports The SET JSURL command enables you to include JavaScript or VBScript files in an HTML report Syntax How to Include a JavaScript or VB Script File in an HTML Report SET JSURL file1 file2 file3 where file1 file2 file3 Are the files that contain JavaScript or VBScript If there is more than one JavaScript file the delimiter is a blank and the values must be enclosed in single quotation marks Files must be in a location that is accessible by the Web server You can reference files with a URL Specifying Holidays You can use the SET HDAY command to specify company specific holiday
199. Total OVER BAR OVER RECAP PROFIT 2 TOTAL 1 TOTAL 2 AS Profit INDENT 10 END The output is WebFOCUS Reporting Language Enhancements WebFOCUS Summary of New Features 1 93 Graph Enhancements The graph environment has been enhanced to Facilitate saving a graph as a GIF file in a server environment Alter X and Y axis values in a SCATTER graph using linear regression Offer a variety of new graph type options Send graph output directly to a printer Graphing capabilities are fully documented in the Creating a Graph chapter in the Creating Reports With WebFOCUS Language manual For a graphical implementation see the Creating a Graph With Graph Assistant chapter in the Creating Reports With Graphical Tools manual Saving a Graph as a GIF File The SET GRAPHSERVURL command eliminates the need to set the IBIJAVAPATH system environment variable before holding or saving a graph image This enables users who are running against a server environment where the WebFOCUS Reporting Server is installed on an OS 390 and z OS Windows NT 2000 XP or UNIX machine to save graph output as a GIF file GIF images can be embedded in a PDF or HTML report The GRAPHSERVURL parameter sends an http request to the machine that has the WebFOCUS Graph Servlet The graph image is created by the WebFOCUS Graph Servlet and the image is sent back to a temporary location on the WebFOCUS Reporting Server if a FILEDEF has n
200. US Call Information Builders Customer Support Services CSS at 800 736 6130 or 212 736 6130 Customer Support Consultants are available Monday through Friday between 8 00 A M and 8 00 P M EST to address all your WebFOCUS questions Information Builders consultants can also give you general guidance regarding product capabilities and documentation Please be ready to provide your six digit site code xxxx xx when you call You can also access support services electronically 24 hours a day with InfoResponse Online InfoResponse Online is accessible through our World Wide Web site http www informationbuilders com It connects you to the tracking system and known problem database at the Information Builders support center Registered users can open update and view the status of cases in the tracking system and read descriptions of reported software issues New users can register immediately for this service The technical support section of www informationbuilders com also provides usage techniques diagnostic tips and answers to frequently asked questions To learn about the full range of available support services ask your Information Builders representative about InfoResponse Online or call 800 969 INFO Indicates that you can enter a parameter multiple times Type only the parameter not the ellipsis points Indicates that there are or could be intervening or additional commands Convention Descrip
201. US Reporting Server IBI_REPORT_USER wfuser IBI_REPORT_PASS wfpass In this example you are dynamically prompted for server credentials IBI_REPORT_USER IBI_REPORT_PASS In this example a user ID chuck and password hill for connecting to the WebFOCUS Reporting Server has been set up They will only be used if a public user connects to the server from Managed Reporting or Dashboard lt if gt IBIMR_user upper EQ PUBLIC IBI_REPORT_USER chuck IBI_REPORT_PASS hill lt endif gt Configuring Deferred Server Mappings You can configure alternate server nodes for use with Managed Reporting s Deferred Receipt feature For more information about Deferred Receipt see the WebFOCUS Managed Reporting Administrator s Manual Deferred Receipt requests can be processed by using the immediate WebFOCUS Reporting Server Immediate Server or by using an Alternate Deferred Receipt Server Deferred Server dedicated to running only deferred requests The resources for the Deferred Server are managed independently from the immediate Server The Deferred Server must have the same access to applications data sources and Master Files and run in the same environment for example UNIX as the immediate Server Note z OS and OS 390 require deferred requests to run on an Alternate Server How to Map a Deferred Server Node to an Immediate Server Node Configuring WebFOCUS Reporting Server Settings 6 8 Information Builders Procedur
202. WebFOCUS and Developer Studio environments with the SET command The following SET parameters were introduced or enhanced in Release 5 2 Those marked with asterisks were introduced in Release 5 2 3 SET commands are fully documented in the Customizing Your Environment chapter in the Developing Reporting Applications manual SET Parameter Description For details see BLANKINDENT Clarifies relationships within an FML hierarchy by indenting the captions titles of values at each level Indent Row Titles in an FML Hierarchy on page 1 86 CDN Specifies the punctuation used in numerical notation Determine the Punctuation of Large Numbers on page 1 118 CENT ZERO Displays a leading zero in decimal only numbers Display a Leading Zero in Decimal only Numbers on page 1 120 DEFINES Compiles virtual fields into machine code to improve performance Compile DEFINE Expressions on page 1 106 ERROROUT Terminates a request and returns an error message when an error is encountered Control Error Processing on page 1 106 EXL2KLANG Specifies the language used on the server for Microsoft Excel requests Set the Language for Excel Requests on page 1 137 FILECASE Automatically converts file names and directories to lowercase Convert File Names to Lowercase on page 1 107 FOCHTMLURL Allows you to access resources with an alias other than ibi_html Access a Resource With a Non Standard Alias on page 1 105
203. YNONYM command used in conjunction with the CREATE SYNONYM command generates the syntax required for transparent superdescriptors The CREATE SYNONYM command is used to generate the metadata Master File for an Adabas file The SET SYNONYM command can be coded in any supported server profile Syntax How to Set Synonyms for Superdescriptors ENGINE ADBSINX SET SYNONYM NEW STD NEW Describes superdescriptors as groups in the Master File With NEW synonym format neither the groups nor the components fields have field names specified in the Master File Aliases are populated using the Adabas FDT 2 byte name When a synonym contains the NEW syntax the Data Adapter for Adabas uses NEW logic to process the selection criteria of requests involving that synonym Screening conditions within the request are analyzed and the superdescriptor that covers the highest order component fields required by the selection criteria are used Note that you must specify CALLTYPE RL in the Access File in order to take advantage of superdescriptor based access STD Incorporates the usual CREATE SYNONYM behavior which does not trigger the new logic for requests using superdescriptors STD is the default value Data Adapter Enhancements WebFOCUS Summary of New Features 8 5 Adabas Hyper and Phonetic Descriptors An Adabas file is defined with a set of indexes called descriptors Descriptors are fields partial fields or groups of complete and par
204. You can use a user written external Java program with ReportCaster ensuring that ReportCaster user IDs and passwords are properly authenticated without having to store passwords in the ReportCaster Repository In Release 5 2 3 when ReportCaster is configured with Managed Reporting you can integrate the Managed Reporting Servlet Exit with ReportCaster to authenticate user passwords in an external repository Note that ReportCaster has utilities to bulk load existing Managed Reporting or external user IDs For details about how to load user IDs into the ReportCaster Repository and configure the ReportCaster authentication exit see ReportCaster Authentication Exit in the WebFOCUS Custom Security Exits chapter in the WebFOCUS Security and Administration manual ReportCaster User Credentials Due to ReportCaster supporting multiple WebFOCUS Reporting Servers there is a change in how ReportCaster utilizes user credentials There is a ReportCaster owner ID same as Managed Reporting user ID when ReportCaster is configured with Managed Reporting for ownership of schedules distribution lists access lists and Report Library content In addition an Execution ID specifies the user ID to run the scheduled job This implementation permits users to access all schedules distribution lists access lists and Report Library content independent of the server that executes scheduled jobs Configuring Access to the User Interfaces By default Managed Reporting
205. You will receive a message asking for you to confirm the deletion Profile Enables you to override WebFOCUS default settings for a specific WebFOCUS Reporting Server node These settings are written to ibi client52 wfc etc node prf where node is the node you selected in step 2 For examples see Overriding WebFOCUS Default Settings for a Specific Server Node on page 6 7 Server Console Displays the WebFOCUS Reporting Server Console which enables you to remotely manage your server environment For more information see the iWay Server Administration for UNIX Windows OpenVMS OS 400 OS 390 and z OS manual Note In Release 5 2 3 you can select the Sort alphabetically check box to sort a list of multiple servers WebFOCUS Client Enhancements WebFOCUS Summary of New Features 6 7 Example Overriding WebFOCUS Default Settings for a Specific Server Node To override WebFOCUS default settings for a specific WebFOCUS Reporting Server node set the IBI_REPORT_USER and IBI_REPORT_PASS settings to values that are appropriate for your environment In this example an already authenticated Web server user ID is used for the connection to the WebFOCUS Reporting Server and no password is required This example is not supported when connecting to a Windows based WebFOCUS Reporting Server IBI_REPORT_USER amp REMOTE_USER IBI_REPORT_PASS TRUSTED In this example a valid user ID and password are required to connect to the WebFOC
206. _xsl If the original XML document produced by the WebFOCUS Reporting Server was not type SYSFEX the WebFOCUS Client will not perform internal and external transformations The WebFOCUS Client will instead perform one transformation using the XSL document pointed to by the URL stored in this variable This setting is blank by default Settings Description WebFOCUS Client Enhancements WebFOCUS Summary of New Features 6 17 IBIWF_language The language in which your WebFOCUS environment is running WF_AUTOSIGNON Auto prompting of server credentials Possible values are YES Displays a dynamic server signon page after a failed connection to the WebFOCUS Reporting Server YES is the default value NO Disables the dynamic server signon page Users will receive a message after a failed connection to the WebFOCUS Reporting Server PREPROMPT Displays a dynamic server signon page before attempting to connect to the WebFOCUS Reporting Server for the first time This is a new setting in Release 5 2 3 IBI_RES_ANALYZER Specifies whether WebFOCUS Resource Analyzer is installed IBIF_persistentamp Turns on the persistent amp amp feature YES is the default value To disable set to NO ENCRYPT If you select the ENCRYPT check box the cgivars wfs file will be encrypted When you access the file again using the console it will be decrypted for you to view and the ENCRYPT check box will still be selected If y
207. a Report Icon Add TOCs to a Heading Example Navigating Sorted Data From a TOC Icon Navigating a Multi Level HTML TOC in a Page Heading Navigating Reports From a Table of Contents 1 142 Information Builders Syntax How to Add a Multi Level TOC as a Report Icon Using a SET command the syntax is SET COMPOUND BYTOC n ON TABLE SET COMPOUND BYTOC n Using a PCHOLD command the syntax is ON TABLE PCHOLD FORMAT HTML BYTOC n where n Represents the number of vertical sort BY fields to include in the TOC beginning with the first highest level sort field in the request The hierarchy of sort fields is determined by the order in which they are specified in the request 1 is the default value meaning that only the highest level sort field and its values are displayed in the TOC By default a section break is placed after the first highest level sort field unless otherwise specified in the request For details see Grouping Sort Fields for Display on page 1 147 Note Single quotation marks are required when you use the SET command to specify the number of sort fields you want to include in the TOC Single quotation marks are not required when BYTOC is specified without a number or when it is specified in a PCHOLD command with or without a number WebFOCUS Reporting Language Enhancements WebFOCUS Summary of New Features 1 143 Example Navigating Sorted Data From a TOC Icon The following reque
208. a Single Space Example Reducing Multiple Spaces to a Single Space Adjusting Field Displays 1 156 Information Builders Example Reducing Multiple Spaces to a Single Space The SQUEEZ function reduces multiple spaces in the NAME field to a single blank and stores the result in a field with the format A30 DEFINE FILE EMPLOYEE NAME A30 FIRST_NAME LAST_NAME END TABLE FILE EMPLOYEE PRINT NAME AND COMPUTE SQNAME A30 SQUEEZ 30 NAME A30 WHERE DEPARTMENT EQ MIS END The output is Removing a Character From a Field The STRIP function removes all occurrences of a specific character from a string The resulting character string has the same length as the original string but is padded on the right with spaces This is useful for removing punctuation in a DEFINE or COMPUTE command NAME SQNAME MARY SMITH MARY SMITH DIANE JONES DIANE JONES JOHN MCCOY JOHN MCCOY ROSEMARIE BLACKWOOD ROSEMARIE BLACKWOOD MARY GREENSPAN MARY GREENSPAN BARBARA CROSS BARBARA CROSS How to Remove a Character From a String Example Removing Occurrences of a Character From a String Reporting WebFOCUS Reporting Language Enhancements WebFOCUS Summary of New Features 1 157 Syntax How to Remove a Character From a String STRIP length string char outfield where length Integer Is the length in characters of string and outfield or a field that contains the length string Alphanumeric Is an alphanu
209. a up to the last non blank character How to Remove Characters From a String Example Creating an AnV Field by Removing Trailing Blanks Using Variable Length Character Expressions 1 62 Information Builders Syntax How to Remove Characters From a String TRIMV trim_where string slength_limit pattern plength_limit outfield where trim_where Alphanumeric Is one of the following which indicates where to remove the pattern L removes leading occurrences T removes trailing occurrences B removes both leading and trailing occurrences string Alphanumeric Is the source field or an alphanumeric constant enclosed in single quotation marks If it is a field it can have An or AnV format If it is a field of type AnV its length is taken from the length bytes stored in the field If slength_limit is smaller than the actual length the source string is truncated to this upper limit slength_limit Numeric Is a positive numeric value The integer part is an upper limit for the length of the input string pattern Alphanumeric Is a field or an alphanumeric constant enclosed in single quotation marks that is the pattern to remove If it is a field it can have An or AnV format If it is a field of type AnV its length is taken from the length bytes stored in the field If plength_limit is smaller than the actual length the pattern is truncated to this limit plength_limit Numeric Is a positive nu
210. additional lines identical to those displayed by GET CHILDREN ADD How to Create One Summary Row for an FML Hierarchy Consolidate FML Hierarchy Data to Any Level and Depth Display the Same Record in Multiple FOR Rows Example Displaying One Summary Row for an FML Hierarchy Displaying Consolidated Data For Multiple Hierarchy Levels WebFOCUS Reporting Language Enhancements WebFOCUS Summary of New Features 1 79 Syntax How to Create One Summary Row for an FML Hierarchy TABLE FILE filename SUM FOR hierarchyfield parentvalue ADD n ALL AS CAPTION text LABEL label END where filename Is the name of the file to be used in the FML request If the hierarchy for this request cannot be loaded automatically you must have previously issued the LOAD CHART command to load the hierarchy hierarchyfield Is the hierarchy field name If the request references a joined structure the name must be the field name from the host file The alias name is not supported parentvalue Is the parent value that determines the starting point in the hierarchy for the aggregation ADD Displays the parent and n levels of its children on one row summing the numeric data values displayed on the row This corresponds to the FML syntax parentvalue or CHILD1 OR CHILD2 OR To display the sum of just the children you must display the parent row display the summary row and use a recap to subtract the parent row f
211. aintain 9 4 phonetic descriptors 8 5 POSITV function 1 56 PostScript fonts 1 160 predicting values 1 2 and multivariate regression 1 18 FORECAST 1 3 2 26 prefix operators 1 31 and calculated values 1 38 and multiple commands 1 40 on summary values 1 32 to 1 33 preselecting items by value in Maintain 9 13 Preview screen 4 18 printing graph output 1 97 procedures 9 6 running from Maintain 9 6 procedures in WebFOCUS Reporting Server Console 9 2 profile keyword 7 2 profiles directory 7 4 Progress Data Adapter 8 20 project search in Maintain 9 9 Project Wizard 2 4 projects and applications 9 2 public users 3 18 Index I 16 Information Builders public views 3 13 to 3 14 punctuating large numbers 1 118 to 1 119 Q quartiles 4 6 to 4 7 queued connections 7 4 Quick Links 6 22 Quiesce control 7 4 quit option 7 17 R radio buttons 2 44 Radio Buttons Properties window 2 45 Radio Buttons Properties window 2 45 ranges 1 27 to 1 28 RDBMS return codes in Maintain 9 32 READLIMIT tests 8 12 Recent link 3 15 RECOMPUTE command 1 31 prefix operators and 1 32 to 1 33 records 4 11 selecting 4 11 recreating synonyms 2 7 redirection settings 6 18 reducing column width 1 138 reformatting fields 1 116 to 1 117 REGRESS 1 2 and multivariate regression 1 18 REGRESS method 1 18 2 26 regression equations 1 18 Remote Procedure Calls RPCs 7 28 remote server contr
212. al Added dialog box options You can Select a column component Title Data or Title and Data and apply styling options font and font color grid border or background color using the new Style tab on the Field Properties dialog box In addition you can create a condition and apply to it any style available on the Style tab For Style tab options see Field Properties Style Tab in the Report Painter Basics chapter in the Creating Reports With Graphical Tools manual For procedures see Styling With Fonts Colors and Grids in the Styling Reports With the Report Painter chapter in the Creating Reports With Graphical Tools manual Copy an existing drill down component to a column component using the new Drill Down tab on the Field Properties dialog box You can also open a child report from this tab for viewing or modification in a new instance of Report Painter For Drill Down tab options see Field Properties Drill Down Tab in the Report Painter Basics chapter in the Creating Reports With Graphical Tools manual For procedures see Creating a Drill Down Procedure in the Creating Reports With the Report Painter chapter in the Creating Reports With Graphical Tools manual Remove an underline from a column title on a report using the new General tab on the Field Properties dialog box See Field Properties General Tab in the Report Painter Basics chapter in the Creating Reports With Graphical Tools manual Developer Stu
213. alues are indented at each level For language implementation of this feature see Indenting Row Titles in an FML Hierarchy in Chapter 1 WebFOCUS Reporting Language Enhancements Procedure How to Adjust Indents for Captions in a Hierarchy If you wish to adjust the indents 1 Choose Indent from the File menu The Indent dialog box opens If a hierarchy has not been defined in the Master File for the data you are reporting against the Indent option does not appear 2 Choose one of the following radio buttons Turn indent off This option left justifies titles for values at all levels of the hierarchy Select a value of indent then enter an explicit measurement to represent the number of spaces to be indented based on the number of blank spaces preceding the caption text in the Master File and the unit of measurement defined in the Page Setup dialog box inches centimeters or points For example suppose that the caption text is preceded by two blanks and the base measurement is inches If you enter 2 each level of values in the hierarchy is indented 2 inches for each leading space 2 x 2 from the previous level Displaying an FML Hierarchy With the Financial Report Painter When reporting from an FML hierarchy you can dynamically retrieve and display hierarchical data using two variations Show only children displays only the children not the parent value for those children Show with children
214. and run the report by clicking the Save and Run buttons on the toolbar The main report appears in the browser 17 To view the pop up menu of drill down options a Place the cursor over one of the highlighted components to reveal the drill down icon a hand b Click the component The pop up menu appears 18 Click each of the menu options to open the corresponding drill down item The currently selected option appears in red and is underlined An additional browser window opens with your output 19 Click Back on your browser to return to the main report Developer Studio Enhancements WebFOCUS Summary of New Features 2 25 20 Click a highlighted component to redisplay the pop up menu If you click the last field of the report output scroll bars appear in the browser window if they are required for access to all of the menu options For examples and details on implementing this feature see Creating a Multiple Drill Down Procedure in the Creating Reports With the Report Painter chapter in the Creating Reports With Graphical Tools manual Calculating Trends and Predicting Values in Developer Studio 2 26 Information Builders Calculating Trends and Predicting Values in Developer Studio You can calculate trends in data and predict values beyond the range of those stored in the data source with the Forecast and Regress commands Forecast uses either averages or a linear regression line to distinguish trend
215. and vertical Y axis labels Selection Criteria Limit the data that appears in your graph by creating WHERE statements WHERE statements limit data by creating parameters the data must satisfy before it is included in the data set Properties Customize your graph using the subtabs Options Settings X axis Y axis Pie of the Properties tab These include customizing fonts X axis and Y axis orientation output destination graphs on servers label locations for all graph types legend location and much more HTML Graph Assistant is fully documented in the Creating a Graph With Graph Assistant chapter in the WebFOCUS Managed Reporting End User s Manual HTML Graph Assistant enhancements include Addition of Several Templates to the Styles Tab Updated Styles Tab to Include Graph Types and Graph Styles Addition of the Preview Screen Auto Update Feature Added to the Preview Screen HTML Graph Assistant is fully documented in the Creating a Graph With Graph Assistant chapter in the WebFOCUS Managed Reporting End User s Manual In this section Addition of Several Templates to the Styles Tab Updated Styles Tab to Include Graph Types and Graph Styles Addition of the Preview Screen Auto Update Feature Added to the Preview Screen HTML Graph Assistant 4 18 Information Builders Addition of Several Templates to the Styles Tab In Release 5 2 3 the following graph types are available
216. and z OS 7 26 creating through Server Console 7 26 recreating 2 7 syntax parsing in Maintain 9 37 SYS_MGR DBMS_ERRORCODE 9 32 SYS_MGR ENGINE 9 30 SYS_MGR FOCSET 9 20 T TAB format 1 153 tab names 1 134 tab delimited data sources 2 12 tab delimited files 1 48 extract files 1 154 output files 1 153 TABLASTPAGE variable 1 29 Table of Contents TOC 1 141 table types on OS 400 8 13 TABT data source 1 151 2 12 TABT format 1 153 to 1 154 target object 10 16 Target Setup tab 10 18 FOCUS files 10 18 Fusion files 10 18 relational data sources 10 18 10 22 target tables in ETL 10 16 pre loading options 10 17 tasks 5 6 distributing 5 6 file type 5 6 report type 5 6 URL type 5 6 temporary columns 10 15 creating 10 15 temporary fields 4 10 testing procedures in Maintain 9 37 Text Console 7 17 text searching in Maintain 9 9 TILE column 1 25 4 6 to 4 7 tile fields 1 25 4 6 to 4 7 TILES parameter 1 25 TILES phrase 4 6 time display 2 8 time display options 2 9 time formats 2 9 timestamp columns 9 40 TLS Transport Layer Security 7 24 TOC Table of Contents 1 141 toolbars 3 15 in Dashboard 3 15 3 17 toolboxes 3 16 trace facility in Maintain 9 15 TRACEOFF parameter in Maintain procedure 9 20 TRACEON parameter in Maintain procedure 9 20 TRACEUSER parameter in Maintain procedure 9 20 tracing for the WebFOCUS Client 6 22 tracing in Dashboard 3 20 tracing
217. anguage Enhancements Describes new features and enhancements to the WebFOCUS Reporting Language 2 Developer Studio Enhancements Describes new features and enhancements to Developer Studio 3 Managed Reporting Enhancements Describes new features that enhance Managed Reporting including User Administration Services Dashboard the applet environment and migration and extract utilities 4 Ad Hoc Reporting Enhancements Describes new features that enhance ad hoc reporting capabilities These enhancements include OLAP Report Assistant and Graph Assistant features 5 ReportCaster Enhancements Describes new features and enhancements to ReportCaster 6 WebFOCUS Client Enhancements Describes new features that enhance the WebFOCUS Client and National Language Support NLS 7 WebFOCUS Reporting Server Enhancements Describes new features that enhance the WebFOCUS Reporting Server 8 Data Adapter Enhancements Describes support for new DBMSs new versions of existing DBMSs and features within DBMSs 9 WebFOCUS Maintain Enhancements Describes the enhancements that have been made to the Maintain Language Server and Development environments Preface iv Information Builders Documentation Conventions The following conventions apply throughout this manual 10 ETL Manager Enhancements Describes enhancements to ETL Manager 11 Resource Analyzer and Resource Governor Enhancements Describes enhan
218. anguage Enhancements WebFOCUS Summary of New Features 1 5 infield Is any numeric field It can be the same field as result_field or a different field It cannot be a date time field or a numeric field with date display options interval Is the increment to add to each sortfield value after the last data point to create the next value This must be a positive integer To sort in descending order use the BY HIGHEST phrase The result of adding this number to the sortfield values is converted to the same format as sortfield For date fields the minimal component in the format determines how the number is interpreted For example if the format is YMD MDY or DMY an interval value of 2 is interpreted as meaning two days if the format is YM the 2 is interpreted as meaning two months npredict Is the number of predictions for FORECAST to calculate It must be an integer greater than or equal to zero Zero indicates that you do not want predictions and is only supported with a non recursive FORECAST For the SEASONAL method npredict is the number of periods to calculate The number of points generated is nperiod npredict nperiod For the SEASONAL method is a positive whole number that specifies the number of data points in a period npoint1 Is the number of values to average for the MOVAVE method For EXPAVE DOUBLEXP and SEASONAL this number is used to calculate the weights for each component in the average This value
219. apply date format and time display options to date fields using the Date Formats dialog box which can be accessed from the Formats dialog box In previous releases you could only select different date formats for example MDY DMY and so on from the Format dialog box Procedure How to Change the Display of the Date Format 1 Select the date field that you want to change in the Report Painter window 2 Right click and select Format from the shortcut menu or Choose Format from the Properties menu The Format dialog box opens 3 Click the Date button on the Format dialog box The Date Formats dialog box opens 4 Scroll the Date list to select a date format 5 Click OK How to Change the Display of the Date Format Change the Time Display Developer Studio Enhancements WebFOCUS Summary of New Features 2 9 Procedure How to Change the Time Display You have the option of changing the time display when you use a date field that contains a time component in the Master File 1 Select the date time field that you want to change in the Report Painter window 2 Right click and select Format from the shortcut menu or Choose Format from the Properties menu The Format dialog box opens 3 Click the Date button on the Format dialog box The Date Formats dialog box opens 4 Scroll the Time Options list to select the one s you wish to change 5 Click OK Comma Suppression Display Op
220. aster Distribution Server queue Depending on the status of the job you can then delete a job change its priority or run a Job Process Log Report Log Generates a list of schedules based on criteria you specify The resulting list may then be used to view a Job Process Log Report or purge a log transaction These actions may be performed for a specific schedule or for all schedules Execution ID Adds or deletes an Execution ID which is a valid user ID that is used to run a scheduled Task on a specified server You can also change the password of an Execution ID In Release 5 2 3 you can change the Execution ID for specified owners on a specific server For more information about how to accomplish this see How to Change an Execution ID in the ReportCaster Console chapter in the ReportCaster Development and Administration manual Tools Globally replaces field values in the ReportCaster Repository Logoff Logs off the ReportCaster Console Help Opens the online help file For detailed information about how to access and use the ReportCaster Console see the ReportCaster Console chapter in the ReportCaster Development and Administration manual Log Enhancements ReportCaster enables you to Suppress log file messages for burst values not distributed Add burst values to log information indicating successful and unsuccessful distribution Include distribution information by Task For
221. ata sources in which field values are separated by commas This format type can be imported into applications such as Excel or Lotus Tab delimited data sources are sequential data sources in which field values are separated by tabs To access these output formats in the Report Painter choose Output from the Report menu The Report Options dialog box opens at the Output tab Click the Hold Data button in the Hold Save section The Hold dialog box opens where you can select a format from the Hold Format drop down list For language implementation of this feature see Output Formats for Application Processing in Chapter 1 WebFOCUS Reporting Language Enhancements Developer Studio Enhancements WebFOCUS Summary of New Features 2 13 Configuration for ANSI Windows Format In Release 5 2 3 you can configure WebFOCUS Developer Studio to store data and all development components in ANSI Windows format without changing the ANSI OEM settings in the Registry Editor Procedure How to Configure Developer Studio for ANSI Windows Format 1 Select WebFOCUS Developer Studio from the WebFOCUS 52 Developer Studio program group The Developer Studio Explorer opens 2 Select the Window menu option and then choose Options The Windows Options dialog box opens 3 Select the Store data as ANSI check box and click OK You need to restart WebFOCUS Developer Studio in order for this setting to take effect Creating and Styling Rep
222. ation Builders MVS type security settings 7 31 MVSAPP feature 7 29 N name spaces 10 2 National Language Support NLS 6 20 7 5 configuring a WebFOCUS Client 6 20 configuring a WebFOCUS Reporting Server 7 9 native Excel formulas 1 133 Native Interface 8 21 support 8 23 navbar htm file 2 51 navigation 1 141 NE_MASK logical operator in Maintain 9 35 nesting requests in ETL 10 19 new report columns 4 10 NEXT command in Maintain and screening options 9 35 NLS National Language Support 6 20 6 23 configuring a WebFOCUS Client 6 20 configuring a WebFOCUS Reporting Server 6 20 directory structures 6 28 dynamic language switch 6 24 supported languages 6 28 NLS configuration file 7 11 NLS Configuration Wizard 7 5 7 9 nlscfg err file 6 21 7 11 NLSCHR Maintain function 9 33 NOBREAK phrase 1 125 NODATA parameter in Maintain procedure 9 20 noibitranslate flag 6 33 6 38 6 40 non aggregated fields for Essbase 8 15 non consolidating members in Essbase 8 16 None option 4 16 non FOCUS files 7 32 non standard aliases 1 105 establishing 1 105 normal distribution 1 21 NORMSDIST function 1 23 to 1 24 NORMSDST function 1 21 NORMSINV function 1 21 1 23 to 1 24 NOT_IN logical operator in Maintain 9 35 numbers 1 22 standard normal deviation 1 22 numeric data 1 25 1 27 4 6 numeric data grouped in tiles 4 7 numeric functions 1 23 FMLINFO 1 87 to 1 88 NORMSDIST 1 23 to 1 24 NOR
223. ation Enhancements 1 132 Information Builders The output is WebFOCUS Reporting Language Enhancements WebFOCUS Summary of New Features 1 133 Example Generating Native Excel Formulas for Column Totals The following request illustrates how a column total in a report request is translated to an Excel formula when you use the format EXL2K FORMULA Notice that the formatting of the column total TYPE GRANDTOTAL is retained in the Excel 2000 spreadsheet When you select the total in the report the equation SUM B4 B10 displays in the formula bar representing the column total as a sum of cell ranges TABLE FILE SHORT HEADING Projected Return By Region SUM PROJECTED_RETURN AS RETURN BY REGION AS REGION ON TABLE COLUMN TOTAL ON TABLE SET STYLE TYPE REPORT COLOR BLUE BACKCOLOR SILVER SIZE 9 TYPE HEADING STYLE BOLD SIZE 14 TYPE TITLE STYLE BOLD UNDERLINE SIZE 10 TYPE GRANDTOTAL STYLE BOLD ENDSTYLE ON TABLE PCHOLD FORMAT EXL2K FORMULA END The output is You can translate any total subtotal row total or column total to an Excel formula Excel Integration Enhancements 1 134 Information Builders Example Customizing Worksheet Tabs in EXL2K Reports The following request illustrates how you can replace the default worksheet tab name in an EXL2K report using the TITLETEXT attribute in your StyleSheet TABLE FILE SHORT SUM PROJECTED_RETURN BY REGION ON TABLE
224. ation mark adjacent to the existing one For example if you input Joe Smitty Smith the output will be Joe Smitty Smith The extension or file type for this format is CSV A Master File is created for this format type when the command used to create the output file is HOLD The SUFFIX in the generated Master File is COM Syntax How to Control Retrieval of Comma delimited Data Sources With PCOMMA SET PCOMMA ON OFF where ON Enables the retrieval of comma delimited data sources created by a PC application It indicates that alphanumeric data is enclosed in double quotation marks and each record is completely contained on one line and is terminated with a carriage return and line feed OFF Does not enable the retrieval of comma delimited data sources created by a PC application It indicates that alphanumeric data is not enclosed in double quotation marks and each record is terminated with a comma and dollar sign OFF is the default value WebFOCUS Reporting Language Enhancements WebFOCUS Summary of New Features 1 153 COMT Format The COMT format saves the column headings in the first row of the output file It produces a variable length text file with fields separated by commas and with character values enclosed in double quotation marks This is useful for further processing in a database application This format type can be imported into applications such as Excel or Lotus Leading blanks are removed from nu
225. ators in the Including Totals and Subtotals chapter in the Creating Reports With WebFOCUS Language manual ASQ LST AVE MAX CNT MIN FST SUM FST MIN LST SUM means LST if SUMPREFIX LST means FST if SUMPREFIX FST MAX WebFOCUS Reporting Language Enhancements WebFOCUS Summary of New Features 1 33 Syntax How to Use Prefix Operators With Summary Values BY ON sortfield AS text1 summaryoption MULTILINES operator_and_field_list AS text2 WHEN expression where sortfield Is a sort field When the value of the sort field changes it triggers the summary operation text1 Is the column heading to use for the sort field on the report output summaryoption Is one of the following SUBTOTAL SUB TOTAL RECOMPUTE or SUMMARIZE MULTILINES Suppresses the printing of a summary line for every sort break that has only one detail line Note that MULTILINES suppresses the summary line even if a prefix operator is used to specify a different operation for the summary line MULTI LINES is a synonym for MULTILINES operator_and_field_list Can have one of the following forms prefixop includes all display fields on the summary line If a prefix operator is specified it is applied to all fields If the prefix operator is not supported with alphanumeric fields alphanumeric fields are not included on the summary line prefixop is applied to every numeric column in the report output Ever
226. ault value network Corresponds to the user privilege access this computer from the network batch Corresponds to the user privilege log on as a batch job For example if the user privilege for log on locally is disabled but access this computer from the network is enabled the logon_method should be set to network Assigning Administrative Privileges 7 22 Information Builders Assigning Administrative Privileges The configuration keyword server_admin_id has been introduced to allow the server administrator to assign administrative rights to other users in the server configuration file edaserve cfg Syntax How to Assign Administrative Privileges server_admin_id user_ID password SRV APP OPR where server_admin_id Defines a comma separated list of administrators For each entry the list includes the user ID password and administrative level At least one member must be defined in the list All users not in this list are limited to monitoring functions only user_ID Is the ID of the user being granted administrative privileges password Is an encrypted password required if security mode is WCPROTECT or running on a Windows operating system for at least one member of the list SRV Assigns Server Administrator privileges giving the user the right to perform all administrative tasks available through the WebFOCUS Reporting Server Console including the assignment of administrative or operator pr
227. auto increment field Concurrent FOCUS Data Source Access The Shared Application Server MNTCON STARTSERVER supports simultaneous use of FOCUS data sources and is no longer limited to relational data sources The Shared Application Server provides the scalability options necessary for the access of WebFOCUS Maintain applications by many concurrent users The enhanced Shared Application Server allows the multi session per agent functionality to be used for WebFOCUS Maintain applications updating FOCUS data sources For complete instructions on preparing and running an application on a Shared Application Server see Developing an Application for a Shared Application Server in the Running WebFOCUS Maintain Applications chapter in the Developing WebFOCUS Maintain Applications manual Example Setting Up a Shared Application Server For Concurrent Access of FOCUS Data Sources WebFOCUS Maintain Enhancements WebFOCUS Summary of New Features 9 43 Example Setting Up a Shared Application Server For Concurrent Access of FOCUS Data Sources The following is a sample profile EDASPROF PRF To run the starting procedure NYACCTS use the MNTCON RUNIMAGE NYACCTS command from a launch form In the example the USE command is required for FOCUS data sources NYACCTS and REGIONS APP ENABLE APP PATH ACCOUNTS USE NYACCTS ON FOCSU01 REGIONS ON FOCSU01 END SET COMMIT ON MNTCON PREPARESERVER MNTCON LOADIMAGE NYACCTS
228. bFOCUS Reporting Server running under UNIX Systems Services USS can communicate with one or more FOCUS Database Servers sink machines running in the z OS and OS 390 environment in addition to one FOCUS Database Server running under the WebFOCUS Reporting Server for OS 390 and z OS This feature is supported in OS 390 2 10 and higher operating systems It is not supported on VM operating systems How to Access a FOCUS Database Server on z OS and OS 390 Example Retrieving Data From a FOCUS Database Server on z OS and OS 390 FOCUS Database USS Server FOCUS Data Source Any iWay Client Server z OS and OS 390 Address Space IBI Subsystem z OS and OS 390 Address Space iWay Web Console I O to DASD TCP IP WebFOCUS Reporting Server Enhancements WebFOCUS Summary of New Features 7 19 Syntax How to Access a FOCUS Database Server on z OS and OS 390 To enable communication between the Server for OS 390 and z OS and a FOCUS Database Server on z OS and OS 390 perform the following steps 1 In the communications configuration file odin cfg of the OS 390 and z OS add an SBS node block FOCUS Database Client NODE sbsname BEGIN PROTOCOL SBS CLASS SUCLIENT SERVICE qualif focsu data END where sbsname Is a unique node name This is also the ddname for the FOCUS Database Server communication data set The server automatically performs the allocation of the communication data set based on
229. bas N2 Direct Call to assign this ISN value to the inserted record Adabas returns Response Code 113 if this value was already assigned to another record in the file or if it is larger than the MAXISN in effect for the file Switching Access Mode Using NOPACCESS In Release 5 2 3 a customization parameter SET NOPACCESS FIND enables you to switch access mode from RL Read Logical to FIND in order to optimize performance when the NOP superdescriptor defined in a root segment is derived from fields that belong to different Master File segments This option overrides the CALLTYPE RL setting Data Adapter Enhancements WebFOCUS Summary of New Features 8 9 Syntax How to Optimize Performance By Switching Access Mode ENGINE ADBSINX SET NOPACCESS MIXED RL FIND where MIXED Allows the adapter to choose the access mode RL or FIND MIXED is the default value RL Switches the access mode to Read Logical FIND Switches the access mode from RL to FIND if a field defined with TYPE NOP is selected even if CALLTYPE RL has been specified Data Adapter for Allbase on HP UX The Allbase data source is supported on the HP UX platform The Data Adapter for Allbase supports read write access to Allbase data structures The Data Adapter for Allbase provides the following enhanced capabilities Support for the CREATE SYNONYM command for the generation of Master Files Direct SQL Passthru SQL translation
230. before you create the synonym SQL ESSBASE SET AGGREGATE NOOP ON OFF where ON Allows the use of SUM on NOOP Essbase members With this setting Essbase members are not added to the Access File ON is the default value OFF Does not allow the use of SUM on NOOP Essbase members Members with the consolidation property are added to the Access File Note Any member of the Accounts dimension in the Essbase outline tagged with or as a consolidation property automatically appears in the Access File with AGGREGATE NO Data Adapter Enhancements WebFOCUS Summary of New Features 8 17 Suppressing Shared Members Shared members in Essbase store pointers to data that is stored in the real member Therefore although the data is shared between the two members it is only stored one time You can exclude shared members from reports using the SET SUPSHARE command Syntax How to Suppress Shared Members in Essbase SQL ESSBASE SET SUPSHARE ON OFF where ON Excludes shared members in a report OFF Includes shared members in a report OFF is the default value Suppressing Zero Values In Release 5 2 3 Essbase stores zero values that you can exclude from reports using the SET SUPERZEROS command The setting applies to an entire row If one member in a row has a value of zero and the other values in the same row have values other than zero the zero value is not suppressed Syntax How to Suppre
231. button to run procedures against the default server The Check button replaces the Run button that appeared in the Define Set Use Filedef and Let tools When you click Check the current procedure is run against the default server A new dialog box opens It displays the component s code and either an error message or text stating that no error exists Increased Number of Columns Generated by Across In Release 5 2 3 each Across selection can generate up to 1 056 columns of data The total number of Across columns is equal to the total number of horizontal sort field values multiplied by the total number of display fields Developer Studio Enhancements WebFOCUS Summary of New Features 2 21 Creating Multiple Drill Downs With the Report Painter In Release 5 2 3 you can create multiple hyperlinks for a single value on a summary report chosen from any combination of supported actions For example you can create hyperlinks that run a detail report or Maintain procedure execute a JavaScript function and link to a URL When you click a field in the summary report a pop up menu appears with the possible drill down options The multiple drill down feature applies to HTML reports and format HTMTABLE In the Output tab on the Report Options dialog box the Select Format option must be HTML Data fields in the body of the report not to headings subheadings footings or subfootings For language implementation of t
232. c French Canadian fr French Standard es Spanish de German Standard at German Austrian zh Chinese Simplified GB tw Chinese Traditional Big 5 ko Korean ja Japanese When you select more than one language during installation the value of the multiLanguage variable is true 1 and therefore a language selection link is displayed on all logon pages If you select only one language the value is false 0 no link is present and the user interface uses one language All languages declared under the ArrayofLanguage variable populate the dynamic language link The first value is the default in the event that the browser language is not available The administrator can make changes to the ibimultilanguage js file Customizing the User Interface 6 30 Information Builders Customizing the User Interface All text that appears in a WebFOCUS window is located in a resource file To customize the text in a window such as a logon page you must edit the associated resource file This feature allows you to add another language provided that all resource files are translated for that language This documentation covers customization of htm end user files only For more support and information on adding a language contact your Information Builders representative In this section Architecture Locating the Name of a Resource File Interpreting the Resource File Editing t
233. can drag and drop the filter of your choice from the fields frame to the expressions frame Designing Joins HTML Report Assistant has a redesigned Join Tool which you access from the Join tab The process of creating joins involves selecting each Master File you want to add and then selecting your joins When you click the Create Join button the join name and syntax are displayed You can also edit or delete a join from the Existing Join statements list See Joins in the Creating a Report With Report Assistant chapter in the Managed Reporting End User s Manual HTML Report Assistant 4 16 Information Builders End User Drill Down Capability Along with Managed Reporting Administrators and Developers end users can drill down to Standard Reports from within Reporting Objects and My Reports In Release 5 2 3 end users can also drill down from one My Report to another My Report The end user drill down capability enables users to Create drill downs to Standard Reports from Reporting Objects Run or delete drill downs created by Administrators or Developers to Standard Reports from My Reports Delete does not alter the Reporting Object since it only applies to ad hoc requests Note The default is that functionality exists for all users Performing OLAP Operations Directly From the Report In Release 5 2 3 the Enable OLAP options in the Report Assistant and the OLAP Panel options in Developer Studio control how users can
234. cations manual Customizing Update Assist Designs In Release 5 2 3 by using a new XML based definition language developers can create custom looks for applications generated with Update Assist They can add corporate logos and Cascading Style Sheets CSS to create WebFOCUS Maintain applications that all share a common corporate look and feel For technical documentation on how to use this feature contact your Information Builders representative Developer Studio Enhancements WebFOCUS Summary of New Features 2 53 Calendar Control for Date Formatted Fields in Update Assist In Release 5 2 3 a calendar icon appears next to changeable date formatted fields When a user clicks the calendar icon a calendar appears any date selected on this calendar is entered into the date field Users can also enter dates into the date field manually Right Click Menu Options on Trees If you have selected Key values selected via tree in Step 3 of the Update Assist Wizard your update application generates a form in which the user can select records using a hierarchical tree control In Release 5 2 3 users can perform update functions directly from the tree by right clicking the tree item and selecting one of the options Select opens the record in the form on the right side of the application Delete removes the record from the data source New enables the user to add a new record to the data source Search enables a user
235. ccessed within the tab Availability of tabs and buttons depends on the type of user logging on to WebFOCUS or Dashboard Self service users do not have access to the Join tab Run Deferred Save and Save As buttons or OLAP options in the Report Options tab HTML Report Assistant 4 10 Information Builders WebFOCUS lists available fields in two formats as a list of fields or as a tree separated by segments You can select the Fields radio button to toggle between the two formats Select report fields by highlighting the field and clicking Add for Column Fields Sort Fields and Across Fields From either the List or Tree view you can drag and drop or use Add To multi select use List to include fields and then drag and drop or click Add List is the default value List mode is the default for the Field List Box List mode allows you to view one or more options name alias title remarks format description segment colno and file name In List mode you can sort any list of variables alphabetically from A to Z or from Z to A by clicking the option name for example name or alias In tree mode the following options are provided in a box under the tree segment alias title description and format When you specify a column you must designate the selected field as Sum WebFOCUS adds the values together or Detail WebFOCUS prints the values individually Sum is the default selection In Report Options you can enter your own re
236. ccomplish this by checking the server property on a domain report or reporting object and selecting it from a list You can also override the server s default search behavior by setting the Application Path property This allows you to select or enter the application s that are searched by the server Note You must have the Data Servers privilege in order to change the Server or Application Path The Data Servers feature is fully documented in the Data Servers Feature chapter in the WebFOCUS Managed Reporting Developer s Manual Custom Reports in Managed Reporting 3 8 Information Builders Custom Reports in Managed Reporting End users can edit existing reports or create new reports called Custom Reports Users can run run deferred share and schedule Custom Reports just like other reports Custom Reports are located in the My Reports tab in a folder called Custom Reports This gives an Analytical user Administrator or Developer the capability of creating a new report with the assist tools or with an editor To gain this capability the Administrator must grant the user the Advanced privilege Administrators automatically have this new privilege and can assign it to Analytical users and Developers in the User Administration interface Procedure How to Create a Custom Report 1 Right click the Custom Reports folder and select New Managed Reporting Enhancements WebFOCUS Summary of New Features 3 9 2
237. ced at the start of the next line If it is a sort field the next field is on a new line offset by two spaces from the beginning of the current line Example Stacking Columns With Multiple FOLD LINE Phrases SET ONLINE FMT PDF TABLE FILE MOVIES SUM WHOLESALEPR LISTPR BY CATEGORY FOLD LINE BY TITLE BY DIRECTOR FOLD LINE IF CATEGORY EQ FOREIGN OR DRAMA END The output is Specifying Multiple Drill Down Links 1 140 Information Builders Specifying Multiple Drill Down Links You can create multiple drill down links for a single value on a summary report chosen from any combination of supported actions For example you can create links to a detail report or Maintain procedure a JavaScript function and a URL The user selects the desired drill down action from a pop up menu that is automatically generated This feature is available for HTML reports and format HTMTABLE Developer Studio has an interface that automatically generates the code See Creating Multiple Drill Downs With the Report Painter in Chapter 2 Developer Studio Enhancements The types of links you can create are fully documented in the Linking a Report to Other Resources chapter in the Creating Reports With WebFOCUS Language manual Syntax How to Create Multiple Drill Down Links TYPE type subtype DRILLMENUITEM description DrillDown n type_of_link where type Identifies the report component that you select in the Web browser to exec
238. cedure in the Procedure Editor 2 Place your cursor in the Declarations section 3 Right click and select Import WebFOCUS Parameters 4 In the Open dialog box select the WebFOCUS report you want to import parameters from and click OK 5 In the Import WebFOCUS Parameters into Maintain dialog box assign new data types to the parameters you want to import using the Type Wizard and click OK WebFOCUS Maintain places the following code at the beginning of the procedure Declare variable A4 IWC GetAppCgiValue variable Reference Variable Binding Guidelines If you import a parameter from a WebFOCUS report into an existing Maintain procedure make sure that the parameter name matches the variable name used in the procedure For example if you use a variable named CustomerNo in a Maintain procedure to determine which record is pulled from a customer data source but you use CustomerID as the parameter name in the WebFOCUS report that launches the Maintain procedure variable binding will not work You can however manually change the variable name in the Maintain procedure so that it matches the parameter name You cannot import parameters from a WebFOCUS report that drills down to a different Maintain procedure WebFOCUS Maintain Enhancements WebFOCUS Summary of New Features 9 19 Reference Import WebFOCUS Parameters Into Maintain Dialog Box When importing parameters from a WebFOCUS report into a Mai
239. cedures page of the WebFOCUS Reporting Server Console has been enhanced to support a directory tree structure Directories on the Application Path are displayed in a tree format with procedures or HTML files appearing in individual folders Clicking a procedure displays the options that can be performed with that procedure Selecting an HTML file from the Procedures page opens that file Text Console Enhancements Two options have been added to the edastart command which is used to start the Workspace Manager from the command line and to invoke the Text Console quit Enables you to exit the Text Console and return to the shell without stopping the Workspace Manager Using this option suspends the display of edaprint log messages in the Text Console but does not interrupt the flow of these messages to the edaprint log itself console Enables you to return to the Text Console and resume monitoring of subsequent edaprint messages from the console This option invokes the Text Console even if it was not previously running that is if the Workspace Manager was started using the start option which does not invoke a Text Console You cannot use this option if the Text Console is already running as there can be only one Text Console For information on edastart options issue the following command edastart Communicating With a FOCUS Database Server 7 18 Information Builders Communicating With a FOCUS Database Server The We
240. cements Enhancement See Developer user type previously Domain Admin Developer User Type on page 3 2 Windows based Managed Reporting development Managed Reporting Developer for Windows on page 3 3 Moving application components between environments Change Management on page 3 4 Trusted connections between Managed Reporting and ReportCaster Servlet Exit on page 3 5 Configuring authentication of users against passwords defined in an LDAP directory LDAP Authentication on page 3 6 Signon integration Integrating Managed Reporting Security With Basic Web Server Authentication on page 3 5 Custom Reports Custom Reports in Dashboard on page 3 19 INCLUDE in Custom Reports Execution of a Custom Report Using INCLUDE on page 3 11 Filters for Standard Reports Filters For Standard Reports in Dashboard on page 3 20 Content pages for viewing ReportCaster and Report Library interfaces Content Pages ReportCaster and Report Library on page 3 20 Dynamic tracing Dynamic Tracing on page 3 20 New Feature Roadmap for WebFOCUS Version 5 Release 2 3 WebFOCUS Summary of New Features A 5 Ad Hoc Reporting Enhancements Report Caster Enhancements Enhancement See HTML Report Assistant End User Drill Down Capability on page 4 16 Performing OLAP Operations Directly From the Report on page 4 16 HTML Graph Assistant Addition of Several Templates to the Styles Tab on page 4 18 Updated Styles Tab
241. cements to Resource Analyzer and Resource Governor A New Feature Roadmap for WebFOCUS Version 5 Release 2 3 Provides a listing of the new features that are specific to WebFOCUS Version 5 Release 2 3 Chapter Appendix Contents Convention Description THIS TYPEFACE or this typeface Denotes syntax that you must enter exactly as shown this typeface Represents a placeholder or variable in syntax for a value that you or the system must supply underscore Indicates a default setting this typeface Represents a placeholder or variable a cross reference or an important term It may also indicate a button menu item or dialog box option you can click or select this typeface Highlights a file name or command Key Key Indicates keys that you must press simultaneously Indicates two or three choices type one of them not the braces Indicates a group of optional parameters None are required but you may select one of them Type only the parameter in the brackets not the brackets Separates mutually exclusive choices in syntax Type one of them not the symbol Preface WebFOCUS Summary of New Features v Related Publications To view a current listing of our publications and to place an order visit our World Wide Web site http www informationbuilders com You can also contact the Publications Order Department at 800 969 4636 Customer Support Do you have questions about WebFOC
242. ch as WordPad and edit the following boldfacelines to read Revision 1 xx var workbnchtrans_js_Revision Revision 1 xx workbnchtrans put Select Language Select Language workbnchtrans put Submit Submit workbnchtrans put Reset Reset workbnchtrans put OK OK workbnchtrans put admin admin workbnchtrans put Logon Logon workbnchtrans put Logoff Logoff workbnchtrans put Help Help workbnchtrans put Welcome Welcome workbnchtrans put Welcome to Managed Reporting Welcome to Managed Reporting workbnchtrans put Welcome to WebFOCUS Web Services Welcome to WebFOCUS Web Services workbnchtrans put User ID Customer ID workbnchtrans put Password PIN workbnchtrans put Change Password Change PIN 2 Save and exit workbnchtrans js In a multilingual environment repeat steps 1 and 2 for each ibi WebFOCUS52 ibi_html javaassist intl xx xxworkbnchtrans js file where xx is the language subdirectory or file name prefix WebFOCUS Client Enhancements WebFOCUS Summary of New Features 6 35 3 Launch the Managed Reporting logon page The new labels appear Example Adding New Text In this example you want to add the following text to the Managed Reporting logon page instructing users how to log on to their account Enter the Customer ID and PIN that were e mailed to you 1 Open ibi WebFOCUS52 ibi_html workbnch logon ht
243. character where character Is the ASCII or EBCDIC character Example Retrieving the Integer Value of the Character X MAINTAIN INT I3 CHAR2INT X type INT IS lt INT END On an ASCII platform the returned integer value is 120 In this section CHAR2INT INT2CHAR NLSCHR GetAppCGIValue WebFOCUS Maintain Functions 9 34 Information Builders INT2CHAR The INT2CHAR function returns the character equivalent of a numeric value on a current 256 element code page Syntax How to Retrieve the Character Equivalent of a Numeric Value INT2CHAR value where value Is the numeric value on the code page Example Retrieving the Character Equivalent of 93 MAINTAIN CHAR A1 INT2CHAR 93 TYPE CHAR IS lt CHAR END On an ASCII platform the returned character is a right bracket NLSCHR The NLSCHR function converts a character on the currently enabled code page to a character on the native English code page This function is useful when hosting Web applications on an EBCDIC platform with non English code pages Syntax How to Convert a Character on the Current Code Page NLSCHR character where character Is the character being converted Example Displaying a Dollar Sign Regardless of Code Page NLSCHR forces the display of a dollar sign whenever the variable ADOLLAR is used regardless of the currently enabled code page MAINTAIN ADOLLAR A1 NLSCHR
244. children or Show with children options Consolidation is designed to work with requests that use the Sum option for fields other than the For field It is also designed to be used with detail level financial data not data that is already consolidated When used alone the Consolidate option aggregates the parent and children on one line of the report output summing the numeric data values included on the line When used in conjunction with Show only children the Consolidate option displays one line for each child of the specified parent value Each line is a summation of that child and all of its children You can specify the number of levels of children to display which determines the number of lines generated on the report output and the depth of summation under each child By default only direct children have a line in the report output and the summary for each child includes all of its children When used in conjunction with Show with children the Consolidate option first displays a line in the report output that consists of the summation of the parent value and all of its children Then it displays additional lines identical to those displayed by Show only children plus Consolidate In order to use a data record in more than one line of a financial report for example to display both detail and summary lines or to consolidate detail data at multiple levels select the option Use Multiple Values before you begin to populat
245. chy the parent line of the hierarchy is indented the number of spaces specified as the indent The hierarchy levels are indented two spaces from each other If the GET CHILDREN phrase is used the first line of the hierarchy is indented an additional two spaces because the hierarchy output begins with the first child rather than the parent text Is a label to be displayed on a row of the FML report CAPTION Indicates that a caption field has been defined in the Master File OVER Indicates that this row is not the last row to be displayed fieldname Is a name you assign to the value calculated by the RECAP command Financial Reporting Language Enhancements 1 92 Information Builders format Is the RECAP field s USAGE format It cannot exceed the column width The format of the column in which the calculated value will be displayed is the default value expression Is the expression that describes how to calculate the RECAP field s value Example Indenting FML RECAP Rows The following request sums price cost and quantity in stock for digital and analog product types The first RECAP command calculates the total for each column and indents the label five spaces The second RECAP command calculates the profit and indents the label 10 spaces SET BLANKINDENT ON SET FORMULTIPLE ON TABLE FILE CENTINV SUM PRICE COST QTY_IN_STOCK FOR PRODTYPE Digital OVER Analog OVER BAR OVER RECAP TOTAL R1 R2 INDENT 5 AS
246. cimal only numbers OFF Suppresses a leading zero in decimal only numbers OFF is the default value Example Displaying a Leading Zero in Decimal only Numbers In the following request the CENT ZERO setting is ON which displays a leading zero in decimal only numbers SET CENT ZERO ON SET PAGE NUM OFF TABLE FILE CENTINV PRINT PRODNAME COMPUTE FACTOR COST RETAIL BY PRODCAT WHERE PRODCAT EQ Cameras ON TABLE SET STYLE TYPE REPORT GRID OFF ENDSTYLE END The output is WebFOCUS Reporting Language Enhancements WebFOCUS Summary of New Features 1 121 Selecting a Currency Symbol for Display You can select a currency symbol for display in report output regardless of the default currency symbol configured for National Language Support NLS Use the extended currency symbol format in place of the floating dollar M or non floating dollar N display option When you use the floating dollar M or non floating dollar N display option the currency symbol associated with the default code page is displayed For example when you use an American English code page the dollar sign is displayed The extended currency symbol format allows you to display a symbol other than the dollar sign Using the extended currency symbol format you can display the symbol for a United States dollar a British pound a Japanese yen or the euro The extended currency support symbol formats are available for numeric formats I
247. comma delimited files with double quotation marks around alpha data and a carriage return line at the end of each record For language implementation of this feature see Output Formats for Application Processing in Chapter 1 WebFOCUS Reporting Language Enhancements You can issue the following commands from the Financial Report Painter BLANKINDENT Clarifies relationships within an FML hierarchy by indenting the captions titles of values at each level For language implementation of this feature see Indenting Row Titles in an FML Hierarchy in Chapter 1 WebFOCUS Reporting Language Enhancements FORMULTIPLE Enables you to include the same value of a FOR field in multiple rows of the FML matrix For language implementation of this feature see Consolidating Data in an FML Hierarchy in Chapter 1 WebFOCUS Reporting Language Enhancements Functions for Displaying Fields 2 70 Information Builders Functions for Displaying Fields You can use three functions to adjust the display of fields in a report SQUEEZ reduces multiple blank spaces to a single space STRIP removes a character TRIM removes leading or trailing occurrences of a pattern You can select these functions from the Functions tab in the Define tool For language implementation of this feature see Adjusting Field Displays in Chapter 1 WebFOCUS Reporting Language Enhancements WebFOCUS Summary of New Features 3 1 CHAPTER 3 3 Managed
248. computed for each region without using prefix operators TABLE FILE GGSALES SUM UNITS DOLLARS BUDDOLLARS COMPUTE DIFF I10 DOLLARS BUDDOLLARS BY REGION BY CATEGORY WHERE CATEGORY EQ Food OR Coffee WHERE REGION EQ West OR Midwest ON REGION RECOMPUTE END The recomputed value is the difference between the totals for DOLLARS and BUDDOLLARS The following request uses prefix operators in the RECOMPUTE command to calculate maximum DOLLARS and the minimum BUDDOLLARS and then recompute DIFF Regardless of which prefix operator you specify for DIFF it is calculated as the difference between the values in the DOLLARS and BUDDOLLARS columns If any of the fields used in the calculation DOLLARS BUDDOLLARS and DIFF do not display on the summary row the calculation cannot be performed TABLE FILE GGSALES SUM UNITS DOLLARS BUDDOLLARS COMPUTE DIFF I10 DOLLARS BUDDOLLARS BY REGION BY CATEGORY WHERE CATEGORY EQ Food OR Coffee WHERE REGION EQ West OR Midwest ON REGION RECOMPUTE MAX DOLLARS MIN BUDDOLLARS AVE DIFF END Region Category Unit Sales Dollar Sales Budget Dollars DIFF Midwest Coffee 332777 4178513 4086032 92481 Food 341414 4338271 4220721 117550 TOTAL Midwest 674191 8516784 8306753 210031 West Coffee 356763 4473517 4523963 50446 Food 340234 4202337 4183244 19093 TOTAL West 696997 8675854 8707207 31353 TOTAL 1371188 17192638 17013960 178678 Manipulating Summa
249. constant is g b t g SEASONAL t SEASONAL t 1 1 g b t 1 The third equation is the calculated seasonal index and is a weighted average of the current data value divided by the current average and the seasonal index for the previous season I t represents the average seasonal coefficient The weight constant is p I t p datavalue t SEASONAL t 1 p I t L These equations are solved to derive the triple smoothed average The first smoothed average is set to the first data value Initial values for the seasonality factors are calculated based on the maximum number of full periods of data in the data source while the initial trend is calculated based on two periods of data These values are calculated with the following steps 1 The initial trend factor is calculated by the following formula b 0 1 L y L 1 y 1 L y L 2 y 2 L y 2L y L L 2 The calculation of the initial seasonality factor is based on the average of the data values within each period A j 1 lt j lt N A j y j 1 L 1 y j 1 L 2 y jL L 3 Then the initial periodicity factor is given by the following formula where N is the number of full periods available in the data L is the number of points per period and n is a point within the period 1 lt n lt L I n y n A 1 y L n A 2 y N 1 L n A N N The three constants must be chosen carefully The bes
250. cp834 CP00934 A KPC Korean IBM PC cp891 cp926 CP00944 A KPC Korean IBM PC Extended cp1040 cp926 CP00949 A KKS Korean KS5601 code cp1088 cp951 CP00935 E SOSI PRC IBM MF Extended cp836 cp837 CP00946 A CPC PRC IBM PC Extended cp1042 cp928 CP00937 E SOSI Taiwanese IBM MF cp37 cp835 CP00948 A TPC Taiwanese IBM PC Extended cp1043 cp927 CP10948 A TBIG5 Taiwanese PC BIG 5 code cp950 CP20948 A TNS Taiwanese PC National Standard code CP30948 A TTEL Taiwanese PC Telephone code CP00857 A ASCR IBM PC Turkish Latin 5 CP00920 A ISO9 ISO 8859 9 Latin 5 Turkish CP01026 E EBCR IBM MF Turkish CP01252 A SBCS Windows Latin 1 CP00819 A SBCS ISO 8859 1 Latin 1 IBM Version 8X 9X undef ed CP00912 A ISO2 ISO 8859 2 Latin 2 CP01047 E SBCS IBM MF Open Systems Latin 1 CP65001 A UTF8 Unicode UTF 8 CP00916 A ISO8 ISO 8859 8 Hebrew CP00813 A ISO7 ISO 8859 7 Greek CP00870 E EBCE IBM MF Multilingual Latin 2 East European CP00852 A ASCE IBM PC Multilingual Latin 2 East European CP01250 A WINE Windows Latin 2 East European CP01253 A WING Windows Greek CP01254 A WINR Windows Turkish CP01255 A WINH Windows Hebrew CP01025 E EBCY IBM MF Cyrillic Multilingual CP00866 A ASCY IBM PC Cyrillic 2 CP00915 A ISO5 ISO 8859 5 Cyrillic 8 bit CP01251 A WINY Windows Cyrillic CP01112 E EBCB IBM MF Baltic Multilanguage CP00921 A ISO3 ISO 8859 4 Baltic Multilanguage CP01257 A WINB Windows Baltic Latin 7 WebFOCUS Reporting Server Enhanc
251. create the output file is HOLD The Master File behaves exactly as in FORMAT ALPHA except for the inclusion of double quotation marks Adjusting Field Displays 1 154 Information Builders TABT Format The TABT format creates an output file in tab delimited format that includes column headings in the first row This is useful for importing data to Windows based applications such as MS Access and Excel The TABT format includes a built in safety feature that allows embedded quotation marks within text fields It inserts a second double quotation mark adjacent to the existing one For example if you input Joe Smitty Smith the output will be Joe Smitty Smith The TABT format also includes the following features The first row contains field names All trailing blanks are stripped from alpha An fields All leading blanks are stripped from numeric Dx y Fx y Px y and In fields There is a 32K record length limit in the output file A Master File is created when the command used to create the output file is HOLD The Master File behaves exactly as in FORMAT ALPHA except for the inclusion of double quotation marks Adjusting Field Displays You can use three character functions to adjust the display of fields in a report SQUEEZ reduces multiple blank spaces to a single space STRIP removes a character TRIM removes leading or trailing occurrences of a pattern Functions
252. culating Trends and Predicting Values With FORECAST FORECAST Processing Using a Simple Moving Average Using Single Exponential Smoothing Using Double Exponential Smoothing Using Triple Exponential Smoothing Using a Linear Regression Equation Calculating Trends and Predicting Values Using REGRESS How to Calculate Trends and Predict Values Using FORECAST WebFOCUS Reporting Language Enhancements WebFOCUS Summary of New Features 1 3 Calculating Trends and Predicting Values With FORECAST The calculations you can make to identify trends and forecast values are Simple moving average MOVAVE calculates a series of arithmetic means using a specified number of values from a field Exponential moving average calculates a weighted average between the previously calculated value of the average and the next data point There are three methods for using an exponential moving average Single exponential smoothing EXPAVE calculates an average that allows you to choose weights to apply to newer and older values Double exponential smoothing DOUBLEXP accounts for the tendency of data to either increase or decrease over time without repeating Triple exponential smoothing SEASONAL accounts for the tendency of data to repeat itself in intervals over time Linear regression analysis REGRESS derives the coefficients of a straight line that best fits the data points and uses this linear equation
253. cument open your WebFOCUS Reporting Server Console follow the Summary of New Features link on the main page then follow the link provided Data Adapter for Siebel 8 24 Information Builders Data Adapter for Siebel The Data Adapter for Siebel is available for UNIX NT and z OS This read only adapter supports the following capabilities Server metadata creation from Business Component and Business Object DML and SQL syntax Multiple connections Joins Visibility mode Siebel data types including integer date time datetime and alpha All others are mapped to alpha Multi valued groups Data Adapter for UniVerse on HP UX The UniVerse data source is supported on an HP UX platform The Data Adapter for UniVerse supports read write access to UniVerse data structures and supports the CREATE SYNONYM command for the generation of Master Files The Data Adapter for UniVerse provides the following enhanced capabilities Direct SQL Passthru Support for the CREATE SYNONYM command SQL Translation Support for UniVerse native data types Data Adapter Enhancements WebFOCUS Summary of New Features 8 25 Data Adapter for VSAM In Release 5 2 3 the most efficient way to retrieve selected records from a VSAM KSDS data source is by applying an IF screening test against the primary key This results in a direct read of the data using the data source s index
254. d The fifth argument specifies a substring length 0 that is too short it should be 9 SET USERFCHK ON TABLE FILE MOVIES PRINT TITLE COMPUTE NEWTITLE A9 SUBSTR 39 TITLE 6 14 0 NEWTITLE WHERE CATEGORY EQ CHILDREN END When the request is executed with the USERFCHK ON setting a warning message is produced The incorrect length is corrected and the request completes processing FOC36335 PARAMETER LENGTH CONFLICT IN FUNCTION SUBSTR ARG 5 The output is Note To view the message right click the report and select View Source When the request is executed with the USERFCHK OFF setting no warning message is produced The length error is still corrected and processing continues WebFOCUS Reporting Language Enhancements WebFOCUS Summary of New Features 1 69 Example Verifying Arguments With Uncorrectable Errors The following request has an incorrect data type in the last argument to SUBSTR This argument should specify an alphanumeric field or format for the extracted substring SET USERFCHK ON TABLE FILE MOVIES PRINT TITLE COMPUTE NEWTITLE F9 SUBSTR 39 TITLE 6 14 500 F9 WHERE CATEGORY EQ CHILDREN END When the request is executed with the USERFCHK ON setting a message is produced and the request terminates ERROR AT OR NEAR LINE 5 IN PROCEDURE USERFC3 FOCEXEC FOC279 NUMERIC ARGUMENTS IN PLACE WHERE ALPHA ARE CALLED FOR FOC009 INCOMPLETE REQUEST STATEMENT UNKNOWN F
255. d applications For a description of Update Assist features see Update Assist in Chapter 2 Developer Studio Enhancements Applying a Cascading Style Sheet to a Form In Release 5 2 3 you can use an external Cascading Style Sheet CSS when developing a WebFOCUS Maintain form A Cascading Style Sheet enables you to format the appearance of forms using one separate file rather than having formatting information appear throughout all your files It is a standard means of separating look from structure The formatting information for a form or control comes from one of three places in the following order of precedence 1 You can set its value explicitly in Maintain code This value takes precedence over any other setting 2 You can apply a Cascading Style Sheet to the form and apply a class to any control on the form The control uses the characteristics of the class defined in the CSS 3 You can apply a Cascading Style Sheet to the form but not apply any classes to the controls The form and the controls use the characteristics defined in the CSS You can use all of these types of styling in the same Maintain form allowing for powerful and flexible styling capabilities Cascading Style Sheets are fully documented on the World Wide Web Consortium W3C Web site How to Apply a Cascading Style Sheet to a Form Apply a Class to a Control on a Form WebFOCUS Maintain Enhancements WebFOCUS Summary of New Features 9 11
256. d with a DEFINE command DEFINE in the Master File COMPUTE command If the field is created with a COMPUTE command the command must appear in the request prior to using the calculated field for reformatting The field that contains the formats must be alphanumeric and be at least eight characters in length Only the first eight characters are used for formatting The field based format may specify a length longer than the length of the original field However if the new length is more than one third larger than the original length the report column width may not be large enough to hold the value indicated by asterisks in the field You can apply a field based format to any type of field However the new format must be compatible with the original format A numeric field can be reformatted to any other numeric format with any edit format options An alphanumeric field can be reformatted to a different length Any date field can be reformatted to any other date format type Any date time field can be reformatted to any other date time format If the field based format is invalid or specifies an impermissible type conversion the field displays with plus signs on the report output For an illustration of this technique see Displaying Extended Currency Symbols on page 1 123 How to Define and Apply a Format Field WebFOCUS Reporting Language Enhancements WebFOCUS Summary of New Featur
257. database has date time fields Update Assist s automatic validation correctly handles validating user input for these fields Also partial date fields for example Month Year Month only Year only validate correctly Validation of User Supplied Data in Update Assist Applications In Release 5 2 3 rather than performing validation as users enter data into each field applications generated with Update Assist validate data only when the user submits the information for example by clicking Save if the form contains a Save button If the form does not contain a Save button data is submitted when the user clicks Next to go to the next step For procedures and examples see Update Assist Step 2 of 6 Selecting Fields to Update in the Creating an Update Application With Update Assist chapter in the Developing Reporting Applications manual Update Assist 2 52 Information Builders Choosing a Color Scheme for an Update Assist Application In Release 5 2 3 Update Assist has six windows in which to create applications The fourth window of Update Assist is where you select the color scheme for your Update Assist application In the fourth window select a color scheme and click Next To see a preview of the color scheme and more information about it select the particular color scheme and click Show details For complete Update Assist steps see the Creating an Update Application With Update Assist chapter in the Developing Reporting Appli
258. dditional locations search paths the system should use when searching for dependent resources Master Files imported modules and so on The path location names are application names existing in the APPROOT directory structure or application names introduced with the APP MAP command The search path value can be in the form of a Maintain variable or a list of literal values enclosed in double quotation marks as follows EXEC Procedure AT server PATH MyVariable CALL Procedure AT server PATH AppDir1 AppDir2 AppDir3 Procedure How to Specify an Additional Search Path The Developer Studio deployment process can introduce the PATH keyword into a CALL or EXEC statement This is accomplished by the deployment scenario editor which provides a dialog box that controls the values used for the application path To access this dialog box 1 Open the deployment scenario 2 Right click the WebFOCUS Environment assigned to the procedure 3 Select Paths from the pop up menu Items included in the Running Paths list appear as PATH values for those procedures that are invoked with the CALL or EXEC statement on the selected WebFOCUS Environment WebFOCUS Maintain Enhancements WebFOCUS Summary of New Features 9 39 Support for Data Source Access Passwords The Edit menu Password option prompts you to enter the WebFOCUS DBA password required for data source access WebFOCUS Maintain uses the password to access the Master File Proc
259. delimited files with double quotation marks around alpha data and a carriage return line at the end of each record Control Retrieval of Comma delimited Data Sources With PCOMMA on page 1 152 PSPAGESETUP Used with the PAGESIZE parameter sets the paper size for a PDF or PostScript report Control the Paper Source for a PS Printer on page 1 161 SUMMARYLINES Controls summary line processing in reports that use prefix operators Control Summary Line Processing on page 1 38 USERFCHK Controls the level of verification applied to DEFINE FUNCTION and Information Builders supplied function arguments Control Function Argument Verification on page 1 67 USERFNS If your site has a locally written function with the same name as an Information Builders supplied function the USERFNS setting determines which function will be used Enable Function Argument Verification on page 1 67 SET Parameter Description For details see WebFOCUS Reporting Language Enhancements WebFOCUS Summary of New Features 1 165 Functions Summary The following functions were introduced in Release 5 2 Those marked with asterisks were introduced in Release 5 2 3 Adjusting Field Displays Using Variable Length AnV Fields With Functions Function Description For details see SQUEEZ Reduces contiguous blanks to a single blank Reducing Multiple Spaces in a Field to a Single Space on page 1 155 STRIP Removes occu
260. description where amp variable Is the variable including the ampersand for which you are supplying a list of values value1 value2 value3 value4 Are the values comprising the list of selectable variable values description Is an optional description of the variable Prompting for Variables in CGI Servlet 1 102 Information Builders Syntax How to Add a Dynamic Multi Select List of Values amp variable AND OR FIND fieldname IN datasource description where amp variable Is the variable including the ampersand for which you are supplying a list of values fieldname Is the field name containing the possible variable values datasource Is the data source that contains the field name specified in fieldname description Is an optional description of the variable Syntax How to Add a Range of Values List amp variable FROM range1 TO range2 where amp variable Is the numerical variable including the ampersand for which you are supplying a list of values range1 Is the starting numerical value of the range of list of values range2 Is the ending numerical value of the range of list of values WebFOCUS Reporting Language Enhancements WebFOCUS Summary of New Features 1 103 Example Adding a Single Selectable List of Values The following request generates a form that lists valid values for the SNAME field The user can select one value from the list
261. dface line anywhere between the left and right brackets Tip Type the new text on one line Due to formatting conventions the line breaks shown in the code throughout this topic do not match the line breaks in the actual file Revision 1 xx var workbnchtrans_js_Revision Revision 1 xx workbnchtrans put Select Language Select Language workbnchtrans put Submit Submit workbnchtrans put Instruction Enter the Customer ID and PIN that were e mailed to you 4 Save and exit workbnchtrans js In a multilingual environment repeat steps 3 and 4 for each ibi WebFOCUS52 ibi_html javaassist intl xx xxworkbnchtrans js file where xx is the language subdirectory or file name prefix WebFOCUS Client Enhancements WebFOCUS Summary of New Features 6 37 5 If you are using Microsoft Internet Explorer clear the Temporary Internet Files cache Tip This step is not required on all machines depending on the file storage setup 6 Launch the Managed Reporting logon page again The instruction you added to the page appears Customizing the User Interface 6 38 Information Builders Example Adding New Text Without Translation You want to add text to the Managed Reporting logon page that does not require translation In this case use the noibitranslate flag to disable dynamic language switch translation 1 Open ibi WebFOCUS52 ibi_html workbnch logon htm in a text editor such a
262. dio Enhancements WebFOCUS Summary of New Features 2 17 Enter replacement text using the Output tab The Output tab on the Report Options dialog box features a WebFOCUS Title input box The text you enter into this input box replaces the default text in the Internet Explorer title bar when you run the report in HTML format For details see Report Options Output Tab in the Report Painter Basics chapter in the Creating Reports With Graphical Tools manual If you run the report in the EXL2K format the text in the WebFOCUS Title input box replaces the default Worksheet tab text in Excel 2000 Use the Display Format option The Output tab on the Report Options dialog box provides a Display Format drop down list that enables you to specify output formats such as HTML PDF Excel 2000 Excel 2000 PivotTable Excel 2000 Formula Excel 97 User and FOCUS default See Report Options Output Tab in the Report Painter Basics chapter in the Creating Reports With Graphical Tools manual Enable Excel 2000 PivotTable format from the Object Inspector When you select Excel 2000 PivotTable in the Output tab s Display Format drop down list a Pivot tab is added to the Object Inspector You can then drag available fields into dimensions within the Object Inspector s Pivot hierarchy For Output tab options see Report Options Output Tab in the Report Painter Basics chapter in the Creating Reports With Graphical Tools manual For an example of enab
263. domain com For complete details on the options in the Properties window see Setting Properties of an ETL Request in the Building an ETL Request chapter in the iWay ETL Manager User s Guide ETL Manager Enhancements WebFOCUS Summary of New Features 10 21 Optimized Load Loading relational data source targets is much faster when optimized load capabilities are used to insert a block of rows at once For Microsoft SQL Server and Sybase Fastload is used for other relational data sources Array Insert is used Optimized load is available for relational data source targets on Windows and UNIX To utilize optimized load for these platforms be sure that Include duplicates is selected on the load object so that no pre processing is performed A user entry area labeled Optimize Load accepts the number of rows to load at once as input If the number one 1 is entered the default row at a time insert is used and the behavior is the same as in previous releases If a number greater than one 1 is entered optimized load is used Note that when optimized load is used Loading is much faster since a block of rows are inserted at once Input data should be clean If any one row in the block causes a data source constraint violation such as not null or unique index the entire block is rejected No row counts are available for the number of records inserted or rejected in the detail log or statistics N A no
264. dure How to Create a New Application Directory 1 In the Configure Application Path window click New Directory 2 Enter the name of the new directory and click OK Procedure How to Set the Server Application Path 1 In the APPROOT directory tree drag and drop the directory you want to add from the list of directories to the APP PATH window 2 Set the directory search order by moving the directories into their search order using the Up Down and Remove links 3 Click Set APP PATH Request Logs The request logs have been simplified and are easier to understand Parameters for stored procedures appear in the log in addition to procedure names The logs capture output from user written stored procedures TYPE commands Procedure How to View the ETL Request Log From the ETL Workbench 1 Right click your request in the ETL request folder 2 Select View Last Log from the pop up menu The results are retrieved and displayed Request and Log Management From the WebFOCUS Reporting Server Console 10 4 Information Builders Request and Log Management From the WebFOCUS Reporting Server Console You can manage ETL requests from the WebFOCUS Reporting Server Console While you can still use the ETL Workbench to build and edit requests you can perform most management activities from the WebFOCUS Reporting Server Console Request Management The WebFOCUS Reporting Server Console displays a list of all ETL re
265. dure names are hyperlinks that allow you to drill down to a report that shows the requests that were executed from the selected procedure From this report you can drill down further to see the actual request syntax Resource Analyzer Reports 11 8 Information Builders Large Volume Request Reports Large volume requests are requests that return more data than might be necessary These requests can be targeted for optimization You can identify these reports with the Large Volume Requests Report When you click the Large Volume Requests Report hyperlink the Large Volume Requests report opens By default the report is sorted by Highest Average Rows In this report the procedure names are hyperlinks that allow you to drill down to a report that shows the requests that were executed from the selected procedure From this report you can drill down further to see the actual request syntax Resource Analyzer and Resource Governor Enhancements WebFOCUS Summary of New Features 11 9 Candidates for Column Index Report Indexing columns that are frequently used in selection criteria for reports can improve efficiency This report identifies columns that should be indexed When you click the Candidates for Column Index hyperlink the Candidates for Column Index report opens This report shows how often columns were used as selection criteria in requests Click any of the hyperlinked column headings to resort the report by that column
266. e If you do not install a WebFOCUS Reporting Server during the Developer Studio installation procedure your environment allows the last two capabilities For differences in development environments and other architectural details see the Introducing WebFOCUS and Developer Studio chapter in the Developer Studio Application Development Getting Started manual Developer Studio Enhancements WebFOCUS Summary of New Features 2 3 Managed Reporting Developer for Windows Release 5 2 3 introduces the new WebFOCUS Managed Reporting Developer for Windows product It enables Developers to create and manage domain content Using this product Developers can Create Standard Reports and Reporting Objects with Windows based tools such as the Report Painter Analyze data with OLAP Create and manage WebFOCUS Reporting Server resources such as metadata procedures and other files This product is fully documented in the WebFOCUS Managed Reporting Developer s Manual By design all Managed Reporting administrative features are disabled That means that Developers cannot create delete or rename Domains using the Managed Reporting Developer There is also no access to User Administrator Dashboard View Builder or the ReportCaster Console The Web Applications and User Management nodes have been removed in Explorer since they do not apply to this product Important Managed Reporting Administrators can use this product but th
267. e http hostname application_address IBIWF_language xx where hostname Is the location where WebFOCUS is installed application_address Is the startup location of the application IBIWF_language Is a required function call xx Is the two letter value for a valid installed language en for English is the default value Using the Dynamic Language Switch 6 28 Information Builders Reference Values for Supported Languages The following table lists the values that you can specify on the IBIWF_language function call Directory Structures Based on the languages selected during installation the setup program creates the corresponding language folders under the ibi_html javaassist intl directory which contains all the files needed to create a localized user interface These files consist of string tables and gif files Language Value English en default Chinese Simplified GB zh Chinese Traditional Big 5 tw French Canadian fc French Standard fr German Standard de German Austrian at Japanese ja Korean ko Spanish es WebFOCUS Client Enhancements WebFOCUS Summary of New Features 6 29 Editing Language Values The ibimultilanguage js file which is located in the ibi_html javaassist intl directory holds the values of the languages selected in the Language Selection dialog box For example var multiLanguage 1 var ArrayofLanguage en English f
268. e nlscfg err which controls settings such as currency symbol date and time format and Microsoft Excel language Procedure How to Edit the NLS Configuration File nlscfg err The NLS configuration file nlscfg err controls the value of the code page and the language of server error messages It is located in the etc directory under the configuration directory for example on Windows ibi srv52 wfs etc 1 From the advanced NLS Configuration window click Edit nlscfg err The content of the current nlscfg err file opens in an editor 2 Enter the desired parameters See New NLS Configuration File nlscfg err Parameters on page 7 11 for new settings you can control Reference New NLS Configuration File nlscfg err Parameters EXL2KLANG Is the language used on the WebFOCUS Reporting Server for Microsoft Excel requests It must be the same as the language of Excel on the machine running the browser to ensure the correct display of output from the WebFOCUS Reporting Server Possible values are ENG for English ENG is the default value FRE for French GER for German JPN for Japanese KOR for Korean SPA for Spanish EXL2K_DEFCOLW Is the column width for the language of Excel It tells WebFOCUS the value to use for Excel formatting For English or Japanese the default column width is 8 Western European languages use the default column width of 10 You must supply the Excel column width that is valid for th
269. e Administrator should not define passwords for the users in Managed Reporting Updated Presentation A new look has been designed for WebFOCUS and Information Builders products that is consistent with the new ReportCaster and HTML Report Assistant The windows are much less cluttered and you can specify placement of the tabs across the top of the page or vertically on the left side The graphic below shows the Managed Reporting window with tabs placed horizontally Managed Reporting Enhancements WebFOCUS Summary of New Features 3 7 Reporting Object Component Validation Reporting Object components are validated prior to run time Therefore the process of finding and correcting errors is easier since errors in individual components are detected prior to run time whereas after run time all components must be checked New Create Synonym Behavior You create synonyms using the Server Console The Server Console is accessed in the Data Server component when selecting Create Synonym This functions for all supported platforms except for z OS and OS 390 MVS which still accesses the Synonym Wizard Developers can view existing and new Master and Access Files and delete and refresh synonyms in the Server Console Developers can also create synonyms for remote Reporting Servers and for relational and multidimensional data sources Multiple Servers and Application Path You can choose the server on which you execute your reports You a
270. e How to Map a Deferred Server Node to an Immediate Server Node Using the WebFOCUS Client Console add a node for the Deferred Server the same way as adding a non deferred node see Add a New Node to ODIN CFG on page 6 4 Next perform the following steps to map the Deferred Server to an immediate Server node 1 Click Reporting Servers and then Deferred Server Mappings A page appears for editing the Deferred Server Mappings file altdnode wfs 2 Click New to create a new mapping 3 Specify the immediate Server in the Select Server drop down list which displays all nodes specified in the ibi client52 wfc etc odin cfg file 4 Specify the Deferred Server in the Select Deferred Server drop down list which displays all nodes specified in the ibi client52 wfc etc odin cfg file excluding the immediate Server you just specified 5 Click Save Note You can map multiple immediate Servers to the same Deferred Server by repeating these steps WebFOCUS Client Enhancements WebFOCUS Summary of New Features 6 9 Configuring Special Services To use Server Side Graphics or amper auto prompting when the WebFOCUS Client CGI or ISAPI only is installed on a Windows XP or Windows 2000 server platform you must perform the following steps 1 Configure the service and classpath for JSCOM3 a Click Reporting Servers and then Special Services The New JSCOM3 Node window appears b In the SERVICE field enter the port number
271. e including the ampersand whose value is being prompted for description Is a description of the variable that replaces the variable name in the prompt Syntax How to Set a Default Variable Value DEFAULT amp variable value where amp variable Is the variable including the ampersand for which you are setting a default value value Is the default value for the variable WebFOCUS Reporting Language Enhancements WebFOCUS Summary of New Features 1 101 Syntax How to Add a Static Single Select List of Values amp variable value value2 value3 value4 description where amp variable Is the variable including the ampersand for which you are supplying a list of values value value2 value3 value4 Are the values comprising the list of selectable variable values description Is an optional description of the variable Syntax How to Add a Dynamic Single Select List of Values amp variable FIND fieldname IN datasource description where amp variable Is the variable including the ampersand for which you are supplying a list of values fieldname Is the field name containing the possible variable values datasource Is the data source that contains the field name specified in fieldname description Is an optional description of the variable Syntax How to Add a Static Multi Select List of Values amp variable AND OR value1 value2 valuen
272. e purposes of execution execution using RPC transform or archiving Procedure How to Configure the MQ XML Listener The MQ XML Listener is configured using the WebFOCUS Reporting Server Console 1 Open the Communications setup page and in the Add New Node Block section specify the following Class of Agent Protocol of MQXML Desired name for the block 2 Click Continue 3 On the page that follows supply qmanager inqueue outqueue and errorqueue click Save and restart 4 Click the question mark for more information The server is now ready to accept XML documents from MQ SOAP XML Listener The SOAP XML Listener listens on a TCP IP port number for SOAP and XML documents conforming to the iWay SOAP and XML Document Specifications You can now control the incoming XML from the listener for purposes of execution execution through RPC transform or archiving SOAP XML Listener 7 34 Information Builders WebFOCUS Summary of New Features 8 1 CHAPTER 8 8 Data Adapter Enhancements This chapter describes all of the features for the Data Adapters in Version 5 Release 2 and has been updated to reflect Version 5 Release 2 3 Topics that contain Version 5 Release 2 3 features are marked with asterisks For complete documentation about data adapters see the Data Adapter Administration for UNIX Windows OpenVMS OS 400 OS 390 and z OS or the iWay Data Adapter Administration for MVS and VM ma
273. e 6 30 In Release 5 2 3 support for Double Byte Character Set DBCS code pages in addition to the following translated user interfaces Japanese Korean Simplified Chinese and Traditional Chinese Using the Dynamic Language Switch 6 24 Information Builders Using the Dynamic Language Switch All supported localized versions are included in a single WebFOCUS Client installation In Release 5 2 3 all language files are installed by default so that you have the option of enabling a language at a later time Only the languages you select during installation will be enabled initially You can dynamically switch between languages used throughout the user interface without affecting other users The installation program uses the same language specified in the operating system s regional settings or browser language options If the language is not available in a localized version English is used as the default In Release 5 2 3 you can install the following languages Chinese Simplified GB Chinese Traditional Big 5 English French Canadian French Standard German Austrian German Standard Japanese Korean Spanish In this section Dynamic Language Switch Feature Directory Structures Editing Language Values Reference Values for Supported Languages WebFOCUS Client Enhancements WebFOCUS Summary of New Features 6 25 Dynamic Lan
274. e Access File The adapter currently supports access to Enterprise Java Beans deployed under the BEA WebLogic and IBM WebSphere Application servers Data Adapter for Essbase 8 14 Information Builders Data Adapter for Essbase The Data Adapter for Essbase has been enhanced with the following new features The CREATE SYNONYM command supports parent child view The SET MEASURE command allows the server to recognize any one dimension as an accounts measures dimension without having to change the ESSBASE outline The SET RESTRICTSUM command allows SUM operations on non aggregated fields that appear in the Access File The SET AGGREGATE NOOP command controls the use of SUM operations on Essbase members with the consolidation property The SET SUPSHARE command allows Shared Members to be suppressed The SET SUPZEROS command permits zero values to be suppressed during reporting The SET SUPMISSING command permits empty cells missing data to be suppressed during reporting The SET SUPEMPTY command permits an entire row that contains either zero values or missing data to be suppressed during reporting The ESSBASE OLAP Server s User Defined Attributes UDAs can be used in requests In this section Describing the Measures Dimension in the Master File Summing on Non Aggregated Fields Preventing Aggregation of Non Consolidating Members Suppressing Shared Members Suppressi
275. e Description text box 3 Click Update When a page is added it is added as the last page You can rearrange the order of the content pages using the Move Left Move Right or Set Default buttons The Set Default button promotes the current page to the first page Creating a Group View You can create a different view of the Dashboard for each user group These views are known as group views and are based on Managed Reporting repository groups For each group view you can select a banner and customize the colors composition and content Dashboard administrators can use this feature to create different Dashboard views for Managed Reporting repository groups Procedure How to Add a Group View 1 Open the View Builder 2 Click Group Views 3 Click Add An input form displays at the bottom of the Group Views window 4 Select a Group Name from the drop down list 5 Enter a description for the group view 6 Click Submit The new view is added to the Group Views list Unique Customizations for Public Views 3 14 Information Builders Unique Customizations for Public Views Dashboard administrators can create different customizations for each public view in the Dashboard This enables you to select a different look composition and message of the day for each public view Previously you could only have one customization that applied to all public views Dashboard customization is fully documented in the Custo
276. e OLAP Control Panel Tiling is calculated within all of the higher level sort fields in the request and restarts whenever a sort field at a higher level than the tile field s value changes Instances are counted using the tile field If the request displays fields from lower level segments there may be multiple report lines that correspond to one instance of the tile field Ad Hoc Reporting Enhancements WebFOCUS Summary of New Features 4 7 Procedure How to Group Data Into Tiles in an OLAP Report 1 Open the OLAP Control Panel 2 Select a numeric or date field from the Drill Down box 3 Click the Tiles button The Tiles pane opens 4 Select the Tile the Report check box 5 In the In Groups Of spin box select the number of tiles to be used in grouping the data For example 100 tiles produces percentiles 10 tiles produces deciles and so on 6 In the Name of Tiled Group input box type a name for the Tile column HTML Report Assistant 4 8 Information Builders 7 In the Restrict Report to only the top spin box select the number of tile groups to display in the report 8 Optionally select a Sort Order option button Choose High to Low to sort data in descending order so that the highest data values are placed in tile 1 Choose Low to High to sort data in ascending order so that the lowest data values are placed in tile 1 Low to High is the default value 9 If you wish to
277. e a Results page check the Generate Results Page box in the Update Assist s Navigation Options Step 3 of 6 dialog box When you have completed all steps in the wizard four instead of three Maintain forms are added to your project The Results page is created and sourced as a standard Maintain form and can be customized and edited in the Maintain Development Environment You can customize the messages displayed in this form by editing the Maintain procedure You can for example place a button or link on the Results page that takes a user to another location or if the Maintain procedure was called from a report navigates the user back to a rerun version of the report with the new data showing Tip While you are able to generate the Results page regardless of which navigation option you choose this option is most appropriate for the no navigation scenario It is best to use the Results page with an application that calls the Maintain procedure directly with a URL and displays the Maintain form in a frame or iFrame of the application s workspace When using the Tree Combo or Edit box navigation users must renavigate to their information or click the browser s Back button to get back to a form with controls Enhanced DBA Prompting You can mask passwords during DBA prompting and you are reprompted if you enter an incorrect DBA password Enhanced Data Retrieval Error Messages Any errors that occur during data retrieval are specif
278. e and therefore the upper limit for the length of the input string string Alphanumeric Is the field or alphanumeric constant enclosed in single quotation marks that will be converted to uppercase If it is a field it can have An or AnV format If it is a field of type AnV its length is taken from the length bytes stored in the field If length_limit is smaller than the actual length the source string is truncated to this size outfield Alphanumeric Is either a field with AnV or An format for the returned uppercase string or the format of the output value enclosed in single quotation marks If the format of outfield is AnV then the actual length returned is equal to the smaller of the input string length and length_limit WebFOCUS Reporting Language Enhancements WebFOCUS Summary of New Features 1 65 Example Creating a Variable Length Uppercase String Suppose you are sorting on a field that contains both uppercase and mixed case values The following request defines a field called LAST_NAME_MIXED that contains both uppercase and mixed case values DEFINE FILE EMPLOYEE LAST_NAME_MIXED A15 IF DEPARTMENT EQ MIS THEN LAST_NAME ELSE LCWORD 15 LAST_NAME A15 LAST_NAME_UPCASV A15 UPCASV 5 LAST_NAME_MIXED A15 END Suppose you execute a request that sorts by this field TABLE FILE EMPLOYEE PRINT LAST_NAME_MIXED AND FIRST_NAME BY LAST_NAME_UPCASV WHERE CURR_JOBCODE EQ B02 OR A17 OR B04 END RUN Th
279. e language specified on EXL2KLANG It is a fixed value for each language Configuring National Language Support 7 12 Information Builders Step 3 Configure the WebFOCUS Client for NLS To configure the WebFOCUS Client for NLS see Configuring WebFOCUS Client Settings in Chapter 6 WebFOCUS Client Enhancements Reference Language and Default Code Pages for Windows and UNIX In Release 5 2 3 WebFOCUS added support for the Baltic language Language Code Language Name Language Abbreviation Code Page 001 AMENGLISH AME 437 001 ENGLISH ENG 437 370 BALTIC BAL 921 420 CZECH CZE 912 045 DANISH DAN 137 031 DUTCH DUT 137 358 FINNISH FIN 137 033 FRENCH FRE 137 049 GERMAN GER 137 030 GREEK GRE 813 972 HEBREW HEB 916 972 HEBREW HEW 1255 039 ITALIAN ITA 137 081 JAPANESE JPN 942 081 JAPANESE JPE 10942 082 KOREAN KOR 949 047 NORWEGIAN NOR 137 048 POLISH POL 912 351 PORTUGUESE POR 137 WebFOCUS Reporting Server Enhancements WebFOCUS Summary of New Features 7 13 Reference Language and Default Code Pages for OS 400 In Release 5 2 3 WebFOCUS added support for the Baltic language 007 RUSSIAN RUS 915 085 S CHINESE PRC 946 034 SPANISH SPA 137 046 SWEDISH SWE 137 086 T CHINESE ROC 10948 090 TURKISH TUR 920 044 UKENGLISH UKE 137 800 UNICODE UCS 65001 Language Code Language Name Language Abbreviati
280. e options in the ETL Configuration window see Configuring ETL Manager Behavior in the Using the iWay Web Console chapter in the iWay ETL Manager User s Guide ETL Manager Enhancements WebFOCUS Summary of New Features 10 5 Request Scheduling You can schedule the execution of your ETL requests with the ETL Manager Scheduler Scheduled requests are initiated using the deferred receipt server the same technology used by a majority of WebFOCUS installations The ETL Manager Scheduler supports schedule times to the minute and schedule intervals of minutes The scheduler is controlled from the WebFOCUS Reporting Server Console ETL Configuration page For scheduled requests to run the Scheduler must be running The etl_schedule_autostart radio button must be set to yes The schedule interval determines how often the scheduler checks for requests to run For example for a request to run every five minutes the scheduler interval etl_interval must be set to a value of 300 seconds or less Changes made to the schedule interval on the WebFOCUS Reporting Server Console are not reflected on the schedule panel in the ETL Workbench until the program is shut down and restarted Procedure How to Schedule an ETL Request to Run Once 1 In the Scheduler window select Run Once in the Schedule Type section 2 Select a start time in the Start Time section by entering the time in the fields or using the arrow buttons 3 Sel
281. e output is Validating Function Arguments 1 66 Information Builders Validating Function Arguments The SET USERFCHK command controls the level of verification applied to DEFINE FUNCTION arguments and Information Builders supplied function arguments USERFCHK does not affect verification of the number of arguments the correct number must always be supplied Functions typically expect arguments to be a specific type or have a length that depends on the value of another argument It is possible in some situations to enforce these rules by truncating the length of an argument and therefore avoid generating an error at run time The level of verification and conversion performed depends on the specific function The following two situations can usually be fixed satisfactorily If a numeric argument specifies a maximum size for an alphanumeric argument but the alphanumeric string supplied is longer than the specified size the string can be truncated If an argument supplied as a numeric literal specifies a value larger than the maximum size for an argument it can be reduced to the proper size Since argument verification can only be used for functions supplied by Information Builders you must first ensure that those functions are enabled using the SET USERFNS command How to Enable Function Argument Verification Control Function Argument Verification Example Verifying Arguments With Correctable Errors Verify
282. e server Hiper Memory reduces server processing time by using hiperspaces to accelerate processing of temporary files On the Server for OS 390 and z OS Hiper Memory settings are specified with a DYNAM command in the global server profile edasprof prf or in a procedure Syntax How to Use DYNAM Commands With Hiper Memory DYNAM MEMIO ON OFF HIPER MEMORY where ON Enables Hiper Memory OFF Disables Hiper Memory I O goes to disk OFF is the default value HIPER Uses HIPERSPACE memory for I O MEMORY Uses main storage for I O WebFOCUS Reporting Server Enhancements WebFOCUS Summary of New Features 7 29 Accessing z OS and OS 390 Applications From the WebFOCUS Reporting Server Console You can access applications residing on z OS and OS 390 through the WebFOCUS Reporting Server Console for OS 390 and z OS You can view execute and directly edit applications from the console Available files allocated in the EDASTART server JCL include partitioned data sets PDSs and data files on z OS and OS 390 such as procedures FOCEXECs Master Files and Access Files You can access these files through the Procedures page or the Metadata page in the WebFOCUS Reporting Server Console reached by clicking the corresponding link on the left side of the start page Accessing z OS and OS 390 VSAM Files Using XMI Server The Server for OS 390 and z OS introduces read only remote access to sequential data stored on z OS and
283. e the list of parent values and their associated children TABLE FILE chartfile BY parentfield BY hierarchyfield SUM captionfield END The resulting chart contains the following information It may also contain the associated captions depending on whether the AS CAPTION phrase is used in the request parentfield hierarchyfield parentvalue1 child1 parentvalue1 child2 parentvalue1 child3 How to Display an FML Hierarchy Example Displaying an FML Hierarchy Displaying an FML Hierarchy With Captions Financial Reporting Language Enhancements 1 74 Information Builders Syntax How to Display an FML Hierarchy TABLE FILE filename PRINT SUM FOR hierarchyfield parentvalue GET WITH CHILD REN n ALL AS CAPTION text LABEL label END where filename Is the name of the file to be used in the FML request If the hierarchy for this request cannot be loaded automatically you must have previously issued the LOAD CHART command to load the hierarchy hierarchyfield Is the hierarchy field name If the request references a joined structure the name must be the field name from the host file The alias name is not supported parentvalue Is the parent value for which the children are to be retrieved GET CHILDREN Displays the hierarchy starting from the first child of the specified parentvalue Does not include the parent in the display This corresponds to
284. e the matrix When using WebFOCUS instead of Developer Studio use the SET FORMULTIPLE command to use a data record in more than one line of an FML report Using the SET FORMULTIPLE command you can include the same value of a FOR field whether as a single tag value as part of a range or in a calculation in multiple rows of the FML matrix This feature is available in the Financial Report Painter simply by clicking the Use Multiple Value check box above the Design matrix For language implementation of this feature see Consolidating Data in an FML Hierarchy in Chapter 1 WebFOCUS Reporting Language Enhancements Developer Studio Enhancements WebFOCUS Summary of New Features 2 63 Example Consolidating Data in a Hierarchy Into One Line of Report Output The following matrix displays detail data for Selling Expenses the parent level in a hierarchy and its children followed by a summary line for all Selling Expenses It produces the following output What makes this reporting dynamic Suppose that you run this report weekly If you ran the report today and tomorrow another account were added as a child of 3100 next week s report would automatically reflect the change in the hierarchy as well as changes to the data based on the versatile parent child declaration in the Master File No adjustment would be needed to keep either the Master File or the report request up to date Financial Report Painter Enhancements 2 64
285. e the values entered in Report Painter or select No to ignore those changes 3 Optionally select Don t show this message again to make your selection valid for every instance in which Report Painter changes the parameter values in Resource Layout Painter Designing a User Interface With the Resource Layout Painter 2 38 Information Builders Procedure How to Automatically Update Parameters in the Resource Layout Painter With Report Painter Changes 1 Select Settings from the Tools menu The Settings dialog box opens 2 In the Default behavior for updated parameter values select one of the following Auto update replaces the values in Resource Layout Painter with the modified values from Report Painter Retain values does not replace the values in Resource Layout Painter with the modified values from Report Painter The original values are retained Prompt prompts you for a choice every time changes in the Report Painter may affect the values in Resource Layout Painter You can change this setting at any time Developer Studio Enhancements WebFOCUS Summary of New Features 2 39 Automatically Deleting a Form Control Associated With a Parameter When you delete a parameter from your report you can elect to automatically delete the form control associated with that parameter This functionality is not new but the way this choice is made has changed Procedure How to Automatically Delete a Form Control Associa
286. ebFOCUS Reporting Server Console using the HTTP Listener For complete details about accessing Resource Analyzer and Resource Governor reports see the iWay Resource Analyzer Administrator s and User s Manual and the iWay Resource Governor Administrator s and User s Manual Increased Support for Long Procedure Names Resource Analyzer and Resource Governor monitor long procedure names for WebFOCUS applications In addition Resource Analyzer and Resource Governor store up to 66 bytes of a stored procedure name and all reports support this length Resource Analyzer and Resource Governor Enhancements WebFOCUS Summary of New Features 11 7 Resource Analyzer Reports The following reports have been added to Resource Analyzer Long running Requests uncover procedures which use excessive resources that result in long waits for users Large Volume Requests identify requests returning more data than necessary and target them for optimization Candidates for Column Index identify columns that should be indexed Long running Requests Report Procedures with long running requests use excessive resources a particular problem when dealing with operational systems These procedures should be targeted for optimization When you click the Long running Requests hyperlink the Long running Request report opens By default the report is sorted by Average Elapsed Seconds and Average CPU Seconds In this report the proce
287. ect a start date in the Start Time section by entering the date or by clicking the calendar icon and choosing a date from the Calendar window How to Schedule an ETL Request to Run Once Schedule an ETL Request to Run on a Recurring Interval Schedule an ETL Request to Run at Multi Day Intervals Request Scheduling 10 6 Information Builders Procedure How to Schedule an ETL Request to Run on a Recurring Interval 1 In the Scheduler window select Recurring in the Schedule Type section 2 Select an interval type from the Interval Type section 3 Select an interval number from the Interval Number section 4 Select a start time in the Start Time section by entering the time in the fields or using the arrow buttons 5 Select a start date in the Start Time section by entering the date or by clicking the calendar icon and choosing a date from the Calendar window 6 Optionally select an end time in the End Time section by entering the time in the fields or using the arrow buttons 7 Optionally select an end date in the End Time section by entering the date or by clicking the calendar icon and choosing a date from the Calendar window Note You do not need to change the schedule to stop a query from executing regularly Instead set the status of the request to Inactive in the ETL request main window For details on setting the status of an ETL request see Specifying ETL Request Properties in the Working With an
288. ect action DBMS_ERRORCODE applies to the current Maintain procedure Return codes are RDBMS specific Also RDBMS vendors may change return codes between releases To ensure portability use a coding technique that is easy to adjust You should also document the fact that you are using this feature to allow sufficient testing before implementing a new RDBMS Syntax How to Examine an RDBMS Return Code in a Procedure SYS_MGR DBMS_ERRORCODE Example Coding for Portability Compute Ref_Integ_Code i8 843 Include ProdOrder from OrdStk If SYS_MGR DBMS_ERRORCODE eq Ref_Integ_Code Then An enhanced technique is to put the calculated field in a common procedure that is imported Example Examining an RDBMS Return Code in a Procedure The following Maintain code examines a return code from an RDBMS and depending on its value branches to the appropriate action Compute ErrCode a3 SYS_MGR DBMS_ERRORCODE If ErrCode EQ 515 goto BadInsert How to Examine an RDBMS Return Code in a Procedure Example Coding for Portability Examining an RDBMS Return Code in a Procedure WebFOCUS Maintain Enhancements WebFOCUS Summary of New Features 9 33 WebFOCUS Maintain Functions The following functions were introduced in Release 5 2 CHAR2INT The CHAR2INT function returns the integer value of an ASCII or EBCDIC character Syntax How to Retrieve the Integer Value of a ASCII or EBCDIC Character CHAR2INT
289. ecution ID and password Valid credentials to connect to the server that runs the schedule The following is an additional parameter for the ReportCaster Bean API Server Name Must be specified since ReportCaster operates in a multi server environment Multiple server support using the ReportCaster Bean API will be introduced in a future release In Release 5 2 3 the following are additional features for the ReportCaster API You must exist as a ReportCaster user ID prior to utilizing any API functionality ReportCaster migration of API schedules from Release 4 3 6 to Release 5 2 3 will assign the WebFOCUS Reporting Server user ID and password in Release 4 3 6 as the owner ID password and Execution ID password For an overview about ownership for the ReportCaster API components Bean Servlet and Subroutine see ReportCaster API Authentication and Ownership in the Introducing the ReportCaster API chapter in the ReportCaster and Two Way Email API for Self Service Applications manual The ReportCaster Servlet API provides the option to assign ownership with the Default User Release 5 2 1 5 2 2 compatible or the WebFOCUS cookie IBIB_user Release 4 3 6 compatible For more information about assigning ownership for the ReportCaster Servlet API see Servlet Security in the ReportCaster Servlet API chapter in the ReportCaster and Two Way Email API for Self Service Applications manual Two Way Email API 5 18 Information
290. ed executing a query containing the code to access a single data source Do you have a trace file How is the problem affecting your business Is it halting development or production Do you just have questions about functionality or documentation Preface WebFOCUS Summary of New Features vii User Feedback In an effort to produce effective documentation the Documentation Services staff welcomes your opinions regarding this manual Please use the Reader Comments form at the end of this manual to relay suggestions for improving the publication or to alert us to corrections You can also use the Documentation Feedback form on our Web site http www informationbuilders com Thank you in advance for your comments Information Builders Consulting and Training Interested in training Information Builders Education Department offers a wide variety of training courses for this and other Information Builders products For information on course descriptions locations and dates or to register for classes visit our World Wide Web site http www informationbuilders com or call 800 969 INFO to speak to an Education Representative Preface viii Information Builders WebFOCUS Summary of New Features ix Contents 1 WebFOCUS Reporting Language Enhancements 1 1 Calculating Trends and Predicting Values
291. edicting Values 1 16 Information Builders Using a Linear Regression Equation The Linear Regression Equation estimates values by assuming that the dependent variable the new calculated values and the independent variable the sort field values are related by a function that represents a straight line The equation is y mx b where y Is the dependent variable m Is the slope of the line x Is the independent variable b Is the y intercept This calculation uses a technique called Ordinary Least Squares to determine values for m and b that minimize the sum of the squared differences between the data and the resulting line The following formulas show how m and b are calculated where x Are the sort field values independent variables y Are the data values dependent variables n Is the number of data points Example Calculating a Linear Regression Field m xy x y n x2 x 2 n b y n m x n WebFOCUS Reporting Language Enhancements WebFOCUS Summary of New Features 1 17 Trend values as well as predicted values are calculated using the regression line equation Example Calculating a Linear Regression Field TABLE FILE CAR PRINT MPG BY DEALER_COST WHERE MPG NE 0
292. edure How to Supply a WebFOCUS DBA Password 1 Click Password on the Edit menu 2 Enter a password in the dialog box and click OK Procedure How to Collect DBA Information at Run Time Use a Web form to collect DBA information when your application starts and to place the DBA password in a special cookie entry called DBAPASS in the WF_USER cookie You can then modify the WebFOCUS CGI scripts to send DBAPASS to the WebFOCUS Server as a SET PASS amp DBAPASS command in the IBISTART WFS file This way your WebFOCUS Maintain applications can transparently and consistently pass DBA support To see this technique generate an Update Assist application against a DBA protected Master File and make sure you select Prompt user to enter database security information DBA at the Selecting Navigation Options step The resulting navigation bar illustrates the technique For complete instructions on creating an Update Assist application see the Creating an Update Application With Update Assist chapter in the Developing Reporting Applications manual Coding Auto Increment Columns 9 40 Information Builders Coding Auto Increment Columns Auto increment columns are useful in transaction processing Use auto increment columns when many updates could occur for one key field An example is one social security number with several updates that reflect an individual s multiple purchases The field level Master File attribute FIELDTYPE R ident
293. ee Pot 49922 Mug 88474 Thermos 48976 West Coffee Grinder 48081 Coffee Pot 47432 Mug 93881 Thermos 45648 In this section Controlling Summary Line Processing Using Prefix Operators With Calculated Values Using Multiple SUB TOTAL or SUMMARIZE Commands How to Use Prefix Operators With Summary Values Example Using Prefix Operators With SUBTOTAL at the Sort Break Displaying an Alphanumeric Field on a Summary Line Manipulating Summary Values 1 32 Information Builders In Release 5 2 3 you can also display alphanumeric fields on summary lines To display an alphanumeric field on a summary line you must either explicitly list its field name on the summary command or use the asterisk wildcard to display all fields Different operations from two ON phrases for the same sort break appear on the same summary line and allow a mixture of operations on summary lines The grand total line populates all fields populated by any summary command even fields that are not specified in the grand total command If the same field is referenced in more than one ON phrase for the same sort break the last function specified is applied The following prefix operators are supported for numeric fields The following prefix operators are supported for alphanumeric fields Several examples of the use of prefix operators with summary values are shown here For additional examples see Manipulating Summary Values With Prefix Oper
294. efault value This attribute is available only if you choose to bind your program Data Adapter for DB2 8 12 Information Builders DB2 FETCH FIRST n ROWS Starting with the following versions of DB2 READLIMIT tests restrict the size of the answer set returned 5 0 UDB UNIX LINUX Windows and OS 2 5 1 OS 400 iSeries 7 1 OS 390 z OS In prior releases DB2 constructed a full answer set even if a request included a READLIMIT test The adapter then retrieved from the answer set only the number of rows specified in the request When accessing a version of DB2 that supports the FETCH FIRST n ROWS clause the data adapter translates a READLIMIT phrase to the appropriate clause to inform the RDBMS that only n rows need to be included in the answer set For n 1 the SQL request contains the clause FETCH FIRST 1 ROW ONLY The reduction in answer set size reduces response time and enhances performance RECORDLIMIT tests do not restrict the size of the answer set returned by DB2 The full answer set is constructed and the data adapter retrieves the number of rows specified by the RECORDLIMIT test Note This feature is not available in DB2 for VM or VSE Example Reducing Answer Set Size Data Adapter Enhancements WebFOCUS Summary of New Features 8 13 Example Reducing Answer Set Size The following request turns on the STMTRACE trace component and issues a retrieval request with a READLIMIT phrase The
295. efined filters when running Standard Reports in Dashboard Administrators define the filters when they build the reports Procedure How to Use Filters 1 Click the Standard Report 2 From the menu select Filter If the Filter option is not available on the menu this means filters have not been set up for this report The Filter Selection window opens 3 Select the options you want to filter on and click Save Your selections are saved and the Filter Selection window closes 4 Click the report and select Run or Run Deferred to execute the report Content Pages ReportCaster and Report Library In Release 5 2 3 administrators and authenticated users can add content pages where users can view the ReportCaster and the Report Library user interfaces Add these pages where you create all other content pages in the View Builder or from the Personalize link in the Dashboard Adding the ReportCaster and Report Library interfaces to a content page is different from accessing them from banner links in that a new browser window does not open Each interface appears in its own content page right in the Dashboard Since public users do not have access to ReportCaster or the Report Library administrators will not be able to create these types of pages for public users ReportCaster and Report Library content pages are fully documented in Creating Content Pages in the Creating a Content Block chapter in the WebFOCUS Managed Reportin
296. eir behavior is the same as that of Developers who have the Data Server privilege Likewise Developers still have their administrative capabilities when they use the full Developer Studio Administrative functions are fully documented in the WebFOCUS Managed Reporting Administrator s Manual Managed Reporting Developer for Windows can be used to create self service applications You can create Server procedures and metadata using the Data Server node so long as you are either an Administrator or a Developer with the Data Server privilege But you cannot access the Web Applications folder from Explorer which you might want to do to create launch pages and you cannot work in the project development paradigm which includes support for source control and deployment scenarios In these cases you must use the full Developer Studio The functionality of the Managed Reporting Developer for Windows product is described in the WebFOCUS Managed Reporting Developer s Manual Enhanced Explorer 2 4 Information Builders Enhanced Explorer In the Explorer you can Copy and paste a procedure within a single project The copied procedure is identified as Copy of procedure_name See Copying a Procedure in the Creating a Reporting Procedure chapter in the Developing Reporting Applications manual Enter a long procedure name in the Add Procedure dialog box The name is no longer restricted to eight characters See Selecting a Creati
297. el Hebrew CP00850 A SBCS IBM PC Multinational CP00856 A SBCS IBM PC Hebrew CP00860 A SBCS IBM PC Portugal CP00861 A SBCS IBM PC Iceland CP00862 A ASCH IBM PC Israel CP00863 A SBCS IBM PC Canadian French CP00864 A SBCS IBM PC Arabic CP00865 A SBCS IBM PC Nordic CP00869 A ASCG IBM PC Greece CP00871 E SBCS IBM MF Iceland CP00875 E EBCG IBM MF Greece CP00637 A SBCS DEC Multinational Character Set CP00600 A SBCS DEC German NRC Set CP00604 A SBCS DEC British United Kingdom NRC Set Configuring National Language Support 7 8 Information Builders CP00608 A SBCS DEC Dutch Netherland NRC Set CP00612 A SBCS DEC Finnish Finland NRC Set CP00616 A SBCS DEC French Flemish and French Belgian NRC Set CP00620 A SBCS DEC French Canadian NRC Set CP00624 A SBCS DEC Italian Italy NRC Set CP00628 A SBCS DEC Norwegian Danish Norway Denmark NRC Set CP00632 A SBCS DEC Portugal NRC Set CP00636 A SBCS DEC Spanish Spain NRC Set CP00640 A SBCS DEC Swedish Sweden NRC Set CP00644 A SBCS DEC Swiss Swiss French and Swiss German NRC Set CP00930 E SOSI Japanese IBM MF Katakana Code Page cp290 cp300 CP00939 E SOSI Japanese IBM MF Latin Extended cp1027 cp300 CP00932 A SJIS Japanese PC Shift JIS cp897 cp301 CP00942 A SJIS Japanese PC Shift JIS Extended cp1041 cp301 CP10942 A EUC Japanese PC EUC CP10930 E SOSIF Japanese Mainframe Fujitsu CP20930 E SOSIH Japanese Mainframe Hitachi CP00933 E SOSI Korean IBM MF Extended cp833
298. el reports 1 129 2 11 selecting languages 1 137 EXEC statements in Maintain 9 38 executing a Java class 8 27 execution enhancements in Maintain 9 4 exit on error 1 106 EXL2K display format 1 133 displaying dates 1 131 formatted dates and 1 131 saving reports 1 130 EXL2K format 1 129 2 11 FOLD LINE 1 138 EXL2K FORMULA display format 1 130 EXL2K_DEFCOLW parameter 1 138 7 11 EXL2KLANG parameter 1 137 7 11 EXL97 display format 1 135 reports in 1 135 Explorer 9 2 in Developer Studio 2 4 exponential moving average 1 3 to 1 4 1 9 2 26 to 2 27 2 29 2 31 to 2 32 2 34 exporting and importing forms in Maintain 9 12 exporting forms in Maintain 9 12 expressions 4 11 extensions in Maintain 9 36 external Cascading Style Sheets CSS in Maintain 9 10 extract transform with LAST function 10 15 extract utility 3 12 extracting variable length strings 1 59 F Favorites 3 15 FDS FOCUS Database Server 7 18 FETCH FIRST n ROWS clause 8 12 to 8 13 Field Creator dialog box 4 10 field displays 1 154 adjusting 1 154 field based reformatting 1 116 to 1 117 Fields tab 4 10 FIELDTYPE R attribute in Maintain 9 40 FILCASE parameter 1 107 file designations in Maintain 9 36 file names 1 107 converting 1 107 Index WebFOCUS Summary of New Features I 9 filtering parameter values 2 40 filters 4 11 for Standard Reports 3 20 in Dashboard 3 20 financial data 2 62 consolidating 2 62
299. eld it can have An or AnV format If it is a field of type AnV its length is taken from the length bytes stored in the field If in_limit is smaller than the actual length the source string is truncated to this size The final length value determined by this comparison will be referred to as p_length see the description of the outfield parameter start Numeric Is a positive constant or a field whose integer portion represents the starting position of the substring Note that the starting position can exceed the input string length sublength Numeric Is a positive constant or a field whose integer portion represents the length of the substring The end position of the substring is end start sublength 1 Note that the ending position can exceed the input string length depending on the provided values for start and sublength provided How to Extract a Variable Length Substring Example Extracting a Variable Length Substring Using Variable Length Character Expressions 1 60 Information Builders outfield Alphanumeric Is either a field with AnV or An format for the returned substring or the format of the output value enclosed in single quotation marks If the format of outfield is AnV the actual length outlen is computed as follows from the values for end start and p_length see the parent parameter If end gt p_length or end lt start then outlen 0 otherwise outlen end start 1 Example Extracting
300. ements WebFOCUS Summary of New Features 7 9 Step 2 Configure the WebFOCUS Reporting Server for NLS 1 Open the WebFOCUS Reporting Server Console with administrative privileges In a Web browser enter the following address http host port where host Is the host name or IP address of the machine running the WebFOCUS Reporting Server port Is one number higher than the port number specified when installing the server For example if at installation you accepted the default port number of 8120 to access the console you would specify port number 8121 If you installed the server on a machine with the host name MyServer and chose the base port 9190 to access the console enter http MyServer 9191 In WebFOCUS running on Windows you can also access the console in the following ways Select WebFOCUS 52 Server and then Web Console from the Start Programs menu In Developer Studio select Server Console from the Command menu The console for the project based development environment opens 2 In the console s navigation pane click NLS The NLS Configuration Wizard opens Notice that the current settings near the top of the window show the default configuration for the code page code page name and language The following steps describe how to select the code page using graphical prompts Alternatively you can manually specify the language and code page values For instructions see How to Manually Spec
301. ements WebFOCUS Summary of New Features 8 39 Text Fields for Relational Data Adapters Text TX type fields have been enhanced to support Text strings up to 32K The WHERE optimization clause 32K Text Strings for Text Fields Columns described with ACTUAL TX in a Master File support text strings up to 32K for example DB2 CLOB and LONG VARCHAR columns These columns can be used for read only operations Syntax How to Describe a Text Field in the Master File FIELDNAME fname ALIAS sqlcolname USAGE TXnn ACTUAL TX where fname Is any valid field name sqlcolname Is the RDBMS column name nn Is the length of an output line for display The maximum line length is 32K Example Describing a DB2 CLOB Column In the Master File FIELD CLOB_COL ALIAS CLOB_CO USAGE TX100 ACTUAL TX MISSING ON A request that retrieves this column can display text output up to 32K in length Text Fields for Relational Data Adapters 8 40 Information Builders WHERE Optimization Clause for Text Fields When creating a table request WHERE criteria can reference RDBMS variable character data types such as VARCHAR LONG VARCHAR and CLOB described in the Master File with USAGE TX and ACTUAL TX In addition certain types of IF and WHERE criteria that reference variable length character data types are included in the generated SQL causing the selection operations to be performed
302. en requests Self referential transforms that is CNTR CNTR 1 are no longer flagged as errors You can use the TAB key to move between entry areas Scroll bars are available in the workflow Indexed columns in FOCUS files are identified ETL Manager Enhancements WebFOCUS Summary of New Features 10 15 SQL Answer Set Object The SQL Answer object allows you to move SQL SELECT statements between applications by copying and pasting Source Object You can use the LAST function in an extract transformation to compare the current and previous value of an input column The LAST function retrieves the previous value for a field The Test button tests extract transformations Procedure How to Use the LAST Function in an Extract Transformation 1 In the Target window click Insert A new column appears in the Mapping and Transformation Rules grid 2 Double click in the Column field and enter a name for the temporary column In this example the field name is LASTORDER 3 Double click the Format field and enter a format for the temporary column In this example the format is DATE 4 In the Expression column type LAST fieldname In this example LAST ORDER_DATE You can also use the Transform Calculator to create this expression Target Object 10 16 Information Builders 5 Select the new temporary field and click Test The following window opens showing the current and previous field
303. ences a joined structure the name must be the field name from the host file The alias name is not supported parentvalue Is the parent value that determines the starting point in the hierarchy for the aggregation Financial Reporting Language Enhancements 1 82 Information Builders GET WITH CHILDREN GET specifies that the first line generated on the report is the consolidated line for the first child of the parent value WITH specifies that the first line generated on the report is the consolidated line for the parent value followed by the consolidated lines for each of its children to the level specified by n n ALL Is a positive integer from 1 to 99 specifying the number of levels of children to display The line of output for each child will have the sum of that child and its children to the depth specified for the ADD option 1 is the default value Therefore if n is omitted direct children each have a line on the report If n is 2 direct children and grandchildren each have a line on the report output ALL is a synonym for 99 ADD Sums the hierarchy to the depth specified by m for each line generated by the GET or WITH CHILDREN command m ALL Is a positive integer from 1 to 99 specifying the number of levels of children to consolidate on each line of the report output If a number greater than 99 is specified a warning message is displayed and m is set to 99 ALL is the default value Therefore if m is omitted the
304. ent as a trusted client This is optional and can take effect only on platforms where a password is not required Since Windows requires a password to impersonate a user this is not available on the Server for Windows This option is controlled by a keyword in the server configuration file edaserve cfg On z OS and OS 390 this keyword is set in the service section of the server configuration file Syntax How to Specify a Trusted Windows NT 2000 Client trust_nt y n where y Supports Windows client as a trusted client n Does not allow a trusted client n is the default value HTTP Basic Authentication 7 24 Information Builders HTTP Basic Authentication In addition to the Integrated Windows Authentication IWA and server basic authentication methods the HTTP listener supports HTTP basic authentication This authentication method can be activated by setting the SECURITY keyword in the HTTP listener node block in the communication configuration file odin cfg NODE LST_HTTP BEGIN PROTOCOL HTTP SERVICE 8101 CLASS AGENT SECURITY HTTPBASIC END This authentication method uses Web Server logon options It is not recommended to use this method since it is not encrypted SSL TLS Support The HTTP Listener supports the following protocols through OpenSSL Secure Sockets Layer SSL Version 3 Transport Layer Security TLS Version 1 The listener supports DH and RSA algorithms for key exchan
305. er a value This value is based on the operating system on which the ReportCaster Distribution Server is running and the language you would like ReportCaster to use for report scheduling and distribution For more information on code page values contact your Information Builders representative ReportCaster Enhancements WebFOCUS Summary of New Features 5 15 5 Select Webserver Codepage and enter a value This value is based on the operating system on which the Web server is running and must be the language equivalent of the ReportCaster Distribution Server s code page For more information on code page values contact your Information Builders representative Configuring ReportCaster for NLS 5 16 Information Builders 6 Open the Repository folder and select Unitype 7 From the drop down list select either YES or NO This setting activates Unitype for the Repository If you are using Oracle or SQL Server repositories and require Unicode support you must specify Unitype YES This setting is also required if your tables include Double Byte Character Set DBCS characters 8 Once you have configured the ReportCaster Distribution Server for NLS click the Save icon ReportCaster Enhancements WebFOCUS Summary of New Features 5 17 ReportCaster API The following are additional parameters for all components of the ReportCaster API ReportCaster User Owner of schedules and Distribution Lists Ex
306. erate dynamic lists in your applications This means that you can add pick lists to your application which get their data from a database column or a flat file without having to write any supporting code With Dynamic Lists any database column can be used as the source of pick lists on your forms To activate the feature for any field in your application select the Dynamic List option from the Validation drop down list in Step 2 of the Update Assist Wizard In this section Dynamic List Generation Results Page Enhanced DBA Prompting Enhanced Data Retrieval Error Messages Tree Navigation Enhancements Enhanced Date Field Validation Validation of User Supplied Data in Update Assist Applications Choosing a Color Scheme for an Update Assist Application Customizing Update Assist Designs Calendar Control for Date Formatted Fields in Update Assist Right Click Menu Options on Trees Sorting Tables Update Assist 2 50 Information Builders Results Page Update Assist lets you specify if you want an alternative Results page to display once a user commits a Save or Delete action This gives you the functionality to embed an Update Assist application in an existing Web application When users complete a Save action instead of seeing a message displayed in the Message Area near the top of the form they are sent to the Results page where they see a message Your changes have been saved If you want your application to us
307. erence Forecast Dialog Box Linear Regression Forecast dialog box options are fully documented in Calculating Trends and Predicting Values With Forecast in the Creating Temporary Fields chapter in the Creating Reports With Graphical Tools manual Developer Studio Enhancements WebFOCUS Summary of New Features 2 35 Designing a User Interface With the Resource Layout Painter The Resource Layout Painter previously the Layout tool enables you to graphically create an HTML page that incorporates WebFOCUS forms reports graphs and other Web objects The Resource Layout Painter enables you to add these components to your HTML page in an integrated process within Developer Studio The following topics describe the improved functionality of the Resource Layout Painter Form Controls With User supplied Values Add WebFOCUS form controls such as radio buttons text boxes and single and multiple drop down lists that enable the user to supply variable values to a report or graph request The Resource Layout Painter creates these WebFOCUS form controls automatically when you add a variable to a request in the Report Painter For procedures on adding form controls see Using Forms to Supply Parameter Values in the Designing a User Interface for a Web Application With the Resource Layout Painter chapter in the Developing Reporting Applications manual Enhanced Customization of Web Objects Add more Web objects and customize the objects on your HT
308. ers to create and manage domain content Using this product Developers can Create Standard Reports and Reporting Objects with Windows based tools such as the Report Painter Analyze data with OLAP Create and manage WebFOCUS Reporting Server resources such as metadata procedures and other files By design all Managed Reporting administrative features are disabled That means that Developers cannot create delete or rename Domains using the Managed Reporting Developer There is also no access to User Administrator Dashboard View Builder or the ReportCaster Console The Web Applications and User Management nodes have been removed in Explorer since they do not apply to this product Important Managed Reporting Administrators can use this product but their behavior is the same as that of Developers who have the Data Server privilege Likewise Developers still have their administrative capabilities when they use the full Developer Studio Administrative functions are fully described in the WebFOCUS Managed Reporting Administrator s Manual Managed Reporting Developer for Windows can be used to create self service applications You can create Server procedures and metadata using the Data Server node as long as you are either an Administrator or a Developer with the Data Server privilege You cannot access the Web Applications folder from Explorer which you might want to do to create launch pages and you cannot work in
309. erver Settings 6 4 Information Builders Configuring WebFOCUS Reporting Server Settings You can use the Reporting Servers section of the WebFOCUS Client Console to Add or change server settings in the ibi client52 wfc etc odin cfg file Configure Deferred Server Mappings in the ibi client52 wfc etc altdnode wfs file Configure special settings for Server Side Graphics and amper auto prompting in the ibi client52 wfc etc odin cfg file This is a new feature in Release 5 2 3 Adding or Changing Server Settings Administrators can use the WebFOCUS Client Console to add WebFOCUS Reporting Servers and HTTP Listeners to the WebFOCUS environment Additionally you can use the console to add WebFOCUS Client node profiles for each WebFOCUS Reporting Server The nodes are added to the ibi client52 wfc etc odin cfg file Procedure How to Add a New Node to ODIN CFG 1 Click Reporting Servers and then Remote Services 2 Click New 3 In the NODE field specify the node name 4 Specify the Node class Client or Cluster 5 Click Next If you selected Client in step 4 proceed to step 6 If you selected Cluster in step 4 proceed to step 7 How to Add a New Node to ODIN CFG Change a Node Example Overriding WebFOCUS Default Settings for a Specific Server Node WebFOCUS Client Enhancements WebFOCUS Summary of New Features 6 5 6 The New Node block window appears Enter the followin
310. es 1 117 Syntax How to Define and Apply a Format Field In a DEFINE command DEFINE FILE filename format_field A8 expression END In a Master File DEFINE format_field A8 expression In a request COMPUTE format_field A8 expression where format_field Is the name of the field that contains the format for each row expression Is the expression that assigns the format values to the format field Once the format field is defined you can apply it in a report request TABLE FILE filename display fieldname format_field just END where display Is any valid display command fieldname Is a field in the request to be reformatted format_field Is the name of the field that contains the formats If the name of the format field is the same as an explicit format the explicit format will be used For example a field named I8 cannot be used for field based reformatting because it will be interpreted as the explicit format I8 just Is a justification option L R or C The justification option can be placed before or after the format field separated from the format by a slash Punctuating Numbers 1 118 Information Builders Punctuating Numbers Countries differ in how they punctuate numbers you can reflect these differences in reports using Continental Decimal Notation CDN specified with the SET CDN command This command allows you to choose how to punctuate numbers
311. es up to 66 characters for a total of 138 characters Because of the two QUALCHARs included with every long qualified field name the total length of a long qualified field name usually displayed as two dots can be up to 196 characters for a relational or an XFOCUS data source and up to 140 characters for a FOCUS data source To use long qualified field names FIELDNAME must be set to NEW Long field names can be coded in a Master File or in a DEFINE command They can be used on z OS and OS 390 UNIX or Windows NT Example Using Long Qualified Field Names Sample Master File FILENAME INTSALES SUFFIX FOC SEGNAME FRANCE SEGTYPE S1 FIELDNAME PROVINCE_NICE_STORE500_TOTALSALES TSALE500 A10 FIELDNAME PROVINCE_NICE_STORE501_TOTALSALES TSALE501 A10 Example Using Long Qualified Field Names Data Adapter Enhancements WebFOCUS Summary of New Features 8 37 Sample FOCEXEC Note For display purposes the FOCEXEC contains CREATE FILE and MODIFY commands DYNAM ALLOC DD INTSALES LONGNAME AVANT_GARDE_CLOTHING_DATASOURCE DS PMSESD INTSALES FOCUS SHR REU RUN CREATE FILE AVANT_GARDE_CLOTHING_DATASOURCE RUN MODIFY FILE AVANT_GARDE_CLOTHING_DATASOURCE FREEFORM TSALE500 TSALE501 MATCH TSALE500 ON MATCH REJECT ON NOMATCH INCLUDE DATA 12235 5470 9827 7675 7635 9327 10325 7543 END RUN TABLE FILE AVANT_GARDE_CLOTHING_DATASOURCE PRINT AVANT_GARDE_CLOTHING_DATASOURCE FRANCE PROVINCE_NICE_ST
312. eves the value of the CGI parameter PRODUCT_ID Maintain File GGPRODS Infer Product_ID into prodstk Declare pcode a4 IWC getAppCGIValue PRODUCT_ID For 1 next Product_ID into prodstk where Product_ID eq pcode Importing and Binding Variables From a WebFOCUS Report The variable binding feature allows you to bind any Maintain procedures to WebFOCUS drill down reports without having to write code This feature is especially applicable for users who need to make spot updates from WebFOCUS reports To implement this feature add a drill down to your WebFOCUS report passing to Maintain all keys needed to locate the record in Maintain You can then create the WebFOCUS parameter to Maintain variable binding without writing Maintain code Tip In WebFOCUS Developer Studio passed name value pairs are called parameters In WebFOCUS Maintain replaceable named values are called variables How to Import and Bind Variables Reference Variable Binding Guidelines Import WebFOCUS Parameters Into Maintain Dialog Box Importing and Binding Variables From a WebFOCUS Report 9 18 Information Builders Procedure How to Import and Bind Variables Before using variable binding in a Maintain procedure you must create a WebFOCUS report that has a drill down to the Maintain procedure Once you have created the report and specified the drill down parameters do the following 1 In the Maintain Development Environment open the Maintain pro
313. f versions The Report Library is only available to ReportCaster users who have been granted access to the library The Report Library consists of the following interfaces Library Access List Defines who may access specific content in the Report Library Library Content View the content in the Report Library to which you have been granted access Library Management ReportCaster Administrators can view a high level summary of the content in the Report Library Reports can be deleted but the actual content of the reports cannot be viewed For detailed information about how to access and use the Report Library see the Report Library chapter in the ReportCaster Development and Administration manual or see the Report Library chapter in the ReportCaster End User s Manual ReportCaster Console 5 10 Information Builders ReportCaster Console The ReportCaster Console is an interactive administrator s tool that may be used to maintain and view schedule and log information stored in the ReportCaster Repository From the redesigned ReportCaster Console you can select the following options Info Generates a list of schedules based on criteria you specify The resulting list may then be used to view additional information about a specific schedule You may also run a schedule adding Task parameters and run a log report for a specific schedule Status Generates a list of scheduled jobs that are in the ReportC
314. face you must create a Task to be distributed by ReportCaster You can create the following types of Tasks WF Server Procedure Schedules the distribution of a WebFOCUS report that resides on a specified WebFOCUS Reporting Server Standard Report Schedules the distribution of a WebFOCUS report that resides in a Managed Reporting Standard Reports folder My Report Schedules the distribution of a WebFOCUS report that resides in a Managed Reporting My Reports folder URL Schedules the contents of a URL to specified recipients The contents of a URL may be distributed through e mail using FTP to a printer or to the Report Library File Schedules the distribution of a file to which the ReportCaster Distribution Server has read access When scheduling a file you must enter the fully qualified path and file name for example d reportcaster52 filename doc of the file For example if you want to distribute a Word document you can send the static file to ReportCaster recipients The options for creating a Task differ depending on the Task type For more information about these options see the specific procedure for each Task type in Creating a Task in the Creating and Maintaining a Schedule chapter in the ReportCaster Development and Administration manual In this section Distributing a Task Distribution Enhancements When Creating a Schedule ReportCaster Enhancements WebFOCUS Summary of New Features
315. figuration tool From the Programs menu select ReportCaster52 Configuration and then Edit For new feature information about the configuration tool see ReportCaster Server Configuration Tool on page 5 5 Test the ReportCaster configuration even if the Application Server and ReportCaster Distribution Server are not running From the Programs menu select ReportCaster52 Configuration and then Test This option is also available on UNIX and z OS using a shell script Security Configurations ReportCaster supports trusted security configurations and remote authentication For more information about the various security settings that enable ReportCaster to support this functionality see ReportCaster Security Settings and ReportCaster Remote Authentication in the ReportCaster Security chapter in the ReportCaster Development and Administration manual To implement a single signon environment where the Web server identifies users you can use Managed Reporting signon integration with Basic Web server authentication In Release 5 2 3 ReportCaster is fully supported when using this signon integration technique For more information about how to implement this signon integration technique follow the steps outlined in the Integrating WebFOCUS Security With Basic Web Server Authentication chapter in the WebFOCUS Security and Administration manual ReportCaster Authentication Exit 5 4 Information Builders ReportCaster Authentication Exit
316. first complete moving average occurs at the nth data point because the calculation requires n values This is called the lag The moving average values for the lag rows are calculated as follows the first value in the moving average column is equal to the first data value the second value in the moving average column is the average of the first two data values and so on until the nth row at which point there are enough values to calculate the moving average with the number of values specified Example Calculating a Simple Moving Average Column WebFOCUS Reporting Language Enhancements WebFOCUS Summary of New Features 1 7 Example Calculating a Simple Moving Average Column The following request defines an integer value named PERIOD to use as the independent variable for the moving average It predicts three periods of values beyond the range of the retrieved data DEFINE FILE GGSALES SDATE YYM DATE SYEAR Y SDATE SMONTH M SDATE PERIOD I2 SMONTH END TABLE FILE GGSALES SUM UNITS DOLLARS BY CATEGORY BY PERIOD WHERE SYEAR EQ 97 AND CATEGORY NE Gifts ON PERIOD RECAP MOVAVE D10 1 FORECAST DOLLARS 1 3 MOVAVE 3 END The output is Category PERIOD Unit Sales Dollar Sales MOVAVE Coffee 1 61666 801123 801 123 0 2 54870 682340 741 731 5 3 61608 765078 749 513 7 4 57050 691274 712 897 3 5 59229 720444 725 598 7 6 58466 742457 718 058 3 7 60771 747253 736 718 0 8 54633 655896 715
317. from the Graph Types drop down list in the Styles tab line graphs bar graphs pie graphs scatter graphs area graphs 3D graphs bubble charts polar graphs radar graphs spectral map charts stock charts and histograms When you select a graph type a thumbnail image and brief description of the graph are displayed Updated Styles Tab to Include Graph Types and Graph Styles In Release 5 2 3 you can select from a number of basic graph types as well as refinements on these types known as graph styles The Styles tab provides a list and brief descriptions of the many graph types and styles available in WebFOCUS Addition of the Preview Screen In Release 5 2 3 the graph in the Graph Preview window displays the graph type and style you chose as well as any styling information you specified from the template drop down list or in the Properties tab The Preview is best viewed using 1024 x 768 resolution The Preview does not open by default for other resolutions In these cases you have to click the Show Preview button The following bar graph uses the 3DBAR graph style This generic chart is a two dimensional chart with three dimensional type bars Ad Hoc Reporting Enhancements WebFOCUS Summary of New Features 4 19 The data used for this Graph Preview is built with the selected data sources field format types and lengths of the data In this case the X axis field COUNTRY is alphanumeric A10 and will be displayed as Axxxxxxxx
318. g 1 112 Information Builders Syntax How to Specify Decimal Alignment of a Heading or Footing To align the decimal points define the width of the decimal item then measure how far in from the right side of a column you want to position the decimal point This places the decimal point in the same position in a column regardless of the number of decimal places displayed to its right TYPE hcomponent ITEM n WIDTH w JUSTIFY DECIMAL m where hcomponent Specifies the type of heading component that should display with decimal alignment Possible values are TABHEADING specifies the report heading TABFOOTING specifies the report footing HEADING specifies the page heading FOOTING specifies the page footing SUBHEAD specifies a sort heading SUBFOOT specifies a sort footing n Specifies the part of the heading or footing to align by its position within the heading or footing Note that several other heading and footing subcomponents can also be used to select a specific item w Specifies the width of the item to be aligned in the units specified by the UNITS parameter inches by default m Is the measurement in the unit of measurement specified by the UNITS parameter inches by default which specifies how far in from the right side of a column you want to place your decimal point With this specification you can locate the decimal point in the same position within a column regardless of the n
319. g Access Mode Using NOPACCESS on page 8 8 DB2 Declaring DB2 CAF Connection Attributes From the WebFOCUS Reporting Server Console on page 8 11 Support for DB2 8 1 on page 8 13 Essbase Preventing Aggregation of Non Consolidating Members on page 8 16 Suppressing Zero Values on page 8 17 Suppressing Missing Data on page 8 17 Suppressing Zero Values and Missing Data on page 8 18 J D Edwards Data Adapter for J D Edwards on page 8 19 Millennium Data Adapter for Millennium on page 8 19 PeopleSoft Data Adapter for PeopleSoft on page 8 20 SAP R 3 Aggregation Support in the SAP R 3 Interface on page 8 23 VSAM Data Adapter for VSAM on page 8 25 WebFOCUS Maintain Enhancements A 8 Information Builders WebFOCUS Maintain Enhancements Java classes Java Applications Adapter on page 8 26 Database selection Database Selection From the Console on page 8 33 SUBSTRING function SUBSTRING Function Behavior on page 8 42 Enhancement See Enhancement See Smart deployment Deploying Only Changed Files With Smart Deploy on page 9 4 Parsing activity Customizing Parsing Activity on page 9 8 Text search Searching for Text in a Project on page 9 9 Cascading Style Sheets in forms Applying a Cascading Style Sheet to a Form on page 9 10 Testing procedures Testing Procedures With Run Procedure on page 9 37 Search paths Specifying Additional Search Paths on page 9 38 Microsoft Access integrat
320. g End User s Manual and the WebFOCUS Managed Reporting Administrator s Manual Dynamic Tracing In Release 5 2 3 you can turn on tracing dynamically in the Dashboard by editing the bid config xml file in the worp conf directory In the bid config xml file find the following line lt trace option trace flag false trace level DEBUG gt and set the value to true You do not need to reload the servlet WebFOCUS Summary of New Features 4 1 CHAPTER 4 4 Ad Hoc Reporting Enhancements This chapter describes all of the features for ad hoc reporting in Version 5 Release 2 and has been updated to reflect Version 5 Release 2 3 Topics that contain Version 5 Release 2 3 features are marked with asterisks Topics OLAP HTML Report Assistant HTML Graph Assistant HTML Report Assistant and HTML Graph Assistant OLAP 4 2 Information Builders OLAP OLAP has been rewritten using JavaScript and HTML instead of Java applets OLAP s functionality look and feel remain the same OLAP enhancements include the following Drag and Drop Dimensions and Measures Right Click in a Report Hidden Reports Tiles OLAP is fully documented in the Analyzing Data in an OLAP Report chapter in the WebFOCUS Managed Reporting End User s Manual Drag and Drop Dimensions and Measures You can drag and drop measures and dimension controls in an OLAP enabled report from one position to another T
321. g Report Formats and Graphs in a Compound Report Displaying Compound Reports in PS Format 1 126 Information Builders NOBREAK Is an optional phrase that suppresses page breaks By default each report is displayed on a separate page You can use NOBREAK selectively in a request to control which reports are displayed on the same page Page numbering and headings are automatically supported with NOBREAK Example Combining Report Formats and Graphs in a Compound Report The following request generates a compound report from three different report types PDF HTML and EXL2K and embeds a graph in each report Notice that each graph is saved as a GIF file in the graph request The graph is then identified sized and positioned within the StyleSheet declaration TYPE REPORT IMAGE graphname of the report in which it is being embedded Variations on the SET COMPOUND syntax OPEN NOBREAK CLOSE combine the three reports on the same page Key lines of code are highlighted in the following request Report 1 GRAPH FILE SHORT SUM PROJECTED_RETURN AS Return on Investment BY HOLDER ACROSS CONTINENT ON GRAPH SET LOOKGRAPH 3D_BAR ON GRAPH SET GRAPHEDIT SERVER ON GRAPH HOLD AS SLSGRPH1 FORMAT GIF END SET COMPOUND OPEN NOBREAK TABLE FILE SHORT SUM PROJECTED_RETURN AS Return on Investment BY CONTINENT BY HOLDER HEADING Investment Report ON TABLE SET STYLE TYPE DATA BACKCOLOR BY B2 SILVER WHITE TYP
322. g box to enter or choose values for the Date month day and year and Time hours minutes seconds Procedure How to Create a Where Statement Using Date and Time Values 1 Select a field from the Fields tree and drag the field to the right frame The field name and lt Select expression gt and lt Select values gt will appear in the right frame prefixed by a green check mark 2 Click lt Select expression gt in the right frame to display a list of operators in the left frame Click the expression of your choice 3 Click lt Select values gt to complete the expression 4 Click Enter Value or Retrieve Values to access the Edit Date Time Value window 5 Type in or use the drop down boxes to create a new date Click Values to retrieve actual values from the database Ad Hoc Reporting Enhancements WebFOCUS Summary of New Features 4 21 6 If the where operator allows for only one value for example greater than the following window appears HTML Report Assistant and HTML Graph Assistant 4 22 Information Builders WebFOCUS Summary of New Features 5 1 CHAPTER 5 5 ReportCaster Enhancements This chapter describes all of the features for ReportCaster in Version 5 Release 2 and has been updated to reflect Version 5 Release 2 3 Topics that contain Version 5 Release 2 3 features are marked are marked with asterisks The following topics describe new features for ReportCaster ReportCaster API and Two Way Emai
323. g required parameters a PROTOCOL Rules for communicating between nodes for example TCP b PORT Service port number or name c HOST Name or IP address of the server d CLASS Purpose of the node For example CLIENT or CLUSTER If you specify CLIENT for a z OS or OS 390 MVS server you must include a qualifier e SECURITY In Release 5 2 3 this is a new setting Select one of the following options from the drop down list Explicit A user ID and password are required to connect to this server node Explicit is the default value IWA Integrated Windows Authentication This option is only available on Windows when using the WebFOCUS CGI When IWA is set no user ID or password is required to connect to this server node Instead the user context of the WebFOCUS Client connection is derived by the server using a Microsoft security API Password Passthru The user ID and password are explicitly specified for each connection and passed to the server at connection time for authentication This option requires that the server be started with security off Note You can also specify the following optional parameters COMPRESSION Turns on data compression Codes are 0 off and 1 on ENCRYPTION Sets data encryption ability CONNECT_LIMIT Number of seconds the client holds the pending connection This is useful in a cluster deployment to avoid a lengthy delay of failover response Other poss
324. ge DSS and RSA for authentication 3DES and RC4 for encryption decryption MD5 and SHA1 for hashing To enable the SSL TLS protocol a certificate and a private key file must be specified in SSL_CERTIFICATE and SSL_PRIVATE_KEY in the communication configuration file odin cfg The Listener presents the certificate to clients and clients verify the certificate to determine if the listener can be trusted Optionally the listener can authenticate clients by providing trusted CA certificates in SSL_CA_CERTIFICATE Only clients with certificates signed by one of the trusted CAs establishes a secure connection to the listener WebFOCUS Reporting Server Enhancements WebFOCUS Summary of New Features 7 25 Lawson Security Adapter In Release 5 2 3 you can apply Lawson security rules to the Lawson LAUA repository automatically In previous releases access was secured using DBA commands in the Master File or by controlling access with Managed Reporting In Release 5 2 3 with the development of the Lawson Security Adapter the appropriate Lawson security rules are automatically applied as defined in the Lawson LAUA repository This is done by generating dynamic DBA commands and or dynamic WHERE criteria The Lawson Security Adapter is configured using the WebFOCUS Reporting Server Console The SUFFIX of the Lawson database xxxx and the default Lawson PRODUCTLINE yyyy need to be entered in the WebFOCUS Reporting Server Console This information gene
325. guage Enhancements WebFOCUS Summary of New Features 1 19 Syntax How to Calculate Trends and Predict Values Using REGRESS ON sortfield TABLE RECAP y fmt REGRESS n x1 x2 x3 z where sortfield Is a field in the data source It cannot be the same field as any of the parameters to REGRESS A new linear regression equation is derived each time the sort field value changes y Is the new numeric column calculated by applying the regression equation You cannot DEFINE or COMPUTE a field with this name fmt Is the display format for y If it is omitted D12 2 is the default value Format I is not supported for y n Is a whole number from 1 to 3 indicating the number of independent variables x1 x2 x3 Are the field names to be used as the independent variables All of these variables must be numeric and be independent of each other z Is an existing numeric field that is assumed to be approximately linearly dependent on the independent variables and is used to derive the regression equation Calculating Trends and Predicting Values 1 20 Information Builders Example Creating a Multivariate Linear Regression Column Using REGRESS The following request uses the GGSALES data source to calculate an estimated DOLLARS column The BUDUNITS UNITS and BUDDOLLARS fields are the independent variables The DOLLARS field provides the actual values to be estimated DEFINE FILE GGSALES SDATE YYM DATE SY
326. guage Switch Feature During installation the Language Selection dialog box appears after you select the WebFOCUS components you want to install Using the Dynamic Language Switch 6 26 Information Builders Select the languages you want to install and click Next You can dynamically switch among these languages from all logon pages Once installation is complete every logon page has a link with the languages installed The default language that displays is the operating system language specified in the regional settings or browser language options Once you select a language the user interface automatically switches to that language WebFOCUS creates two cookies holding the language value selected during logon The first one is a temporary cookie IBIWF_language It is used to pass the language value to all WebFOCUS components during the browser session You may have multiple temporary cookies with different languages on the same user machine if a user has multiple browser sessions open with a different language in each one WebFOCUS Client Enhancements WebFOCUS Summary of New Features 6 27 The second is a permanent cookie IBIWF_langperm It sets the initial language that is displayed every time a browser session is opened The language may be different from the operating system s language For self service applications for which a user logon is not required you can pass the language value directly to the URL For exampl
327. hat involves the following One or more BAPIs as BAPIs are secured by SAP SAP delivered logical databases as the server code is secured by SAP Function Modules either SAP or customer that are fully prototyped and that include the proper AUTHORITY CHECK statements Reference Usage Notes for Security in SAP R 3 Native Interface If the user ID and password are not provided in the connection string the request is executed with the user ID and password provided in the sapserv cfg file for the given system If user ID and password are provided in the connection string all work except execution of the request is done with the user ID and password stored in the sapserv cfg file The user ID and password from the connection string are used only on execution of the request BAPI Support in the SAP R 3 Interface The current release supports most read only BAPIs including joins as described in the following example CREATE SYNONYM baseapp BUS0002_GETLIST FOR BUS0002 GETLIST BAPI DBMS SQLSAP AT I46 END CREATE SYNONYM baseapp BUS0002_GETDETAIL FOR BUS0002 GETDETAIL BAPI DBMS SQLSAP AT I46 END JOIN BAPI0002_COMP_CODE IN COMPANYCODE_GETLIST TO CCGD2_COMP_CODE IN COMPANYCODE_GETDETAIL END TABLE FILE COMPANYCODE_GETLIST PRINT CCGL0_TYPE NOPRINT BAPI0002_COMP_CODE BAPI0002_COMP_NAME CCGD2_CURRENCY CCGD2_LANGU IF BAPI0002_COMP_CODE NE 2300 OR 6000 END Data Adapter Enhancements WebFOCUS Summary of New Features
328. have already styled either the title or data for a column and wish to quickly apply the same formatting to the other element click the appropriate button Copy Title Style to Data or Copy Data Style to Title 3 Under Column Layout you can change column width and justification Width options are Maximum Sets the width according to the length defined in the field format Minimum Sets the width of the column according to the widest value or heading in the field Minimum is the default selection Truncate Enables you to specify where to truncate the column width based on the specified units inches or centimeters To indicate that a field value has been truncated in the browser WebFOCUS places an exclamation point after every alphanumeric and text field value and an asterisk after every numeric field value Wrap Enables you to specify where to wrap data based on the specified units inches or centimeters Justification options are left right center or return to the default positioning Financial Report Painter Enhancements 2 66 Information Builders 4 Under Graphical options select the font characteristics border or grid characteristics and or background colors that you wish to apply to the column a For borders click the Select Borders button The Borders dialog box opens Select width style and or color options from the drop down lists Click OK You can apply the same specifications to all b
329. he htm File Example Locating the Name of a Resource File Modifying Existing Text Adding New Text Adding New Text Without Translation Adding a gif File WebFOCUS Client Enhancements WebFOCUS Summary of New Features 6 31 Architecture Each language has its own set of resource files Depending on the languages selected during installation the following directory structure is available install_drive ibi WebFOCUS52 ibi_html javaassist intl lang_subdir where install_drive Is the drive on which WebFOCUS is installed lang_subdir Is the subdirectory created for an installed language The values are AT for German Austrian DE for German Standard EN for English ES for Spanish FC for French Canadian FR for French Standard JA for Japanese KO for Korean TW for Chinese Traditional Big 5 ZH for Chinese Simplified GB Each subdirectory contains all the necessary files to display a localized WebFOCUS user interface including gif image txt text css cascading style sheet and js JavaScript files Customizing the User Interface 6 32 Information Builders Locating the Name of a Resource File To make changes to the user interface in WebFOCUS you must first locate the name of the resource file associated with the feature Each htm file has JavaScript code indicating its associated resource file Example Locating the Name of a Resource File This example illustrates h
330. he Refresh Synonym feature you can recreate a synonym in order to update field information while preserving the old synonym s title description usage virtual field and DBA information This feature also synchronizes the Master File with the table on which the synonym is based You can access the Refresh Synonym feature from either the Projects on localhost area or the WebFOCUS Environments area in the Explorer window This feature is also available in the Server Console Procedure How to Refresh a Synonym 1 Right click a synonym Master File In the Projects area Master Files are listed in a Master Files folder under a project s name In the WebFOCUS Environments folder Master Files are listed within an application in the Data Servers Applications area or in the Data folder under the Cataloged Path folder if the server is set up to use EDAPATH 2 Choose one of the following Refresh Synonym then Replace to recreate the Master File or Refresh Synonym then Create new to provide a name for the new synonym When you choose this option a new synonym is created based on the name you provide but the original Master File or Access File is not modified Synonyms for FOCUS and relational tables can have a maximum of 64 characters but they cannot include spaces or special characters Date Format and Time Display Options 2 8 Information Builders Date Format and Time Display Options You can
331. hese drill down and drill across positions are as follows By to By By to Across Across to By and Across to Across You can also drag and drop dimension controls from above the blue colored band to the body of the report You can drag and drop measures to other measure positions to affect the order in which you read the measures Example Using the Drag and Drop Feature in a WebFOCUS OLAP Analysis In the following report quarterly production information is spread out A horizontal display may make comparisons easier Ad Hoc Reporting Enhancements WebFOCUS Summary of New Features 4 3 1 Drag and drop QUARTER above the report The report changes immediately and appears as follows The store information is more compact Right Click in a Report You can right click dimensions and measures in an OLAP enabled report to yield several choices When you right click a dimension you have the following choices Delete New Move to Across By Full Screen Show Panel Field Info and Help When you right click measures you have the following choices Sort by Highest Sort by Lowest Graph New Remove Measure Remove Visualization Forecast Full Screen Show Panel Field Info and Help Example Using the Right Click Feature in a WebFOCUS OLAP Analysis 1 Right click Line Cost of Goods Sold and choose Visualization This applies a data visualization bar graph to each value in the column which may reveal a trend OLAP 4 4 Infor
332. his feature see Specifying Multiple Drill Down Links in Chapter 1 WebFOCUS Reporting Language Enhancements Procedure How to Create a Multiple Drill Down Procedure 1 Create a new procedure or open an existing procedure in the Report Painter window 2 Right click the report component for which you will drill down 3 Select Options from the shortcut menu The Properties dialog box opens 4 Click the Drill Down tab Creating and Styling Reports With the Report Painter 2 22 Information Builders 5 Select the Multiple Drill Downs check box The Current Drill Down input box is enabled and the default drill down name DrillDown1 appears Tip The pop up menu of drill down options is only visible in the report output if the Multiple Drill Downs check box is enabled and you have at least one drill down definition 6 Type the first drill down name in the Current Drill Down input box This is the name that appears on the pop up menu in the report output Developer Studio Enhancements WebFOCUS Summary of New Features 2 23 7 Select a drill down type from the Drill Down Type drop down list The drill down type can be any of the following Executable procedure URL URL from a field JavaScript function Maintain procedure Compiled Maintain procedure Maintain case 8 Enter any values required by the selected drill down type For example if the drill down
333. ible values are 0 no wait and 1 infinite wait 1 is the default value MAXWAIT lt query wait gt lt row wait gt Time the client waits before timeout The first number is the return time for any row The second number optional is the return time for rows beyond the first row Time is in seconds TYPE In Release 5 2 3 this is a new setting Select one of the following options from the drop down list INTERNAL Node is ignored by the Communication Gateway Server RESERVED Node is stopped and started by Cluster Manager to optimize performance DESCRIPTION Description for the WebFOCUS Reporting Server node This description displays in the WebFOCUS front end tools Proceed to step 8 Configuring WebFOCUS Reporting Server Settings 6 6 Information Builders 7 The New Cluster Node block window appears Enter the following required parameters a ALTERNATE Select the servers to be included in the cluster b DESCRIPTION Description for the cluster c LICENSE License key If a license key has not already been specified add a license key that will enable the cluster feature 8 Click Save Procedure How to Change a Node 1 Click Reporting Servers and then Remote Services 2 Select the node you want to change 3 Click one of the following buttons Modify Displays the settings for the selected node enabling you to make changes Remove Deletes the selected node
334. ically listed inside the navigation pane Such errors can occur if you do not place a Master File in an application path if a data file is missing from an application or if the WebFOCUS Reporting Server is not running Developer Studio Enhancements WebFOCUS Summary of New Features 2 51 Tree Navigation Enhancements The Tree control used in Tree navigation displays in just a few seconds even with database selections of tens of thousands of rows You can use two JavaScript variables that control the sub foldering of nodes to customize the Tree control Modify these variables by editing the segname_navbar htm file the navigation bar HTML file that is generated by Update Assist It is in the HTML files directory for your project after you run Update Assist maxNodesPerFolder is an integer value that controls the maximum number of nodes that can be displayed in each folder If the number of nodes exceeds this number the Tree control uses sub folders labeled with a range of the node values contained within to automatically split up the nodes maxFolders is an integer value that determines the maximum number of folders that can be rendered The total number of nodes that are rendered are divided among these folders Note If the maxNodesPerFolder and maxFolders values are set in a way that would cause a conflict the setting for maxFolders takes precedence over maxNodesPerFolder Enhanced Date Field Validation If your source
335. ied in step 1 based on the size of the font you are using For example the following value of the COUNTRY field would measure as follows Tip Consider using a consistent set of fonts in your reports to make your measurements reusable Measuring for Decimal Alignment After you have determined the width of an item you can do a related measurement to determine the physical space required to display decimal data with a varying number of digits to the right of the decimal point 1 Determine the maximum number of decimal places you need to accommodate to the right of the decimal place plus the decimal point itself 2 Measure the physical space in units for example inches that is required to display the number of characters identified in step 1 based on the size of the font you are using Font Font size Comparison Inches Helvetica 10 England 5 Times New Roman 10 England 44 Courier 10 England 56 Using Fields to Define Formats 1 116 Information Builders Using Fields to Define Formats Field based reformatting allows you to apply different formats to each row in a single report column by using a field to identify the format that applies to each row For example you can use this technique to apply the appropriate decimal currency formats when each row represents a different country The field that contains the format specifications can be a Real field in the data source Temporary field create
336. ield CREATE SYNONYM MNTAUTO FOR AUTOINC1 DBMS SQLMSS AT MSXYZ END The generated Master File is FILE MNTAUTO SUFFIX SQLMSS SEGNAME MNTAUTO SEGTYPE S0 FIELD CONTROL CONTROL I11 I4 MISSING OFF FIELDTYPE R FIELD LASTNAME LASTNAME A12 A12 MISSING OFF FIELD FIRSTNAME FIRSTNAME A12 A12 MISSING OFF FIELD ITEM ITEM A20 A20 MISSING OFF FIELD AMOUNT AMOUNT P19 P10 MISSING OFF The generated Access File is SEGNAME MNTAUTO TABLENAME AUTOINC1 CONNECTION MSSXYZ KEYS 1 LIBPATH Display for DBMS When configuring a DBMS adapter on UNIX environments the Shared Library Path is displayed on the Adapter ADD panel Long Qualified Field Names 8 36 Information Builders Long Qualified Field Names A qualified field consists of a file name a segment name and a field name separated by qualifying characters QUALCHARs A long qualified field name is comprised of a long file name a long segment name and a long field name Long qualified field names are useful for storing documents that use large descriptive field names such as those used and transmitted with XML For a relational or an XFOCUS data source file names can be up to 64 characters segment names up to 64 characters and field names up to 66 characters for a total of 194 characters For a FOCUS data source file names can be up to 64 characters segment names up to 8 characters and field nam
337. ieving WebFOCUS CGI Parameters Importing and Binding Variables From a WebFOCUS Report Changing WebFOCUS Settings From a Procedure Issuing SQL Commands in a Procedure Examining RDBMS Return Codes in a Procedure WebFOCUS Maintain Functions Enhanced Screening Options File Designations for Procedures Testing Procedures With Run Procedure Syntax Parsing in Scripts Resource and Data Access Specifying Additional Search Paths Support for Data Source Access Passwords Coding Auto Increment Columns Concurrent FOCUS Data Source Access Variable Varchar Data Type Support Integration With Other Products Additional Microsoft Access Support WebFOCUS Connector for Excel Tighter Integration With Developer Studio 9 2 Information Builders Tighter Integration With Developer Studio The Maintain Development Environment has been integrated more tightly with WebFOCUS Developer Studio The following features apply The Maintain Development Environment uses Developer Studio for the creation and management of projects what the development versions of applications are now called You can create a project in the Maintain Development Environment as part of Developer Studio For a full description of the Explorer interface from which you access all development tools and facilities see the Exploring Your WebFOCUS Development Environment chapter in the Developer Studio Application Development Getting Started manua
338. ified Field Names 8 36 Size Restrictions for Generated Alpha Fields 8 38 SQL Join Optimization 8 38 Text Fields for Relational Data Adapters 8 39 32K Text Strings for Text Fields 8 39 WHERE Optimization Clause for Text Fields 8 40 SUBSTRING Function Behavior 8 42 VARCHAR Support 8 42 Contents xviii Information Builders 9 WebFOCUS Maintain Enhancements 9 1 Tighter Integration With Developer Studio
339. ifies a field as read only You can use the read only attribute for auto increment columns This attribute provides support for relational data sources with auto increment columns such as IDENTIFY or timestamp columns in DB2 These columns are automatically incremented by the RDBMS Update languages such as Maintain ignore columns with this designation and allow the RDBMS to handle the automatic generation of the value CREATE SYNONYM adds the FIELDTYPE R attribute for read only fields in an RDBMS table Syntax How to Specify a Read Only Field in a Master File FIELD FIELDTYPE R FIELD FIELDTYPE RI FIELD FIELDTYPE IR where R Indicates that the field is read only Any number of fields can have this attribute RI IR Indicates that the field is read only and indexed applies to FOCUS VSAM and XFOCUS data sources only How to Specify a Read Only Field in a Master File Example Using FIELDTYPE R Coding an Auto Increment Column WebFOCUS Maintain Enhancements WebFOCUS Summary of New Features 9 41 Example Using FIELDTYPE R Autoinc1 is an MS SQL Server table with an IDENTITY field called Control as the first field which is a key The following CREATE SYNONYM command creates a Master File with the FIELDTYPE R attribute for the Control field CREATE SYNONYM MNTAUTO FOR AUTOINC1 DBMS SQLMSS AT MSSXYZ END The generated Master File is FILE MNTAUTO SUFFIX SQLM
340. ify the Language and Code Page Values on page 7 10 Use the manual procedure to configure the server for a code page that is different from the default associated with a language or to configure the server for features such as currency symbol or Microsoft Excel language You may also use the manual procedure if you already know the language and default code page value Configuring National Language Support 7 10 Information Builders 3 To select a standard ISO or DBCS code page choose it from the scroll down list To select a code page that predates the introduction of Windows technology first select the Legacy OEM DOS Code Pages radio button and then choose the page from the scroll down list These pages are not appropriate for current Windows applications they are supplied for backward compatibility 4 If you select Western European ISO 8859 1 or the legacy code page Western European 850 or Nordic 865 you are prompted for the language of the data source This selection controls the language of server error messages and other internal locale capabilities Click the desired language from the list box on the right An asterisk to the right of a language for example French means that translated server error messages FOCnnn through FOCnnnnn are available and the WebFOCUS Reporting Server Console is fully displayed in that language once you configure and restart the server If you choose Other or a language without
341. ignations Reference Maintain Search Order WebFOCUS Maintain Enhancements WebFOCUS Summary of New Features 9 37 Example Specifying File Designations In Windows C mydata test1 mnt In OS 390 JCL MAINTAIN DD myqualif MAINTAIN DATA DISP SHR Testing Procedures With Run Procedure In Release 5 2 3 you can test procedures by conducting a local deploy and run using the Run Procedure option Procedure How to Test Procedures With Run Procedure 1 Right click a procedure in the Object Explorer or Project Explorer window 2 Select Run Procedure This option initiates a local deploy and run Syntax Parsing in Scripts When you type JavaScript or VBScript in a script file or an event handler WebFOCUS Maintain parses the code for syntax errors Errors are flagged with exclamation marks as are Maintain syntax errors Only valid JavaScript or VBScript is permitted in a script file or event handler For example HTML comments lt gt are not valid Instead use JavaScript comments The use of scripts in Maintain projects is fully documented in Using Script Functions as Event Handlers in the Defining Events and Event Handlers chapter in the Developing WebFOCUS Maintain Applications manual Specifying Additional Search Paths 9 38 Information Builders Specifying Additional Search Paths In Release 5 2 3 when issuing a CALL or EXEC statement use the optional PATH keyword to specify a
342. ilders Syntax How to Use ISN and GFBID Parameters With CREATE SYNONYM CREATE SYNONYM appname synoynm FOR FILE file number predict file number predict filename DBMS ADBSINX DATABASE dbid predict dbid PARMS lt parameter_list gt END where parameter_list Is the parameter value delimited by a space or a comma Possible values are GFBID specifies that a field generated in the Master File is to be used to specify Global Format Buffer ID values ISN specifies that a field generated in the Master File is to be used to specify Internal Sequence Numbers ISN NEW or STD is the processing mode for Adabas superdescriptor fields This is an alternative to the SET SYNONYM syntax described in Set Synonyms for Superdescriptors on page 8 4 STD is the default value Reference Usage Notes For Adabas ISN Support Equality tests on the ISN field can be used to retrieve a single record when The report request contains an equality operator in the selection test on an ISN list The ISN field is used as the cross referenced field in the Join to an Adabas file If the record defined in the test is not present in the Address Converter file Adabas returns the Response Code 113 The adapter returns the following message Record is not found It is also possible to assign a value for the ISN field when performing an Insert if the request contains the ISN field and the assigned value is not 0 The adapter issues an Ada
343. ilders The output is WebFOCUS Reporting Language Enhancements WebFOCUS Summary of New Features 1 129 Excel Integration Enhancements The Excel 2000 format EXL2K has been enhanced to Display Formatted Dates and Numeric Values in Excel 2000 Excel 2000 spreadsheets generated by the server contain the same numeric formatting as specified in the data source s Master File or as specified in a temporary field Numeric values and date formats such as currency and Smart Dates are translated to supported Excel formats and are displayed properly in Excel 2000 For an example see Displaying Formatted Dates in Excel 2000 on page 1 131 Generate Native Excel Formulas in Excel 2000 When you display or save a report request using EXL2K FORMULA the resulting spreadsheet contains an Excel formula that computes and displays the results of any type of summed information such as column totals row totals subtotals and calculated values rather than static numbers Spreadsheets saved using the EXL2K FORMULA format are interactive allowing for what if scenarios that immediately reflect any additions or modifications made to the data For an example see Generating Native Excel Formulas for Column Totals on page 1 133 Customize Worksheet Tabs By default when you choose EXL2K as your display format the report opens in an Excel 2000 worksheet identified in a tab at the bottom of the spreadsheet as Sheet1 Sheet2 and so o
344. ile will not be used as the caption on the report output label Is an explicit row label Each generated row is labeled with the specified label text The hierarchy is displayed sorted by the parent field and within each parent sorted by the hierarchy field Note In order to display the hierarchy with levels of data indented you must include the SET BLANKINDENT command in your request For detailed syntax see Indenting Row Titles in an FML Hierarchy on page 1 85 Financial Reporting Language Enhancements 1 76 Information Builders Example Displaying an FML Hierarchy The following request displays two levels of account numbers starting from account 3000 SET BLANKINDENT ON TABLE FILE CENTGL PRINT GL_ACCOUNT_PARENT FOR GL_ACCOUNT 3000 WITH CHILDREN 2 END The output is Note that if the request specifies GET CHILDREN instead of WITH CHILDREN the line for the parent value 3000 does not display on the report output WebFOCUS Reporting Language Enhancements WebFOCUS Summary of New Features 1 77 Example Displaying an FML Hierarchy With Captions The following request displays two levels of hierarchy starting with account 1000 the top of the hierarchy and displays the caption field values instead of the account numbers SET BLANKINDENT ON TABLE FILE CENTGL PRINT GL_ACCOUNT_PARENT FOR GL_ACCOUNT 1000 WITH CHILDREN 2 AS CAPTION END The output is Note that if the request had specified GET CHILDREN i
345. iler is invoked any request that uses a DEFINE expression causes the expression to be compiled and then loaded into the system For each record of the request that needs the computation the system executes the generated code This compiler is most effective with report requests that include a large number of virtual DEFINE fields and read a large number of records because the speed of evaluation per record in such requests offsets the extra compilation and load steps How to Compile DEFINE Expressions Exiting on Error 1 106 Information Builders Syntax How to Compile DEFINE Expressions Issue the following command in a profile or procedure SET DEFINES COMPILED OLD where COMPILED Implements expression compilation at request run time compiling only those virtual fields DEFINEs that are used in the request COMPILED is the default value in the OS 390 and z OS environments OLD In the UNIX and Windows NT environments this indicates that expression compilation will not take place In the Mainframe environment the OLD setting leaves expression compilation up to the control of the current value of the SET COMPUTE command OLD is the default in the UNIX Windows NT OS 390 and z OS and VM environments Note Linux running in any operating environment uses the UNIX version of the compiler and has the same default value The SET DEFINES command is not supported in an ON TABLE phrase Exiting on Error Using the
346. iles deciles and so on in tabular reports For example you can group student test scores into deciles to determine which students are in the top ten percent of the class Grouping is based on the values in the selected vertical BY sort field and is apportioned as equally as possible into the number of tile groups you specify If you want to group data into tiles from the Report Painter see How to Group Numeric Data Into Tiles in the Creating Reports With the Report Painter chapter in the Creating Reports With Graphical Tools manual If you want to do this from an OLAP report see How to Group Data Into Tiles in an OLAP Report in the Analyzing Data in an OLAP Report chapter in the Creating Reports With Graphical Tools manual For language implementation of this feature see Grouping Numeric Data Into Tiles in Chapter 1 WebFOCUS Reporting Language Enhancements Apportioned numeric data in ranges In Release 5 2 3 when you sort a report using a numeric sort field you can group the sort field values together and define groups of equal range using the In Ranges Of option in the Report Painter See How to Group Numeric Data Into Ranges in the Creating Reports With the Report Painter chapter in the Creating Reports With Graphical Tools manual For language implementation of this feature see Grouping Sort Field Values in Ranges in Chapter 1 WebFOCUS Reporting Language Enhancements Creating and Styling Reports With the Report Painter
347. imum_number_of lines where maximum_number_of lines Is any number greater than 0 0 is the default value which indicates no limit The recommended value is 1000 This value ensures that even on a fast system a log file remains active for at least one second which is long enough to prevent two log files having the same timestamp The timestamp determines the order in which log files are deleted so it is critical that no two files have the same timestamp Reference Identifying Log Continuation Files When a new log file is created the first line of the new file indicates the file s order in the log archive and the name of the first archived file in the series as follows continuation n of edapriNN where n Is the file s rank in the log file history edpriNN Indicates the startup file in the series The value of NN is automatically assigned by the server when the log file is archived How to Specify the Maximum Number of Lines in a Server Activity Log Reference Identifying Log Continuation Files WebFOCUS Reporting Server Enhancements WebFOCUS Summary of New Features 7 17 Automatic Self Recovery In Release 5 2 3 the server provides the ability to automatically self recover crashed listeners and special services without restarting the server You can enable disable this functionality using the automatic_recovery keyword in the server configuration file edaserve cfg Tree View for Procedures The Pro
348. in Maintain 9 16 Index I 22 Information Builders transcoding tables 7 5 translating formulas to Excel 2000 1 130 transparent superdescriptors 8 4 Transport Layer Security TLS 7 24 transport object in ETL 10 19 transport options 10 19 FTP 10 19 Transport window 10 19 Transport window 10 19 tree navigation control in Update Assist 2 51 trends in data 1 2 1 18 2 26 TRIM function 1 158 to 1 159 2 70 TRIMV function 1 61 Tru64 operating systems security 7 25 TX fields 8 39 to 8 40 8 42 describing 8 39 relational data adapters and 8 39 TYPE ON EDAPRINT in Maintain 9 16 U UDAs User Defined Attributes for Essbase 8 18 UniVerse Data Adapter 8 24 UNIX language and code page values 7 12 UNIX Operating System 7 32 UPCASV function 1 63 Update Assist tool 2 49 2 51 color schemes for applications 2 52 controlling date fields 2 53 customizing designs 2 52 right click menu options 2 53 sorting tables 2 54 validation option 2 51 updating applications 2 49 updating graphs 4 19 URLs 6 27 drill downs within 5 6 passing language parameters 6 27 user administration 3 2 user interfaces 2 35 user level profiles 7 4 USER parameter in Maintain procedure 9 20 user rights 7 21 User Defined Attributes UDAs for Essbase 8 18 USERFCHK setting 1 66 USERFNS setting 1 67 Users option 5 10 V validating function arguments 1 66 validation option in Update Assist tool 2 51 VARC
349. in the Access File is ADBS If the field list is changed but the same GFBID is used in a request incorrect results may be displayed In some cases a message about the possible mismatch between the Field Definition Table FDT and Master File will be issued If two requests have the same list of selected fields but different fields are used in selection criteria the requests must use different GFBID values The GFBID field can be defined manually in the Master File or using the CREATE SYNOYNM facility with the option PARMS GFBID For CREATE SYNONYM syntax see Use ISN and GFBID Parameters With CREATE SYNONYM on page 8 8 If a GFBID field is defined in the Master File it can be used in a request as part of the selection test The adapter takes the GFBID value from the selection criteria deactivate the field and remove it from the match array The GFBID value is placed in the ADD5 field of the Adabas Control Block for the request Remove these values from the Adabas queue by issuing the SET command ENGINE ADBSINX SET GFBID_OFF ALL lt value gt DBID lt number gt ALL Clears all GFBID values lt value gt Clears a specific GFBID value When a single lt value gt is referenced in the SET command all values issued for child segments are removed as well If lt value gt contains blanks it must be enclosed in single quotation marks lt number gt Is the database number Data Adapter for Adabas 8 8 Information Bu
350. include in the total How to Produce Row Totals for Horizontal ACROSS Sort Field Values Example Producing Row Totals for Horizontal ACROSS Sort Field Values Producing Row Totals for ACROSS Field Values 1 150 Information Builders Example Producing Row Totals for Horizontal ACROSS Sort Field Values The following request illustrates how to generate a row total for horizontal ACROSS sort field values Notice that the summed values in the TOTAL TITLE COUNT column only reflect the values in the PG RATING and R RATING columns The values in the COPIES column are not included since they are not horizontal ACROSS sort field values TABLE FILE MOVIES SUM COPIES BY CATEGORY COUNT TITLE BY CATEGORY ACROSS RATING ACROSS TOTAL COLUMNS PG AND R END The output is RATING PG R TOTAL CATEGORY COPIES TITLE COUNT TITLE COUNT TITLE COUNT ___________________________________________________ ACTION 14 2 3 5 COMEDY 16 4 1 5 DRAMA 2 0 1 1 FOREIGN 5 2 3 5 MUSICALS 2 1 1 2 MYSTERY 17 2 5 7 SCI FI 3 0 3 3 WebFOCUS Reporting Language Enhancements WebFOCUS Summary of New Features 1 151 Output Formats for Application Processing Four output formats COM COMT TAB and TABT enable you to save report output to a designated directory for use with a desktop product Comma delimited data sources are sequential data sources in which field values are separated by c
351. ing How to Specify AnV Fields in a Master File WebFOCUS Reporting Language Enhancements WebFOCUS Summary of New Features 1 51 In addition six functions have been designed to work specifically with the AnV data type For details and examples see Using AnV Fields With Functions on page 1 52 The character format AnV is supported in Master Files for FOCUS XFOCUS Fusion and relational data sources This format is used to represent the VARCHAR variable length character data types supported by relational database management systems For relational data sources AnV keeps track of the actual length of a VARCHAR column This information is especially valuable when the value is used to populate a VARCHAR column in a different RDBMS It affects whether trailing blanks are retained in string concatenation and for Oracle string comparisons the other relational engines ignore trailing blanks in string comparisons In a FOCUS Fusion or XFOCUS data source AnV does not provide true variable length character support It is a fixed length character field with an extra two leading bytes to contain the actual length of the data stored in the field This length is stored as a short integer value occupying two bytes Because of the two bytes of overhead and the additional processing required to strip them AnV format is not recommended for use with non relational data sources Syntax How to Specify AnV Fields in a Master File FIELD na
352. ing Arguments With Uncorrectable Errors WebFOCUS Reporting Language Enhancements WebFOCUS Summary of New Features 1 67 Syntax How to Enable Function Argument Verification If your site has a locally written function with the same name as an Information Builders supplied function the setting of the USERFNS parameter determines which function will be used SET USERFNS SYSTEM LOCAL where SYSTEM Gives precedence to functions supplied by Information Builders and those created by the DEFINE FUNCTION command This setting is required to enable argument verification SYSTEM is the default value LOCAL Gives precedence to locally written functions Argument verification is not performed when this setting is in effect Syntax How to Control Function Argument Verification Note that the USERFNS SYSTEM setting must be in effect when you issue the following command in a profile or procedure See Enable Function Argument Verification on page 1 67 SET USERFCHK setting where setting Can be one of the following ON is the default value This value verifies parameters in requests but does not verify parameters for functions used in Master File DEFINEs If a parameter has an incorrect length an attempt is made to fix the problem If such a problem cannot be fixed a message is generated and the evaluation of the affected expression is terminated Because parameters are not verified for functions specified in a Master
353. ing Master Files as Text You can edit a Master File as text in the Maintain Development Environment To do this right click any Master File and click Edit As Text Customizing Parsing Activity In Release 5 2 3 you can control how long the parser waits for you to stop typing before it automatically parses the Maintain code You can also disable the parser completely to optimize the Maintain Development Environment when you are in a typing intensive session You can reenable the parser to update the Project Explorer tree automatically Procedure How to Customize Parsing Activity 1 To change or adjust the parsing option for the Maintain Development Environment MDE select Tools gt Environment options WebFOCUS Maintain displays the Maintain Development Environment Options dialog box 2 On the General tab check Automatically parse editor to enable parsing of your code in the code Editor or uncheck it to disable code parsing If the parser is enabled it waits until you stop typing before parsing your code for changes that might affect the Project Explorer If you disable parsing changes to your code are not reflected in the Project Explorer until you save them 3 You can change the amount of time the parser waits before parsing your code Use the spin button to adjust the wait time in seconds or type the desired wait time in the designated field WebFOCUS Maintain Enhancements WebFOCUS Summary of New Features 9 9
354. ing columns 1 89 2 64 to 2 65 formatting options 1 89 financial reports 1 89 2 64 formatting rows 1 89 2 64 2 67 forms 2 46 running from Maintain 9 6 supplying parameter values 2 38 to 2 39 forms and Cascading Style Sheets 9 10 forms in Maintain 9 12 formulas 1 130 converting to Excel 2000 1 130 FORMULTIPLE parameter 2 69 Frame Properties window 2 47 Index I 10 Information Builders frame separator display 3 18 frames 2 47 adding to HTML pages 2 47 Frame Properties window 2 47 free text 1 89 formatting 1 89 2 64 FTP parameters 10 19 functions 1 52 1 155 to 1 156 2 70 and AnV fields 1 52 LENV 1 53 LOCASV 1 53 to 1 54 NORMSDST 1 21 NORMSINV 1 21 POSITV 1 56 SQUEEZ 1 155 2 70 STRIP 1 156 2 70 SUBSTV 1 59 TRIM 1 158 2 70 TRIMV 1 61 UPCASV 1 63 validating arguments 1 66 G generating formulas in Excel 2000 1 133 GET CHILDREN command 1 73 1 78 GET CHILDREN parameter 2 56 GetAppCGIValue Maintain function 9 33 GFA content 9 12 GFA files 9 4 deployment information 9 4 GFBID Global Format Buffer ID 8 7 Global Format Buffer ID GFBID 8 7 global settings 6 15 graph enhancements 1 93 printing output 1 97 type options 1 97 Graph Preview 4 18 graph styles 4 18 graph types 4 18 GRAPHSERVURL parameter 2 69 GRAPHSERVURL SET parameter 1 93 to 1 95 group views 3 13 grouping 1 25 numeric data 1 25 sort fields 1 27 grouping numeric data 1 27 into tiles 1 25 t
355. interact with an OLAP report and access OLAP tools For Standard Reports delivered to Managed Reporting users the Managed Reporting content developers make these decisions However users who are creating their own reports can OLAP enable them and control the OLAP interfaces and drill down options The NONE option turns off the OLAP Control Panel and the OLAP Selections pane but allows OLAP functionality from the report itself You can access options on right click menus drag and drop columns within the report and use up and down arrows to sort columns from high to low or vice versa NONE is the default value Ad Hoc Reporting Enhancements WebFOCUS Summary of New Features 4 17 HTML Graph Assistant The HTML Graph Assistant is an HTML based graphical tool that enables you to create a graphical representation of your data The HTML Graph Assistant is accessible through the Dashboard and Managed Reporting The HTML Graph Assistant is divided into the following tabs Styles Select a graph type Graph types include line graphs connected point plots bar graphs pie graphs and scatter graphs as well as variations on these types Fields Add and remove data fields from your graph Field Options Add conditional styling drill down and other options to your graph Across Create multiple graphs by adding a second X axis Headings Add style headings and or footings for your graph as well as horizontal X
356. into enterprise level applications that access any data source on any platform without having to write code For instructions on implementing this product offering at your site see your Information Builders representative WebFOCUS Summary of New Features 10 1 CHAPTER 10 1 ETL Manager Enhancements This chapter describes cumulative features for ETL Manager in Version 5 Release 2 Topics ETL Server Request Generation Request Categories and Application Directories Request Logs Request and Log Management From the WebFOCUS Reporting Server Console Request Scheduling Bulk Loading Flat File Targets Migrating ETL Requests ETL Workbench General Workbench Enhancements SQL Answer Set Object Source Object Target Object Load Options Transport Simplification Nesting Dependent Requests E mail Request Notification Optimized Load Request Generation 10 2 Information Builders Request Generation ETL requests are generated at the time they are saved as stored procedures FOCEXECs This enhances the functionality of the ETL Engine in the following ways Overhead required to run a request is greatly reduced Smaller requests especially benefit from this with dramatically reduced run times Requests can be run from the Interactive Agent Tool edastart t which simplifies problem determination
357. ion Additional Microsoft Access Support on page 9 43 Excel integration WebFOCUS Connector for Excel on page 9 44 WebFOCUS Summary of New Features I 1 Index Symbols fcm extension in Maintain 9 36 for files in Maintain 9 12 gfa files 9 4 deployment information 9 4 htm files 6 33 mnt extension in Maintain 9 36 A accessing data sources concurrently in Maintain 9 42 accessing Developer Launch Console in Maintain 9 7 accessing Java classes 8 26 ACROSS field values 1 149 ACROSS phrase 1 98 2 20 ACROSS TOTAL phrase 1 149 to 1 150 active connections 7 4 Adabas Data Adapter 8 2 creating synonyms manually 8 8 format buffers and 8 7 GFBID Global Format Buffer ID 8 8 Global Format Buffer ID GFBID 8 8 Internal Sequence Number ISN 8 6 8 8 inverted lists 8 5 ISN Internal Sequence Number 8 6 8 8 OCCURS attribute for Adabas 8 6 ORDER field 8 6 setting new synonyms 8 4 superdescriptors and 8 4 ADD command 1 78 Add to Favorites option 3 15 adding objects to HTML pages 2 43 frames 2 47 images 2 43 Advanced privilege 3 8 agent services 7 2 aligning decimal points 1 111 Allbase Data Adapter 8 9 alpha fields 8 38 restricting size 8 38 alphanumeric data 1 50 and functions 1 52 to 1 54 1 61 altering X and Y axis values 1 97 alternate indexes 8 25 selecting records and 8 25 alternate server nodes 6 8 amper auto prompting 1 99 amper variables 1 99 ANSI format 2 13
358. iously deployed the date time stamps are rolled back to the last deployed date If you add a new file for deployment the GFA has no date time stamp for that file so it is always deployed the first time Make sure the Smart Deploy option is checked for the deployment scenario Do this when creating a new deployment scenario or by editing an existing deployment scenario s properties Local deployment automatically applies Smart Deploy logic maximizing the speed of the development and testing cycle All other deployment scenarios default to Smart Deploy How to Create a New Deployment Scenario Edit an Existing Deployment Scenario s Properties WebFOCUS Maintain Enhancements WebFOCUS Summary of New Features 9 5 Procedure How to Create a New Deployment Scenario 1 Select and right click the project Select Project Deployment from the shortcut menu then select New Scenario 2 The New Deployment Scenario dialog box opens Confirm that Smart Deploy is checked For complete instructions on creating a deployment scenario see Step 2 Create a Deployment Scenario in the Partitioning and Deploying Project Files chapter in the Developing Reporting Applications manual Running Components From the Developer Launch Console 9 6 Information Builders Procedure How to Edit an Existing Deployment Scenario s Properties 1 Select and right click the project Select Properties from the shortcut menu 2 On the Project Proper
359. ith the Financial Report Painter Consolidating Data in a Hierarchy in Developer Studio Formatting Enhancements How to Adjust Indents for Captions in a Hierarchy Format a Column in the Design Matrix Format a Row in the Design Grid Format a Cell in the Design Matrix Example Displaying an FML Hierarchy With Captions Consolidating Data in a Hierarchy Into One Line of Report Output Developer Studio Enhancements WebFOCUS Summary of New Features 2 55 Reporting Dynamically From a Hierarchy In the Financial Report Painter the hierarchy defined in the Master File is reflected in the FOR field values panel to the right of the Design matrix as shown in the following illustration If the hierarchy fields are defined with captions in the Master File the resulting report indents the captions proportional to their levels in the hierarchy The Financial Report Painter supports most of the row styling capabilities that are available in the WebFOCUS language In addition you can format an individual cell Drill down functionality is also supported at the cell level Formatting of columns rows and cells is managed through the familiar Report Painter Field Properties and Report Options Style tabs which can be accessed directly from the Financial Report Painter Financial Report Painter Enhancements 2 56 Information Builders Indenting Row Titles To clarify relationships within an FML hierarchy the captions titles of v
360. itive number that number is the start of the 100 year window Any two digit years greater than or equal to the threshold assume the value of the default century Two digit years less than the threshold assume the value of one more than the default century If yy is a negative number yy the start date of the window is derived by subtracting that number from the current year and the default century is automatically calculated The start date is automatically incremented by one at the beginning of each successive year YRTHRESH is fully documented in Working With Cross Century Dates in the Unique FOCUS Topics category in Supplementary Documentation on the documentation CD Issuing SQL Commands in a Procedure 9 30 Information Builders Issuing SQL Commands in a Procedure You can pass native SQL commands and access parameters directly to an RDBMS from a WebFOCUS Maintain procedure without translation or syntax checking For example applications can create and drop tables create indexes and even make Remote Procedure Calls RPCs Use DBMS_ERRORCODE to examine the RDBMS return code to determine the success or failure of a command For more information on DBMS_ERRORCODE see Examining RDBMS Return Codes in a Procedure on page 9 32 Used in conjunction with the retrieval of return codes this feature gives you greater flexibility and control when designing RDBMS update applications You can also send SQL EDA commands for n tier WebFOCUS
361. its the characteristics of the class as specified in the CSS All the visual properties of the control that are set to Default use the settings for that class in the CSS Any format overrides set in the Property sheet for a control are applied directly to that control using a style tag in its attributes Importing a Form Into a Procedure 9 12 Information Builders Importing a Form Into a Procedure In previous releases of WebFOCUS Maintain forms were sourced inline inside a Maintain only file format called CTA Cactus Application This feature allowed you to transfer projects between machines but individual components were not transferable between files The project control file GFA does not contain individual components only references to them Forms you design in WebFOCUS Maintain are sourced inside the related Maintain procedure Forms are sourced in XML and are converted to WINFORM code when you run a project from the Maintain Development Environment or deploy it to a remote server The developer s tool set gives you the ability to export any WebFOCUS Maintain form to a file with the extension for You can then import the for file into another Maintain project This feature gives you the ability to create and reuse form templates from project to project and allows you to share form templates with other developers When you import a form from one procedure to another WebFOCUS Maintain preserves bindings to resources such as Web lin
362. ivileges to other users If more than one Server Administrator is defined the credentials of the first valid member of the list is used for impersonating the FOCUS Database Server and other special services APP Assigns Application Administrator privileges giving the user the right to perform administrative tasks without the right to add change or remove many parameters OPR Assigns Operator privileges giving the user the right to perform limited administrative tasks such as starting and stopping the server and stopping agent session and connections WebFOCUS Reporting Server Enhancements WebFOCUS Summary of New Features 7 23 Protecting the WebFOCUS Reporting Server Console In addition to SECURITY ON and SECURITY OFF the server supports a third security mode called WCPROTECT This mode allows you to run the server without operating system security while protecting access to the administrative functions of the WebFOCUS Reporting Server Console In this mode access to the WebFOCUS Reporting Server Console is protected by authenticating the connecting user against the Server Administrator user ID and password This authentication is done without the involvement of any system services but by comparison to encrypted configuration data To run the server in this mode export the environment variable EDAEXTSEC WCPROTECT before startup Windows Trusted Client The WebFOCUS Reporting Server supports a Windows NT 2000 API cli
363. king the appropriate image at the bottom of the Toolbar window you may need to scroll down to view this 8 Click Save to save your changes Stand Alone Domain Role Trees To provide more space on your Dashboard view while still allowing users access to the Domain Role Tree you can insert a stand alone Domain Role Tree in your Dashboard view The stand alone Domain Role Tree can be accessed from a link in the banner named Tree Dashboard administrators can use this feature when they want to provide users with access to the Domain Role Tree but not have it display in the Dashboard view Positioning Domain and Role Trees is fully documented in Positioning the Domain Tree Role Tree and Banner in the Customizing Dashboard chapter in the WebFOCUS Managed Reporting Administrator s Manual Optionally Displaying Frame Separators 3 18 Information Builders Optionally Displaying Frame Separators You can choose to keep or omit frame separators from the Dashboard view Omitting frame separators creates a seamless look between the banner and the sidebar Domain Role Tree Frame separators are fully documented in Positioning the Domain Tree Role Tree and Banner in the Customizing Dashboard chapter in the WebFOCUS Managed Reporting Administrator s Manual Hiding the Display of Content Blocks You can hide the display of a content block from the Dashboard view by selecting the deactivate option when adding or editing a content block
364. ks scripts and graphics but not to variables or data source stacks since the latter are defined in the context of a procedure Procedure How to Export a Form 1 In the Project Editor right click the form and click Export 2 In the Export As dialog box enter a name for the form and click Save WebFOCUS Maintain saves the form in a file with the extension for in the project folder Procedure How to Import a Form 1 In the Project Editor right click the Maintain procedure you want to import the form into and click Import forms 2 In the Import Form dialog box select the form you want to import and click Open If you do not see the form you want to import make sure that it is in one of your project paths How to Export a Form Import a Form WebFOCUS Maintain Enhancements WebFOCUS Summary of New Features 9 13 Dynamically Managing the Display of Controls You can dynamically manage the visible property of a control through JavaScript or VBScript Syntax How to Dynamically Manage the Display of a Control document Formname Controlname style visible true false where Formname Is the name of the form Controlname Is the name of the control true Enables the display of a control false Suppresses the display of a control Preselecting List Items by Value To preselect list items by value you can create a stack and search it for the matching items However if you know the
365. kstore derf html Reader Comments Information Builders Two Penn Plaza New York NY 10121 2898 212 736 4433 WebFOCUS Summary of New Features DN4500463 0304 Version 5 Release 2
366. l WebFOCUS Developer Studio and WebFOCUS Maintain share the same deployment tool which has been completely redesigned for maximum ease of use For complete instructions on taking a project live using the Deploy Wizard see the Partitioning and Deploying Project Files chapter in the Developing Reporting Applications manual The currently running Maintain procedure is displayed on the WebFOCUS Reporting Server Console in the Last Command column in the agent and session windows For a full description of these windows see Monitoring Agents and Monitoring Sessions in the Running and Monitoring Your Server chapter in the iWay Server Administration for UNIX Windows OpenVMS OS 400 OS 390 and z OS manual WebFOCUS Maintain Enhancements WebFOCUS Summary of New Features 9 3 Support for Standard WebFOCUS CGI Aliases WebFOCUS Maintain uses the standard WebFOCUS CGI aliases virtual directories including approot ibi_html and cgi bin ibi_cgi This means that WebFOCUS Maintain and WebFOCUS Reporting are more tightly integrated The WebFOCUS CGI automatically adapts to the function call IBIF_command to execute procedures using the standard WebFOCUS Maintain command set for example MNTCON EX and MNTCON RUN Maintain can take advantage of WebFOCUS CGI scripting Scripting is fully documented in the WebFOCUS Security and Administration manual For specific information on the use of WebFOCUS script commands and thei
367. l 2000 worksheet identified in a tab at the bottom of the spreadsheet as Sheet1 Sheet2 and so on You can change the name of a Sheet tab to make it more descriptive by including the TITLETEXT attribute in the StyleSheet declaration Note that the same syntax changes the browser title bar in an HTML report View and Save a Report in Excel 97 Format The EXL97 format enables you to view and save reports in Excel 97 When specifying the EXL97 format an HTML based file is generated with an extension of e97 The appropriate MIME type is automatically assigned to designate Excel as the active application for this file type Format EXL97 is fully compatible with Excel 2000 and Excel 2002 Comma delimited and Tab delimited Output Formats 2 12 Information Builders For examples and procedures on using Excel output format in Developer Studio see Saving Reports as Excel 2000 Excel 97 and Excel Output in the Saving and Reusing Report Output chapter in the Creating Reports With Graphical Tools manual For language implementation of this feature see Excel Integration Enhancements in Chapter 1 WebFOCUS Reporting Language Enhancements Comma delimited and Tab delimited Output Formats In Release 5 2 3 three additional output formats COM COMT and TABT are available in Developer Studio They enable you to save report output to a designated directory for use with a desktop product Comma delimited data sources are sequential d
368. l API For Release 5 2 ReportCaster has been greatly enhanced and expanded to include many new features In order to familiarize yourself with the new ReportCaster interfaces and features Information Builders recommends reading the following ReportCaster manuals along with this chapter ReportCaster Development and Administration ReportCaster End User s Manual ReportCaster and Two Way Email for Self Service Applications WebFOCUS and ReportCaster Installation and Configuration manual for your platform Topics Architecture Migration Tools Configuring the ReportCaster Web Application Configuration Tools Security Configurations ReportCaster Authentication Exit ReportCaster User Credentials Configuring Access to the User Interfaces Development and Administration Interface ReportCaster Server Configuration Tool Creating and Managing ReportCaster User IDs Distribution Enhancements Scheduling Wizard and HTML User Interface Report Library ReportCaster Console Log Enhancements Configuring ReportCaster for NLS ReportCaster API Two Way Email API Architecture 5 2 Information Builders Architecture ReportCaster distribution has been moved from the WebFOCUS Reporting Server to the ReportCaster Distribution Server In addition ReportCaster supports multiple WebFOCUS Reporting Servers to create and run schedules ReportCaster communication from the ReportCaste
369. l DML SQL operations AnV VARCHAR with maximum of n lt 32k This format supports full DML SQL operation according to ANSI TX unlimited VARCHAR lt 32k for a FOCUS data source This format supports limited DML operations as well as limited SQL operations which require field level fetch WebFOCUS Summary of New Features 9 1 CHAPTER 9 9 WebFOCUS Maintain Enhancements This chapter describes all of the features for WebFOCUS Maintain in Version 5 Release 2 and has been updated to reflect Version 5 Release 2 3 Topics that contain Version 5 Release 2 3 features are marked with asterisks Topics General Enhancements Tighter Integration With Developer Studio Support for Standard WebFOCUS CGI Aliases Access to the Installation Verification Program Performance Enhancements Wizards Editors and Other Tools Deploying Only Changed Files With Smart Deploy Running Components From the Developer Launch Console Editing Master Files as Text Customizing Parsing Activity Searching for Text in a Project Creating Applications With Update Assist Forms Development Applying a Cascading Style Sheet to a Form Importing a Form Into a Procedure Dynamically Managing the Display of Controls Preselecting List Items by Value New Sample Launch Page Debugging Multiple Level Tracing With Statement Trace Application Level Tracing With TYPE ON EDAPRINT Procedures and Script Development Retr
370. language or languages to which it applies The WebFOCUS Reporting Server maintains a default code page generation file After you configure the server using the WebFOCUS Reporting Server Console WebFOCUS updates the default file with the code page selected for the server and with the associated client code pages The updated file which contains the new code page values and the default values is used to generate the transcoding monocasing and sorting tables For the default code page values see Default Code Page Generation File Windows UNIX OS 400 on page 7 6 In this section Step 1 Determine Which Code Page You Need Step 2 Configure the WebFOCUS Reporting Server for NLS Step 3 Configure the WebFOCUS Client for NLS Configuring the Server and Client for Baltic Code Pages How to Manually Specify the Language and Code Page Values Edit the NLS Configuration File nlscfg err Configure the Server and Client for Baltic Code Pages on Windows Reference Default Code Page Generation File Windows UNIX OS 400 Supported Code Page File Windows UNIX OS 400 New NLS Configuration File nlscfg err Parameters Language and Default Code Pages for Windows and UNIX Language and Default Code Pages for OS 400 Configuring National Language Support 7 6 Information Builders To configure the server for NLS perform the following steps Step 1 Determine Which Code Page You Need Step 2 Configure the WebFOCUS Re
371. le Allocating a FOCUS Segment Using the DATASET Attribute On z OS and OS 390 FILE SEGNAME BODY SEGTYPE S1 PARENT CARREC LOCATION BODYSEG DATASET USER1 BODYSEG FOCUS FIELDNAME BODYTYPE TYPE A12 FIELDNAME SEATS SEAT I3 FIELDNAME DEALER_COST DCOST D7 FIELDNAME RETAIL_COST RCOST D7 FIELDNAME SALES UNITS I6 On UNIX OS 390 and z OS FILE SEGNAME BDSEG SEGTYPE KU CRSEGNAME IDSEG CRKEY PRODMGR CRFILE PERSFILE DATASET u2 prod user1 idseg foc FIELD NAME ALIAS FNAME FORMAT A12 INDEX I On z OS and OS 390 with SU FILE SEGNAME BODY SEGTYPE S1 PARENT CARREC LOCATION BODYSEG DATASET BODYSEG ON MYSU FIELDNAME BODYTYPE TYPE A12 FIELDNAME SEATS SEAT I3 FIELDNAME DEALER_COST DCOST D7 FIELDNAME RETAIL_COST RCOST D7 FIELDNAME SALES UNITS I6 COBOL FD Translator Enhancements 8 32 Information Builders COBOL FD Translator Enhancements You can create server metadata descriptions by translating COBOL FD definitions for data adapters including VSAM C ISAM and flat files New functionality allows you to Select COBOL Copy Book by name Select COBOL Copy Book from a list by providing the path to the directory Specify the following customization options for metadata generation from the Web Console Option Description On Error Enter Continue to continue generating the Master File when an error occurs Ente
372. les 4 18 Addition of the Preview Screen 4 18 Auto Update Feature Added to the Preview Screen 4 19 HTML Report Assistant and HTML Graph Assistant 4 19 DBA and DBAFILE Support 4 19 Creating a WHERE Statement Using Date and Time Values 4 20 Contents xiv Information Builders 5 ReportCaster Enhancements 5 1 Architecture 5 2 Migration Tools 5 2 Configuring the ReportCaster Web Application 5 2 Configuration Tools
373. ling this format from the Pivot tab see How to Populate a Pivot Table in the Saving and Reusing Report Output chapter in the Creating Report With Graphical Tools manual Improved WYSIWYG environment The Report Painter window displays the actual position of columns that have been wrapped truncated or set to maximum or minimum column width For procedures on formatting these columns with these features see How to Increase Column Width How to Wrap Data Automatically by Changing a Column s Width and How to Truncate Report Column Values in the Creating Reports With the Report Painter chapter in the Creating Reports With Graphical Tools manual Creating and Styling Reports With the Report Painter 2 18 Information Builders Enhanced Graphical User Interface GUI You can align embedded fields in object areas Page Heading Page Footing Subheading Subfooting with report columns Note This feature is available only for HTML reports You can Copy style characteristics from one column to other columns using the Quick Style toolbar You can copy font grid background color conditional styling or all of these characteristics For procedures on copying style characteristics to other columns see Formatting a Column in the Creating Reports With the Report Painter chapter in the Creating Reports With Graphical Tools manual For procedures on copying conditions see Defining a Conditional Report Style in the Styling a Report
374. llowing SET command in your server profile EDASPROF prf ENGINE CPMILL SET ZCOMP FOCMILZ The adapter requires two control files to be built and allocated to DDNAME CPMILL and CPMILLI using JCL or DYNAM allocation The Millennium control file is used as input to these files and is dynamically allocated to the server only for the creation of CPMILL and CPMILLI For details on how to create the required control files see the iWay Server Configuration and Operations for MVS Version 5 2 manual Data Adapter for MUMPS The Data Adapter for MUMPS is available for OpenVMS 7 2 2 and 7 3 1 running DSM Mumps 7 3 The adapter has been enhanced to support Read and write capabilities Creation of server metadata synonym Transaction processing with recovery units This allows you to protect the logical consistency of your application database during a failure Extended descriptions of data values for any level of subscripts Field delimiters Fixed and variable field redefinitions Join between logical statements Data Adapter for PeopleSoft 8 20 Information Builders Data Adapter for PeopleSoft In Release 5 2 3 the Data Adapter for PeopleSoft provides data access for reporting from the following PeopleSoft record types SQL tables SQL views and query views The adapter fully enforces PeopleSoft Query tree and low level security The adapter supports both the client server architecture of
375. lly change the default field format by clicking Change Format and selecting the format from the Format dialog box 12 Click OK Reference Forecast Dialog Box Triple Exponential Average Forecast dialog box options are fully documented in Calculating Trends and Predicting Values With Forecast in the Creating Temporary Fields chapter in the Creating Reports With Graphical Tools manual Calculating Trends and Predicting Values in Developer Studio 2 34 Information Builders Procedure How to Calculate a Linear Regression Column 1 With the By or Across field you want to use for your calculations click Forecast The Forecast dialog box opens 2 If you want to change the name of the output field from FRCSTFLD enter a new name in the Field Name box 3 Select Moving Average from the Step 1 Choose a Method drop down list 4 Select an input field from the Step 2 Choose a Measure drop down list If you select the same field as the By or Across field this field is not displayed even if it is included in a display command 5 Select the increment to count each instance of the By or Across field from the Step 3 Choose The Interval spin box 6 Select the number of predictions to be calculated from the Forecast field from the Step 4 Choose Number of Predictions spin box 7 Optionally change the default field format by clicking Change Format and selecting the format from the Format dialog box 8 Click OK Ref
376. lues in Ranges 1 27 Indicating Total Number of Pages 1 29 Manipulating Summary Values 1 31 Controlling Summary Line Processing 1 37 Using Prefix Operators With Calculated Values 1 38 Using Multiple SUB TOTAL or SUMMARIZE Commands 1 40 Handling Missing Data in HOLD Files 1 43 Controlling Missing Values Propagated to a HOLD File 1 43 Holding Missing Values 1 47 Propagating Missing Values to a Variable Length Delimited HOLD File 1 48 Using Variable Length Character Expressions
377. m FRCSTFLD enter a new name in the Field Name field 3 Select Moving Average from the Step 1 Choose a Method drop down list 4 Select an input field from the Step 2 Choose a Measure drop down list If you select the same field as the By or Across field this field is not displayed even if it is included in a display command 5 Select the increment to count each instance of the By or Across field from the Step 3 Choose The Interval spin box 6 Select the number of predictions to be calculated from the Forecast field from the Step 4 Choose Number of Predictions spin box 7 Select the number of values to average from the Step 5 Choose Number of Values to Average spin box 8 Optionally change the default field format by clicking Change Format and selecting the format from the Format dialog box 9 Click OK Calculating Trends and Predicting Values in Developer Studio 2 28 Information Builders Reference Forecast Dialog Box Moving Average Forecast dialog box options are fully documented in Calculating Trends and Predicting Values With Forecast in the Creating Temporary Fields chapter in the Creating Reports With Graphical Tools manual Developer Studio Enhancements WebFOCUS Summary of New Features 2 29 Procedure How to Calculate a Single Exponential Smoothing Column 1 With the By or Across field you want to use for your calculations click Forecast The Forecast dialog box opens 2 If you wa
378. m in a text editor such as WordPad and type the boldface text shown in the following example The string Instruction is a variable for the actual text that will come from the resource file Tip The HTML code in your version of logon htm may vary slightly Make sure to place the boldface text above the HTML code that prompts for User ID lt TD gt lt div id ibidropmenu gt lt div gt lt TD gt lt TR gt lt TD gt lt TD gt lt TD ALIGN left COLSPAN 8 CLASS tophead gt Instruction lt TD gt lt TD gt lt BR gt lt BR gt lt TD gt lt TR gt lt TR gt lt TD colspan 2 gt lt IMG SRC spacer gif HEIGHT 30 gt lt TD gt lt TD ALIGN right gt lt DIV CLASS tophead2 gt User ID lt DIV gt lt TD gt Customizing the User Interface 6 36 Information Builders 2 Save and exit logon htm and launch the Managed Reporting logon page http local_host ibi_html workbnch mrlogon htm where local_host Is the name of the Web server on which WebFOCUS is installed For now the page displays a script message because you have not modified the resource file ERROR can t translate string Instruction ERROR Also notice the IBI DHTML Debugger Window which displays messages that help you isolate and solve problems when customizing the user interface 3 Open ibi WebFOCUS52 ibi_html javaassist intl EN workbnchtrans js in a text editor such as WordPad and add the following bol
379. m set is lt lt rc DBMS Err lt lt SYS_MGR DBMS_ERRORCODE Example Passing Credentials to a Remote Server You can set user and password values for remote WebFOCUS Servers using the SYS_MGR ENGINE command and setting enginename to EDA Consequently you do not need to use EDASPROF to pass the SQL EDA SET USER command The following code takes values for the user ID and password from a launch form and passes them to the target server COMPUTE USER A8 PWD A8 iwc findappcgivalue IBIC_user USER iwc findappcgivalue IBIC_pass PWD SYS_MGR ENGINE EDA SET USER EDASERVE USER PWD EXEC myreport AT EDASERVE into mystack For a remote server requiring different user ID and password values than those supplied at logon omit the use of the iwc findappcgivalue function and design the application to gather values from the user at run time Examining RDBMS Return Codes in a Procedure 9 32 Information Builders Examining RDBMS Return Codes in a Procedure The DBMS_ERRORCODE property of the SYS_MGR object is the return code from an RDBMS the SQLCODE of the last database command Use DBMS_ERRORCODE to gather more details behind the failure of an operation than are available in FOCERROR For example an INSERT might not complete successfully due to referential integrity failure lack of permissions or other reason DBMS_ERRORCODE contains the specific SQLCODE from the RDBMS so your application can take the corr
380. mands turn on trace logging disable all trace options then turn on tracing for statement trace only MNTSTMT SYS_MGR FOCSET TRACEUSER ON SYS_MGR FOCSET TRACEOFF ALL SYS_MGR FOCSET TRACEON MNTSTMT Syntax How to Set USER From a Procedure USER establishes user access to a data source protected by Information Builders security For syntax see Set PASS From a Procedure on page 9 26 Syntax How to Set WARNING From a Procedure WARNING controls the return of warning messages from the WebFOCUS Server SYS_MGR FOCSET WARNING ON OFF where ON Returns warning messages from the WebFOCUS Server ON is the default value OFF Suppresses warning messages from the WebFOCUS Server WebFOCUS Maintain Enhancements WebFOCUS Summary of New Features 9 29 Syntax How to Set YRTHRESH From a Procedure YRTHRESH defines the start of a 100 year window globally or on a field level Used with DEFCENT it interprets the current century according to the given values Two digit years greater than or equal to YRTHRESH assume the value of the default century Two digit years less than YRTHRESH assume the value of one more than the default century The same result can be achieved by including the FDEFCENT and FYRTHRESH attributes in a Master File SYS_MGR FOCSET YRTHRESH yy 0 where yy Is the year threshold for the window If you do not supply a value yy defaults to zero 0 If yy is a pos
381. mation Builders 2 Once again the display changes instantly as shown here Ad Hoc Reporting Enhancements WebFOCUS Summary of New Features 4 5 Hidden Reports You can turn the OLAP selections panel on but keep it hidden in an OLAP enabled report Later if you want to view the OLAP selections panel you can then right click any dimension or measure and select Show Panel You can also return to the Report Options tab in Report Assistant and select Top or Bottom under Enable OLAP to turn on the selections panel In WebFOCUS OLAP options are available on the Report Options tab of the Report Assistant The relevant option Enable OLAP is located in the lower right corner OLAP 4 6 Information Builders Tiles You can group numeric data into any number of tiles percentiles deciles quartiles and so on in tabular reports For example you can group students test scores into deciles to determine which students are in the top ten percent of the class or determine which salesmen are in the top half of all salesmen based on total sales Grouping is based on the values in the selected vertical BY field and data is apportioned as equally as possible into the number of tile groups you specify When you group data into tiles A new column labeled TILE by default is added to the report output and displays the tile number assigned to each instance of the tile field You can change the column title in the Tiles section of th
382. mber of areas Compiled procedures take 30 less memory on average User stacks start with a smaller initial size WEBFORMs use less memory Deploying Only Changed Files With Smart Deploy In Release 5 2 3 Smart Deploy has been incorporated in the new deployment architecture Deploy Wizard Smart Deploy can significantly reduce the time required to deploy an application because it deploys only files that changed since the last deployment When Smart Deploy is active after the first successful deployment date time information is stored in the project s GFA Graphical FOCUS Application file for each file deployed Each subsequent deploy action compares the date time stamp of the source files in the project against the date time stamps stored in the deployment scenario With Smart Deploy only newer files source files with a later time stamp than that stored in the GFA are deployed to the destination The date time information is stored uniquely in each deployment scenario If a project has multiple deployment scenarios there is no ambiguity about the date time the files were last deployed using a specific scenario When you first use a new deployment scenario Smart Deploy performs a full deployment of all files referenced for deployment in the project subsequently only changed files are deployed Smart Deploy stores date time stamps in the GFA after a successful deployment If an error occurs and the scenario was prev
383. me ALIAS alias USAGE AnV ACTUAL AnV where n Is the size maximum length of the field It can be from 1 to 4093 Note that because of the additional two bytes used to store the length an A4093V field is actually 4095 bytes long A size of zero A0V is not supported The length of an instance of the field can be zero Note The HOLD FORMAT ALPHA command creates an ACTUAL format of AnV in the Master File LENV SUBSTV LOCASV TRIMV POSITV UPCASV Using Variable Length Character Expressions 1 52 Information Builders Using AnV Fields With Functions AnV fields can be used as arguments to all Information Builders supplied functions that expect alphanumeric arguments An AnV input parameter is treated as an An parameter and is padded with blanks to its declared size n If the last parameter specifies an AnV format the function result is converted to type AnV with actual length set equal to its size Note Many functions require both an alphanumeric string and its length as input arguments If the supplied string is stored in an AnV field you still must supply a length argument to satisfy the requirements of the function s calling sequence However the length that will be used in the function s calculations is the actual length stored as the first two bytes of the AnV field The following functions are designed to work specifically with the AnV data type In general any inpu
384. meric Data Into Tiles BY HIGHEST LOWEST k tilefield AS head1 IN GROUPS OF n TILES TOP m AS head2 where HIGHEST Sorts the data in descending order so that the highest data values are placed in tile 1 LOWEST Sorts the data in ascending order so that the lowest data values are placed in tile 1 LOWEST is the default value k Is a positive integer representing the number of tile groups to display in the report For example BY HIGHEST 2 displays the two non empty tiles with the highest data values tilefield Is the field whose values are used to assign the tile numbers head1 Is a heading for the column that displays the values of the tile sort field n Is a positive integer not greater than 32 767 specifying the number of tiles to be used in grouping the data For example 100 tiles produces percentiles 10 tiles produces deciles How to Group Numeric Data Into Tiles Example Grouping Data Into Tiles Grouping Numeric Data Into Tiles 1 26 Information Builders m Is a positive integer indicating the highest tile value to display in the report For example TOP 3 does not display any data row that is assigned a tile number greater than 3 head2 Is a new heading for the column that displays the tile numbers Note The syntax accepts numbers that are not integers for k n and m On OS 390 and z OS and VM values with decimals are rounded to integers on UNIX and Windows NT
385. meric fields and trailing blanks are removed from character fields This format is required by certain software packages such as Microsoft Access The COMT format includes a built in safety feature that allows embedded quotation marks within text fields It inserts a second double quotation mark adjacent to the existing one For example if you input Joe Smitty Smith the output will be Joe Smitty Smith The extension or file type for this format is CSV A Master File is created for this format type when the command used to create the output file is HOLD The SUFFIX in the generated Master File is COMT TAB Format The TAB format introduced in Release 5 2 3 creates an output file in tab delimited format that includes column headings in the first row This is useful for importing data to Windows based applications such as Microsoft Access and Excel The TAB format includes a built in safety feature that allows embedded quotation marks within text fields It inserts a second double quotation mark adjacent to the existing one For example if you input Joe Smitty Smith the output will be Joe Smitty Smith The TAB format also includes the following features All trailing blanks are stripped from alpha An fields All leading blanks are stripped from numeric Dx y Fx y Px y and In fields There is a 32K record length limit in the output file A Master File is created when the command used to
386. meric string or the field from which the character will be removed char Alphanumeric Is the character to be removed from the string This can be a field that contains the character or an alphanumeric literal enclosed in single quotation marks If it is a field the left most character in the field will be used as the strip character Note To remove single quotation marks use two consecutive quotation marks You must then enclose this character combination in single quotation marks outfield Alphanumeric Is the field that contains the result or the format of the output value enclosed in single quotation marks In Dialogue Manager you must specify the format Example Removing Occurrences of a Character From a String Reporting The STRIP function removes all occurrences of a period from the DIRECTOR field and stores the result in a field with the format A17 TABLE FILE MOVIES PRINT DIRECTOR AND COMPUTE SDIR A17 STRIP 17 DIRECTOR A17 WHERE CATEGORY EQ COMEDY END The output is DIRECTOR SDIR ZEMECKIS R ZEMECKIS R ABRAHAMS J ABRAHAMS J ALLEN W ALLEN W HALLSTROM L HALLSTROM L MARSHALL P MARSHALL P BROOKS J L BROOKS JL Adjusting Field Displays 1 158 Information Builders Removing Leading or Trailing Occurrences of a Pattern The TRIM function removes leading and or trailing occurrences of a pattern within a character string This is useful for removing patterns where extracting a
387. meric value The integer part is an upper limit for the length of the pattern outfield Alphanumeric Is either a field with AnV or An format for the returned substring or the format of the output value enclosed in single quotation marks If the format of outfield is AnV the actual length is equal to the number of characters left after trimming WebFOCUS Reporting Language Enhancements WebFOCUS Summary of New Features 1 63 Example Creating an AnV Field by Removing Trailing Blanks The TRIMV function creates an AnV field named TITLEV by removing trailing blanks from the TITLE value TABLE FILE MOVIES PRINT DIRECTOR COMPUTE TITLEV A39V TRIMV T TITLE 39 1 TITLEV BY CATEGORY END Here are the first 10 lines of the output UPCASV Creating a Variable Length Uppercase String The UPCASV function converts alphabetic characters to uppercase and is similar to UPCASE However UPCASV can return AnV output whose actual length is the lesser of the actual length of the AnV input field and an input parameter that specifies the size How to Create a Variable Length Uppercase String Example Creating a Variable Length Uppercase String Using Variable Length Character Expressions 1 64 Information Builders Syntax How to Create a Variable Length Uppercase String UPCASV length_limit string outfield where length_limit Numeric Is a positive constant or a field whose integer portion represents the siz
388. method derives a linear equation that best fits a set of numeric data points and uses this equation to create a new column in the report output The equation can be based on one to three independent variables This method estimates values by assuming that the dependent variable y the new calculated values and the independent variables x1 x2 x3 are related by the following linear equation y a1 x1 a2 x2 a3 x3 b When there is one independent variable the equation represents a straight line This produces the same values as FORECAST using the linear regression REGRESS method When there are two independent variables the equation represents a plane and with three independent variables it represents a hyperplane You should use this technique when you have reason to believe that the dependent variable can be approximated by a linear combination of the independent variables REGRESS uses a technique called Ordinary Least Squares to calculate values for the coefficients a1 a2 a3 and b that minimize the sum of the squared differences between the data and the resulting line plane or hyperplane DEALER_COST Calculation FORMPG 15 940 0 001323 15 940 29 32 8 23 16 940 0 001323 16 940 29 32 6 91 17 940 0 001323 17 940 29 32 5 59 How to Calculate Trends and Predict Values Using REGRESS Example Creating a Multivariate Linear Regression Column Using REGRESS WebFOCUS Reporting Lan
389. mizing Dashboard chapter in the WebFOCUS Managed Reporting Administrator s Manual Removing the Banner You can create your Dashboard view without a banner Previously if you wanted to remove the banner you had to edit the profile prf file manually and change the size of the banner so it would not be visible in the Dashboard Dashboard administrators can use this feature when customizing Dashboard views using the View Builder Dashboard users can take advantage of these enhancements when searching for reports folders Web pages or Web addresses from the Dashboard Procedure How to Remove the Banner in Dashboard 1 From the View Builder click Composition 2 Deselect the Check to use Banner check box 3 Click Preview 4 Click Save Customizing Content Block Layouts You have more control over how content blocks display in the Dashboard Previously you were limited to one or two columns and you could not control how much space each column would fill in the Dashboard You can add as many columns as you need and using a percentage you can specify the width of each column Dashboard administrators as well as authenticated users can use these enhancements to help design the layout of content blocks in their Dashboard view Content blocks are fully documented in the Creating a Content Block chapter in the WebFOCUS Managed Reporting Administrator s Manual Managed Reporting Enhancements WebFOCUS Summary of New
390. mmary of New Features 1 29 Indicating Total Number of Pages You can use the TABLASTPAGE system variable to insert the total number of pages in an HTML PDF PS or Excel 2000 report For example you can add a footing that reads Page 1 of 5 where the value of TABLASTPAGE is 5 Syntax How to Display Page X of Y in a Report heading_or_footing_phrase Page lt TABPAGENO of lt TABLASTPAGE ON TABLE HOLD AS name FORMAT fmt where heading_or_footing_phrase Can be one of the following HEADING CENTER FOOTING CENTER ON sortfield SUBHEAD ON sortfield SUBFOOT where sortfield is the sort field that triggers a new subheading or subfooting name Is the name of the generated PDF Excel 2000 PostScript or HTML file fmt Can be one of the following PDF EXL2K PS POSTSCRIPT HTML How to Display Page X of Y in a Report Example Displaying Page X of Y Indicating Total Number of Pages 1 30 Information Builders Example Displaying Page X of Y TABLE FILE GGSALES Page lt TABPAGENO of lt TABLASTPAGE SUM UNITS AS Unit Sales BY CATEGORY BY REGION BY PRODUCT ON CATEGORY PAGE BREAK ON TABLE HOLD FORMAT HTML ON TABLE SET STYLE TYPE REPORT GRID OFF TYPE REPORT FONT HELVETICA TYPE HEADING STYLE ITALIC ENDSTYLE END The output is Page 1 of 3 Category Region Product Unit Sales Coffee Midwest Espresso 101154 Latte 231623 Northeast Capuccino 4
391. more information about viewing a log report and purging log records see Tracking a Schedule Using the Schedule Log Option in the Creating and Maintaining a Schedule chapter in the ReportCaster Development and Administration manual or see Viewing a Log Report and Purging the Log File in the Maintaining a Schedule chapter in the ReportCaster End User s Manual ReportCaster Enhancements WebFOCUS Summary of New Features 5 11 Configuring ReportCaster for NLS You can use the ReportCaster Development and Administration Interface to configure the ReportCaster Distribution Server for National Language Support NLS Initial configuration of NLS for WebFOCUS including the ReportCaster Distribution Server occurs when you install WebFOCUS and ReportCaster The ReportCaster Development and Administration Interface is useful if you want to change code page values without reinstalling the product Procedure How to How to Configure the ReportCaster Distribution Server for NLS 1 Launch WebFOCUS Managed Reporting Configuring ReportCaster for NLS 5 12 Information Builders 2 Click the ReportCaster icon The ReportCaster Development and Administration Interface opens ReportCaster Enhancements WebFOCUS Summary of New Features 5 13 3 Click ReportCaster Server Configuration The ReportCaster Server Configuration window opens Configuring ReportCaster for NLS 5 14 Information Builders 4 Select Dserver Codepage and ent
392. n For an example see Customizing Worksheet Tabs in EXL2K Reports on page 1 134 You can change the name of a Sheet tab to make it more descriptive by including the TITLETEXT attribute in the StyleSheet declaration Note that the same syntax changes the browser title bar in an HTML report View and Save a Report in Excel 97 Format The EXL97 format allows you to view and save reports in Excel 97 When specifying the EXL97 format an HTML based file is generated with an extension of e97 The appropriate MIME type is automatically assigned to designate Excel as the active application for this file type For an example see Viewing a Report in EXL97 Format on page 1 135 Format EXL97 is fully compatible with Excel 2000 and Excel 2002 How to Save Reports as FORMAT EXL2K FORMULA Example Displaying Formatted Dates in Excel 2000 Generating Native Excel Formulas for Column Totals Customizing Worksheet Tabs in EXL2K Reports Viewing a Report in EXL97 Format Excel Integration Enhancements 1 130 Information Builders For a graphical implementation of these enhancements see Saving a Report as Excel 2000 Excel 97 and Excel Output in the Saving and Reusing Report Output chapter in the Creating Reports With Graphical Tools manual Syntax How to Save Reports as FORMAT EXL2K FORMULA Add the following syntax to your request to take advantage of Excel formulas in your spreadsheet ON TABLE PCHOLD HOLD FORMAT EXL2K FORMU
393. n administrative users You can access this feature as follows From the WebFOCUS Reporting Server Console it is available in the Workspace submenu as Quiesce or Enable From the text console to disable new connections use quiesce newconnect To enable again use enable newconnect When a server is quiesced new connections from a Server Administrator can still go through because some configuration changes from the WebFOCUS Reporting Server Console require an agent connection New connections from non administrators are rejected with a resource limit error 33 The administrator must continue to monitor existing sessions wait for them to finish before disrupting for example stopping old agents or restarting the server after configuration changes and or manually terminate selected sessions The quiesced enabled state is also preserved in the server configuration file edaserve cfg under the keyword quiesce_connections so that the server can stay quiesced across one or more restarts during configuration changes Enhanced Connection Management The connections view in the WebFOCUS Reporting Server Console has been enhanced to show both active and queued connections In previous releases only queued connections were represented on the console The queue view has been removed You can see the statistics of any connection either active or queued from the Connections Panel on the WebFOCUS Reporting Server Console You can
394. n page 10 12 How to Migrate ETL Requests on UNIX and Windows Migrate ETL Requests on OS 390 Migrate ETL Requests on OS 400 Migrating ETL Requests 10 8 Information Builders Note Before you start the migration review category names for the following special characters lt gt Categories names containing these special characters must be renamed before migration In the migration spaces in category names are changed to underscores _ Application names are limited to 18 characters Procedure How to Migrate ETL Requests on UNIX and Windows 1 Locate the Master Files and Access files used by your ETL Requests The default locations are 2 Copy the Master Files and Access Files to the baseapp directory of APPROOT This is the default directory for Release 5 2 ETL Requests or Copy the Master Files and Access Files to any directory under APPROOT then add that directory to APP PATH 3 Prepare the ETL internal database for migration If your ETL internal tables are stored in A relational database such as ORACLE Microsoft SQL Server or DB2 Configure a data adapter for the data source For more information see the documentation for the appropriate data adapter FOCUS No preparation is required if the internal database file CMSCHED FOC and master file CMSCHED MAS are in their original locations Note that if you are migrating from a disconnected computer and have to copy these files the
395. n the Control Values section of the Parameters window select the Dynamic radio button 3 Press the Shift key and then click two or more parameters to select them simultaneously and activate the chain feature buttons on the layout toolbar 4 Click the Add to chain button The parameters you selected are labeled with numbers to indicate the order in which they are chained when you run your report How to Filter Parameter Values Reverse the Order of Chained Parameter Values Remove a Parameter From the Chain Cache Parameter Data Developer Studio Enhancements WebFOCUS Summary of New Features 2 41 Procedure How to Reverse the Order of Chained Parameter Values 1 Click the Chain order button in the layout toolbar 2 Click the parameter you want to display first in the chain You can continue to reverse the order in the chain by clicking the numeric labels on the chained parameters If you would like to see the numeric labels on the chained parameters select the Chain order button Double click a parameter to designate it as the first parameter in the chain Procedure How to Remove a Parameter From the Chain 1 Click the parameter you want to remove from the chain 2 Click the button in the layout toolbar 3 Press the shift key and click the remaining chained parameters 4 Click the Chain order button in the layout toolbar You no longer see a numeric label on the parameter that you removed Desig
396. n the Display column enter the text that will represent the parameter value in the form the user views c In the Selected column check the box for the value you want to be selected by default If the form is a multi select form more than one value can be selected 3 Repeat Step 2 until the list contains all values you want to include 4 Optionally click Delete to eliminate any values and the up and down arrows to rearrange the order of the values Updating Parameters in the Resource Layout Painter With Report Painter Changes When using the Resource Layout Painter if changes are made to parameter values in the Report Painter you have the option to update the values in the Resource Layout Painter with those entered in the Report Painter You can also select whether to automatically update parameter values in the Resource Layout Painter How to Determine Whether to Update Changes Made With the Report Painter Automatically Update Parameters in the Resource Layout Painter With Report Painter Changes Developer Studio Enhancements WebFOCUS Summary of New Features 2 37 Procedure How to Determine Whether to Update Changes Made With the Report Painter 1 After making changes close the Report Painter to return to the Resource Layout Painter A dialog box opens prompting you to decide whether to override parameter values in the Resource Layout Painter with the values changed in the Report Painter 2 Select Yes to us
397. n the report The dialog box looks like this Financial Report Painter Enhancements 2 60 Information Builders 9 Click the plus sign next to 1000 to expand the hierarchy one level The matrix now looks like this If you wish repeat the process to expand the hierarchy another level 10 To add some quick styling click the Report Options icon on the toolbar above the matrix On the Style tab click the Style File Selection button bottom right of window The Style File Selection dialog box opens Select the style sheet DefaultGrid DEFFLT1 STY under Style Sheet Source Click OK to confirm your choice and OK again to return to the matrix Developer Studio Enhancements WebFOCUS Summary of New Features 2 61 11 Click the Run icon on the toolbar to see the report which lists the account numbers associated with the levels of the parent child hierarchy The indents for the hierarchy levels are set by default Tip If you wanted to see the children in the hierarchy without the parent you could choose Show only children to level 2 in step 8 rather than Show with children to level 2 Without the parent line the report would look like this Financial Report Painter Enhancements 2 62 Information Builders Consolidating Data in a Hierarchy in Developer Studio The Consolidate option consolidates multiple levels of the hierarchy on one line of the report output Consolidate can be used alone or in conjunction with the Show only
398. nables you to format line width line style and line color individually for any side of the border DOUBLE Double line GROOVE 3D groove RIDGE 3D ridge INSET 3D inset OUTSET 3D outset Style Description Adding Borders for Emphasis 1 110 Information Builders Example Inserting and Formatting a Border The following request generates an HTML report with a light red dotted line around the entire report heading TABLE FILE GGSALES SUM BUDUNITS UNITS BUDDOLLARS DOLLARS BY CATEGORY ON TABLE SUBHEAD lt 1 Sales Report CONFIDENTIAL December 2002 lt 1 ON TABLE SET PAGE NUM OFF ON TABLE SET ONLINE FMT HTML ON TABLE SET HTMLCSS ON ON TABLE SET STYLE TYPE REPORT GRID OFF TYPE TABHEADING STYLE BOLD JUSTIFY CENTER BORDER LIGHT BORDER COLOR RED BORDER STYLE DASHED ENDSTYLE END The output is Tip You can use the same BORDER syntax to generate this output in a PDF or PS report WebFOCUS Reporting Language Enhancements WebFOCUS Summary of New Features 1 111 Aligning Decimals in a Multi Line Heading You can align decimal points in a multi line heading or footing This feature is particularly useful when you are working with currencies that have different display conventions For example if a figure is in dollars it is formatted with a decimal point and two places for zeros If it is in Swiss Francs it is formatted with a decimal place and four zeros If it is in
399. ndent and correspond with the hierarchy in the report Example Navigating a Multi Level HTML TOC in a Page Heading The following request uses a StyleSheet to add an HTML TOC that contains drop down lists in the third line of the page heading for three sort BY fields specified in the request CONTINENT REGION and COUNTRY Each field becomes a place holder for its TOC If the TOC features were not in effect the field would appear in the report TABLE FILE SHORT Projected Return For lt CONTINENT For lt REGION For lt COUNTRY PRINT PROJECTED_RETURN BY CONTINENT BY REGION BY COUNTRY BY TYPE ON TABLE PCHOLD FORMAT HTML ON TABLE SET HTMLCSS ON ON TABLE SET STYLE TYPE REPORT GRID OFF TYPE HEADING LINE 1 STYLE BOLD TYPE HEADING LINE 3 OBJECT FIELD ITEM 1 TOC 1 TYPE HEADING LINE 3 OBJECT FIELD ITEM 2 TOC 2 TYPE HEADING LINE 3 OBJECT FIELD ITEM 3 TOC 3 ENDSTYLE END WebFOCUS Reporting Language Enhancements WebFOCUS Summary of New Features 1 147 The output is Grouping Sort Fields for Display Data in a TOC report is grouped into sections based on the sort fields TOC reports only display one section at a time for easier viewing Each section contains all the values for its sort field You can customize each section with a page break By default a page break is included in the first highest level sort field You can add page breaks to create additional
400. ndow the column title associated with this field is Parent Select Parent and click the Detail button 4 Now drag GL_ACCOUNT into the Report Painter window the column title associated with GL_ACCOUNT is Ledger Account Select Ledger Account and click the For button This becomes the controlling field in your financial report The Report Painter looks like this Financial Report Painter Enhancements 2 58 Information Builders 5 Click the Matrix tab below the Report Painter to open the Design matrix Note that GL_ACCOUNT the For field is the title of the second column and its values appear in the For field values panel at the right of the matrix You will be populating the matrix with these values 6 Begin by dragging the tag 1000 from the FOR field values panel into row R1 of the matrix The 1000 account tag appears in the GL_ACCOUNT column 7 In row R1 right click 1000 and select Row Properties from the menu The TAG dialog box opens with 1000 listed in the Tags box Developer Studio Enhancements WebFOCUS Summary of New Features 2 59 8 In the Children box choose Show with children to level from the drop down list then select 2 in the Level box to display two levels of the hierarchy with account 1000 as the starting point or parent level The Display children s captions check box is selected by default This shows the descriptive titles for the children rather than their tag values 1000 2000 and so on o
401. ng Request usage monitoring collection Request governing based on collection The CVP uses a temporary table GKEIVP for validating usage monitoring and governing Resource Analyzer and Resource Governor Enhancements WebFOCUS Summary of New Features 11 5 Procedure How to Run the Resource Governor Configuration Verification Program CVP 1 Run the procedure gkeivp fex located in the catalog subdirectory of the EDAHOME directory In the WebFOCUS Reporting Server Console you can add this directory to the server path and then click the procedure in the Procedures page and select Run 2 Examine the output If the Resource Governor installation and configuration is successful the following messages are included among the output This statement indicates that the test data has been put into the test data source INSERTS COMPLETED FOR TEST DATA This statement indicates that the Resource Governor utility procedure gkecol has successfully completed and that data about test requests will be temporarily logged in the Usage Monitor GKECOL COMPLETED SUCCESSFULLY This statement indicates that the test requests using SELECT against the GKEIVP test data source have completed successfully and that Usage Monitor data has been populated in the Resource
402. ng Zero Values Suppressing Missing Data Suppressing Zero Values and Missing Data Support for User Defined Attributes Data Adapter Enhancements WebFOCUS Summary of New Features 8 15 Describing the Measures Dimension in the Master File The SET MEASURE command enables you to set or change the Accounts tagged dimension without having to change the outline in the Essbase Database Server With this setting the server produces an actual field name for every member of the named dimension in the Master File rather than producing the dimension in terms of generations The SET MEASURE command must be executed before the synonym is created Syntax How to Set or Change the Measures Dimension in the Master File To set the Accounts tag for a dimension use the syntax ENGINE ESSBASE SET MEASURE dimension_name FOR synonym where dimension_name Is the name of the dimension to be interpreted as an Accounts tagged dimension when generating a synonym synonym Is an alias for one application database combination Summing on Non Aggregated Fields Any two pass calculated members that are found in the accounts or Scenario dimension and members with the and consolidation properties in the Essbase outline have the following attributes in the associated Access File MEMBER membername AGGREGATE NO Due to the nature of two pass calculation members a summation request SQL SUM or SUM in TABLE may produce
403. ng is based on the OLE DB for OLAP model OLE DB is a successor to ODBC Microsoft s Open Database Connectivity standard designed to access multi dimensional datastores though Multi Dimensional Expressions MDX The OLAP model defines key figures numerics and characteristics alpha to be used in multiple combinations for data analysis The Data Adapter for SAP BW offers Retrieval of all BW multi dimensional metadata objects SAP variable support for parameterized queries SAP attribute property support for complete reporting Support for SAP key and name fields Reporting from InfoCubes and ODS objects Built in flattening for rapid conversion of data sets to row sets High speed performance Automated WebFOCUS Reporting Server Console for server metadata creation Data Adapter for SAP R 3 Enhancements to the SAP R 3 Native Interface include Security Business Application Programming Interface BAPI support Join support Aggregation support Enhancements to IDoc Processing include IDoc Listener Data Adapter for SAP R 3 8 22 Information Builders Security Support for the SAP R 3 Native Interface The Native Interface for SAP R 3 has been enhanced to handle the user password provided in the following statement SQL SQLSAP SET CONNECTION_ATTRIBUTES system user password client This feature allows you to run a secured request t
404. ngth comma or tab delimited HOLD file that differentiates between a missing value and a blank string or zero value using the SET NULL command How to Propagate Missing Values to a Delimited HOLD File Example Creating a Comma delimited File With Missing Values WebFOCUS Reporting Language Enhancements WebFOCUS Summary of New Features 1 49 Syntax How to Propagate Missing Values to a Delimited HOLD File SET NULL ON OFF where ON Propagates missing values to a delimited HOLD file when the field has MISSING ON in the Master File The HOLD formats supported for SET NULL ON are COM COMT TAB and TABT Missing values in a record are denoted by two consecutive delimiters A record that starts with a missing value has a delimiter in the first position and a record that ends with a missing value has a delimiter in the last position OFF Propagates the value zero for a missing numeric value and blank for a missing alphanumeric value to a delimited HOLD file OFF is the default value Note When SET NULL ON the setting for the HNODATA parameter is ignored A missing date is indistinguishable from an empty date Example Creating a Comma delimited File With Missing Values SET NULL ON TABLE FILE SALES PRINT RETURNS DAMAGED BY CITY BY DATE ON TABLE HOLD AS NULL1 FORMAT COMT END The NULL1 file contains the following records CITY DATE RETURNS DAMAGED NEW YORK 1017 2 3
405. ning a User Interface With the Resource Layout Painter 2 42 Information Builders Procedure How to Cache Parameter Data When creating a chained set of parameters you also have the option to cache the parameter data Running a cached version of the parameter data makes the selection of parameters much quicker because the browser retrieves all the data initially from the data source and caches it on the client By default chained parameter data is non cached meaning every selection causes the parameter data to be reloaded from the server However once you make a selection the values are cached The next time you make that selection the cached data is used 1 Click a chained parameter in the layout 2 Right click the parameter and click the Cache run time data option You may select other chained parameters and enable the Cache run time data option Tip If you decide to deactivate the option and revert back to using non cached data right click the chained parameter and click the check mark next to the Cache run time data option For more information about parameters see Using Forms to Supply Parameter Values in the Designing a User Interface for a Web Application With the Resource Layout Painter chapter in the Developing Reporting Applications manual Developer Studio Enhancements WebFOCUS Summary of New Features 2 43 Adding an Image With a Hyperlink to the Layout In Release 5 2 3 you can insert an image into your repo
406. ns recursive Syntax How to Calculate Trends and Predict Values Using FORECAST MOVAVE calculation ON sortfield RECAP result_field fmt FORECAST infield interval npredict MOVAVE npoint1 EXPAVE calculation ON sortfield RECAP result_field fmt FORECAST infield interval npredict EXPAVE npoint1 DOUBLEXP calculation ON sortfield RECAP result_field fmt FORECAST infield interval npredict DOUBLEXP npoint1 npoint2 SEASONAL calculation ON sortfield RECAP result_field fmt FORECAST infield interval npredict SEASONAL nperiod npoint1 npoint2 npoint3 REGRESS calculation ON sortfield RECAP result_field fmt FORECAST infield interval npredict REGRESS where sortfield Is the last ACROSS or BY field in the request This field must be in numeric or date format If the request does not contain an ACROSS field FORECAST works on the last BY field result_field Is the field containing the result of FORECAST It can be a new field or the same as infield This must be a numeric field either a real field a virtual field or a calculated field Note The word FORECAST and the opening parenthesis must be on the same line as the syntax sortfield fmt Is the display format for result_field D12 2 is the default value If result_field was previously reformatted using a DEFINE or COMPUTE command the format specified in the RECAP command is respected WebFOCUS Reporting L
407. nstead of WITH CHILDREN the line for the parent value 1000 Profit Before Tax would not have displayed on the report output Financial Reporting Language Enhancements 1 78 Information Builders Consolidating Data in an FML Hierarchy The ADD command consolidates multiple levels of the hierarchy on one line of the FML report output ADD can be used alone or in conjunction with GET CHILDREN or WITH CHILDREN Note that ADD is designed to work with requests that use the SUM command It is also designed to be used with detail level data not data that is consolidated When used alone ADD aggregates the parent and children on one line of the report output summing the numeric data values included on the line This corresponds to the FML syntax parentvalue or CHILD1 OR CHILD2 OR When used in conjunction with GET CHILDREN ADD displays one line for each child of the specified parent value Each line is a summation of that child and all of its children You can specify the number of levels of children to display which determines the number of lines generated on the report output and the depth of summation under each child By default only direct children will have a line in the report output and the summary for each child will include all of its children When used in conjunction with WITH CHILDREN ADD first displays a line in the report output that consists of the summation of the parent value and all of its children Then it displays
408. nt to change the name of the output field from FRCSTFLD enter a new name in the Field Name box 3 Select Exponential Average from the Step 1 Choose a Method drop down list 4 Select an input field from the Step 2 Choose a Measure drop down list If you select the same field as the By or Across field this field is not displayed even if it is included in a display command 5 Select the increment to count each instance of the By or Across field from the Step 3 Choose The Interval spin box 6 Select the number of predictions to be calculated from the Forecast field from the Step 4 Choose Number of Predictions spin box 7 Select the number of values to average from the Step 5 Choose Number of Values to Average spin box 8 Optionally change the default field format by clicking Change Format and selecting the format from the Format dialog box 9 Click OK Calculating Trends and Predicting Values in Developer Studio 2 30 Information Builders Reference Forecast Dialog Box Exponential Average Forecast dialog box options are fully documented in Calculating Trends and Predicting Values With Forecast in the Creating Temporary Fields chapter in the Creating Reports With Graphical Tools manual Developer Studio Enhancements WebFOCUS Summary of New Features 2 31 Procedure How to Calculate a Double Exponential Smoothing Column 1 With the By or Across field you want to use for your calculations click Forecas
409. ntain procedure use the Import WebFOCUS Parameters into Maintain dialog box to change the format of the parameters This dialog box has the following fields Name Contains the names of the parameters from the WebFOCUS report imported into the Maintain procedure Type Contains the proposed format for a parameter Opens the Type Wizard from which you can specify a new data type for the parameter Changing WebFOCUS Settings From a Procedure 9 20 Information Builders Changing WebFOCUS Settings From a Procedure The SYS_MGR FOCSET function allows you to change certain WebFOCUS environment server and other settings from a Maintain procedure This feature gives greater flexibility and control within a Maintain session How to Change WebFOCUS Settings From a Procedure Set CDN From a Procedure Set COMMIT From a Procedure Set DATEDISPLAY From a Procedure Set DEFCENT From a Procedure Set EMGSRV From a Procedure Set LANGUAGE From a Procedure Set MESSAGE From a Procedure Set NODATA From a Procedure Set PASS From a Procedure Set TRACEOFF From a Procedure Set TRACEON From a Procedure Set TRACEUSER From a Procedure Set USER From a Procedure Set WARNING From a Procedure Set YRTHRESH From a Procedure Example Setting DEFCENT From a Procedure Setting PASS From a Procedure Enabling Server Tracing for MNTSTMT WebFOCUS Maintain Enhancements WebFOCUS Summary of New Features 9 21 Syntax Ho
410. nual Topics Enhancements for Individual Adapters Data Adapter for Adabas Data Adapter for Allbase on HP UX Data Adapter for Micro Focus C ISAM Data Adapter for DBFILE Data Adapter for DB2 Data Adapter for Enterprise Java Beans Data Adapter for Essbase Data Adapter for Informix Data Adapter for J D Edwards Data Adapter for Millennium Data Adapter for MUMPS Data Adapter for PeopleSoft Data Adapter for Progress Data Adapter for SAP BW Data Adapter for SAP R 3 Data Adapter for Siebel Data Adapter for UniVerse on HP UX Data Adapter for VSAM Java Applications Adapter Generic Adapter and Data Access Enhancements DATASET Attribute for a Segment in a Master File COBOL FD Translator Enhancements Database Selection From the Console Field Identification as Read Only LIBPATH Display for DBMS Long Qualified Field Names Size Restrictions for Generated Alpha Fields SQL Join Optimization Text Fields for Relational Data Adapters SUBSTRING Function Behavior VARCHAR Support Data Adapter for Adabas 8 2 Information Builders Data Adapter for Adabas The Data Adapter for Adabas has been enhanced to support Connection attribute settings through the WebFOCUS Reporting Server Console Transparent Superdescriptors Hyper and Phonetic Descriptors ORDER fields Internal Sequence Numbers ISN Global Format Buffe
411. number gt max_sessions_per_agent lt number gt profile lt file fex gt max_connections_per_user lt number gt END Note that there are two additional keywords in the service block profile Specifies the name of a profile to be executed during startup of agents for this service By default the baseapp directory is searched for the profile To specify a file in another application directory use the following format APP file fex max_connections_per_user Specifies the maximum number of concurrent connections a user can have If this parameter is not set or is set to 1 the number of concurrent connections is unlimited this is the default behavior All other parameters have the same meanings and relationships as they had for the entire server applied now in the scope of a service To connect to an agent of a specific service use the following format in the communication configuration file odin cfg for the client TCP Loopback Client NODE LOOPBACK BEGIN PROTOCOL CLASS CLIENT lt service_name gt HOST SERVICE END If no service name is specified by default the client is connected to an agent from the DEFAULT service Blocking New Connections on a Running Server 7 4 Information Builders Blocking New Connections on a Running Server To facilitate application changes on a running production server a control has been introduced to allow an administrator to block new connections from no
412. o 1 26 4 6 grouping numeric data in tiles 4 7 GTREND SET parameter 1 97 H HDAY parameter 1 104 2 69 HDAY SET parameter 1 104 heading limitations 1 98 Help option 5 10 hidden reports 4 5 hiding content blocks 3 18 hierarchies 2 56 displaying 2 56 displaying values as captions 2 56 to 2 57 indenting levels 2 56 Hiper Memory 7 28 HNODATA command 1 43 to 1 44 HOLD command 1 152 HOLD formats 1 48 1 154 COM 1 152 COMT 1 153 TAB 1 153 TABT 1 153 Index WebFOCUS Summary of New Features I 11 HOLDMISS command 1 47 HOLDMISS parameter 1 47 holidays 1 104 specifying 1 104 horizontal sort field values 1 149 HTML files 6 33 HTML Graph Assistant 4 17 enhancements 4 17 HTML Report Assistant 4 8 creating new columns 4 10 creating temporary fields 4 10 enhancements 4 19 redesign 4 9 selecting records for a report 4 11 HTML reports 1 141 HTML tables of contents 1 142 adding to reports 1 142 adding to WebFOCUS StyleSheets 1 142 for multiple sort groups 1 147 HTML TOCs tables of contents 1 141 adding to headings 1 145 HTTP basic authentication 7 24 hyper descriptors 8 5 I ibi_cgi in Maintain 9 3 ibi_start in Maintain 9 3 ibimultilanguage js file 6 29 IBISTART WFS file in Maintain 9 39 IBIWF_language function call 6 27 IDENTIFY columns 9 40 identifying cells 1 89 2 64 identifying columns 1 89 2 64 to 2 65 identifying rows 1 89 2 64 2 67 IDoc listener 8 23
413. oc request and the New Century Corp Self Service application if the application was installed WebFOCUS Client Enhancements WebFOCUS Summary of New Features 6 23 National Language Support for International Computing National Language Support NLS ensures that the WebFOCUS Client correctly processes and displays all national characters embedded in any data source It allows you to represent data in the formatting that corresponds to the currently selected user locale The WebFOCUS Client provides Dynamic configuration for NLS on Windows NT 2000 XP UNIX OS 400 OS 390 and z OS through the WebFOCUS Client Console For more information see NLS Settings on page 6 20 Inclusion of all supported localized versions in a single installation procedure A dialog box prompts you to select one or more languages to install For more information see Using the Dynamic Language Switch on page 6 24 For localized versions a toggle feature that enables an individual user to switch languages from any WebFOCUS logon page such as the Managed Reporting logon page The user can switch to any language selected during the installation procedure Text in the user interface including the logon page then appears in the selected language For more information see Using the Dynamic Language Switch on page 6 24 Customization of the user interface through resource files For more information see Customizing the User Interface on pag
414. of New Features 1 87 Returning FOR Field Values in a Computed Column In an FML report that contains consolidated data you can use the FMLINFO function in a COMPUTE command to accurately determine the value of the FOR field for each row You can use this function to Change the signs of financial data such as revenue figures which are often stored as negative values into positive values for presentation on a report Pass the FOR field value as a parameter in a drill down to another report If row captions are displayed in the report the drill down can be implemented from the caption Note The SET FORMULTPLE parameter must be set to ON in order to use the FMLINFO function This enables an incoming record to be used in more than one row of an FML report Syntax How to Retain FOR Field Values for Consolidated Report Rows FMLINFO FORVALUE outfield where FORVALUE Alphanumeric Returns the FOR value associated with each row in an FML report If the FML row was generated as a sum of data records using the OR phrase FMLINFO returns the first FOR value specified in the list of values If the OR phrase was generated by an FML hierarchy ADD command FMLINFO returns the FOR value associated with the parent specified in the ADD command outfield Alphanumeric Is the name of the field that contains the result or the format of the output value enclosed in single quotation marks How to Retain FOR Field Value
415. ol 7 2 remote server installation 7 2 Remove All button 3 15 removing banners 3 14 removing characters from fields 1 156 removing characters from strings 1 61 removing parameters from a chain 2 41 removing punctuation 1 156 Report Assistant 4 5 OLAP enabling from 4 5 Report Assistant OLAP settings 4 5 report fields 4 9 Report Library 3 2 5 9 in Dashboard 3 20 Report Painter 2 14 formatting capabilities 2 14 to 2 16 OLAP enabling from 4 5 report types 3 8 custom 3 8 ReportCaster 3 2 5 2 architecture 5 2 configuration 5 2 Development and Administration Interface 5 5 HTML user interface 5 8 in Dashboard 3 20 ReportCaster Console 5 10 Help option 5 10 Log File option 5 10 Logoff option 5 10 Run Now option 5 10 Users option 5 10 ReportCaster Distribution Server 5 11 configuring for NLS 5 11 settings 5 13 reporting against hierarchies 1 76 2 55 to 2 56 Index WebFOCUS Summary of New Features I 17 reporting enhancements 1 124 Reporting Object components 3 7 reports 1 29 Candidates for Column Index 11 9 compound 1 125 expanded limits 1 98 including script files 1 104 inserting page numbers 1 29 Large Volume Requests 11 8 Long running Requests 11 7 OLAP enabling 4 5 saving 1 130 repository extract utility 3 12 request logs 10 3 Resource Analyzer 11 1 accessing through Web console 11 6 Candidates for Column Index report 11 7 configuring internal tables 11 2 Large Volume Requests
416. ol 7 4 user level profiles 7 4 SET AGGREGATE NOOP command 8 14 8 16 SET BLANKINDENT command 1 85 2 56 2 69 SET commands 1 142 1 161 2 69 ERROROUT 1 106 HOLDMISS 1 47 PSPAGESETUP 1 161 SUMMARYLINES 1 37 SET EMPTY command 8 14 SET FORMULTIPLE parameter 2 69 SET HNODATA command 1 43 Index WebFOCUS Summary of New Features I 19 SET MEASURE command 8 14 to 8 15 SET NOPACCESS command 8 8 to 8 9 SET ORDERKEYS command 8 6 SET parameters 1 162 2 69 BLANKINDENT 1 85 2 69 CDN 1 118 2 69 CENT ZERO 1 119 2 69 changing from Maintain procedure 9 20 COMPOUND 1 125 DEFINES 2 69 EXL2KLANG 1 137 FILCASE 1 107 FOCHTMLURL 1 105 FORMULTIPLE 2 69 GRAPHSERVURL 1 93 to 1 95 2 69 GTREND 1 97 HDAY 1 104 2 69 HNODATA 1 43 JSURLS 1 104 LANG 1 161 LANG parameter 1 161 LOOKKGRAPH 1 97 PCOMMA 2 69 SET PSPAGESETUP command 1 161 SET RESTICTNUM command 8 14 SET RESTRICTNUM command 8 16 SET SUMMARYLINES command 1 37 SET SUPEMPTY command 8 18 SET SUPMISSING command 8 14 8 17 SET SUPSHARE command 8 14 8 17 SET SUPZEROS command 8 14 8 17 SET SYNONYM command 8 4 SET USERFCHK command 1 66 SET USERFNS command 1 67 setting CDN from Maintain procedure 9 22 setting COMMIT from Maintain procedure 9 22 setting DATEDISPLAY from Maintain procedure 9 23 setting DEFCENT from Maintain procedure 9 23 setting EMGSRV from Maintain procedure 9 24 setting LANGUAGE from Maintain procedure 9 25 setting MESS
417. olumn on page 1 87 Formatting an FML Report on page 1 89 This topic describes a feature introduced in Release 5 2 3 which enables you to control the indentation of rows and labels For the graphical implementation of the hierarchy features see Financial Report Painter Enhancements in Chapter 2 Developer Studio Enhancements The FML language and the graphical Financial Report Painter are fully documented in the Creating Financial Reports manual In this section Defining an FML Hierarchy Displaying a Dynamic FML Hierarchy Consolidating Data in an FML Hierarchy Indenting Row Titles in an FML Hierarchy Returning FOR Field Values in a Computed Column Formatting an FML Report WebFOCUS Reporting Language Enhancements WebFOCUS Summary of New Features 1 71 Defining an FML Hierarchy You define the hierarchical relationship between two fields in the Master File using the PROPERTY PARENT_OF and REFERENCE hierachyfield attributes The parent and child fields must share data values and their relationship should be hierarchical The formats of the parent and child fields must both be numeric or both alphanumeric You can also provide descriptive captions in the Master File for display in reports in place of the specified hierarchy field values Syntax How to Define a Hierarchy Between Fields in a Master File FIELD parentfield PROPERTY PARENT_OF REFERENCE seg hierarchyfield where parentfield
418. ommas This format type can be imported into applications such as Excel or Lotus Tab delimited data sources are sequential data sources in which field values are separated by tabs Supported output formats are fully documented in Choosing Output File Formats in the Saving and Reusing Your Report Output chapter in the Creating Reports With WebFOCUS Language manual For graphical implementations of these formats see Comma delimited and Tab delimited Output Formats in Chapter 2 Developer Studio Enhancements In this section COM Format COMT Format TAB Format TABT Format How to Control Retrieval of Comma delimited Data Sources With PCOMMA Output Formats for Application Processing 1 152 Information Builders COM Format The COM format saves the data values as a variable length text file with fields separated by commas and with character values enclosed in double quotation marks This is useful for further processing in a database application This format type can be imported into applications such as Excel or Lotus Leading blanks are removed from numeric fields and trailing blanks are removed from character fields Issuing a request against this data source requires the SET PCOMMA ON command See Control Retrieval of Comma delimited Data Sources With PCOMMA on page 1 152 The COM format includes a built in safety feature that allows embedded quotation marks within text fields It inserts a second double quot
419. on Code Page Language Code Language Name Language Abbreviation Code Page 001 AMENGLISH AME 37 001 ENGLISH ENG 37 370 BALTIC BAL 1112 420 CZECH CZE 870 045 DANISH DAN 277 031 DUTCH DUT 37 358 FINNISH FIN 278 033 FRENCH FRE 297 049 GERMAN GER 273 049 GERMAN 500 GE5 500 030 GREEK GRE 875 972 HEBREW HEB 424 Configuring National Language Support 7 14 Information Builders 039 ITALIAN ITA 280 081 JAPANESE JPN 939 081 JAPANESE 930 JPK 930 082 KOREAN KOR 933 047 NORWEGIAN NOR 277 048 POLISH POL 870 351 PORTUGUESE POR 37 007 RUSSIAN RUS 1025 085 S CHINESE PRC 935 034 SPANISH SPA 284 046 SWEDISH SWE 278 086 T CHINESE ROC 937 090 TURKISH TUR 1026 044 UKENGLISH UKE 285 Language Code Language Name Language Abbreviation Code Page WebFOCUS Reporting Server Enhancements WebFOCUS Summary of New Features 7 15 Configuring the Server and Client for Baltic Code Pages In Release 5 2 3 WebFOCUS added support for Baltic code pages 1112 921 and 1257 You must manually configure the WebFOCUS Reporting Server and WebFOCUS Client for these code pages Procedure How to Configure the Server and Client for Baltic Code Pages on Windows 1 Open the file cpcodepg nls in the directory ibi srv52 wfs etc Add the following three lines to the file and save it CP01112 IBM MF Baltic Multilanguage CP00921
420. on Tool in the Creating a Reporting Procedure chapter in the Developing Reporting Applications manual Add a virtual folder to a project or add a virtual subfolder to an existing folder for example an HTML Files or Master Files folder See Organizing a Project in the Creating a Reporting Application chapter in the Developing Reporting Applications manual Customize the file types displayed in any folder See Organizing a Project in the Creating a Reporting Application chapter in the Developing Reporting Applications manual Right click to rename a component such as a folder subfolder HTML file Master File or procedure See Organizing a Project in the Creating a Reporting Application chapter in the Developing Reporting Applications manual Permanently remove a file for example a procedure from the hard drive by deleting it from the associated project See Adding a Master File to a Project in the Creating a Reporting Application chapter in the Developing Reporting Applications manual In addition the Project Properties dialog box has been expanded so that you can select a deployment scenario customize the items displayed under a project folder and set other project attributes See Viewing and Modifying Project Properties in the Creating a Reporting Application chapter in the Developing Reporting Applications manual Project Wizard The Project Wizard enables you to select a folder or folders to add to a project pa
421. on User Properties window has been reorganized to be more intuitive and accommodate several additional properties The user privilege User represents the entry UAS User that can only run reports and not invoke Report or Graph Assistant or save output from the OLAP slice n dice options In addition the Java User privilege has been renamed as Analytical User The public user and group required for Business Intelligence Dashboard are defined in the default Managed Reporting Repository Two capabilities have been created as follows The ReportCaster Administrator is enabled when ReportCaster is installed and the user has Managed Reporting Administrator privileges The Report Library option is available when ReportCaster and Report Library are installed The E Mail Address field is an optional user property The Push Notification through Email feature of the Report Library uses this property Developer User Type In Release 5 2 3 the term Domain Admin has been replaced with Developer This more accurately reflects the role of this type of user which is to develop content for Managed Reporting and not to administer users or groups The internal flag for Developer remains domadmin for compatibility with previous releases Managed Reporting Enhancements WebFOCUS Summary of New Features 3 3 Managed Reporting Developer for Windows In Release 5 2 3 WebFOCUS Managed Reporting Developer for Windows enables Develop
422. on which you want the JSCOM3 node to listen c In the CLASS_PATH field enter the following without leaving any spaces drive ibi WebFOCUS52 ibi_html javaassist WFServlet jar drive ibi WebFOCUS52 ibi_html javaassist WFAppPass jar drive ibi WebFOCUS52 ibi_html javaassist IBIGifGraphChart jar where drive is the letter of the drive on which WebFOCUS is installed d Click Save 2 Enable the JSCOM3 setting in the cgivars wfs file a Click Configuration and then Client Settings The settings in the cgivars wfs file appear b Set the IBI_USE_JSCOM3 setting to YES c Click Save 3 Start the WebFOCUS Client WorkSpace located under your WebFOCUS 52 Client Programs menu This is separate from the WebFOCUS Reporting Server WorkSpace For example select WebFOCUS52 Client from Programs and then click Start Security ON Configuring WebFOCUS Client Settings 6 10 Information Builders Configuring WebFOCUS Client Settings You can use the Configuration section of the WebFOCUS Client Console to Configure WebFOCUS startup parameters in the ibi client52 wfc web cgi ibiweb cfg file Change WebFOCUS Client settings in the ibi client52 wfc etc cgivars wfs file Redirect report output using the ibi client52 wfc etc mime wfs file Customize WebFOCUS Client settings in the ibi client52 wfc etc site wfs file Configure National Language Support NLS settings in the ibi client52 wfc etc
423. only when the following conditions are met The Decimal D Integer I Floating F and Packed P formats are selected in the Format Types group box The M floating dollar sign N non floating dollar sign or E scientific notation edit options are not selected in the Edit Options group box If you select the M N or E options the percent edit option becomes disabled Numeric display options are fully documented in Numeric Formats in the Assigning Field Formats chapter in the Creating Reports With Graphical Tools manual Reference Displaying a Percent Sign With Numeric Data Report Viewing in a Browser Your HTML report output and graphs are displayed in your browser instead of the Desktop Viewer For examples of report and graph viewing options see the Viewing and Printing Reports and Graphs chapter in the Creating Reports With Graphical Tools manual Option Format Data Display Percent sign I2 D7 F3 2 21 6148 48 21 6 148 48 00 Developer Studio Enhancements WebFOCUS Summary of New Features 2 11 PS Format in Compound Reports In addition to being able to combine multiple reports into a single PDF file you can concatenate reports into a PS file using the SET COMPOUND command The first PS or PDF report defines the format for the concatenated report enabling you to intersperse intermediate reports of other formats HTML PDF PS EXL2K into one encompassing report You can then run or
424. ons horizontally with an unlimited number of columns All options are fully documented in Radio Buttons Properties Window in the Designing a User Interface for a Web Application With the Resource Layout Painter chapter in the Developing Reporting Applications manual Designing a User Interface With the Resource Layout Painter 2 46 Information Builders Specifying Different Names for Dynamic Parameter Values In Release 5 2 3 you can specify different names for a dynamic parameter s value in the Display and Value fields on the Parameters Window in the Resource Layout Painter The parameter s value displays by default unless you specify a different name in the Display field Use the Parameters Window Dynamic list Reference Parameters Window Dynamic list The Parameters Window contains the Value field and Display field Value field Is the data source field from which the values are retrieved Display field Is the text that represents the parameter value in the form the user views All options are fully documented in Parameters Window Dynamic list in the Designing a User Interface for a Web Application With the Resource Layout Painter chapter in the Developing Reporting Applications manual Developer Studio Enhancements WebFOCUS Summary of New Features 2 47 Hiding Borders Around Frames In Release 5 2 3 you can hide borders around frames in the report layout using the Frame Properties Window Reference Frame
425. order lines or vary specifications for top bottom right and or left borders Note To set borders in an HTML report you must turn Cascading Style Sheets On Click the Report Options icon on the toolbar and select the Output tab Under Display Options select HTML and verify that On is selected from the Cascading Style Sheets drop down menu When Borders is selected Grids is disabled b For grids click the Select Grids button Select a line style and indicate whether to display horizontal lines vertical lines or both Click OK This option applies to columns in PDF reports it does not apply to columns in HTML reports When Grids is selected Borders is disabled c For fonts click the Select Fonts button The Fonts dialog box opens Select font name font style font size and or color Click OK d For background color select the Single Color radio button under Background Coloring and choose a color from the palette Click OK If you identify the active object as column data the Alternating Background Colors button is activated You can use this feature to assign colors to alternating rows in one or more columns 5 Under Applying to condition in the Style tab you can define or edit a condition that controls when specified formatting options are applied to one or more columns 6 Click OK to return to the Design matrix where many styling changes are reflected 7 Click the Run icon on the toolbar to see the column
426. ored procedure If you use the SET tool a SET command is generated for the report you are developing SET commands are fully documented in the Customizing Your Environment chapter the Developing Reporting Applications manual The following SET commands are supported in Developer Studio CDN Enables you to choose how to punctuate numbers using a combination of commas decimals spaces and single quotation marks For language implementation of this feature see Punctuating Numbers in Chapter 1 WebFOCUS Reporting Language Enhancements CENT ZERO Displays a leading zero in decimal only numbers For language implementation of this feature see Displaying a Leading Zero in Decimal Numbers in Chapter 1 WebFOCUS Reporting Language Enhancements DEFINEs Compiles expressions into machine code for faster processing For language implementation of this feature see Compiling Expressions Containing DEFINEs in Chapter 1 WebFOCUS Reporting Language Enhancements GRAPHSERVURL Creates a GIF file of the graph by sending an HTTP request to a servlet For language implementation of this feature see Graph Enhancements in Chapter 1 WebFOCUS Reporting Language Enhancements HDAY Specifies the holiday file from which to retrieve dates that are considered holidays For language implementation of this feature see Specifying Holidays in Chapter 1 WebFOCUS Reporting Language Enhancements PCOMMA Enables the reading of PC type
427. orts With the Report Painter 2 14 Information Builders Creating and Styling Reports With the Report Painter The Report Painter provides many powerful reporting features that enable you to create and style complex reports You can graphically paint the report on the Report Painter window which is a graphical representation of the report page The Report Painter offers an improved reporting environment as well as greater functionality These features are relevant if you are responsible for developing WebFOCUS reporting applications Summary of Report Painter New Features The benefits of using the enhanced Report Painter include the following Added styling capabilities You can Drag the column border to the desired width See How to Increase Column Width in the Creating Reports With the Report Painter chapter in the Creating Reports With Graphical Tools manual Add a border to an entire report a column or any object area for example Page Heading Page Footing Subheading Subfooting You can add borders in a variety of line styles widths and colors See How to Add Borders to an HTML or PDF Report in the Styling Reports With the Report Painter chapter in the Creating Reports With Graphical Tools manual For language implementation of this feature see Adding Borders for Emphasis in Chapter 1 WebFOCUS Reporting Language Enhancements Insert a spot marker A spot marker divides text in a heading or footing
428. ot been specified or to the location specified in a FILEDEF How to Save a Graph as a GIF File Example Inserting a GIF Image Into a PDF Report Graph Enhancements 1 94 Information Builders Syntax How to Save a Graph as a GIF File FILEDEF filename DISK drive filename GIF SET GRAPHSERVURL graph_servlet_URL GRAPH FILE file graph commands ON GRAPH HOLD AS filename FORMAT GIF END where FILEDEF Saves the GIF file to the location you specify filename Is the name you give the GIF file If you want to prompt for a file name include an amper variable such as amp FILENAME in the procedure Note To insert a GIF image that resides in a permanent location you must provide the fully qualified path to the GIF file For example in the following code TYPE REPORT IMAGE drive filename gif drive filename gif is the path where the GIF file is located The WebFOCUS Reporting Server must be installed on that drive graph_servlet_URL Is the URL to invoke the WebFOCUS Graph Servlet file Is the name of the data source you wish to report against WebFOCUS Reporting Language Enhancements WebFOCUS Summary of New Features 1 95 Example Inserting a GIF Image Into a PDF Report The following illustrates how to create a GIF file in a graph request then embed the GIF image into a PDF report 1 Create the following remote procedure in a location accessible to the application path SET
429. ot been specified then any user IDs stored in the ADMINISTRATORS parameter must be able to connect to the default WebFOCUS Reporting Server IBI_REPORT_SERVER If an EDANODE has been specified then any user IDs stored in the ADMINISTRATORS parameter must be able to connect to that EDANODE If IBIWFC_Authentication is set to WEB then any user IDs stored in the ADMINISTRATORS parameter must be able to connect to the Web server specified in the WebFOCUS configuration If IBIWFC_Authentication is not set in ibiweb cfg then any user ID can be stored as an administrator Setting Usage Notes Configuring WebFOCUS Client Settings 6 14 Information Builders MR_PGM_FLAGS positions1through10 Position 5 Enables the MRCEXT3 exit which allows for an external encryption algorithm to be used for WebFOCUS encryption Position 7 Enables the MRCEXT4 exit which allows for the external authentication of a user s credentials during a Managed Reporting signon Position 8 Enables the MRCEXT5 exit which allows for the external management of users MRCEXT5 is used in conjunction with the MRCEXT1 exit Position 9 Turns off the prompting of variables in Managed Reporting Position 10 Enables WebFOCUS CGI callable exits to be invoked In Release 5 2 3 this setting may be modified using the WebFOCUS Client Console CGI only MR_PGM_FLAGS are positional flags that can be used to enable WebFOCUS custom security
430. ou edit the cgivars wfs file outside of the console its contents will be encrypted In Release 5 2 3 you can encrypt the cgivars wfs file using the WebFOCUS Client Console Settings Description Configuring WebFOCUS Client Settings 6 18 Information Builders Redirection Settings The mime wfs file contains information about format types available with WebFOCUS The following is a sample mime wfs file lt VER 1 gt lt file extension lt content type lt format of data ascii binary lt use redirection yes no lt convert to ascii yes no used by EBCDIC base systems lt lt extension content_type format redirect translate lt lt ADDTYPE gt html text html ascii no no lt ADDTYPE gt htm text html ascii no no lt ADDTYPE gt e97 application vnd ms excel ascii no no lt ADDTYPE gt htx application vnd ms excel ascii yes no lt ADDTYPE gt xht application vnd ms excel ascii yes amp astran lt ADDTYPE gt wk1 application vnd ms excel binary yes no lt ADDTYPE gt txt text plain ascii no no lt ADDTYPE gt fex text plain ascii no no lt ADDTYPE gt sty text plain ascii no no lt ADDTYPE gt css text css ascii no no lt ADDTYPE gt orw application x odin int binary no no lt ADDTYPE gt wp text plain ascii no no lt ADDTYPE gt hts text plain ascii no no lt ADDTYPE gt ftm application x ftm ascii no no lt ADDTYPE gt gif image gif binary no no lt ADDTYPE gt jpeg image jpeg binary no no lt A
431. ou must specify an SMF number to be used by the accounting facility when it sends records to the SMF system Syntax How to Enable Accounting Using SMF Records To activate usage accounting add the following statement in the server configuration file edaserve cfg smf_recno n where n Indicates the SMF record number This number represents the SMF number used by the accounting facility when it sends records to the SMF system Values can range from 128 to 255 values less than 128 are not recommended Workload Manager Enclave Integration 7 32 Information Builders Workload Manager Enclave Integration On OS 390 and z OS a parameter in the service block of the server configuration file edaserve cfg enables you to specify an enclave name This enclave is a feature of Workload Manager WLM Based on this setting the task joins a Workload Manager enclave when a request starts and leaves it when the request finishes This transfers control for the dispatching priority of the task to the Workload Manager The rules for the enclave govern how the task performs with respect to running the request One use of this feature is to balance the workload so a long running request does not affect a short running request This can be achieved through Workload Manager rules by lowering the priority of the long requests after a certain period of time Without this feature all requests share the regions priority To define the WLM service
432. oundary of a percentile in a standard normal distribution curve NORMSINV is the inverse of NORMSDST The results of NORMSDST and NORMSINV are returned as double precision and are accurate to six significant digits Information Builders supplied functions are fully documented in the WebFOCUS Using Functions manual How to Calculate Cumulative Standard Normal Distribution Calculate Inverse Cumulative Standard Normal Distribution Reference Characteristics of a Standard Normal Distribution Curve Example Using the NORMSDST and NORMSINV Functions Calculating Cumulative Normal Distribution 1 22 Information Builders Reference Characteristics of a Standard Normal Distribution Curve A standard normal distribution curve is a normal distribution that has a mean of 0 and a standard deviation of 1 The total area under this curve is 1 A point on the X axis of the standard normal distribution is called a normalized value Assuming that your data is normally distributed you can convert a data point to a normalized value in order to find the percentage of scores that are less than or equal to the raw score The results of the NORMSDST and NORMSINV functions are illustrated by the following diagram Many common measurements tend to be normally distributed A plot of normally distributed data values approximates a bell shaped curve The two measures needed to describe any normal distribution are the mean and the standard deviation
433. ow to locate the name of the resource file associated with the WebFOCUS Managed Reporting logon page named logon htm 1 Open logon htm with a text editor such as WordPad By default this file resides in install_drive ibi WebFOCUS52 ibi_html workbnch 2 Search for the parameter addIntlTranslatedJS in the file This parameter indicates the name of the resource file associated with the htm file 3 Locate the name of the file that appears in double quotation marks in the JavaScript code workbnchtrans js Workbnchtrans js is the resource file used to populate the strings for logon htm Note Due to formatting conventions the line breaks shown in the code throughout this topic do not match the line breaks in the actual file lt script type text javascript gt addIntlTranslatedJS workbnchtrans js lt script gt WebFOCUS Client Enhancements WebFOCUS Summary of New Features 6 33 Interpreting the Resource File Using the example WebFOCUS interprets all text in ibi WebFOCUS52 ibi_html workbnch logon htm as a single variable that must be referenced in its resource file ibi WebFOCUS52 ibi_html javaassist intl EN workbnchtrans js In the resource file the first string in double quotation marks is the variable Do not change this variable Subsequent strings in double quotation marks are the text that may appear on the logon page Revision 1 xx var workbnchtrans_js_Revision Revision 1 x
434. owing command To copy the Master file CPYTOSTMF FROMMBR QSYS LIB EDAMAIN LIB MASTER FILE CMSCHED MBR TOSTMF home ibi srv52 etl etlmgr cmsched mas To copy the Access file CPYTOSTMF FROMMBR QSYS LIB EDAMAIN LIB ACCESS FILE CMSCHED MBR TOSTMF home ibi srv52 etl etlmgr cmsched acx With the replace option CPYTOSTMF FROMMBR QSYS LIB EDAMAIN LIB ACCESS FILE CMSCHED MBR TOSTMF home ibi srv52 etl etlmgr cmsched acx STFMOPT REPLACE 4 After the Master Files and Access Files have been copied edit CMCSHED ACX and change the file name so that it points to the physical location of the table This is done with the following from FILENAME CMSCHED to FILENAME EDAMAIN CMSCHED where EDAMAIN Is the name of the library where the DB2 CMSCHED tables reside 5 Prepare the ETL internal database for migration To do this configure the Data Adapter for DB2 for the internal tables 6 In the Web Console navigation pane click ETL The ETL Configuration page opens 7 In the ETL Configuration page s navigation pane click the ETL Procedures folder A context menu opens ETL Manager Enhancements WebFOCUS Summary of New Features 10 13 8 Click Migrate 4 x Procedures The Migrate page opens 9 Enter the path to the directory where CMSCHED MAS and CMSCHED ACX reside on the 4 x or 5 1 x Server The default location is home ibi apps baseapp 10 Click Submit The message Migrate
435. plied Use the Uniform scale option if you want each vertical bar graph to be scaled based on the minimum and maximum values of all values compiled from each Across column Use the Distinct scale option to specify that each vertical bar graph should be scaled based on the distinct minimum and maximum values for each Across column See Associating Bar Graphs With Columns in the Visualizing Trends in Reports chapter in the Creating Reports With Graphical Tools manual Added formatting capabilities You can Style the background color for an entire report including all column titles and all data components You can also specify a background color for individual columns and alternating rows See How to Assign a Background Color to a Column in the Creating Reports With the Report Painter chapter in the Creating Reports With Graphical Tools manual Apply a page color The report on the page inherits the page color See How to Set the Page Color for the Report in the Creating Reports With the Report Painter chapter in the Creating Reports With Graphical Tools manual Insert the current page number and total page count for a report as embedded fields in a report heading or footing See How to Add the Current Page Number in the Creating Reports With the Report Painter chapter in the Creating Reports With Graphical Tools manual For language implementation of this feature see Indicating Total Number of Pages in Chapter 1 WebFOCUS Re
436. port missing data FIELDNAME BANK_NAME ALIAS BN FORMAT A20 MISSING ON FIELDNAME BANK_CODE ALIAS BC FORMAT I6S MISSING ON The request is SET HNODATA 9999 TABLE FILE EMPLOYEE PRINT BANK_NAME BANK_CODE BY EMP_ID ON TABLE HOLD FORMAT ALPHA AS HMISS END RUN TABLE FILE HMISS PRINT END The output is WebFOCUS Reporting Language Enhancements WebFOCUS Summary of New Features 1 47 Holding Missing Values In HOLD files you can distinguish between missing data and default values of blank for character data or zero for numeric data using the SET HOLDMISS command Syntax How to Store Missing Data in HOLD Files SET HOLDMISS ON OFF ON TABLE SET HOLDMISS ON OFF where ON Allows you to store missing data in a HOLD file When TABLE generates a default value for data not found it generates missing values OFF Does not allow you to store missing data in a HOLD file OFF is the default value How to Store Missing Data in HOLD Files Example Holding Missing Values Using HOLDMISS Handling Missing Data in HOLD Files 1 48 Information Builders Example Holding Missing Values Using HOLDMISS SET HOLDMISS ON TABLE FILE MOVIES SUM WHOLESALEPR BY CATEGORY ACROSS RATING ON TABLE HOLD AS HLDM END RUN TABLE FILE HLDM PRINT END The output is Propagating Missing Values to a Variable Length Delimited HOLD File In Release 5 2 3 you can create a variable le
437. port title and summary text description for your report Also the TABT EXL97 and EXL2K FORMULA have been added to the display format drop down list Creating New Columns You can use the Fields tab to compute new columns COMPUTE and virtual fields DEFINE If you attempt to create a new column with more than 66 characters the following message appears Compute string cannot be more than 66 characters If you attempt to create a new virtual field with greater than 66 characters the following message appears Define string cannot be greater than 66 characters Ad Hoc Reporting Enhancements WebFOCUS Summary of New Features 4 11 Selecting Records for a Report The Selection Criteria tab enables you to create WHERE or WHERE TOTAL statements for record selection based on values parameters and fields You can combine expressions by clicking the default operator AND and switching between the choices AND OR WHERE and WHERE TOTAL Procedure How to Select Records Based on Values Parameters and Fields 1 Select a field from the Fields tree and drag the field to the right frame The field name and lt Select expression gt and lt Select values gt will appear in the right frame prefixed by a green check mark Note You can replace the field you selected by clicking on the field in the expression and then double clicking the new field in the tree Your new selection automatically appears in the expression
438. porting Language Enhancements Creating and Styling Reports With the Report Painter 2 16 Information Builders Align decimal points You can align decimal points when the displayed data has a varying number of decimal places See How to Align Decimals in a Heading or Footing in the Creating Reports With the Report Painter chapter in the Creating Reports With Graphical Tools manual For language implementation of this feature see Aligning Decimals in a Multi Line Heading in Chapter 1 WebFOCUS Reporting Language Enhancements Insert the current date You can insert the current date as an embedded field in any object area for example Page Heading Page Footing Subheading Subfooting in the Report Painter Once the date is inserted you can justify position and change the font of the date field See How to Insert the Current Date in the Creating Reports With the Report Painter chapter in the Creating Reports With Graphical Tools manual You can also specify the date format and a display format for the time For more information see Date Format and Time Display Options on page 2 8 Use the Range option in the Variable Editor dialog box You can specify a range of values instead of a list of acceptable values when you access the Variable Editor dialog box See How to Specify a Range of Values for Variables in Your Report in the Creating Reports With the Report Painter chapter in the Creating Reports With Graphical Tools manu
439. porting Server for NLS Step 3 Configure the WebFOCUS Client for NLS Step 1 Determine Which Code Page You Need Today most Database Management Systems DBMSs have ways to refer to the code page associated with the data See your database administrator to get this information so that you can select the corresponding server code pages to interpret the data correctly By default the server uses code page 437 AMENGLISH on Windows and UNIX and code page 37 AMENGLISH on OS 400 OS 390 and z OS For instructions on configuring the server and client on OS 390 and z OS see the documentation for those platforms in the National Language Support for International Computing manual To identify supported code pages refer to the file cpxcptbl nls which resides in the nls directory under the installation directory for example on Windows ibi srv52 home nls If the code page needed to interpret your data is not listed in the supported code page file cpxcptbl nls contact your Information Builders representative Reference Default Code Page Generation File Windows UNIX OS 400 The following is the default code page generation file cpcodepg nls for Windows UNIX and OS 400 CP00037 E SBCS US IBM MF EBCDIC code CP00437 A SBCS US PC ASCII code CP00137 A SBCS ANSI Character Set for MS Windows CP01047 E SBCS IBM MF Open Systems Latin 1 CP65001 A UTF8 Unicode UTF 8 WebFOCUS Reporting Server Enhancements WebFOCUS Summary of New
440. procedure submitted appears 11 When the migration procedure finishes review the log created to ensure that all ETL Requests migrated successfully The following message should appear for each ETL Request ICM18164 Request NAME was created updated successfully for user USER The following message should also appear ICM18354 Migration procedure completed successfully 12 Review the list of new application directories By default ETL Requests are located in the APPROOT baseapp directory If a category name was previously assigned in the Properties window a directory with that category s name is created under APPROOT and the following message appears New Created APP directories newapp Note To view or run ETL Requests in these new application directories they must be added to the server application path 13 In the ETL Configuration page s navigation pane click Refresh Page then check to see that the application directories and requests are listed General Workbench Enhancements 10 14 Information Builders General Workbench Enhancements Enhancements to the Workbench include the following features Column lists identify key columns not only for local tables but also for remote tables You can use copy cut and paste operations in all grids to copy or move column names and transformations from one part of a request to another and betwe
441. pter in the WebFOCUS Security and Administration manual Integrating Managed Reporting Security With Basic Web Server Authentication To implement a single signon environment where the Web server identifies users you can use Managed Reporting signon integration with Basic Web server authentication In Release 5 2 3 Developer Studio Dashboard ReportCaster and the HTML Report Assistant are fully supported when using this signon integration technique For more information about this technique see the Integrating WebFOCUS Security With Basic Web Server Authentication chapter in the WebFOCUS Security and Administration manual Updated Presentation 3 6 Information Builders LDAP Authentication In Release 5 2 3 on Windows Managed Reporting and ReportCaster users can use LDAP authentication When using LDAP authentication passwords are not defined stored and administered within Managed Reporting Instead Managed Reporting and ReportCaster are configured to authenticate users against passwords defined in an LDAP Directory You can configure LDAP Authentication during the WebFOCUS installation as explained in the Installing the WebFOCUS Client chapter in the WebFOCUS and ReportCaster Installation and Configuration for Windows manual After installation a Managed Reporting Administrator adds users to Managed Reporting who are defined in an LDAP directory Because Managed Reporting will authenticate the users against the LDAP Directory th
442. quests stored on the server You can select a request to view run or run deferred You can also view all logs for a request Log Management You can view create or clean the log and statistics tables from the WebFOCUS Reporting Server Console The Statistics report which shows one line for each run of a request is color coded to indicate requests that are in progress green successfully completed blue or failed red Each report has a link to the detailed log for that run of the request When viewing the statistics table use the job ID to view the log for that job Procedure How to Configure Request and Log Management 1 Click the Configure ETL link The ETL Configuration window opens 2 Make your changes for request management 3 Make your changes for log management The ETL Log and Statistics option specifies the action to take on the log and statistics tables The options are Create Recreate creates or recreates empty log and statistics tables Create Recreate is the default value Clean deletes all rows from the log and statistics tables up to a specified date Backup creates a backup of the log and statistics tables named ETLLOGBK and ETLSTABK respectively Deferred Statistics Recovery moves information about deferred ETL requests to the log and statistics tables if the internal tables become corrupted 4 Click Submit 5 Click Save and Restart For complete details on th
443. quire only one display field Multiple Y axis charts Stacks charts in order to make them easier to read analyze and manage You can have a MULTI3Y MULTI4Y or MULTI5Y chart each with the corresponding number of Y axis fields Sending Graph Output Directly to a Printer You can send graph output directly to a printer Add the following syntax to your GRAPH request ON GRAPH SET PRINT OFFLINE Expanded Limits 1 98 Information Builders Expanded Limits You can include an increased number or length of certain elements in a report In Release 5 2 3 you can also create a report with an unlimited number of INCLUDE commands Increased Number of Display Fields The number of display fields you can include in a report has increased from 495 to approximately 1024 495 for MATCH requests This does not include sort fields The maximum number of fields in a request is affected by the following factors Hidden NOPRINT fields Temporary fields created with the COMPUTE and DEFINE commands Internal fields For example TABPAGENO The size of the field Field references in headings and footings Increased Number of Columns Generated by ACROSS In Release 5 2 3 each ACROSS phrase can generate up to 1 056 columns of data The total number of ACROSS columns is equal to the total number of ACROSS sort field values multiplied by the total number of display fields Increased Numbers of Headings and
444. r Abort to stop generating the Master File when an error occurs Enter Comment to produce a commented Master File when an error occurs Continue is the default value Hyphens as Enter No to remove all hyphens in the COBOL name from the Master File field names Enter Yes to replace all hyphens in the COBOL name with the underscore character Yes is the default value Redefines You may treat COBOL REDEFINE fields in one of the following ways Choose Segments to describe REDEFINE fields as segments in the Master File Segments is the default value Choose Comments to describe REDEFINE fields as comments in the Master File Choose None to exclude REDEFINE fields altogether Occurs as Choose Segments to describe OCCURS structures as segments Otherwise choose Field Segments is the default value Alignment Enter Yes to insert slack bytes into records to ensure the alignment of numeric fields Enter No to generate Master Files without alignment of slack bytes Yes is the default value Number of Hyphens to skip The Translator removes characters from the left up to and including the nth hyphen where the value of n can be 1 or 2 0 retains the entire COBOL name All means all prefixes are removed 0 is the default value Data Adapter Enhancements WebFOCUS Summary of New Features 8 33 Database Selection From the Console In Release 5 2 3 for Microsoft SQL Server or Sybase Adaptive Server Enterprise ASE you
445. r Distribution Server to the WebFOCUS Client supports only WebFOCUS Servlet configurations WebFOCUS CGI and ISAPI configurations are not supported For details about how ReportCaster processing works see ReportCaster Processing in the Introducing ReportCaster chapter in the ReportCaster Development and Administration manual Enhancements to the ReportCaster Repository have been made to account for the expanded architecture and the increased functionality of ReportCaster for example you can now specify text within the body of an e mail For detailed information about the repository tables see ReportCaster Repository Tables in the ReportCaster Repository Reports and Tables appendix in the ReportCaster Development and Administration manual Migration Tools In Release 5 2 3 Windows users can take advantage of GUI tools for migrating and creating the ReportCaster Repository These tools are accessible from the Programs menu by selecting ReportCaster 52 and then Utilities Using these tools you can easily extract and load data as well as run a Change Management migrate specific records by providing your old ReportCaster configuration file bkrsched cfg or dserver xmls For more information about how to use these migration tools see the Migrating ReportCaster Data chapter in the WebFOCUS and ReportCaster Installation and Configuration for Windows manual Configuring the ReportCaster Web Application In Release 5 2 3 you can change the default
446. r IDs GFBID Switching access modes with the SET NOPACCESS FIND command Setting Connection Attributes In Release 5 2 3 you can configure the Data Adapter for Adabas by setting connection attributes through the WebFOCUS Reporting Server Console Configuring the adapter consists of specifying connection and authentication information for each of the connections you want to establish In this section Setting Connection Attributes Adabas Transparent Superdescriptors Adabas Hyper and Phonetic Descriptors Adabas ORDER Fields in the Indexed Field List Adabas Internal Sequence Numbers ISN and Global Format Buffer IDs GFBID Switching Access Mode Using NOPACCESS Example Configuring the Data Adapter From the WebFOCUS Reporting Server Console Using Generic Parameters Configuring the Data Adapter From the WebFOCUS Reporting Server Console Using OS 390 and z OS Parameters Data Adapter Enhancements WebFOCUS Summary of New Features 8 3 Example Configuring the Data Adapter From the WebFOCUS Reporting Server Console Using Generic Parameters The following Adabas parameters are applicable on all platforms and must be entered into the input fields of the Add Adapter screen 1 Specify the Adabas database number to access For example 001 2 Specify the number of the Adabas Employee or another Demo File For example 011 3 Click Configure after the parameters are entered Configuration results appears on
447. r syntax see WebFOCUS Script Commands in the WebFOCUS Client Administration Using Additional Customization Techniques chapter in the WebFOCUS Security and Administration manual You no longer need to configure special CGI aliases to support standard and new WebFOCUS Maintain applications If you migrate legacy applications make sure to change any hard coded paths to use the new aliases To support certain legacy WebFOCUS Maintain applications you may still need to configure ibi_start and ibi_cgi as aliases from the Web server configuration window Aliases are fully documented in the Configuring the Web Server chapter in the WebFOCUS and ReportCaster Installation and Configuration manual for your platform Access to the Installation Verification Program You can run the WebFOCUS Maintain Installation Verification Program MNTIVP MNT from the sample launch page to confirm the success of a Maintain installation The sample launch page is named wfmstart html It is located in the approot ibisamp folder on the Web server in the WebFOCUS environment The installation procedure is fully documented in the WebFOCUS and ReportCaster Installation and Configuration manual for your platform Performance Enhancements 9 4 Information Builders Performance Enhancements Performance enhancements affect execution and memory Execution time for Web transaction screens has been optimized by 50 Memory usage has been optimized in a nu
448. rates the code law_access y in the server configuration file edaserve cfg and the following three lines in the global server profile edasprof prf SET USER LAWSON ENGINE LAWSON SET LAW DBMS xxxx ENGINE LAWSON SET LAW PRODLINE yyyy Once the Lawson Security Adapter is configured when the user makes a request against a Lawson table the following queries and actions are performed Is this a Lawson file Is this a Lawson user Does the user have access to this table Generate DBA for any column restrictions Generate WHERE criteria for any Lawson Company and Process Level restrictions Generate WHERE criteria for any row restrictions For more information on configuring the Query Adapter for Lawson see Getting Started in Lawson in the iWay Data Adapter Administration for UNIX Windows OpenVMS OS 400 OS 390 and z OS manual C2 Security Support In Release 5 2 3 on Tru64 operating systems server security implements the Security Integration Architecture SIA by default because it supports both Enhanced C2 and standard UNIX security This C2 support extends only to Tru64 The use of SIA blocks the server trusted connection feature even if Enhanced SIA C2 is not active To enable server trusted connections on Tru64 systems where C2 is not active add the following keyword in the server configuration file edaserve cfg security_sia n Data Adapter Support 7 26 Information Builde
449. re used as new data points to continue the moving average The predicted MOVAVE values starting with 694 975 6 for PERIOD 13 are calculated using the previous MOVAVE values as new data points For example the first predicted value 694 975 6 is the average of the data points from periods 11 and 12 620 264 and 762 328 and the moving average for period 12 702 334 7 The calculation is 694 975 620 264 762 328 702 334 7 3 WebFOCUS Reporting Language Enhancements WebFOCUS Summary of New Features 1 9 Using Single Exponential Smoothing The single exponential smoothing method calculates an average that allows you to choose weights to apply to newer and older values The weight given to the newest value is determined by the formula k 2 1 n where k Is the newest value n Is an integer greater than one Increasing n increases the weight assigned to the earlier observations or data instances as compared to the later ones The next calculation of the exponential moving average EMA value is derived by the following formula EMA EMA 1 k datavalue k This means that the newest value from the data source is multiplied by the factor k and the current moving average is multiplied by the factor 1 k These quantities are then summed to generate the new EMA Note When the data values are exhausted the last data value in the sort group is used as the next data value Example Calculating a
450. refix operator is used in any summary command prefix operator processing is required for the request In most requests it is clear which type of processing to use even if prefix operators are specified in some summary commands but not in others However if the first use of a prefix operator occurs after a field name has been specified in a summary command without an accompanying prefix operator neither type of processing can be implemented Processing stops and the following message is generated FOC36376 CANNOT COMBINE SUBTOTAL RECOMPUTE STYLES WHEN SUMMARYLINES OLD For example ON RATING SUBTOTAL COPIES AVE LISTPR or ON RATING SUBTOTAL LISTPR ON CATEGORY SUBTOTAL AVE COPIES To allow this combination you can issue the SET SUMMARYLINES NEW command to specify that prefix operator processing should be used The SUM operator is then applied to any field that does have a prefix operator How to Control Summary Line Processing Manipulating Summary Values 1 38 Information Builders Syntax How to Control Summary Line Processing SET SUMMARYLINES OLD NEW where OLD Does not allow mixing of summary fields with and without prefix operators when the first field name used in a summary command does not have an associated prefix operator OLD is the default value You can specify the SUM operator for fields for which you want a standard subtotal This produces the same value that would have been generated withou
451. renced by your servlet engine or application server WebFOCUS Summary of New Features 6 1 CHAPTER 6 6 WebFOCUS Client Enhancements This chapter describes all of the features for the WebFOCUS Client in Version 5 Release 2 and has been updated to reflect Version 5 Release 2 3 Topics that contain Version 5 Release 2 3 features are marked with asterisks Topics WebFOCUS Client Console Introducing the WebFOCUS Client Console Configuring WebFOCUS Reporting Server Settings Configuring WebFOCUS Client Settings WebFOCUS Client Tracing Quick Links National Language Support NLS National Language Support for International Computing Using the Dynamic Language Switch Customizing the User Interface Introducing the WebFOCUS Client Console 6 2 Information Builders Introducing the WebFOCUS Client Console The WebFOCUS Client Console enables you to remotely manage your WebFOCUS environment Using the WebFOCUS Client Console administrators can navigate through and change the various configuration settings for the WebFOCUS Client For example administrators can modify default global settings which are now located in cgivars wfs instead of ibidir wfs Additionally administrators can use the console to create WebFOCUS Client node profiles for each WebFOCUS Reporting Server Note The following topics describe how to access and use the WebFOCUS Client Console These topics include WebFOCUS Client settings that are
452. ribute in a StyleSheet you can also specify the weight style and color of border lines If you wish you can specify formatting variations for the top bottom left and right borders For a graphical implementation using the Report Painter in Developer Studio see Adding Borders to an HTML or PDF Report in the Styling Reports With Report Painter chapter in the Creating Reports With Graphical Tools manual How to Add and Format Borders Example Inserting and Formatting a Border Adding Borders for Emphasis 1 108 Information Builders Syntax How to Add and Format Borders To request a uniform border use this syntax TYPE type BORDER option BORDER STYLE line_style BORDER COLOR color RGB r g b To specify different characteristics for the top bottom left and or right borders use this syntax TYPE type BORDER position option BORDER position STYLE line_style BORDER position COLOR color RGB r g b where type Identifies the report component to which borders are applied option Can be one of the following values ON turns borders on ON generates the same line as MEDIUM Note The MEDIUM line setting ensures consistency with lines created with GRID attributes OFF turns borders off OFF is the default value LIGHT specifies a thin line MEDIUM identifies a medium line ON sets the line to MEDIUM HEAVY identifies a thick line width specifies the line wid
453. rom the sum For example FOR parentvalue OVER parentvalue ADD 1 OVER RECAP CHILDSUM R2 R1 n ALL Is a positive integer from 1 to 99 specifying the number of levels of the hierarchy to aggregate ALL is the default value Therefore if n is omitted all children are included in the sum If n is 1 direct children are included If n is 2 direct children and grandchildren are included ADD 99 includes children to 99 levels ALL is a synonym for 99 Financial Reporting Language Enhancements 1 80 Information Builders CAPTION Indicates that the caption of the parent value will display for the total row Note The AS CAPTION phrase is supported for tagged rows including those that do not use the GET WITH CHILDREN or ADD syntax However the hierarchy must be defined by specifying the PARENT_OF attribute in order to load and display the caption values If the hierarchy is not defined the AS CAPTION phrase is ignored text Is a text string to use as the row title for the aggregate row The CAPTION field defined in the Master File will not be used as the caption on the report output label Is an explicit row label Each generated row is labeled with the specified label text Note Data consolidation requires the reuse of FOR field values in multiple rows of an FML report This capability is enabled by the SET FORMULTIPLE command which must be included in the FML request For detailed syntax see Display the Same Record in
454. rows within the FML code For a RECAP row the name of the calculated value serves as a label it will appear in the report unless an alternate title is specified The label can be implicit or explicit How to Format a Row Column or Cell in an FML Report Indent an FML Label Tag or Caption Example Formatting a Cell in an FML Matrix Indenting FML RECAP Rows Financial Reporting Language Enhancements 1 90 Information Builders Rn Is an implicit row label It is assigned automatically by FML and retained internally for processing even if you set an explicit label To determine the value of n count the number of rows up to and including the desired row label Is an explicit row label that you can assign to identify a row more clearly format_def Is the formatting definition such as FONT SIZE STYLE and COLOR Note To format a cell identify the cell as the intersection of a column and row using COLUMN plus LABEL in the same StyleSheet declaration Example Formatting a Cell in an FML Matrix The following request generates a report in which the data value for AMOUNT is bold in the row titled CASH however the row title CASH is not bold This is accomplished by pinpointing the cell in the StyleSheet declaration that is the column N2 within the row CA SET PAGE NUM OFF TABLE FILE LEDGER SUM AMOUNT FOR ACCOUNT 10 AS CASH LABEL CA OVER 1100 AS ACCOUNTS RECEIVABLE LABEL AR OVER 1200
455. rrences of a character from a string Removing a Character From a Field on page 1 156 TRIM Removes leading trailing occurrences of a pattern for example ing Removing Leading or Trailing Occurrences of a Pattern on page 1 158 Function Description For details see LENV Returns the actual length of an AnV input field or the size of an An field Find the Length of an Alphanumeric Field on page 1 53 LOCASV Converts alphabetic characters to lowercase and is similar to LOCASE Create a Variable Length Lowercase String on page 1 55 POSITV Finds the starting position of a substring within a larger string and is similar to POSIT Find the Beginning of a Variable Length Substring on page 1 57 SUBSTV Extracts a substring from a string and is similar to SUBSTR Extract a Variable Length Substring on page 1 59 TRIMV Removes a pattern from a string and is similar to TRIM Remove Characters From a String on page 1 62 UPCASV Converts alphabetic characters to uppercase and is similar to UPCASE Create a Variable Length Uppercase String on page 1 64 Functions Summary 1 166 Information Builders Calculating Cumulative Normal Distribution Retrieving FOR Field Values Function Description For details see NORMSDST Calculates the percentage of data values that are less than or equal to a normalized value Calculate Cumulative Standard Normal Distribution on page 1 23 NORMSINV
456. rs Data Adapter Support The following data adapters are fully supported on OS 390 and z OS Creating Synonyms Create Synonym functionality is available for the following adapters on OS 390 and z OS Synonyms are created through the Server Console and reside in a pre specified directory on OS 390 and z OS Existing synonyms on z OS and OS 390 can be accessed from OS 390 and z OS but cannot be updated ADABAS DATACOM DB2 CLI DB2 CAF Call Attach Facility Flat files FOCUS IDMS SQL IDMS DB IMS INFOMAN MILLENNIUM MODEL 204 ORACLE TERADATA SAP SUPRA Server PDM for PDM and RDM components VSAM ADABAS DB2 CLI DB2 CAF Fixed IMS TERADATA SAP VSAM WebFOCUS Reporting Server Enhancements WebFOCUS Summary of New Features 7 27 Accessing Files on z OS and OS 390 In addition to accessing HFS based files Release 5 2 of the Server for OS 390 and z OS can also access files on z OS and OS 390 using the DYNAM command You can use the DYNAM command to access partitioned data sets PDSs and data files on z OS and OS 390 such as procedures FOCEXECs Master Files and Access Files Syntax How to Access Files Using the DYNAM Command The DYNAM command has multiple variations in syntax which are fully described in FOCUS for Mainframe Overview and Operating En
457. rt layout and add a hyperlink to it After you run your report and click the image you can launch a URL or run a report the same way you can by clicking a hyperlink or push button Procedure How to Add an Image With a Hyperlink 1 Open the Resource Layout Painter 2 Do one of the following Click the Insert image button From the Insert menu select Image Right click in the layout select Insert from the pop up menu then select Image The Get source file dialog box opens 3 Click the browse button to the right of the blank field and select the image you want to add to the layout 4 Click OK 5 Right click the image and select Image Properties and then Create Hyperlink The Hyperlink Properties dialog box opens 6 Ensure that the URL radio button is selected in the Action section of the Hyperlink Properties dialog box and type a name in the Enter URL Address field 7 Click OK Execute the request and click the image to launch the Web page of the URL address you typed in the Enter URL Address field Designing a User Interface With the Resource Layout Painter 2 44 Information Builders Displaying Radio Buttons and Check Box Lists in Multiple Columns In Release 5 2 3 you can display radio buttons and check box lists within a report layout in multiple columns The Properties dialog boxes for radio buttons and check boxes has a Columns option in which you can change the number of columns
458. rting Server for NLS 7 5 configuring WebFOCUS Reporting Server settings 6 4 configuring WebFOCUS startup parameters 6 10 connections 7 4 consolidating financial data 2 62 CONTAINS operator in Maintain 9 35 CONTAINS test 8 40 content blocks 3 14 3 18 content pages 3 13 Continental Decimal Notation CDN punctuating large numbers 1 118 controlling missing data 1 43 in HOLD files 1 43 controlling ORDER fields in indexed lists 8 6 converting file names 1 107 converting totals to Excel 2000 formulas 1 130 cpcodepg nls file 7 6 cpxcptbl nls file 7 7 Create Synonym 3 7 CREATE SYNONYM command 7 26 8 9 8 24 for Adabas 8 8 for Enterprise Java Beans 8 13 for Essbase 8 14 restrictions 8 38 creating financial reports 2 56 for hierarchies 2 56 creating lowercase strings 1 54 creating new columns 4 10 creating temporary fields 4 10 creating uppercase strings 1 63 creating WHERE statements 4 11 CSS in Maintain 9 10 CSSNAME 9 11 CTA files in Maintain 9 12 cumulative normal distribution 1 21 currency symbols 1 121 extended currency symbols 1 121 custom messages 2 50 Custom Reports 3 8 creating 3 8 in Dashboard 3 8 3 19 in Managed Reporting 3 8 customizing parsing activity in Maintain 9 8 customizing public views 3 14 customizing the user interface 6 30 adding gif files 6 40 adding text 6 35 adding text without translation 6 38 modifying text 6 34 customizing Update Assist
459. ry Values 1 40 Information Builders The output is Using Multiple SUB TOTAL or SUMMARIZE Commands SUB TOTAL and SUMMARIZE propagate their operations to all higher level sort fields If a request uses SUB TOTAL or SUMMARIZE at multiple sort levels more than one prefix operator may apply to the same field When a SUB TOTAL or SUMMARIZE command on a lower level sort field propagates up to the higher levels it applies its prefix operators only to those fields that did not already have a different prefix operator specified at the higher level For any field that had a prefix operator specified at a higher level the original prefix operator is applied at the level at which it was first specified and on the grand total line unless a different operator is specified for the grand total line Region Category Unit Sales Dollar Sales Budget Dollars DIFF Midwest Coffee 332777 4178513 4086032 92481 Food 341414 4338271 4220721 117550 TOTAL Midwest 4338271 4086032 252239 West Coffee 356763 4473517 4523963 50446 Food 340234 4202337 4183244 19093 TOTAL West 4473517 4183244 290273 TOTAL 4473517 4086032 387485 Example Using Multiple SUB TOTAL Commands With Prefix Operators WebFOCUS Reporting Language Enhancements WebFOCUS Summary of New Features 1 41 Example Using Multiple SUB TOTAL Commands With Prefix Operators DEFINE FILE GGSALES YEAR YY DATE END TABLE FILE GGSALES SUM UNITS DOLL
460. ry or partial key are applicable to screening on the alternate index or partial alternate index Java Applications Adapter 8 26 Information Builders Java Applications Adapter In Release 5 2 3 you can easily access a Java class in your application much as you would access a program with CALLPGM There are two ways to call a Java class CALLJAVA call EX command Either method enables you to pass parameters to the Java class Syntax How to Use CALLJAVA to Execute a Java Class CALLJAVA class parameter1 parameter2 where class Is the full name of the class to be invoked parameter1 parameter2 Are the remaining parameters which must be passed to the Java class Syntax How to Use EX to Execute a Java Class EX java class parameter1 parameter2 where java class Is the full name of the class to be invoked and must be preceded by the prefix java parameter1 parameter2 Are the parameters which must be passed to the Java class In this section Writing a Java Class Java Class Communications Compiling and Running a Java Program How to Use CALLJAVA to Execute a Java Class Use EX to Execute a Java Class Data Adapter Enhancements WebFOCUS Summary of New Features 8 27 Writing a Java Class When you write a Java class to be invoked by the server you use the class with the CALLJAVA interface much as you would use a 3GL program with the CALLPGM interface
461. s 10 is the default value Syntax How to Set the Excel Default Column Width in nlscfg err You must specify the default column width that is valid for the language specified for EXL2KLANG EXL2K_DEFCOLW nn where nn Is the default column width for Excel Example Specifying German With Column Width 10 To run the WebFOCUS Reporting Server using German for Excel code the following in the nlscfg err file EXL2KLANG GER EXL2K_DEFCOLW 10 Stacking Columns With Multiple FOLD LINEs You can reduce column width by including up to 16 FOLD LINE phrases in a report request Previously you could only include one per request FOLD LINE is available for PDF and PS reports but not for cell based reports such as HTML and Excel How to Set the Excel Default Column Width in nlscfg err Example Specifying German With Column Width 10 How to Stack Columns With Multiple FOLD LINE Phrases Example Stacking Columns With Multiple FOLD LINE Phrases WebFOCUS Reporting Language Enhancements WebFOCUS Summary of New Features 1 139 Syntax How to Stack Columns With Multiple FOLD LINE Phrases display fieldname1 FOLD LINE fieldname2 ON BY fieldname3 FOLD LINE where display Is any display command fieldname2 fieldname3 Are field names that follow FOLD LINE phrases are moved to a new line The field name may be a sort field or display field If it is a display field the next field is pla
462. s WordPad and add the following lines immediately before the lt TABLE gt tag Notice the noibitranslate flag placement for the text 2003 by Information Builders Inc lt TR gt lt TD COLSPAN 2 gt lt TD gt lt TD gt lt BR gt lt BR gt lt BR gt lt BR gt lt BR gt lt BR gt lt BR gt lt BR gt lt BR gt lt BR gt lt BR gt lt BR gt lt TD gt lt TD ALIGN right gt lt IMG SRC spacer gif WIDTH 1 HEIGHT 1 ALT gt lt TD gt lt TD COLSPAN 5 VALIGN bottom noibitranslate gt 2003 by Information Builders Inc lt TD gt lt TD gt lt TD gt lt TD gt lt TD gt lt TR gt lt TABLE gt 2 Save and exit logon htm WebFOCUS Client Enhancements WebFOCUS Summary of New Features 6 39 3 Launch the Managed Reporting logon page The copyright text you added is near the bottom of the page You did not need to modify the resource file workbnchtrans js since you used the noibitranslate flag The same text will be displayed for all languages Customizing the User Interface 6 40 Information Builders Example Adding a gif File To add a red arrow to the Managed Reporting logon page follow the same instructions in Adding New Text on page 6 35 Although gif files do not require translation you cannot use the noibitranslate flag for file names referenced in HTML code 1 Open ibi WebFOCUS52 ibi_html workbnch logon htm in a text editor such as WordPad and modify the following lines tha
463. s a decimal position with a comma instead of a period For example the number 3 045 000 76 is represented as 3 045 000 76 For further information on the use of CDN and an example see Punctuating Numbers in Chapter 1 WebFOCUS Reporting Language Enhancements Syntax How to Set COMMIT From a Procedure COMMIT enables transaction integrity for FOCUS data sources SYS_MGR FOCSET COMMIT ON OFF where ON Enables the COMMIT and ROLLBACK commands for use with FOCUS data sources and enables the use of the FOCUS Database Server to ensure transaction integrity OFF Disables the COMMIT and ROLLBACK commands for use with FOCUS data sources and disables the use of the FOCUS Database Server OFF is the default value COMMIT is fully documented in Ensuring Transaction Integrity for FOCUS Data Sources in the Ensuring Transaction Integrity chapter in the Developing WebFOCUS Maintain Applications manual WebFOCUS Maintain Enhancements WebFOCUS Summary of New Features 9 23 Syntax How to Set DATEDISPLAY From a Procedure DATEDISPLAY controls the display of a date format field for example YYMD that contains the value zero SYS_MGR FOCSET DATEDISPLAY ON OFF where ON Returns the base date for a date format field containing the value zero OFF Returns a blank for a date format field containing the value zero OFF is the default value Syntax How to Set DEFCENT From a Procedure DEFCENT defines
464. s file will be encrypted When you access the file again using the console it will be decrypted for you to view and the ENCRYPT check box will still be selected If you edit the mime wfs file outside of the console its contents will be encrypted In Release 5 2 3 you can encrypt the mime wfs file using the WebFOCUS Client Console Configuring WebFOCUS Client Settings 6 20 Information Builders Customizing WebFOCUS Client Settings You can customize the default global settings for WebFOCUS using the ibi client52 wfc etc site wfs file You would use site wfs to override cgivars wfs for a specific user or request To override the default global settings in the cgivars wfs file click Configuration and then Custom Settings The settings in the site wfs file appear Make the necessary changes after the lt VER 1 gt tag and then click Save The following additional setting may be added to site wfs SIGNON_CORRECT The HTML page that appears after a successful signon In addition if you select the ENCRYPT check box the site wfs file will be encrypted When you access the file again using the console it will be decrypted for you to view and the ENCRYPT check box will still be selected If you edit the site wfs file outside of the console its contents will be encrypted In Release 5 2 3 you can encrypt the site wfs file using the WebFOCUS Client Console NLS Settings In Release 5 2 3 the interface for the NLS Settings option
465. s for Consolidated Report Rows Example Reversing Negative Signs of FOR Field Values in an FML Report Financial Reporting Language Enhancements 1 88 Information Builders Example Reversing Negative Signs of FOR Field Values in an FML Report The following request creates a field called PRINT_AMT that reverses the negative signs in the NAT_AMOUNT field for account numbers less than 2500 in the CENTSYSF data source The CENTGL data source contains the hierarchy information for CENTSYSF Therefore CENTGL is joined to CENTSYSF for the request SET FORMULTIPLE ON JOIN SYS_ACCOUNT IN CENTGL TO ALL SYS_ACCOUNT IN CENTSYSF TABLE FILE CENTGL SUM NAT_AMOUNT D10 IN 30 COMPUTE PRINT_AMT D10 IF FMLINFO FORVALUE A7 LT 2500 THEN 0 NAT_AMOUNT ELSE NAT_AMOUNT COMPUTE FORV A4 FMLINFO FORVALUE A4 COMPUTE ACTION A9 IF FORV LT 2500 THEN CHANGED ELSE UNCHANGED FOR GL_ACCOUNT 2000 WITH CHILDREN 2 ADD AS CAPTION END Note that the parent value specified in the WITH CHILDREN ADD command 2000 is returned for the first row on the report Each subsequent row is also a consolidated subsection of the hierarchy with a parent value that is returned by FMLINFO Month Actual PRINT_AMT FORV ACTION Gross Margin 25 639 223 25 639 223 2000 CHANGED Sales Revenue 62 362 490 62 362 490 2100 CHANGED Retail Sales 49 355 184 49 355 184 2200 CHANGED Mail Order Sales 6 899 416 6 899 416 2300 CHANGED Internet Sales
466. s in a file for later retrieval The dates that are designated as holidays can be used with the date functions DATEDIF DATEMOV DATECVT and DATEADD The file must be named HDAY followed by four characters Syntax How to Specify Holidays SET HDAY xxxx where xxxx Are the letters in the name of the holiday file named HDAYxxxx This string must be four characters long By default this parameter is not set WebFOCUS Reporting Language Enhancements WebFOCUS Summary of New Features 1 105 Establishing a Non Standard Alias In Release 5 2 3 you can generate an alias other than ibi_html on the WebFOCUS Reporting Server using the SET FOCHTMLURL command This command is usually included in a profile or in one of the WFS files site wfs to establish a default setting for the installation Syntax How to Access a Resource With a Non Standard Alias SET FOCHTMLURL my_html where my_html Is an alias other than ibi_html that is generated on the WebFOCUS Reporting Server Compiling Expressions Containing DEFINEs In Release 5 2 3 you can use the DEFINE compiler to compile expressions into machine code for faster processing Benefits of the DEFINE compiler include Compilation of only those expressions that are actually used in the report request Much faster execution of expressions containing complex calculations in long packed fields Compilation of date expressions Once the DEFINE comp
467. s in data using a single independent variable to derive the dependent variable This feature is useful for predicting values that may occur beyond the current data set Regress uses up to three independent variables to derive a linear equation that best fits a set of numeric data points This feature is useful if the dependent variable can be approximated by a linear combination of multiple independent variables For language implementation of this feature see Calculating Trends and Predicting Values in Chapter 1 WebFOCUS Reporting Language Enhancements Calculating Trends and Predicting Values With FORECAST in Developer Studio The calculations you can make to identify trends and forecast values are Simple moving average calculates a series of arithmetic means using a specified number of values from a field How to Calculate a Simple Moving Average Column Calculate a Single Exponential Smoothing Column Calculate a Double Exponential Smoothing Column Calculate a Triple Exponential Smoothing Column Calculate a Linear Regression Column Reference Forecast Dialog Box Moving Average Forecast Dialog Box Exponential Average Forecast Dialog Box Double Exponential Average Forecast Dialog Box Triple Exponential Average Forecast Dialog Box Linear Regression Developer Studio Enhancements WebFOCUS Summary of New Features 2 27 Exponential moving average calculates a weighted average between the
468. s used Data Adapter for DB2 The Data Adapter for DB2 has been enhanced to support Connection attributes settings from the WebFOCUS Reporting Server Console FETCH FIRST n ROWS clause Expanded DB2 table types on OS 400 DB2 Version 8 1 database Data Adapter Enhancements WebFOCUS Summary of New Features 8 11 Declaring DB2 CAF Connection Attributes From the WebFOCUS Reporting Server Console In Release 5 2 3 on the USS server the configuration screen for the Data Adapter for DB2 CAF displays the following fields When you have completed the fields click Configure to generate the adapter and build a DB2 plan Click Grant to grant plan execution to public Attribute Description SSID DB2 SSID that is to be accessed specified in the GENIDB2 job This value must be uppercase Plan Plan that was bound to DB2 using the GENIDB2 job This value must be uppercase Execute DB2 BIND Command Indicates whether to bind the program Yes is the default value and adds the following fields to the configuration window DSNCLST Library Name Owner Isolation Level DSNCLST Library Name Is the name of the DSNCLST library For example DSN710 SDSNCLST This attribute is available only if you choose to bind your program Owner Determines the authorization ID of the Owner of the Plan This attribute is available only if you choose to bind your program Isolation Level Is the isolation level CS is the d
469. sbase outline CREATE SYNONYM generates a UDA field name under a segment called UDA in the Master File Example Reporting From a UDA Segment The Sample Master File contains the following UDA segment DIMENSION UDA SEGMENT UDA SEGTYPE U PARENT BASIC FIELD MARKET_UDA ALIAS Market USAGE A13 ACTUAL A13 When referencing UDAs in a request you must also reference a member of the dimension that contains the UDA In this example STATE is a member of the MARKET Dimension in the Master File TABLE FILE SAMPLE PRINT SALES BY STATE WHERE MARKET_UDA EQ New Market END Data Adapter Enhancements WebFOCUS Summary of New Features 8 19 Data Adapter for Informix The Data Adapter for Informix supports the LVARCHAR data type On the server an LVARCHAR column is mapped as ALPHA Data Adapter for J D Edwards In Release 5 2 3 the Data Adapter for J D Edwards allows WebFOCUS and other applications to access J D Edwards data sources The adapter converts data or application requests into native J D Edwards statements and returns optimized answer sets to the requesting program Data Adapter for Millennium In Release 5 2 3 the Data Adapter for Millennium running on the z OS and OS 390 Server supports compressed Millennium VSAM files The Millennium decompression routines have been added to the Data Adapter for VSAM through the existing ZCOMP1 exit point To enable support for compressed files include the fo
470. serted into an Adabas file ISN based access is applicable only if an ISN field is described in the Master File The name of the field is user defined and has an ALIAS of ISN This field can be defined only in a segment that contains non repeating data that is using an access method defined in the Access File as ADBS FIELD ISN_FIELD ALIAS ISN I10 I4 The USAGE format is I and the ACTUAL format must be I4 The ISN field can be defined manually in the Master File or using the CREATE SYNOYNM facility with the option PARMS ISN For CREATE SYNONYM syntax see Use ISN and GFBID Parameters With CREATE SYNONYM on page 8 8 How to Use ISN and GFBID Parameters With CREATE SYNONYM Reference Usage Notes For Adabas ISN Support Data Adapter Enhancements WebFOCUS Summary of New Features 8 7 The Data Adapter for Adabas supports Global Format Buffer IDs GFBID to optimize the performance of queries that use the same Adabas field lists repeatedly Field lists are generated in Adabas format buffers and can be retained GFBID support requires a GFBID field in the Master File This field has a user defined field name and an ALIAS of GFBID It is used to determine the Global Format Buffer ID defined in read requests with identical field lists for the same database The GFBID field has a USAGE format of A8 and an Actual format of A8 It can be defined only in segments that contain non repeating data that is the access method defined
471. server tracing for Information Builders products In this syntax Maintain specific values are shown SYS_MGR FOCSET TRACEOFF ALL MNTSTMT MNTPERF where ALL Disables all available trace options ALL is the default value MNTSTMT Disables basic WebFOCUS Maintain trace information such as file name case name line number and milliseconds MNTPERF Disables trace information that includes memory and CPU performance statistics Syntax How to Set TRACEON From a Procedure TRACEON controls the level and scope of trace information Values are available to generate different kinds of server tracing for Information Builders products In this syntax Maintain specific values are shown SYS_MGR FOCSET TRACEON ALL MNTSTMT MNTPERF where ALL Enables all available trace options ALL is the default value MNTSTMT Generates basic WebFOCUS Maintain trace information such as file name case name line number and milliseconds MNTPERF Used with MNTSTMT generates trace information that includes memory and CPU performance statistics Changing WebFOCUS Settings From a Procedure 9 28 Information Builders Syntax How to Set TRACEUSER From a Procedure TRACEUSER controls trace logging SYS_MGR FOCSET TRACEUSER ON OFF where ON Starts or resumes trace logging OFF Stops trace logging OFF is the default value Example Enabling Server Tracing for MNTSTMT The following com
472. ses messages from the WebFOCUS Server WebFOCUS Maintain Enhancements WebFOCUS Summary of New Features 9 25 Syntax How to Set LANGUAGE From a Procedure LANGUAGE specifies the language in which WebFOCUS Server messages in the format FOCnnn FOCnnnnn are displayed The setting applies only to the current Maintain procedure SYS_MGR FOCSET LANG UAGE value AMENGLISH where value Is a language from the following list You can use the abbreviation or full language name to specify the language Syntax How to Set MESSAGE From a Procedure MESSAGE controls the display of informational messages in the view source window of a Web browser SYS_MGR FOCSET MESSAGE ON OFF where ON Displays informational messages ON is the default value OFF Suppresses both informational messages and carets that appear when WebFOCUS executes commands in procedures WebFOCUS still displays error messages and the carets that prompt for input Name Abbreviation Description AMENGLISH AME Uses the English set of server messages default DUTCH DUT Uses the Dutch set of server messages FRENCH FRE Uses the French set of server messages GERMAN GER Uses the German set of server messages JAPANESE JPN Uses the Japanese set of server messages SPANISH SPA Uses the Spanish set of server messages Changing WebFOCUS Settings From a Procedure 9 26 Information Builders Syntax How to Set NOD
473. sitories and migration across platforms for example Windows NT 2000 to UNIX and code pages for example UNIX to OS 390 UNIX The Public user and group required for the Dashboard are also added to the Managed Reporting repository during migration if not found The migration utility is fully documented in the WebFOCUS and ReportCaster Installation and Configuration Manual for your platform Repository Extract Utility The IBIDumpRepos jar utility has been replaced by IBIExtractRepos jar which includes support for extracting domain content information in addition to users groups and domain descriptions Master Files are provided to describe these extracts so that administrators and developers can better analyze the content of their domains with WebFOCUS The Extract Utility is fully documented in the Managing Reporting Extract Utility chapter in the WebFOCUS Managed Reporting Administrator s Manual Managed Reporting Enhancements WebFOCUS Summary of New Features 3 13 Creating Multiple Content Pages You can create multiple content pages in your Dashboard view In previous releases you were limited to only one content page Dashboard administrators as well as authenticated users can use this feature to increase the amount of space available to display content in the Dashboard and to help organize content Procedure How to Create Content Pages 1 From the Content window click Add Page 2 Enter the tab name in the Pag
474. specify the highest tile value to appear in the report select a value from the Limit spin box For example if you enter a Limit of 3 the report will not display any data row that is assigned a tile number greater than 3 10 Click OK to accept the selections and return to the main Control Panel window 11 Click Run to reexecute and view the report HTML Report Assistant HTML Report Assistant enhancements include the following Report Presentation Creating New Columns Selecting Records for a Report Designing Joins End User Drill Down Capability Performing OLAP Operations Directly From the Report HTML Report Assistant is fully documented in the Creating a Report With Report Assistant chapter in the WebFOCUS Managed Reporting End User s Manual Ad Hoc Reporting Enhancements WebFOCUS Summary of New Features 4 9 Report Presentation The HTML Report Assistant is an HTML based reporting tool that allows you to select a data source specify any sorting or grouping information and display the report in your browser or another desktop application You can access the HTML Report Assistant through the Dashboard Managed Reporting or as a stand alone version The HTML Report Assistant is divided into the following tabs Fields Fields Options Headings Selection Criteria Join and Report Options Each tab includes explanatory text designed to guide you in using the specific features a
475. sport window opens 4 In the Remote Directory field enter the directory where the file to transfer is located 5 In the Local Directory field enter the directory where the file will be transferred 6 In the User ID field enter a valid user ID 7 In the Password field enter the password for the user ID 8 Select ASCII or Binary from the Transfer Mode section Nesting Dependent Requests Dependent requests can be nested For example request A can have request B as a dependency request B can have request C as a dependency E mail Request Notification You can specify in the Workbench that an e mail message be sent when a request starts completes or fails An SMTP server is required to send e mail notifications Set e mail notification options from the Properties window E mail Request Notification 10 20 Information Builders Procedure How to Setup E mail Notification for an ETL Request 1 If the Properties window is not open click the General button 2 Select an option for e mail notification in the Notify section The options are Start sends an e mail when an ETL request is executed End sends an e mail when an ETL request s execution is successfully completed Failure of Job to sends an e mail when a specified error occurs 3 In the text box enter the e mail address of the person you want the e mails sent to Only one e mail address can be entered and must be in the form user
476. ss Rows With Zero Values SQL ESSBASE SET SUPZEROS ON OFF where ON Suppresses an entire row that contains 0 values OFF Does not suppress zero values OFF is the default value Suppressing Missing Data In Essbase empty cells are known as missing or MISSING data In Release 5 2 3 you can suppress missing data during reporting using the SET SUPMISSING command Syntax How to Suppress Rows With Missing Data SQL ESSBASE SET SUPMISSING ON OFF where ON Suppresses an entire row that contains MISSING data OFF Does not suppress rows with MISSING data OFF is the default value Data Adapter for Essbase 8 18 Information Builders Suppressing Zero Values and Missing Data In Release 5 2 3 you can use the SET SUPEMPTY command to suppress an entire row that contains either zero values missing MISSING data or a combination of the two Syntax How to Suppress Rows With Zero Values or Missing Data SQL ESSBASE SET SUPEMPTY ON OFF where ON Suppresses an entire row that contains either zero values MISSING data or a combination of the two OFF Does not suppress rows that contain either zero values or MISSING data OFF is the default value Support for User Defined Attributes A User Defined Attribute UDA in Essbase enables you to select and report on data based on a common characteristic You can include User Defined Attributes in report requests For each dimension with UDAs in an Es
477. ssing z OS and OS 390 Applications From the WebFOCUS Reporting Server Console Accessing z OS and OS 390 VSAM Files Using XMI Server Security Types Server Accounting Using SMF Records Workload Manager Enclave Integration Platform Support Support for Additional Operating Systems and Releases Support for Large Files on HP and Solaris Listeners Displaying Listener Statistics in the WebFOCUS Reporting Server Console MQ XML Listener SOAP XML Listener Installing WebFOCUS Reporting Server Remotely 7 2 Information Builders Installing WebFOCUS Reporting Server Remotely In Release 5 2 3 remote installations reduce the manual tasks involved in installing a server on UNIX OS 390 z OS OS 400 and OpenVMS Server installation is simplified because The installation files can be executed and transferred from a Windows machine Locations and naming conventions are set rather than variable Remote installation involves the following tasks 1 Prepare your target computer the UNIX OS 390 z OS OS 400 or OpenVMS computer where installing the server ensuring that it meets the server installation requirements 2 Download the installation files from the iWay Web site 3 Install the iWay Client on a Windows machine 4 Install the server on the target computer using the iWay Client 5 Test the installation of your server Controlling WebFOCUS Reporting Server Remotely In Release 5 2 3
478. st smoothed average is set to the first data value The first trend component is set to zero For choosing the two constants the best results are usually obtained by minimizing the mean squared error MSE between the data values and the calculated averages You may need to use nonlinear optimization techniques to find the optimal constants The equation used for forecasting beyond the data points with double exponential smoothing is forecast t m DOUBLEXP t m b t where m Is the number of time periods ahead for the forecast Example Calculating a Double Exponential Smoothing Column WebFOCUS Reporting Language Enhancements WebFOCUS Summary of New Features 1 13 Example Calculating a Double Exponential Smoothing Column The following sums the ACTUAL_YTD field of the CENTSTMT data source by period and calculates a single exponential and double exponential moving average TABLE FILE CENTSTMT SUM ACTUAL_YTD BY PERIOD ON PERIOD RECAP EXP D15 1 FORECAST ACTUAL_YTD 1 0 EXPAVE 3 ON PERIOD RECAP DOUBLEXP D15 1 FORECAST ACTUAL_YTD 1 0 DOUBLEXP 3 3 WHERE GL_ACCOUNT LIKE 3 END The output is Using Triple Exponential Smoothing Triple exponential smoothing produces an exponential moving average that takes into account the tendency of data to repeat itself in intervals over time For example sales data that is growing and in which 25 of sales always occur during December contains both trend
479. st uses the SET COMPOUND command to add a dynamic HTML Table of Contents as an icon in the upper left corner of the report The TOC displays a hierarchy consisting of five levels of sort fields beginning with the first highest level The sort fields are CONTINENT REGION COUNTRY HOLDER and TYPE TABLE FILE SHORT PRINT PROJECTED_RETURN BY CONTINENT BY REGION BY COUNTRY BY HOLDER BY TYPE ON TABLE SET PAGE NUM OFF ON TABLE PCHOLD FORMAT HTML ON TABLE SET COMPOUND BYTOC 5 ON TABLE SET HTMLCSS ON ON TABLE SET STYLE TYPE REPORT GRID OFF FONT ARIAL SIZE 9 STYLE NORMAL ENDSTYLE END The output is displayed with the TOC object in the upper left corner Double click the object to expand the Table of Contents at the continent level Navigating Reports From a Table of Contents 1 144 Information Builders Click the sign next to Americas then click the sign next to South America The field values Argentina and Brazil are listed in the TOC These are values of the field COUNTRY If you wish to see the field name of a value in the TOC hover over that value with your cursor Continue to navigate to the detail you want to view by choosing values at any sort level in the TOC Clicking a sign expands the field to display its values in the TOC Clicking an actual value hyperlink in the TOC momentarily highlights that value and if necessary adjusts the report display to move the value into view
480. stance of the IBI answer set object Compiling and Running a Java Program When compiling your Java program the jscom3 jar file located in the etc directory in the EDAHOME directory needs to be accessible using the CLASSPATH environment variable or the javac command parameter When executing your Java class place the client jar file containing the Java class to be invoked in the CLASSPATH environment variable prior to starting the server DATASET Attribute for a Segment in a Master File 8 28 Information Builders DATASET Attribute for a Segment in a Master File In addition to having a DATASET attribute at the file level in a FOCUS Master File you can add the DATASET attribute to a segment declaration to specify the physical file name for a LOCATION segment or a cross referenced segment with field redefinitions In addition the DATASET attribute permits you to bypass the search mechanism for default data source location DATASET eliminates the need to allocate data sources using JCL FILEDEF DYNAM and USE commands User allocation and system specific behavior is as follows In this section DATASET Behavior in FOCUS Data Sources How to Use the DATASET Attribute Example Allocating a FOCUS Segment Using the DATASET Attribute Platform User allocation command CMS UNIX Windows NT FILEDEF TSO DYNAM ALLOC or TSO ALLOC Data Adapter Enhancements WebFOCUS Summary of New Features 8 29 DATASET Behavior in FOCUS
481. t The Forecast dialog box opens 2 If you want to change the name of the output field from FRCSTFLD enter a new name in the Field Name box 3 Select Double Exponential Average from the Step 1 Choose a Method drop down list 4 Select an input field from the Step 2 Choose a Measure drop down list If you select the same field as the By or Across field this field is not displayed even if it is included in a display command 5 Select the increment to count each instance of the By or Across field from the Step 3 Choose The Interval spin box 6 Select the number of predictions to be calculated from the Forecast field from the Step 4 Choose Number of Predictions spin box 7 Select the number of values to average from the Step 5 Choose Number of Values to Average spin box 8 Select the number to use to calculate the weights for each term in the trend from the Step 6 Choose The Number of Values For Each Trend spin box 9 Optionally change the default field format by clicking Change Format and selecting the format from the Format dialog box 10 Click OK Calculating Trends and Predicting Values in Developer Studio 2 32 Information Builders Reference Forecast Dialog Box Double Exponential Average Forecast dialog box options are fully documented in Calculating Trends and Predicting Values With Forecast in the Creating Temporary Fields chapter in the Creating Reports With Graphical Tools manual Proced
482. t Financial Report Painter Enhancements SET Parameters Functions for Displaying Fields New Architecture 2 2 Information Builders New Architecture Choose the Developer Studio environment that meets your development needs If you install a WebFOCUS Reporting Server during the Developer Studio installation procedure you can Locally develop and deploy self service applications from the Projects area Stand alone project based development and deployment requires installation of a WebFOCUS Reporting Server on the same machine as Developer Studio A WebFOCUS Client is also required for project based development The files that you create for a local project reside in a subdirectory under APPROOT defined in the configuration files edaserve cfg and cgivars wfs The Application Root directories APPROOT directories attribute must point to the same directory for project based development since files are created with the WebFOCUS Client which resides on the Web server Connect to one or more remote servers and modify existing self service applications on those servers For example you can add a reporting procedure to an existing application Configure access to one or more WebFOCUS environments so that you can manage resources on the WebFOCUS Client and Reporting Server and in the Managed Reporting Repository if installed From the environment tree you can create and edit procedures metadata HTML files and mor
483. t argument can be a field or a literal In most cases numeric input arguments to these functions are supplied as literals and there is no reason not to supply an integer value However if the value is not an integer it is truncated to an integer value regardless of whether it was supplied as a field or a literal LENV SUBSTV LOCASV TRIMV POSITV UPCASV WebFOCUS Reporting Language Enhancements WebFOCUS Summary of New Features 1 53 LENV Returning the Length of an Alphanumeric Field The LENV function returns the actual length of an AnV input field or the size of an An field Syntax How to Find the Length of an Alphanumeric Field LENV string outfield where string Alphanumeric Is the source field or an alphanumeric constant enclosed in single quotation marks If it is a field it can have An or AnV format If it is a field of type AnV its length is taken from the length bytes stored in the field outfield Integer Field that receives the actual length or the format of the output value enclosed in single quotation marks How to Find the Length of an Alphanumeric Field Example Finding the Length of an AnV Field Using Variable Length Character Expressions 1 54 Information Builders Example Finding the Length of an AnV Field The TRIMV function creates an AnV field named TITLEV by removing trailing blanks from the TITLE value see TRIMV Removing Characters From a
484. t available will appear in the log instead Record logging used to write rejected records to a flat file for review is not available How to Specify Optimized Load for a Relational Data Source Optimized Load 10 22 Information Builders Procedure How to Specify Optimized Load for a Relational Data Source 1 Add a Load component to the workspace and connect it to the Target component 2 Double click the Load component to open it The Load window opens with the Target Setup tab open 3 In the Options area select Optimized load and enter 1 inserts records a row at a time 1 is the default value A number greater than one uses optimized load For complete details on the options in the Target Setup tab see Specifying Target Setup Options in the Building an ETL Request chapter in the iWay ETL Manager User s Guide WebFOCUS Summary of New Features 11 1 CHAPTER 11 11 Resource Analyzer and Resource Governor Enhancements This chapter describes cumulative features for Resource Analyzer and Resource Governor in Version 5 Release 2 Topics Configuring Internal Tables From the WebFOCUS Reporting Server Console Accessing Resource Analyzer and Resource Governor Reports From the WebFOCUS Reporting Server Console Increased Support for Long Procedure Names Resource Analyzer Reports Configuring Internal Tables From the WebFOCUS Reporting Server Console 11 2 Information
485. t contain the Instruction variable to specify the path for the new gif file lt TD gt lt div id ibidropmenu gt lt div gt lt TD gt lt TR gt lt TD gt lt TD gt lt TD ALIGN left COLSPAN 8 CLASS tophead VALIGN top gt lt IMG SRC javaassist arrow gif WIDTH 15 HEIGHT 15 gt Instruction lt TD gt lt TD gt lt BR gt lt BR gt lt TD gt lt TR gt Tip This example is a continuation of the previous examples so you will see the line added previously to supply text for the variable Instruction 2 Save and exit logon htm 3 Open ibi WebFOCUS52 ibi_html javaassist intl EN workbnchtrans js in a text editor such as WordPad and add the following boldface line as shown Revision 1 xx var workbnchtrans_js_Revision Revision 1 xx workbnchtrans put Select Language Select Language workbnchtrans put Submit Submit workbnchtrans put Instruction Enter the Customer ID and PIN that were e mailed to you workbnchtrans put arrow gif ibi_html javaassist arrow gif WebFOCUS Client Enhancements WebFOCUS Summary of New Features 6 41 4 Save and exit workbnchtrans js In a multilingual environment repeat steps 3 and 4 for each ibi WebFOCUS52 ibi_html javaassist intl xx xxworkbnchtrans js file where xx is the language subdirectory or file name prefix 5 Launch the Managed Reporting logon page The red arrow you added appears
486. t prefix operators NEW Allows mixing of summary fields with and without prefix operators even when the first field name specified in a summary command does not have a prefix operator All summary fields without prefix operators are processed as though they were specified with the SUM operator Using Prefix Operators With Calculated Values If a request includes the RECOMPUTE or SUMMARIZE command the expression specified in the associated COMPUTE command is applied using values from the summary line The columns used to recompute the expression can have prefix operators The recomputed column regardless of the prefix operator specified for it applies these input values to the expression specified in the COMPUTE command Therefore any supported prefix operator can be specified for the recomputed report column without affecting the calculated result With prefix operator processing all fields used in the COMPUTE command must be calculated by the RECOMPUTE or SUMMARIZE command in order to be populated If any field used in the expression is not populated the calculated value returned for the expression is unpredictable Example Using Prefix Operators With RECOMPUTE WebFOCUS Reporting Language Enhancements WebFOCUS Summary of New Features 1 39 Example Using Prefix Operators With RECOMPUTE The following request creates a calculated field named DIFF which is the difference between DOLLARS and BUDDOLLARS This value is then re
487. t results are usually obtained by choosing the constants to minimize the mean squared error MSE between the data values and the calculated averages You may need to use nonlinear optimization techniques to find the optimal constants The equation used to forecast beyond the last data point with triple exponential smoothing is forecast t m SEASONAL t m b t I t L MOD m L where m Is the number of periods ahead for the forecast WebFOCUS Reporting Language Enhancements WebFOCUS Summary of New Features 1 15 Example Calculating a Triple Exponential Smoothing Column In the following request the data has seasonality but no trend Therefore npoint2 is set high 1000 to make the trend factor negligible in the calculation SET HISTOGRAM OFF TABLE FILE VIDEOTRK SUM TRANSTOT BY TRANSDATE ON TRANSDATE RECAP SEASONAL D10 1 FORECAST TRANSTOT 1 3 SEASONAL 3 3 1000 1 WHERE TRANSDATE NE 19910617 END In the output npredict is 3 Therefore three periods nine points nperiod npredict are generated TRANSDATE TRANSTOT SEASONAL 91 06 18 21 25 21 3 91 06 19 38 17 31 0 91 06 20 14 23 34 6 91 06 21 44 72 53 2 91 06 24 126 28 75 3 91 06 25 47 74 82 7 91 06 26 40 97 73 7 91 06 27 60 24 62 9 91 06 28 31 00 66 3 91 06 29 45 7 91 06 30 94 1 91 07 01 53 4 91 07 02 72 3 91 07 03 140 0 91 07 04 75 8 91 07 05 98 9 91 07 06 185 8 91 07 07 98 2 Calculating Trends and Pr
488. ta sources you must issue additional GRANT commands for those user IDs A sample data file gkegrant dat can be found in the etc directory in EDAHOME This file contains the commands needed to grant user access to the Resource Analyzer and Resource Governor administrative data sources Syntax How to Grant Access to an Administrative Data Source GRANT SELECT UPDATE INSERT ON owner admin_datasource TO user1 user2 where owner Is the owner name of tables that are used for system administration and collection admin_datasource Is one of the Resource Analyzer Resource Governor administrative data sources SMCONTROL SMKBASE SMPRL and SMPARAMETERS user1 user2 Are the user IDs of the users to whom you wish to grant access Note To grant certain users access to the Resource Analyzer and Resource Governor administrative data sources you must issue the GRANT command for each data source Configuring Internal Tables From the WebFOCUS Reporting Server Console 11 4 Information Builders Running the Resource Governor Configuration Verification Program CVP Note The CVP is applicable only to Resource Governor not Resource Analyzer The CVP is a program that verifies the Resource Governor installation and configuration The following remote procedures located in the catalog directory of EDAHOME are executed gkecol gkeparm gkegov gkerule gkedel The CVP verifies the followi
489. tain procedure 9 20 Enable control 7 4 enabling Smart Deploy in Maintain 9 4 enclave name in Workload Manager 7 32 enhancing navigation 1 141 Enterprise Java Beans Adapter 8 13 EQ_MASK logical operator in Maintain 9 35 equal ranges 1 27 defining 1 27 error messages in Update Assist 2 50 ERROROUT command 1 106 Essbase Data Adapter 8 14 Master File 8 15 measures dimension 8 15 missing data 8 17 to 8 18 non aggregated fields 8 15 non consolidating members 8 16 SET MEASURE command 8 15 shared members 8 17 SUPEMPTY setting 8 18 SUPMISSING setting 8 17 SUPSHARE setting 8 17 SUPZERO setting 8 17 UDAs User Defined Attributes 8 18 User Defined Attributes UDAs 8 18 zero value suppression 8 17 zero values 8 18 ESSBASE OLAP User Defined Attributes 8 14 ETL logs 10 4 managing from the Web Console 10 4 ETL Manager 10 1 configuring 10 4 ETL request log 10 3 viewing 10 3 Index I 8 Information Builders ETL requests 10 2 categories 10 2 logs 10 3 managing from the Web Console 10 4 migrating 10 7 to 10 8 10 10 10 12 nesting 10 19 saving as procedures 10 2 scheduling 10 5 to 10 6 sending status by email 10 19 to 10 20 ETL scheduler 10 5 managing from the Web Console 10 5 ETL target tables 10 16 ETL Workbench 10 14 EX command 8 26 examining RDBMS return codes in Maintain 9 32 Excel 2000 1 131 displaying formatted dates 1 131 Excel 97 1 135 reports in 1 135 Excel and Maintain 9 44 Exc
490. tatic or dynamic single select list For details see Add a Static Single Select List of Values on page 1 101 and Add a Dynamic Single Select List of Values on page 1 101 Static or dynamic multi select list For details see Add a Static Multi Select List of Values on page 1 101 and Add a Dynamic Multi Select List of Values on page 1 102 Range of values Auto prompting is not supported for Managed Reporting How to Add a Description of the Procedure Add a Heading to the Form Add a Variable Description to the Form Set a Default Variable Value Add a Static Single Select List of Values Add a Dynamic Single Select List of Values Add a Static Multi Select List of Values Add a Dynamic Multi Select List of Values Add a Range of Values List Example Adding a Single Selectable List of Values Prompting for Variables in CGI Servlet 1 100 Information Builders Syntax How to Add a Description of the Procedure lt description gt text lt description gt where text Is the description of the procedure Note If the text takes up more than one line you must repeat the lt description gt and lt description gt tags Syntax How to Add a Heading to the Form lt heading gt text lt heading gt where text Is the heading that will display on the form Syntax How to Add a Variable Description to the Form amp variable description where amp variable Is the variable nam
491. ted With a Parameter 1 Select Settings from the Tools menu The Settings dialog box opens 2 In the Default behavior for deleted report parameters select one of the following Remove controls automatically deletes the form control associated with the deleted parameter Retain controls does not delete the form control associated with the deleted parameter Prompt prompts you for a choice every time a parameter is deleted or When exiting the Report Painter after a parameter has been deleted you are prompted to decide whether or not to delete the associated form control Select Don t show this message again then select Yes or No Designing a User Interface With the Resource Layout Painter 2 40 Information Builders Filtering Dynamic Parameter Values Release 5 2 3 introduces the Resource Layout Painter s chain feature to associate two or more related parameters Chained parameter values are filtered as selections are made to each parameter control For example if you chain the PLANT parameter to the STATE parameter only PLANT values for the currently selected STATE parameter are available instead of all the plants in the data source Each time a selection is made all chained parameters are dynamically updated The chain feature also enables you to add remove and reverse the order of parameters in the chain Procedure How to Filter Parameter Values 1 Open the Resource Layout Painter 2 I
492. th using the redesigned Browse for Folder dialog box To use the Browse for Folder dialog box see Creating a Project in the Creating a Reporting Application chapter in the Developing Reporting Applications manual Developer Studio Enhancements WebFOCUS Summary of New Features 2 5 Redesigned Deploy Wizard Deploying a project is the process of copying project files to a Web server and a WebFOCUS Reporting Server so the application can run on the Web and be accessed by other users HTML forms are used to launch the application in the Web environment The Deploy Wizard guides you through the process of creating a configuration that manages the deployment of your project files to the Web In Developer Studio you can take advantage of the following enhancements to the Deploy Wizard Multiple deployment scenarios You can define multiple deployment scenarios and save them for future deployment A deployment scenario includes the partitioning of the project files and the selection of servers For example you might have two deployment scenarios for a project one that maps the files to a production server and another that maps the files to a test server To create multiple deployment scenarios see Step 2 Create a Deployment Scenario in the Partitioning and Deploying Project Files chapter in the Developing Reporting Applications manual Consolidated deployment tool for Developer Studio and Maintain The Developer Studio and Maintain en
493. th in points where 72 pts 1 inch Tip Line width specified in points is displayed differently in HTML and PDF output For uniform appearance regardless of display format use LIGHT MEDIUM or HEAVY line_style Sets the style of the border line WebFOCUS StyleSheets support all of the standard Cascading Style Sheet line styles Several 3 dimensional styles are available only in HTML as noted by asterisks Possible values are Style Description NONE No border is drawn SOLID Solid line DOTTED Dotted line DASHED Dashed line WebFOCUS Reporting Language Enhancements WebFOCUS Summary of New Features 1 109 color Is one of the preset color values BLACK is the default value If the display or output device does not support colors it substitutes shades of gray For a complete list of available color values see Color Values in a Report in the Formatting Report Data chapter in the Creating Reports With WebFOCUS Language manual RGB Specifies the font color using a mixture of red green and blue r g b Is the desired intensity of red green and blue respectively The values are on a scale of 0 to 255 where 0 is the least intense and 255 is the most intense Using the three color components in equal intensities results in shades of gray position Specifies which border line to format Possible values are TOP BOTTOM LEFT RIGHT You can specify a position qualifier for any of the BORDER attributes This e
494. that has the following limitation CALLTYPE RL is not supported when this field is the IXFLD in an embedded cross reference or JOIN If you have selected a field defined with TYPE NOP for example subdescriptors TYPE PDS or TYPE HDS a FIND call is issued even if RL has been specified For information on how to switch access modes from RL to FIND see Switching Access Mode Using NOPACCESS on page 8 8 Data Adapter for Adabas 8 6 Information Builders Adabas ORDER Fields in the Indexed Field List When the order of the data is significant the ORDER field maintains the sequence number for each multiply occurring instance To use the ORDER attribute include an additional field in your Master File with an ALIAS of ORDER The ORDER field does not represent an existing Adabas field it is used only for internal processing The SET ORDERKEYS command enables you to exclude ORDER fields from the list of indexed fields Syntax How to Set ORDERKEYS in the Indexed Field List ENGINE ADBSINX SET ORDERKEYS ON OFF where ON Includes ORDER fields in the list of indexed fields ON is the default value OFF Excludes ORDER fields from the list of indexed fields Adabas Internal Sequence Numbers ISN and Global Format Buffer IDs GFBID The Data Adapter for Adabas can employ a new data retrieval strategy using Read Logical by ISN L1 calls to determine the Internal Sequence Number ISN of a record that was read or is in
495. the Project development paradigm which includes support for source control and deployment scenarios In these cases you must use the full Developer Studio The functionality of the Managed Reporting Developer for Windows product is described in the WebFOCUS Managed Reporting Developer s Manual Change Management 3 4 Information Builders Change Management Developer Studio supports copy and paste of Managed Reporting resources between Managed Reporting repositories in order to help developers better manage their development test and production environments Developers with proper permission can multi select reports reporting objects other files folders and sub folders or they can select a single domain The internal name of each resource is checked and a replace add merge dialog box is presented as appropriate Many organizations do not grant Developers write access to the user acceptance test and production environments Access to these environments is controlled and granted only to Administrators and or automated change management processes Yet only Developers know which changes are ready to be moved into test In Release 5 2 3 the Change Management Extract Interface presents Developers with a graphical view of the Managed Reporting domains they manage and allows them to build a change package This package is then loaded into another environment by the Change Management Load Program Change Management is fully documented in
496. the Punctuation of Large Numbers In the following request the CDN setting is ON which punctuates numbers using a period to separate thousands and a comma to separate decimals SET CDN ON TABLE FILE EMPLOYEE PRINT LAST_NAME FIRST_NAME SALARY END The output is Displaying a Leading Zero in Decimal Numbers By default when a number containing only a decimal portion appears in a report a leading zero is not displayed with the number You can use the SET CENT ZERO command to display a leading zero in decimal only numbers Note that the CDN setting determines whether a decimal point or comma is the decimal separator For information about the CND parameter see Punctuating Numbers on page 1 118 LAST_NAME FIRST_NAME SALARY STEVENS ALFRED 11 000 00 SMITH MARY 13 200 00 JONES DIANE 18 480 00 JONES DIANE 17 750 00 BANNING JOHN 29 700 00 IRVING JOAN 26 862 00 IRVING JOAN 24 420 00 ROMANS ANTHONY 21 120 00 MCCOY JOHN 18 480 00 BLACKWOOD ROSEMARIE 21 780 00 MCKNIGHT ROGER 16 100 00 MCKNIGHT ROGER 15 000 00 CROSS BARBARA 27 062 00 CROSS BARBARA 25 775 00 How to Display a Leading Zero in Decimal only Numbers Example Displaying a Leading Zero in Decimal only Numbers Displaying a Leading Zero in Decimal Numbers 1 120 Information Builders Syntax How to Display a Leading Zero in Decimal only Numbers SET CENT ZERO ON OFF where ON Displays a leading zero in de
497. the shape to draw for each character of the font The information in the font file is scalable which means that a single font file can be used to generate characters of any size Note however that bold and italic variations of the typeface are separate fonts An alternative ASCII format PFA can also be used by WebFOCUS Adobe Font Metrics AFM file This file is distributed with all Adobe fonts It contains information about the size of each character in each font WebFOCUS uses this information to lay out the report on the page Note that the three built in fonts also have AFM files which are distributed with WebFOCUS However these fonts do not require font files since the fonts are built in to Acrobat Note A Printer Metrics File PFM is also available This file is used by applications such as Acrobat Reader for laying out text however it is not supported by WebFOCUS You must use the AFM file WebFOCUS Font Map files These configuration files map the name of a font to the appropriate font and font metrics files AFM and PFB or PFA There are two versions of this file PDF FMP and PSCRIPT FMP You can update either one or both depending on the output format PDF or PS with which you plan to use the Type 1 fonts WebFOCUS Reporting Language Enhancements WebFOCUS Summary of New Features 1 161 Through a simple process you can customize your environment to take advantage of these fonts First copy the font
498. the sort field values together and define groups of equal range using the IN RANGES OF phrase Each report request can contain a total of five IN GROUPS OF phrases plus IN RANGES OF phrases The IN RANGES OF phrase can be used only once per BY field The first sort field range starts from the lowest value of a multiple of the IN GROUPS OF value For a graphical implementation of this feature see How to Group Numeric Data Into Ranges in the Creating Reports With Report Painter chapter in the Creating Reports With Graphical Tools manual How to Define Equal Ranges Example Defining Equal Ranges Grouping Sort Field Values in Ranges 1 28 Information Builders Syntax How to Define Equal Ranges BY ACROSS sortfield IN RANGES OF value TOP limit where sortfield Is the name of the sort field The sort field must be numeric Its format must be I integer F floating point D double precision or P packed value Is an integer greater than zero indicating the range by which sort field values are grouped limit Is an optional number that defines the highest range label to be included in the report The range is extended to include all data values higher than this value Example Defining Equal Ranges This following request creates five groups of equal range TABLE FILE EMPLOYEE PRINT LAST_NAME BY CURR_SAL IN RANGES OF 5000 END The output is WebFOCUS Reporting Language Enhancements WebFOCUS Su
499. the wfmpriv1 htm page from previous releases but supports the common WebFOCUS CGI calling protocols and APP ENABLE setting that are the global defaults in the Release 5 2 environment The launch page is located in the approot ibisamp folder on the Web server in the WebFOCUS environment This page can launch any WebFOCUS Maintain application You can also use it as a basis for creating your own launch pages WebFOCUS Maintain Enhancements WebFOCUS Summary of New Features 9 15 Multiple Level Tracing With Statement Trace Trace controls allow application developers to trace the logic flow of WebFOCUS Maintain procedures as well as measure CPU and memory used at the procedure case and statement level First compile the procedure to provide the desired level of tracing MNTCON COMPILE procname produces trace operation codes for each CASE entry ENDCASE CALL and EXEC statement Tip A MNTCON EX procname does a compile transparently and runs the procedure without writing the compiled version to disk it therefore also supplies trace information at run time if the SET TRACEON options have been set on the server as described in Set Statement Trace on page 9 15 MNTCON DEBUG COMPILE procname produces trace operation codes for every WebFOCUS Maintain statement such as COMPUTE IF FOR ALL NEXT You can view the trace output from the WebFOCUS Reporting Server Console or by developing reports using the MNTSTMT Master File which
500. they are truncated If the numbers supplied are negative or zero a message is generated Both k and m limit the number of rows displayed within each sort break in the report If you specify both the more restrictive value will control the display If k and m are both greater than n the number of tiles n will be used Example Grouping Data Into Tiles The following request illustrates group data into five tiles TABLE FILE MOVIES PRINT TITLE BY CATEGORY BY LISTPR IN GROUPS OF 5 TILES WHERE CATEGORY EQ ACTION OR CHILDREN END The output is WebFOCUS Reporting Language Enhancements WebFOCUS Summary of New Features 1 27 Note that the tiles are assigned within the higher level sort field CATEGORY The ACTION category does not have any data assigned to tile 3 The CHILDREN category has all five tiles For additional examples see Grouping Numeric Data Into Tiles in the Sorting Tabular Reports chapter in the Creating Reports With WebFOCUS Language manual For two graphical implementations of this feature see the following topics in the Creating Reports With Graphical Tools manual For Report Painter How to Group Data Into Tiles in the Creating Reports With the Report Painter chapter For an OLAP report Grouping Numeric Data Into Tiles in the Analyzing Data in an OLAP Report chapter Grouping Sort Field Values in Ranges In Release 5 2 3 when you sort a report using a numeric sort field you can group
501. tial fields used by Adabas to select records in a file The Adabas term for these values which reside in the File Associator Table is inverted lists Inverted lists contain the values of descriptors a count of the total number of records in which each value appears and the Internal Sequence Numbers ISNs in ascending order associated with each occurrence The descriptors are identified to speed data location and to retrieve specific frequently required data from Adabas files In Release 5 2 3 two additional types of descriptors are supported by the Data Adapter for Adabas Phonetic descriptors Consist of similar phonetic values for which an index has been created in Adabas It is described at the field level in the Access File as TYPE PDS It can be used in selection tests but it cannot be printed The phonetic value of a descriptor is based on the first twenty bytes of the field value Only alphabetic values are considered numeric values special characters and blanks are ignored Lowercase and uppercase alphanumeric characters are internally identical Hyper Descriptors Consist of values that are generated based on a user supplied algorithm for which an index has been created in Adabas It is described at the field level in the Access File as TYPE HDS It can be used in selection tests but it cannot be printed Any phonetic or hyper descriptor defined to the server in the Access File with TYPE PDS or TYPE HDS
502. ties dialog box select the Deployment tab Confirm that Smart Deploy is checked Running Components From the Developer Launch Console The Developer Launch Console enables you to view applications and execute WebFOCUS procedures and forms The Developer Launch Console presents a tree view from which you select components to launch For example you can launch WebFOCUS Maintain and WebFOCUS Reporting procedures and open HTML forms on the Web server WebFOCUS Maintain Enhancements WebFOCUS Summary of New Features 9 7 Procedure How to Run Components From the Developer Launch Console 1 Start the WebFOCUS Server Enter the following URL in the browser http localhost ibi_html applaunch html where localhost Is the Web server running the WebFOCUS Client or your local development server 2 Sign on to the WebFOCUS Server After signing on you see in the left pane a list of WebFOCUS Servers available to you 3 If you expand WebFOCUS or WebFOCUS DATA SERVERS under any WebFOCUS Server you see a list of the applications on that server Editing Master Files as Text 9 8 Information Builders 4 The WebFOCUS folders contain the HTML forms for each application The WebFOCUS DATA SERVERS folders contain the WebFOCUS and Maintain procedures If you expand an application you see the procedures or forms in that application 5 To run a procedure or HTML form click it The results appear in the pane on the right Edit
503. tion Preface vi Information Builders Information You Should Have To help our consultants answer your questions most effectively please provide the following information when you call Your six digit site code xxxx xx Your WebFOCUS configuration The front end you are using including vendor and release The communications protocol for example TCP IP or HLLAPI including vendor and release The software release Your server version and release You can find this information using the Version option in the Web Console The stored procedure preferably with line numbers or FOCUS commands being used in server access The name of the Master File and Access File The exact nature of the problem Are the results or the format incorrect Are the text or calculations missing or misplaced The error message and return code if applicable Is this related to any other problem Has the procedure or query ever worked in its present form Has it been changed recently How often does the problem occur What release of the operating system are you using Has it WebFOCUS your security system communications protocol or front end software changed Is this problem reproducible If so how Have you tried to reproduce your problem in the simplest form possible For example if you are having problems joining two data sources have you tri
504. tion You have the ability to suppress the display of commas in a numeric column using the comma suppress edit format option This option is listed in the Format dialog box which you can access from the Master File Editor the Report Painter the Define Tool or the Compute Tool It enables you to display numeric and monetary data without commas The comma suppress edit format option is available only when a numeric format such as Decimal D Integer I Floating F or Packed P is selected in the Format Types group box Numeric display options are fully documented in Numeric Formats in the Assigning Field Formats chapter in the Creating Reports With Graphical Tools manual Reference Suppressing the Display of Commas in Numeric Data Reference Suppressing the Display of Commas in Numeric Data Option Format Data Display Comma suppression D6c D7Mc D7Nc 41376 6148 6148 41376 6148 6148 Percent Edit Display Option 2 10 Information Builders Percent Edit Display Option You can display a percent sign along with numeric data using the percent edit format option This option is listed in the Format dialog box which you can access from the Master File Editor the Report Painter the Define Tool or the Compute Tool It enables you to display data as percentages When you apply this option to a column a percentage sign is added to the end of the specified column The percent edit format option is available
505. tions icon on the toolbar and select the Output tab Under Display Options select HTML and verify that On is selected from the Cascading Style Sheets drop down menu b For fonts click the Select Fonts button under Graphical options The Fonts dialog box opens Select font name font style font size and color Click OK c For background color select the Single Color radio button under Background Coloring and choose a color from the palette Click OK 3 Under Applying to condition you can define or edit a condition that controls when specified formatting options are applied to a cell 4 Click OK to return to the Design matrix where most formatting changes are reflected 5 Click the Run icon on the toolbar to see the cell formatting options applied in the report output Note If you wish to drill down from the selected cell to another procedure or to a URL click the Drill Down tab For details see Drilling Down From a Column Cell or Row in the Creating Reports With Financial Report Painter chapter in the Creating Reports With Graphical Tools manual Although certain options on the General tab are enabled when cell is the active object these options are applied to the entire column not only to the selected cell Developer Studio Enhancements WebFOCUS Summary of New Features 2 69 SET Parameters You can issue a SET command by using the SET tool to generate the command in a stored procedure or by coding it in a st
506. to Include Graph Types and Graph Styles on page 4 18 Addition of the Preview Screen on page 4 18 Auto Update Feature Added to the Preview Screen on page 4 19 Creating a WHERE Statement Using Date and Time Values on page 4 20 Enhancement See Repository migration Migration Tools on page 5 2 Configuring the Web Application Configuring the ReportCaster Web Application on page 5 2 Configuration menu options Configuration Tools on page 5 3 Signon integration Security Configurations on page 5 3 Security Exit integration ReportCaster Authentication Exit on page 5 4 Choosing a ReportCaster user interface Configuring Access to the User Interfaces on page 5 4 Scheduling Distribution Enhancements When Creating a Schedule on page 5 7 Scheduling Wizard and HTML User Interface on page 5 8 Distribution Enhancements When Using the Scheduling Wizard on page 5 8 Changing execution IDs ReportCaster Console on page 5 10 ReportCaster API ReportCaster API on page 5 17 WebFOCUS Client Enhancements A 6 Information Builders WebFOCUS Client Enhancements Enhancement See Server side graphics Configuring Special Services on page 6 9 Auto prompting for variables Configuring Special Services on page 6 9 Security and node behavior settings in odin cfg Add a New Node to ODIN CFG on page 6 4 Sorting the Server list Change a Node on page 6 6 Positional flags MR_PGM_FLAGS for custom security e
507. to search for records Note Right click menu options depend on the properties of your Update application For example if you did not select Add in Step 2 of the Update Assist wizard the New option would not appear on the right click menu Financial Report Painter Enhancements 2 54 Information Builders Sorting Tables In Release 5 2 3 when you perform a search in your Update application you can sort the results in ascending or descending order by clicking a column heading These sorting options are available for all of your application tables For more information contact your Information Builders representative Financial Report Painter Enhancements The Financial Report Painter and the underlying Financial Modeling Language FML have been enhanced to support reporting against a hierarchical data structure more flexible use of fields in a request and rows and cell styling from the Financial Report Painter You can access the Financial Report Painter through the Report Painter This tool is documented in the Creating Reports With Financial Report Painter chapter in the Creating Reports With Graphical Tools manual and in the Creating Financial Reports manual which includes tutorials The FML language is fully documented in the Creating Financial Reports chapter in the Creating Reports With WebFOCUS Language manual In this section Reporting Dynamically From a Hierarchy Indenting Row Titles Displaying an FML Hierarchy W
508. trator to control monitoring and build rules If you are configuring for Resource Analyzer only you do not need to run the CVP after the internal tables are created You may use the Resource Analyzer Administrator to control the monitoring of data sources In this section Granting Access to Resource Analyzer Resource Governor Data Sources Running the Resource Governor Configuration Verification Program CVP How to Create Resource Analyzer Resource Governor Internal Tables Grant Access to an Administrative Data Source Run the Resource Governor Configuration Verification Program CVP Resource Analyzer and Resource Governor Enhancements WebFOCUS Summary of New Features 11 3 Granting Access to Resource Analyzer Resource Governor Data Sources Resource Analyzer Resource Governor has two separate data sources one used for administration and the other for usage monitoring data If you are using a relational data source that is not FOCUS as your Resource Analyzer Resource Governor repository a GRANT command is issued for all users PUBLIC when the internal tables are created This command enables all users to write to the usage monitoring data source The owner ID specified when the internal tables are created is granted user access rights to the administrative data sources SMCONTROL SMKBASE SMPRL and SMPARAMETERS If you want to grant other users access to the Resource Analyzer Resource Governor administrative da
509. umber of decimal places displayed to its right Text can also be aligned using this technique The rightmost character aligns in the position immediately to the left of the decimal point The measurement must be a portion of the width you have specified for this item If you wish to mix fonts while retaining the decimal alignment see Measure for Column Width and Decimal Alignment on page 1 115 for additional instructions WebFOCUS Reporting Language Enhancements WebFOCUS Summary of New Features 1 113 Example Aligning Data and Text in a Multi Line Heading or Footing In the following free form report content is defined entirely in the sort heading where text and data are stacked to support comparison among regions The first line of each subheading displays the name of the region The next three lines display the following numbers decimally aligned The decimal point displays one inch from the right of a two inch column Unit sales with no decimal places Dollar sales with two decimal places Budgeted sales with five decimal places DEFINE FILE GGSALES JUNITS D15 0 UNITS JDOLLARS D15 2 DOLLARS JBUDDOLLARS D15 5 BUDDOLLARS END SET SQUEEZE ON TABLE FILE GGSALES BY REGION NOPRINT SUBHEAD SALES FOR lt REGION Units lt JUNITS Dollar Sales lt JDOLLARS Budgeted Sales lt JBUDDOLLARS ON TABLE SET PAGE NUM OFF ON TABLE HOLD FORMAT HTML ON TABLE SET HTMLCSS ON ON TABLE SET STYLE TYPE
510. upper limit outfield Alphanumeric Is either a field with AnV or An format for the returned lowercase string or the format of the output value enclosed in single quotation marks If the format of outfield is AnV the actual length returned is equal to the smaller of the input string length and length_limit Using Variable Length Character Expressions 1 56 Information Builders Example Creating a Variable Length Lowercase String The LOCASV function converts the LAST_NAME field to lowercase and specifies a length limit of five characters The results are stored in the LOWCV_NAME field TABLE FILE EMPLOYEE PRINT LAST_NAME AND COMPUTE LOWCV_NAME A15 LOCASV 5 LAST_NAME LOWCV_NAME WHERE DEPARTMENT EQ MIS END The output is POSITV Finding the Beginning of a Variable Length Substring The POSITV function is similar to POSIT However the lengths of its AnV parameters are based on the actual lengths of those parameters in comparison with two other parameters that specify their sizes How to Find the Beginning of a Variable Length Substring Example Finding the Starting Position of a Variable Length Pattern WebFOCUS Reporting Language Enhancements WebFOCUS Summary of New Features 1 57 Syntax How to Find the Beginning of a Variable Length Substring POSITV parent in_limit substring sub_limit outfield where parent Alphanumeric Is the field or alphanumeric constant enclosed in single quotation
511. ure How to Calculate a Triple Exponential Smoothing Column 1 With the By or Across field you want to use for your calculations click Forecast The Forecast dialog box opens 2 If you want to change the name of the output field from FRCSTFLD enter a new name in the Field Name box 3 Select Triple Exponential Average from the Step 1 Choose a Method drop down list 4 Select an input field from the Step 2 Choose a Measure drop down list If you select the same field as the By or Across field this field is not displayed even if it is included in a display command 5 Select the increment to count each instance of the By or Across field from the Step 3 Choose the Interval spin box Developer Studio Enhancements WebFOCUS Summary of New Features 2 33 6 Select the number of predictions to be calculated from the Forecast field from the Step 4 Choose Number of Predictions spin box 7 Select the number of data points for a period from the Step 5 Choose The Number of Points Per Period spin box 8 Select the number of values to average from the Step 6 Choose Number of Values to Average spin box 9 Select the number to use to calculate the weights for each term in the trend from the Step 7 Choose The Number of Values For Each Trend spin box 10 Select the number to use to calculate the weights for each term in the trend from the Step 8 Choose The Number of Values For Seasonal Adjustment spin box 11 Optiona
512. used to display the controls You can also enter 1 which represents an infinite number if you want to display the controls horizontally with an unlimited number of columns Use the Check Box Properties Window or the Radio Button Properties Window to use the Columns option Reference Check Box Properties Window The Check Box Properties Window contains the Columns option Columns Determines the number of columns in which check boxes are displayed 1 is the default value Enter 2 or a higher number to display check boxes in multiple columns You can also enter 1 which represents an infinite number if you want to display the check boxes horizontally with an unlimited number of columns All options are fully documented in Check Box Properties Window in the Designing a User Interface for a Web Application With the Resource Layout Painter chapter in the Developing Reporting Applications manual Reference Check Box Properties Window Radio Button Properties Window Developer Studio Enhancements WebFOCUS Summary of New Features 2 45 Reference Radio Button Properties Window The Radio Button Properties Window contains the Columns option Columns Determines the number of columns in which the radio buttons list is displayed 1 is the default value Enter 2 or a higher number to display the radio buttons list in multiple columns You can also enter 1 which represents an infinite number if you want to display the radio butt
513. user keyword 7 2 maxFolders variable 2 51 maximum display fields 1 98 maxNodesPerFolder variable 2 51 MEASURE setting 8 15 measures dimension for Essbase 8 15 measuring for column width alignment 1 115 measuring for decimal alignment 1 115 memory enhancements in Maintain 9 4 MESSAGE parameter in Maintain procedure 9 20 metadata generation 8 32 Micro Focus C ISAM Data Adapter 8 9 Microsoft Access and Maintain 9 43 migrating ETL requests 10 7 migrating ETL requests on OS 390 10 10 migrating ETL requests on OS 400 10 12 migrating ETL requests on UNIX and Windows 10 8 Migration Utility 3 12 Millennium Data Adapter 8 19 mime wfs configuration settings 6 18 Minus Edit format option 1 124 minus signs 1 124 displaying 1 124 missing data characters 1 43 to 1 47 missing data suppression in Essbase 8 17 MNTPERF trace 9 15 MNTSTMT Master File in Maintain 9 15 MNTSTMT trace 9 15 modifying server settings 6 4 MQ XML listener 7 33 configuring 7 33 multiLanguage variable 6 29 multi level table of contents 1 141 multiple content pages 3 13 multiple drill down links 1 140 multiple drill down links in Developer Studio 1 140 2 21 multiple servers 3 7 multiple spaces in fields 1 155 multiple level tracing in Maintain 9 15 multivariate regressions 1 18 and calculating trends 1 18 and predicting values 1 18 MUMPS Data Adapter 8 19 MVS external sort 7 28 Index I 14 Inform
514. using a combination of commas decimals spaces and single quotation marks You can use the SET CDN command in a report request but not in a DEFINE or COMPUTE command The punctuation specified by the SET CDN command also determines the punctuation used in numbers affected by the SET CENT ZERO command For syntax and an example of SET CENT ZERO see Displaying a Leading Zero in Decimal Numbers on page 1 119 Syntax How to Determine the Punctuation of Large Numbers SET CDN option where option Determines the punctuation used in numerical notation Possible values are ON enables CDN For example the number 3 045 000 76 is represented as 3 045 000 76 OFF disables CDN For example the number 3 045 000 76 is represented as 3 045 000 76 OFF is the default value SPACE separates groups of three significant digits with a space instead of a comma and marks a decimal position with a comma instead of a period For example the number 3 045 000 76 is represented as 3 045 000 76 QUOTE separates groups of three significant digits with a single quotation mark instead of a comma and marks a decimal position with a comma instead of a period For example the number 3 045 000 76 is represented as 3 045 000 76 How to Determine the Punctuation of Large Numbers Example Determining the Punctuation of Large Numbers WebFOCUS Reporting Language Enhancements WebFOCUS Summary of New Features 1 119 Example Determining
515. ute the link The TYPE attribute and its value must appear at the beginning of the declaration subtype Are any additional attributes such as COLUMN LINE or ITEM that are needed to identify the report component that you are formatting description Is the text that appears on the pop up menu of drill down options on the report output DrillDown n is the default value where n is a consecutive integer such as DrillDown 1 DrillDown 2 and so on type_of_link Is the type of link for example a link to another report a URL a URL from a field a JavaScript function a WebFOCUS Maintain procedure or a WebFOCUS compiled Maintain procedure WebFOCUS Reporting Language Enhancements WebFOCUS Summary of New Features 1 141 Navigating Reports From a Table of Contents You can enhance navigation within a large HTML report by adding a dynamic HTML based Table of Contents TOC for multiple sort fields Enabling a TOC for a lower level sort field automatically enables a TOC for all parent sort fields The TOCs display as hyperlinks all values of the first highest level vertical sort field as well as the values of any lower level BY fields that you designate for inclusion The TOC can appear as an expandable icon in the upper left corner of the report or as one or more drop down lists in a page heading or footing or a report heading or footing If you select a value in the TOC that value flashes it is highlighted in gray to draw
516. values Target Object For relational data source target tables a pull down menu provides a list of all connections whether they are servers or data sources The Validate option validates input rows as they are loaded into the target tables and sends rejected rows to a log file Validating Records You can create a business rule that screens records as they are loaded into the data target If a record does not meet the criteria it is rejected When a value meets the criteria of the rule a value of 1 is assigned to the record and the record is loaded If the value does not meet the criteria of the rule the value of 0 is assigned to the record and the record is rejected ETL Manager Enhancements WebFOCUS Summary of New Features 10 17 Procedure How to Validate Records 1 In the Target Mapping window click Validate A column is added containing lt VALIDATE gt in the Column name field An f is added to the first field of the next row All expressions in this row and the rows beneath it will be rules that are applied to records as they are loaded 2 Enter the column you want to apply the rule to in the Column Name field 3 Enter the format in the Format field 4 Enter the rule to apply to the specified field in the Expressions box or click Calculator to create an expression with the calculator 5 Optionally enter a description in the Description field Load Options Prior to loading a relational table or a
517. values 1 97 XMI Client Server Data Adapter 7 29 to 7 30 XMI listener 7 29 to 7 30 Y Y axis values 1 97 YRTHRESH parameter in Maintain procedure 9 20 Z zero values 8 18 suppressing in Essbase 8 18 Index I 24 Information Builders Reader Comments Information Builders Two Penn Plaza New York NY 10121 2898 212 736 4433 WebFOCUS Summary of New Features DN4500463 0304 Version 5 Release 2 In an ongoing effort to produce effective documentation the Documentation Services staff at Information Builders welcomes any opinion you can offer regarding this manual Please use this form to relay suggestions for improving this publication or to alert us to corrections Identify specific pages where applicable You can contact us through the following methods Name _________________________________________________________________________________ Company ______________________________________________________________________________ Address _______________________________________________________________________________ Telephone ____________________________________Date _____________________________________ E mail _________________________________________________________________________________ Comments Mail Documentation Services Customer Support Information Builders Inc Two Penn Plaza New York NY 10121 2898 Fax 212 967 0460 E mail books_info ibi com Web form http www informationbuilders com boo
518. values to preselect typically found in data source fields and want to write less code use the SelectedItems property This feature allows you to preselect one or more items in a multi select list box by value from Maintain code You can call it from any event handler How to Preselect List Items by Value Example Preselecting List Items by Value New Sample Launch Page 9 14 Information Builders Syntax How to Preselect List Items by Value WINFORM SHOW_INACTIVE Formname Formname ListBoxName SelectedItems 1 value1 Formname ListBoxName SelectedItems 2 value2 Formname ListBoxName SelectedItems m valuen where Formname Is the name of the form ListBoxName Is the name of the list box ListItems Is the name of an internal data source stack that contains the values for the list box SelectedItems Is the name of an internal data source stack that can contain an array of multiple preselected items Like all stacks it is a 1 based not 0 based array value1 value2 valuen Is a preselected item Example Preselecting List Items by Value Form1 ListBox1 SelectedItems 1 NY Office To select multiple items pass each value on a separate line Form1 ListBox1 SelectedItems 1 NY Office Form1 ListBox1 SelectedItems 2 Chicago Office Form1 ListBox1 SelectedItems 3 LA Office New Sample Launch Page The wfmstart html launch page offers the functionality of
519. ve Data 1 124 Information Builders Displaying a Minus Sign After Negative Data The Minus Edit display option enables you to display a minus sign to the right of negative numeric data You can define this option in a Master File or in a COMPUTE or DEFINE command Note that Minus Edit does not perform calculations intended to derive a negative number in the data It functions only as a format option Options for displaying numeric data are fully documented in Numeric Display Options in the Describing an Individual Field chapter in the Describing Data With WebFOCUS Language manual Example Describing the Minus Edit Format Option In the Master File FIELDNAME WHOLESALEPR WPRC F6 2 In a request DEFINE FILE MOVIES MDISC D7 2 7 5 END TABLE FILE MOVIES SUM COMPUTE GROSS_PROFIT LISTPR WHOLESALEPR NET_PROFIT D12 2 GROSS_PROFIT MDISC BY CATEGORY PRINT MDISC AS MEMBER DISCOUNT WHOLESALEPR AS WHOLESALE PRICE LISTPR AS LIST PRICE IF CATEGORY EQ ACTION OR MUSICALS OR DRAMA OR SCI FI IF RECORDLIMIT EQ 10 END The output is Note Results of the Minus Edit option can be seen in the NET_PROFIT column WebFOCUS Reporting Language Enhancements WebFOCUS Summary of New Features 1 125 Displaying Compound Reports in PS Format In addition to being able to combine multiple reports into a single PDF file you can concatenate reports into a PS file using the SET COMPOUND command The first PS or P
520. vent a format error when displaying the data If you use the default HNODATA value it is inserted in numeric fields In this way a request against the HOLD file can recognize missing data that was propagated to the HOLD file If a number with decimal places is specified for HNODATA and the field with missing data requires an integer the value is rounded to a whole number and then inserted In a numeric field that supports decimal places the value is rounded and inserted with the correct number of decimal digits WebFOCUS Reporting Language Enhancements WebFOCUS Summary of New Features 1 45 Example Controlling Missing Data Values in an Alphanumeric HOLD File First edit the BANK_NAME and BANK_CODE fields in the EMPLOYEE Master File to support missing data FIELDNAME BANK_NAME ALIAS BN FORMAT A20 MISSING ON FIELDNAME BANK_CODE ALIAS BC FORMAT I6S MISSING ON The following request sets the HNODATA string to the string N A and creates an alphanumeric HOLD file named HMISS SET HNODATA N A TABLE FILE EMPLOYEE PRINT BANK_NAME BANK_CODE BY EMP_ID ON TABLE HOLD FORMAT ALPHA AS HMISS END RUN TABLE FILE HMISS PRINT END Note that a blank is inserted in the integer field BANK_CODE Handling Missing Data in HOLD Files 1 46 Information Builders Example Propagating Numeric Values for Missing Data to a HOLD File First edit the BANK_NAME and BANK_CODE fields in the EMPLOYEE Master File to sup
521. vironments The general syntax of the DYNAM command for allocation is DYNAM ALLOCATE operand operand where ALLOCATE Allocates a data set Can be abbreviated as ALLOC or ALLO operand May be a keyword a keyword followed by its parameter or a parameter without a keyword Example Accessing Files Using the DYNAM Command The following examples use the DYNAM command with ALLOCATE to access different types of files DYNAM ALLOC FILE MASTER DA qualif MASTER DATA SHR REUSE DYNAM ALLOC FILE VSAM01 DA qualif VSAM CLUSTER SHR REUSE DYNAM ALLOC FILE CAR DA qualif CAR FOCUS SHR REUSE How to Access Files Using the DYNAM Command Example Accessing Files Using the DYNAM Command External Sort 7 28 Information Builders External Sort The z OS and OS 390 external sort feature is fully supported on the Server for OS 390 and z OS External sort allows you to use dedicated sorting products such as SyncSort and DFSORT to generate large reports exceeding 5000 records much faster than if you were to use internal sort Syntax How to Set the External Sort To enable external sort place the following SET command in the global server profile edasprof prf or in a procedure SET EXTSORT ON OFF where ON Enables external sort feature OFF Turns external sort off OFF is the default value Hiper Memory Hiper Memory is a file management feature used to improve performance for temporary data sets on th
522. vironments have a consolidated deployment tool To use the deployment tool in Developer Studio see the Partitioning and Deploying Project Files chapter in the Developing Reporting Applications manual For details about using the deployment tool in Maintain see the Setting Up Your WebFOCUS Maintain Project chapter in the Developing WebFOCUS Maintain Applications manual Deployment to multiple servers You can deploy your project files to multiple WebFOCUS Reporting or Maintain servers This enhancement enables you to access data on multiple servers run your report components in the most suitable environment and speed up your application processing It also enables greater control of access to your reporting applications Deployment to multiple servers is fully documented in Step 3 Partition the Project Files in the Partitioning and Deploying Project Files chapter in the Developing Reporting Applications manual This feature is relevant if you develop WebFOCUS reporting applications or WebFOCUS Maintain applications and are responsible for deploying your application to end users who access it from a Web browser Dimensions Tool 2 6 Information Builders Dimensions Tool The Dimensions Tool enables you to create OLAP hierarchies and dimensions based on enterprise data for multi dimensional analysis without modifying the Master File The new logical view is saved as part of a procedure The Dimensions Tool works with FOCUS data sources
523. w to Change WebFOCUS Settings From a Procedure Tip Single quotation marks are allowed in place of double quotation marks SYS_MGR FOCSET parm value where parm Is one of the supported SET parameters CDN COMMIT DATEDISPLAY DEFCENT EMGSRV LANGUAGE MESSAGE NODATA PASS TRACEOFF TRACEON TRACEUSER USER WARNING YRTHRESH value Is a valid setting for the parameter See the Syntax topics for the default value and valid settings for each parameter Changing WebFOCUS Settings From a Procedure 9 22 Information Builders Syntax How to Set CDN From a Procedure CDN Continental Decimal Notation determines the punctuation used in numerical notation When the CDN setting is ON a comma marks the decimal position and periods separate groups of three significant digits SYS_MGR FOCSET CDN option where option Determines the punctuation used in numerical notation Possible values are ON enables CDN For example the number 3 045 000 76 is represented as 3 045 000 76 OFF disables CDN For example the number 3 045 000 76 is represented as 3 045 000 76 OFF is the default value SPACE separates groups of three significant digits with a space instead of a comma and marks a decimal position with a comma instead of a period For example the number 3 045 000 76 is represented as 3 045 000 76 QUOTE separates groups of three significant digits with a single quotation mark instead of a comma and mark
524. was created updated successfully for user USER The following message should also appear ICM18354 Migration procedure completed successfully 11 Review the list of new application directories By default ETL Requests are located in the APPROOT baseapp directory If a category name was previously assigned in the Properties window a directory with that category s name is created under APPROOT and the following message appears New Created APP directories newapp Note To view or run ETL Requests in these new application directories they must be added to the server application path 12 In the ETL Configuration page s navigation pane click Refresh Page then check to see that the application directories and requests are listed Migrating ETL Requests 10 12 Information Builders Procedure How to Migrate ETL Requests on OS 400 1 Locate the Master Files and Access files used by your ETL Requests The default location is QSYS LIB EDAMAIN LIB 2 For each QSYS library map the directory the new application will be located in into APPROOT using the Configure Application Path window and then add the new directory to APP PATH 3 Copy the Master Files and Access Files for the CMSCHED tables from the QSYS library the default location for this library is QSYS LIB EDAMAIN LIB MASTER FILE to the IFS directory To do this in an OS 400 session enter the foll
525. x workbnchtrans put Select Language Select Language workbnchtrans put Submit Submit workbnchtrans put Reset Reset workbnchtrans put OK OK workbnchtrans put admin admin workbnchtrans put Logon Logon workbnchtrans put Logoff Logoff workbnchtrans put Help Help workbnchtrans put Welcome Welcome workbnchtrans put Welcome to Managed Reporting Welcome to Managed Reporting workbnchtrans put Welcome to WebFOCUS Web Services Welcome to WebFOCUS Web Services workbnchtrans put User ID User ID Editing the htm File Follow two basic rules when editing an htm file to customize the user interface Any new or changed text must be Referenced in the applicable resource file for each language installed or Disabled for the dynamic language switch translation through the use of the noibitranslate flag inside the preceding HTML tag The following are examples of editing text in an htm file The examples use the same files described in Locating the Name of a Resource File on page 6 32 Customizing the User Interface 6 34 Information Builders Example Modifying Existing Text In this example you are going to change the labels on the Managed Reporting logon page from User ID to Customer ID from Password to PIN and from Change Password to Change PIN 1 Open ibi WebFOCUS52 ibi_html javaassist intl EN workbnchtrans js in a text editor su
526. xits Configuring WebFOCUS Startup Parameters on page 6 10 Settings for alias NLS characters signon prompting and encryption Changing WebFOCUS Client Settings on page 6 15 Redirection Settings on page 6 18 Customizing WebFOCUS Client Settings on page 6 20 NLS Settings on page 6 20 Double byte character set DBCS code pages National Language Support for International Computing on page 6 23 Translated interfaces Japanese Korean simplified and traditional Chinese National Language Support for International Computing on page 6 23 Language switching Using the Dynamic Language Switch on page 6 24 New Feature Roadmap for WebFOCUS Version 5 Release 2 3 WebFOCUS Summary of New Features A 7 WebFOCUS Reporting Server Enhancements Data Adapter Enhancements Enhancement See Remote installation Installing WebFOCUS Reporting Server Remotely on page 7 2 Remote control Controlling WebFOCUS Reporting Server Remotely on page 7 2 Log file creation and archiving Specifying the Number of Lines in the EDAPRINT Log on page 7 16 Listener recovery from an operating server Automatic Self Recovery on page 7 17 Lawson security rules Lawson Security Adapter on page 7 25 Security Integration Architecture on Tru64 operating systems C2 Security Support on page 7 25 Enhancement See Adabas Setting Connection Attributes on page 8 2 Adabas Hyper and Phonetic Descriptors on page 8 5 Switchin
527. xx as the series label where A Represents the data type alphanumeric xxxxxxxxxx Indicates the number of characters or digits allowed The Y axis dealer cost and retail cost scale is based on a data range of selected Y axis fields Auto Update Feature Added to the Preview Screen In Release 5 2 3 you can update the Graph Preview manually by clicking the Update button to see how your changes will look in a graph You can also choose to have the Graph Preview updated automatically any time you make changes by selecting the Automatic update check box HTML Report Assistant and HTML Graph Assistant Enhancements to both the HTML Report Assistant and the HTML Graph Assistant include DBA and DBAFILE Support Creating a WHERE Statement Using Date and Time Values DBA and DBAFILE Support WebFOCUS tools including Report Assistant Graph Assistant and JOIN tool components support DBA files and structures containing DBA DBA rules syntax and examples are fully described in the Providing Data Source Security DBA chapter in the Describing Data With WebFOCUS Language manual DBA security for joined data structures is fully documented in the Joining Data Sources chapter in the Creating Reports With WebFOCUS Language manual HTML Report Assistant and HTML Graph Assistant 4 20 Information Builders Creating a WHERE Statement Using Date and Time Values In Release 5 2 3 you can use the new Date and Time dialo
528. y 8 34 Information Builders Field Identification as Read Only The field level Master File attribute FIELDTYPE R identifies a field as read only This attribute provides support for relational data sources with auto increment columns such as IDENTIFY or timestamp columns in DB2 These columns are automatically incremented by the RDBMS CREATE SYNONYM adds the FIELDTYPE R attribute for read only fields in an RDBMS table The update languages MODIFY and Maintain do not populate columns with this designation If an update command is issued for a read only field it is ignored by MODIFY and Maintain Note This attribute is not supported for DB2 on VM Syntax How to Specify a Field as Read Only in a Master File FIELD FIELDTYPE R FIELD FIELDTYPE RI FIELD FIELDTYPE IR where R Indicates that the field is read only Any number of fields can have this attribute RI IR Indicates that the field is read only and indexed applies to FOCUS VSAM and XFOCUS data sources only How to Specify a Field as Read Only in a Master File Example Using FIELDTYPE R Data Adapter Enhancements WebFOCUS Summary of New Features 8 35 Example Using FIELDTYPE R Autoinc1 is an Microsoft SQL Server table with an IDENTITY field called Control as the first field which is a key The following CREATE SYNONYM command creates a Master File with the FIELDTYPE R attribute for the Control f
529. y Values on page 1 31 SET HNODATA Controlling Missing Values Propagated to a HOLD File on page 1 43 SET NULL Propagating Missing Values to a Variable Length Delimited HOLD File on page 1 48 AnV fields Using Variable Length Character Expressions on page 1 50 SET USERFNS SET USERFCHK Validating Function Arguments on page 1 66 FML row indents Indent Row Titles in an FML Hierarchy on page 1 86 Headings and footings Increased Numbers of Headings and Footings on page 1 98 ACROSS columns Increased Number of Columns Generated by ACROSS on page 1 98 Column titles Increased Space for Column Titles on page 1 98 DEFINE compiler Compiling Expressions Containing DEFINEs on page 1 105 SET FOCHTMLURL Establishing a Non Standard Alias on page 1 105 SET FILECASE Converting Case for File Names and Directories on page 1 107 Multiple Drill down links Specifying Multiple Drill Down Links on page 1 140 Minus Edit display format Displaying a Minus Sign After Negative Data on page 1 124 FORMAT TAB TAB Format on page 1 153 New Feature Roadmap for WebFOCUS Version 5 Release 2 3 WebFOCUS Summary of New Features A 3 Developer Studio Enhancements Enhancement See Managed Reporting development Managed Reporting Developer for Windows on page 2 3 Output formats Comma delimited and Tab delimited Output Formats on page 2 12 Storing data and components in ANSI Windows format Configuration for ANSI Windows
530. y numeric column is populated with values on the summary row prefixop1 field1 field2 fieldn prefixop2 fieldm is applied as follows the first prefix operator is applied to field1 through fieldn the second prefix operator is applied to fieldm field1 to fieldm are the field names to be displayed for the summary line for the specified sort break Each field name must be preceded by a space Only the fields specified are populated with values on the summary row Each prefix operator must be separated from the field name by a space For example text2 Is the text that prints on the left of the summary row expression Is an expression that determines whether the summary operation is performed at each break BY STORE_CODE SUMMARIZE AVE UNIT_SOLD RETURNS CNT DAMAGED 1 Space 1 Space Manipulating Summary Values 1 34 Information Builders Example Using Prefix Operators With SUBTOTAL at the Sort Break The following request uses prefix operators to calculate the Average list price by rating within category Sum of copies by category Notice that the subtotal row for each rating contains a value only in the LISTPR column and the subtotal row for each category contains a value only in the COPIES column The default grand total line contains values only for the columns that were subtotaled Note the blank space between each prefix operator and the field name that follows it TABLE FILE MOVIES PRINT COPI
531. y of New Features 1 137 Selecting a Language for Excel Requests You can include the SET EXL2KLANG command in the nlscfg err file to specify the language you wish to use for Microsoft Excel requests This language must be the same as the language of Excel on the browser machine in order to correctly display output You can add the SET EXL2KLANG command in a profile or procedure to override the setting in the errors file Note You must specify a column width that is valid for the language supplied for the SET EXL2KLANG command See Setting the Default Column Width for Excel on page 1 138 Syntax How to Set the Language for Excel Requests You can code the SET EXL2KLANG command in a profile or procedure to override the setting in the errors file SET EXL2KLANG language ENG where language Is the Excel language Possible values are ENG for English ENG is the default value FRE for French GER for German JPN for Japanese KOR for Korean SPA for Spanish In this section Setting the Default Column Width for Excel How to Set the Language for Excel Requests Stacking Columns With Multiple FOLD LINEs 1 138 Information Builders Setting the Default Column Width for Excel The EXL2K_DEFCOLW parameter in nlscfg err sets the default column width for the language version of Excel running on the WebFOCUS Reporting Server For English or Japanese 8 is the default value For Western European language
532. y options 2 8 displaying children 1 76 2 56 displaying date formats 2 8 displaying dates 1 131 in EXL2K 1 131 displaying fields 2 70 using functions 2 70 displaying FML hierarchies 2 56 displaying formatted dates 1 131 displaying leading zero 1 119 displaying missing data 1 47 displaying parents and children 1 76 2 56 displaying reports 1 133 compound 1 125 displaying times 2 9 distribution enhancements 5 6 Domain Admin 3 2 domain searches 3 18 Domain Role Tree 3 17 to 3 18 Index WebFOCUS Summary of New Features I 7 drag and drop measures 4 2 drill down capability 4 16 drill down links in Developer Studio multiple 1 140 2 21 drill down links multiple 1 140 drilling down on dimensions 4 5 drilling down on measures 4 5 DRILLMENUITEM attribute 1 140 DYNAM commands 7 27 to 7 28 dynamic language switch 6 24 dynamic lists 2 49 dynamic parameters 2 46 dynamic reformatting 1 116 to 1 117 dynamic reporting 2 55 dynamic tables of contents 1 142 adding to reports 1 142 adding to WebFOCUS StyleSheets 1 142 for multiple sort groups 1 147 dynamic TOCs tables of contents 1 141 adding to headings 1 145 dynamic tracing 3 20 E EDAPRINT log 7 16 edaprint log file 9 16 edastart console option 7 17 editing language values 6 29 editing the NLS configuration file 7 11 E Mail Address field 3 2 e mail notification in ETL 10 19 to 10 20 EMGSRV parameter in Main
533. y should be copied to the same directory 4 In the Web Console navigation pane click ETL The ETL Configuration page opens 5 In the ETL Configuration page s navigation pane click the ETL Procedures folder A context menu opens Operating System and ETL Release Default Location UNIX Release 4 3 home ibi srv43 cpm catalog UNIX Release 5 1 home ibi srv51 etl catalog Windows Release 4 3 c ibi srv43 cpm catalog Windows Release 5 1 c ibi srv51 etl catalog ETL Manager Enhancements WebFOCUS Summary of New Features 10 9 6 Click Migrate 4 x Procedures The Migrate page opens 7 Enter the path to the directory where CMSCHED MAS and either CMSCHED ACX or CMSCHED FOC files reside on the 4 x or 5 1 x Server The default locations for each platform are as follows 8 Click Submit The message Migrate procedure submitted appears 9 When the migration procedure finishes review the log created to ensure that all ETL Requests migrated successfully The following message should appear for each ETL Request ICM18164 Request NAME was created updated successfully for user USER The following message should also appear ICM18354 Migration procedure completed successfully 10 Review the list of new application directories By default ETL Requests are located in the APPROOT baseapp directory If a category name was previously assigned in the Properties window a directory with that category s name
534. yfield where captionfield Is the name of the field that contains the descriptive text for the hierarchy field For example if the employee ID is the hierarchy field the last name may be the descriptive text to be displayed on the report in place of the ID PROPERTY CAPTION Signifies that this field contains a descriptive caption to be displayed in place of the hierarchy field values A caption can be specified for every field but an individual field can have only one caption If multiple fields have CAPTION attributes for the same hierarchy field the first parent found by traversing the structure in top down left to right order will be used as the caption seg Is the segment location of the hierarchy field Required if more than one segment has a field named hierarchyfield hierarchyfield Is the hierarchy field CAPTION is also allowed on a virtual field in the Master File DEFINE name fmt expression PROPERTY CAPTION REFERENCE hierarchyfield WebFOCUS Reporting Language Enhancements WebFOCUS Summary of New Features 1 73 Displaying a Dynamic FML Hierarchy The GET CHILDREN and WITH CHILDREN commands dynamically retrieve and display hierarchical data on the FML report GET CHILDREN displays only the children not the parent value referenced in the command WITH CHILDREN displays the parent and then the children When a request references a hierarchy an internal TABLE request is automatically run to produc
535. your attention to it in the browser window Where the flash appears and whether and how the screen display changes is controlled by the following factors When you change the highest level sort group from the TOC either from the hierarchy above the report or from the first drop down list in a heading or footing the selected value flashes three times in the browser window When you change a lower level sort value within the current high level sort group the selected value flashes three times in the window This is because you are still within the same major sort group and therefore within the same page break From the selected value at the top of the window you can then scroll quickly to the related details If the selected lower level value is already viewable on the screen and the remaining report will fit on the screen the value flashes but the report does not scroll The TOC also enhances the display of groups of data You can view one section or page of the report at a time or you can view all sections at once You can control this with a page break For more information see Grouping Sort Fields for Display on page 1 147 For a graphical implementation of this feature see Navigating Sort Groups From a Table of Contents in the Creating Reports With the Report Painter chapter in the Creating Reports With Graphical Tools manual In this section Grouping Sort Fields for Display How to Add a Multi Level TOC as

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

TOR GRADE  Hansgrohe 39836001 Instructions / Assembly    Tracker-005 GPS Tracking System  EK Water Blocks EK-NB/SB 5  USER`S MANUAL - Water Solutions  HCP - MHPH MHPF - HCK - MHOF MHPOD  Samsung GT-B5510 راهنمای محصول  Corsair Vengeance LPX, 32GB  Manual de Usuario - Inicio Ventanilla Única  

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file